X Specifications - Site & Buildings 02-20-09

Specifications
Clarendon Hill Towers Site and Building Renovations

Somerville, Massachusetts
February 20, 2009
First Hartford Realty Corp & Subsidiaries 149 Colonial Road, Manchester, CT 06045 Connolly & Partners, LLC 8 Faneuil Hall Marketplace, Boston MA 02109
Architect of Record: Finegold, Alexander + Associates, Inc. 77 North Washington Street Boston, MA 02114 Associate Architect: Seger Architects, Inc. 10 Derby Square Salem, MA 01970 Civil Engineer: H.W. Moore Associates 112 Shawmut Avenue Boston, MA 02118 Landscape Architect: Marc Mazzarelli Associates 284 Concord Avenue Cambridge, MA 02138 Landscape Designer: Equinox 8 Kemp Farm Way Mansfield, MA 02048
Structural Engineer: McBrie, LLC 160 Sylvan Square Danvers, MA 01923 M.E.P. & F.P. Engineer: BLW Engineers 311 Great Road Littleton, MA 01460 Survey: Feldman Professional Land Surveyors 112 Shawmut Avenue Boston, MA 02118 Site Drainage: NorthWest Engineering Services, LLC 184 Indian Trail Glocester, RI 02814
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts
TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01000 Section 01045 Section 01120 Section 01524 Section 01732 General Requirements Cutting and Patching Alteration Project Procedures Construction Waste Management Selective Demolition
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK Section 02200 Section 02230 Section 02410 Section 02420 Section 02515 Section 02520 Section 02700 Section 02710 Section 02770 Section 02790 Section 02800 Section 02810 Section 02850 Section 02870 Section 02950 Section 02960 Excavation, Filling and Grading Site Preparation Demolition Storm Water Quality Separator Unit Pavers Garden Portland Cement Concrete Paving Site Improvements Storm Drainage Utilities Asphalt Paving Hot-Mixed Asphalt Paving Garden Site Improvements Irrigation Systems Fountains Site Fencing Planting Lawns
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 030130 Maintenance of Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03450 Architectural Precast Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04420 Stone Panels
DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05120 Section 05500 Structural Steel Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Section 06200 Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07115 Bituminous Dampproofing TC-1 Table of Contents
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Section 07210 Section 07430 Section 07530 Section 07620 Section 07811 Section 07920 Section 07922 Section 07925 Building Insulation Insulated Metal Wall Panels Single Ply Membrane Roofing Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Through-Penetration Firestop Systems Joint Sealants Intensive Garden Roof Assembly Monolithic Membrane
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Section 08210 Section 08332 Section 08411 Section 08461 Section 08710 Section 08800 Section 08920 Steel Doors and Frames Wood Doors Overhead Coiling Grilles Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors Finish Hardware Glazing Canopy Glazing System
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09260 Section 09310 Section 09400 Section 09511 Section 09590 Section 09650 Section 09680 Section 09910 Gypsum Board Assemblies Ceramic Tile Terrazzo Work Acoustical Panel Ceilings Laminate Wood Flooring System Resilient Flooring Carpet Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10100 Section 10431 Section 10520 Section 10550 Section 10801 Visual Display Boards Signs Fire Protection Specialties Postal Specialties Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Section 11150 Section 11175 Section 11452 Parking Equipment Trash Chute Doors Appliances
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12370 Section 12485 Premanufactured Cabinets Entrance Mats
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
TC-2
Table of Contents
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Section 14222 Elevator Cab Finishes
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Not Used DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16100 Electrical END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC-3
Table of Contents
SECTION 01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 A. 1.02 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS This Section applies to all work performed under the Contract. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION Project Identification: The name of the Project on Contract Documents is CLARENDON HILL TOWERS, SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS. Project Description: Renovations to the interior and exterior of three high rise residential building structures. Renovation work included, but not limited to for the project; Upgrades to residential unit kitchens, lighting, interior finishes, and HC accessibility unit conversions. Interior finishes and lighting replacement for common lobby space, corridors, computer lab, bathrooms, and doors. Site demolition and replacement of sidewalks, landscaping, parking deck pavement, lighting, fencing, and drainage. Parking garage lighting replacement. CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall coordinate with Owner for site, for execution of the Work. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of Products under this Contract, stored on the site. Move any stored Products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of the Owner or separate contractor. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations. SPECIFICATION INFORMATION These Specifications are a special form of technical writing edited from master specifications and contain deviations from traditional writing formats. Capitalization, underlining and bold print is only used to assist reader in finding information and no other meaning will be implied. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the Contractor. Sections are generally numbered in conformance with Construction Specifications Institute Masterformat System. Numbering sequence is not consecutive. Refer to Index of Specification Sections for names and numbers of Sections included in this Project. Pages are numbered separately for each Section. Each Section is noted with "End of Section" to indicate when Section is complete.
B.
1.03 A. B.
C.
D. 1.04 A.
B.
C.
D.
01000 - 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.05 A. DEFINITIONS Some commonly used terms are defined in this article. 1. "Provide": means furnish and install, complete with all necessary components and accessories, ready for intended use. 2. "Indicated": is a cross reference to other portions of the Contract Documents. 3. "Approved": Except where specifically stated otherwise, the words "approved", "directed", "requested", "selected", "accepted" mean "approved by the Architect", "directed by the Architect" and so on. The words "approved" and "accepted" shall be held to the limitations stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case shall "approval" or "acceptance" by the Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor of his responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. "Observe, Observation": Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the Architect's observation of the work will be held to the limitations stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions and the Owner/Architect agreement. In no case shall "observation" by the Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor of his responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. "Observe" shall be defined in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract to include only visiting the site periodically, observing the condition and progress of the work, and reporting to the Owner. 5. "Furnish": Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, "furnish" means supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and the like as applicable in each instance. 6. "Install": Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, "install" means operations at project site including, but not limited to, unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, placing in service and similar operations as applicable in each instance. 7. "Installer": The person or firm engaged by Contractor or Subcontractor for performance of a specific unit of installation work at the project site. It is a general requirement that Installers be expert and experienced in the work they are engaged to perform. 8. "Day": Except as otherwise defined in Owner-Contractor Agreement, "day" means working day. 1.06 A. INDUSTRY STANDARDS Referenced standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and effect as if bound with these Specifications. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, comply with the current standard in effect as of the date of the Owner-Contractor Agreement. Obtain copies of industry standards directly from publisher.
B.
C.
01000 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. The titles of industry standard organizations are commonly abbreviated; full titles may be found in "Encyclopedia of Associations" or consult Architect. CODES, REGULATIONS, AUTHORITIES Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of all permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices, judgments, and communications from authorities having jurisdiction. PROGRESS SCHEDULE Provide comprehensive bar-chart schedule showing all major and critical minor portions of the work, sequence of work and duration of each activity. Update and reissue regularly. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Timing: Submit Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work within ten days after award of Contract. When requested by Architect, submit substantiating data supporting the values submitted. Intent: Unless objections are stated by Architect, the Schedule of Values will be used as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. Form and Content of Schedule of Values: Type schedule on 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. white paper. Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by Architect upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with title of Project and location, Architect's project number, name and address of Architect, name and address of Contractor, Contract designation, and date of submission. 1. Line Item Categories: category items. Follow the Table of Contents of Project Manual for major
1.07 A.
B.
1.08 A.
1.09 A.
B. C.
D.
2. List installed value of component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. E. Sub-Values: For each major line item, list sub-values of major products or operations under the item. Overhead and Profit: For the various portions of the Work, include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit. Stored Material: For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into the following sub-values: 1. The cost of material, delivered and unloaded at Project Site, with taxes paid. 2. Installation cost including overhead and profit. F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. 01000 - 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
F.
G.
G.
Sub-Schedule for Allowance Items: Submit a sub-schedule of unit costs and quantities for products specified under a unit cost allowance in Section 01210, ALLOWANCES. The form of submittal for sub-schedule shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values. 1. Unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. 2. Unit values for allowance materials shall be broken down into, a), cost of material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid, and b), installation costs, including Contractor's overhead and profit.
1.10 A.
PAYMENT REQUESTS Format: Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, and continuation sheets AIA Document G703. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet. Format, schedules, line items and values shall match those of the Schedule of Values accepted by Architect. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede submittal of initial application for payment, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. List of subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators. Schedule of values. Progress schedule. Submittal schedule. Copies of permits and other communications from authorities. Performance and payment bonds (if required). Unit price schedule (if required).
B.
C.
D.
Preparation of Application for Payment: Execute each Application for Payment consistent with previous applications and payments certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Provide partial lien waivers for Work in progress, and full lien waivers for completed Work. Fill in required information, including Change Orders information executed prior to date of submittal of this application. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of Contractor. Fill out continuation sheets as follows: 1. Fill in total list of scheduled component items of Work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item. 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored. Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values. 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission at end of continuation sheets. List by Change Order Number, and description, as if an original item of work.
E.
Substantiating Data for Progress Payments: When Owner or Architect requires substantiating data, submit suitable information with cover letter, identifying Project name, 01000 - 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Architect's Project number, application number and date, and detailed list of enclosures. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 1. For stored products, identify Item number and identification as shown on application along with description of specific material. F. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. Show on this Application for Payment any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner Occupancy of portions of the Work. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede submittal of this Application for Payment, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Occupancy permits. Warranties. Test/adjust/balance records. Maintenance instructions. Meter readings. Final cleaning. Application for reduction of retainage. Consent of surety. Notification of shifting insurance coverages. Final progress photographs. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion.
G.
Preparation of Final Application for Payment: Fill in Application form as specified for progress payments. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede submittal of final Application for Payment, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Completion of Project closeout requirements. Completion of incomplete Work. Assurances that unsettled claims will be settled. Transmittal of Project record documents to Owner. Certified property survey transmitted to Owner. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations have been paid. Removal of temporary facilities and services. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. Change lock cylinders or cores.
H.
Submittal Procedure: Submit Application for Payment to Architect at intervals stipulated in the Agreement, and as follows: 1. Number of Copies: Five copies of each Application. 2. When Architect finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit Certificate for Payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor.
1.11 A.
CHANGE ORDERS Construction Change Authorization, AIA Document G713: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner and Architect which amends the Contract Documents as described, and
01000 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change which affects the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, for inclusion in a subsequent Change Order. B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions, AIA Document G710: A written order, instructions, or interpretations, signed by Architect making minor changes in the Work not involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proposal Request, AIA Document G709: A request to the Contractor, signed by the Architect, for submission of an itemized quotation for changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. This is not a Change Order or a direction to proceed with the Work. Preliminary Procedures: Architect may initiate change by submitting a Proposal Request to Contractor. Request will include: 1. Detailed description of the Change, Products, and location of the change in the Project. 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized. 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. 5. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor to stop Work in progress. F. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to Architect, containing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Description of the proposed changes. Statement of the reason for making the changes. State of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as appropriate.
C.
D.
G.
Construction Change Authorization: In lieu of Proposal Request, Architect may issue a Construction Change Authorization for Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Authorization will describe change in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change, and will designate the method of determining any change in the Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time. 2. Architect will sign and date the Construction Change Authorization and send it to the Owner for authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. 3. Once authorized by the Owner, the Architect will send the Construction Change Authorization to the Contractor. Contractor shall sign and date the Construction Change Authorization to indicate agreement with the terms therein.
H.
Documentation of Proposals and Claims: Support each quotation for a lump-sum proposal, and for each unit price which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate the quotation.
01000 - 6
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. On request provide additional data to support time and cost computations including, but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Labor required. Equipment required. Products required. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. Overhead and profit. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
2. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time-and-material/force account basis, with documentation as required for a lump-sum proposal, plus additional information: a. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work, and date of the order. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. d. Receipts and invoices for: Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. Products used, listing quantities. Subcontracts. I. Preparation of Change Orders: Architect will prepare each Change Order. 1. Form: Change Order, AIA Document G701. 2. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. 1.12 A. LUMP-SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER Lump-Sum Fixed Price Change Orders: Content of the Change Orders will be based on either: 1. Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's responsive Proposal as mutually agreed between Owner and Contractor. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Architect. B. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. Contractor shall sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. Unit Price Change Orders: Content of Change Orders will be based on, either: 1. Architect's definition of the scope of the required changes. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Architect. 3. Survey of completed Work. 01000 - 7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C.
D.
E.
The amounts of the unit prices to be: 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
F.
When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be determined prior to start of the Work: 1. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 2. Contractor shall sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein.
G.
When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the Work: 1. Architect and Owner will issue a Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and will cite the applicable unit prices. 2. At completion of the change, Architect will determine the cost of such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. a. Contractor shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 3. Architect will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 4. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement with the terms therein.
H.
Time and Material/Force Account Change Order/Construction Change Authorization: Architect and Owner will issue a Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor to proceed with the changes. 1. At completion of the change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting and supporting data as provided in the Article "Documentation of Proposals and Claims" of this Section. 2. Architect will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 3. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement therewith.
I.
Correlation with Contractor's Submittals: Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Request for Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of Work, and to record the adjusted Contract Sum.
01000 - 8
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Periodically revise the Construction Progress Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. a. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes. 2. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents. 1.13 A. PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS Preconstruction Conference: Require representatives of all major subcontractors and suppliers to attend; notify Owner and Architect at least thirty-six hours in advance. Progress Meetings: Hold regularly before preparation of payment requests. Make written reports within three days and submit to Architect. Prepare daily reports recording all important information concerning events at the site. Submit to Architect regularly and promptly. Layout work and be responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements of the building, grading, utilities and other work executed under the contract. The boundaries of the site do not limit the responsibility of the Contractor to perform the work in its entirety. Make utility connections as indicated. Notify the Architect and authorities having jurisdiction at least thirty-six hours in advance of concealing any work. Prior to interrupting utilities, services or facilities, notify the owners and obtain their written approval. Cooperate and permit the Owner to install his furnishings and equipment during the progress of the work. Owner's installation of furnishings or equipment does not signify Owner's acceptance of any portion of the work. Frequently clean-up all waste, remove from site regularly, and legally dispose of off-site. All installers shall inspect substrates and conditions under which work is to be executed and shall report in writing to the General Contractor all conditions detrimental to the proper execution and completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means acceptance by the installer of previous work and conditions. EXISTING UTILITIES Contractor shall notify public and private utility companies as required by law in advance of construction so that existing utilities may be accurately located and identified by the appropriate agency or utility. Comply with the requirements of the "Dig Safe" Massachusetts Utilities Underground Plant Damage Prevention System.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I. J.
1.14 A.
01000 - 9
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.15 A. SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings, product data, initial selection samples, verification samples, calculations, and all other submittals as specified for each part of the work. All shop drawing and product data submittals shall be modified by the Contractor to show interface with adjacent work and attachment to building. Each submittal shall be stamped or sealed by the Contractor to show his review and approval of the submission prior to initial submission to the Architect. Submit submittals in a timely fashion to allow at least 10 business days for each office's review and handling. This means that submittals which have to be reviewed by the Architect and one of his consultants require at least 20 business days for review and handling. Add ten business days for each additional consultant who must review a submission. Shop Drawings: For shop drawings, submit one legible, unfolded, double-coated, reproducible (positive side up) sepia transparencies of each drawing and one black or blue line print of same. Each drawing shall provide a space for Architect's "Approval" stamps. When phrase "by others" appears on shop drawings, the responsible Contractor shall indicate on the shop drawing who is to provide materials or operations so marked. When shop drawings are returned to the Contractor by the Architect stamped "resubmit" or words of similar nature, the Contractor shall correct original tracing and submit a new transparency for approval. 1. After completion of each submission of shop drawing transparencies, Architect will return checked transparencies to the Contractor. 2. For use of all trades, the Contractor shall provide a number of prints of finally corrected and approved drawings and schedules as are required for field distribution and for Architect's normal use, including copies for applicable Engineers, and two (2) for use by the Owner. 3. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with one (1) unused copy of all approved shop drawings. E. For other submittals, including product data, schedules, samples, etc., submit at least the following minimum number of submittal copies: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F. Owner: 1 copy. Architect: 1 copy. Architect's Consultant: 1 copy, but only when Consultant's review is required. Field Office: 1 copy. General Contractor: 1 copy, unless otherwise required by Contractor. Others: As required by Contractor.
B.
C.
D.
The Architect's review and approval of submittals shall be held to the limitations stated in the Owner/Architect Agreement and the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction. In no case shall approval or acceptance by the Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor of his responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract Documents or as authorization of a change in the Contract Documents unless accompanied by a Change Order. 01000 - 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
G.
Architect's review of samples and mock-ups is for visual qualities of color, pattern, and texture only. The Architect will not test samples or mock-ups for compliance with other Contract requirements which shall remain the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES This article is not intended to limit the scope of temporary work required under the Contract. Provide all temporary facilities and utilities needed. Obtain and pay for all permits, fees and charges related to temporary work. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, utility companies, NFPA, OSHA and ANSI standards. Provide and maintain clean portable toilet facilities. Do not use permanent facilities within the building. Provide temporary heat as needed to protect the work and create a suitable work environment. Protect building from soot, smoke and fire damage. Contractor may utilize steam from the campus main at his option, after first obtaining all required permits and approvals from the Owner. Provide pumping and drainage as needed to properly dispose of standing and running water regardless of its source. Provide all equipment including, but not limited to, hoists, lifts, scaffolding, machines, tools and the like, as needed for execution of the work. Provide safe access to all parts of the work. Provide temporary enclosures to maintain proper temperatures and to prevent weather damage. Always maintain safe means of egress. Remove all debris which interferes with work or safety. Protect all nearby people and property. Provide and maintain barricades, warning signs and lights, railings, walkways and the like. Immediately repair damaged property to its condition before being damaged. Provide temporary public services such as, lighting, signs, signals and the like, as requested by authorities having jurisdiction. Secure building against unauthorized entry at all times. Provide secure, locked temporary enclosures. Protect the work at all times. No equipment, except permanent light and power system, shall be used for construction purposes without the written permission of the Architect. Provide and maintain temporary water connection to public utilities during construction, including water for drinking and fire protection..
1.16 A.
B. C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I. J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
01000 - 11
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts O. Provide and maintain in building and on site, temporary light and power system for entire project, including security lighting. Take every possible precaution to prevent fire. Store hazardous materials in a manner and at locations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide several fire extinguishers for each work area. Schedule work to make permanent fire protection systems operational at the earliest possible time. To not do any welding or field cutting of steel structures without first taking all necessary precautions to prevent the spread of fire to combustible materials. Temporary Field Office: Provide temporary field office as required. PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS To the greatest degree possible, provide primary materials and products from one manufacturer for each type or kind. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturers of primary materials. Substitution Requests: Submit 3 copies. Identify product to be replaced by substitute by reference to Specification Sections and Drawings numbers. Provide Contractor's certification and evidence to prove compliance with Contract Document requirements. Substitution requests will be returned without action unless one of the following conditions is satisfied. The Contractor shall state which of the following conditions applies to the requested substitution: 1. 2. 3. 4. Request is due to "or equal" clause. Where specified material or product cannot be coordinated with other work. Where specified material or product is not acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Where substantial advantage if offered Owner in terms of cost, time or other valuable consideration.
P.
Q. 1.17 A.
B.
C.
D.
Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of shop drawings, samples, product data or other submittal is not a valid request for, nor an approval of a substitution unless the Contractor presents the information when first submitted as a Request for Substitution. DELIVERY-STORAGE-HANDLING Strictly comply with manufacturer's recommendations and prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Minimize long-term storage at the site. PROJECT CLOSE OUT Complete the following prior to Substantial Completion: 1. Provide list of incomplete items stating reason for incompletion and value of incompletion. 2. Advise Owner of insurance change-over requirements. 3. Submit all warranties, maintenance contracts, final certificates and similar documents. 4. Obtain Certificate of Occupancy and similar releases which permit the Owner's full and unrestricted use of the areas claimed "Substantially Complete".
1.18 A.
1.19 A.
01000 - 12
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 5. Complete startup of all systems and instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and routine maintenance of systems and equipment. 6. Complete clean-up and restoration of damaged finishes. 7. Remove all remaining temporary facilities that are no longer needed. 8. Request Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion. Submit Contractor's punch list of incomplete and incorrect work. B. Architect will either issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issue of certificate. Complete the following prior to Final Acceptance and payment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Obtain Certificate of Substantial Completion. Submit final application for payment, showing final accounting of changes in the work. Submit finalized list of subcontractors and suppliers for the job. Provide final releases and lien waivers not previously submitted. Submit certified copy of final punch list stating that Contractor has completed or corrected each item. 6. Submit final meter readings, record of stored fuel and similar information. 7. Submit Consent of Surety for final payment. 8. Submit evidence of Contractor's continuing insurance coverage. 1.20 A. FINAL CLEANING AND REPAIR Remove all tools, surplus materials, temporary facilities, labels, dust, dirt, stains and protective wrappings or films. Polish all new and existing glass, mirrors and shiny surfaces. Vacuum floors. Clean toilet facilities. Repair all damaged and deteriorated products and surfaces. DISPOSAL OF CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS The Contractor is responsible for locating legal disposal facilities for the disposal of construction debris. In no case will extra costs be approved for the Contractor for the disposal of construction debris. Comply with requirements of Section 01524, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT. END OF SECTION
C.
B. 1.21 A.
01000 - 13
SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting, fitting, and patching work, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make its several parts fit together properly. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installations of ill-timed work. Remove and replace defective work. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 7. Cutting slabs on grade, trenching beneath slabs on grade, and patching after cutting and trenching has been completed; all for installation of piping and electrical conduit under slabs.
1.02 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Permission to patch any items of work does not imply a waiver of the Architect's right to require complete removal and replacement in said areas and of said items if, in Architect's opinion, patching does not satisfactorily restore quality and appearance of work. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut-and-patch structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut-and-patch operational elements and safetyrelated components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in the manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. Visual Requirements: Do not cut-and-patch work that is exposed on exterior or in occupied spaces of building, in a manner resulting in reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of cut-and-patch work, both as judged solely by the Architect. Remove and replace work judged by the Architect to be visually unsatisfactory. SUBMITTALS Submit a written request to Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
B.
C.
D.
1.03 A.
01045 - 1
CUTTING AND PATCHING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. B. Request shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. Identification of the Project. Description of affected work. The necessity for cutting, alteration, or excavation. Effect on work of Owner or any separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5. Description of proposed work: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Description of why cutting-and-patching cannot (reasonably) be avoided. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. How it will be performed. How structural elements (if any) will be reinforced. Trades who will execute the work. Products proposed to be used. Extent of refinishing to be done. Approximate dates of the work, and anticipated results in terms of variations from the work as originally completed (structural, operational, visual, and other qualities of significance).
6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. C. PART 2 2.01 A. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time the work will be uncovered. PRODUCTS MATERIALS Except as otherwise indicated or authorized by the Architect, provide materials for cuttingand-patching which will result in equal-or-better work than the work being cut-and-patched, in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. Comply with the requirements, and use materials identical with the original materials where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. EXECUTION INSPECTION Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching.
B. PART 3 3.01 A.
01045 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of Products, or performance of work. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions. PREPARATION Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water. PERFORMANCE Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. 1. In general, where mechanical cutting is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete work. 2. Comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 2 - SITEWORK where cutting-and-patching requires excavating and backfilling. B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. D. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 1. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over the entire unbroken surface containing the patch.
C.
3.02 A.
B. C.
3.03 A.
C.
E.
F. G.
H.
01045 - 3
I.
Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION
01045 - 4
SECTION 01120 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED Coordinate Work and schedule elements of alterations and renovation work by procedures and methods that expedite completion of the Work. In addition to demolition specified in Section 01732, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, and indicated on Drawings, cut, move and remove miscellaneous existing work as necessary to provide access and to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Include but do not limit work to: 1. Repair and removal of hazardous and unsanitary conditions and materials. 2. Removal of abandoned items and items that serve no useful purpose, such as abandoned piping, conduit and wiring. 3. Removal of unsuitable and extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete. 4. Cleaning of surfaces, and removal of surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes.
B.
C.
Patching, repair, and refinishing existing work intended for reuse, to specified condition for each material, with suitable transition to adjacent new items of construction. ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION Ensure that work is performed by workers qualified for each condition and material encountered. Cutting of existing construction required to install equipment under various Sections shall be done by coring or sawing method under Section appropriate to materials and construction. Cut and remove minimum materials necessary and avoid damage to adjacent work intended for reuse. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, title, plaster and metals by methods that terminate surfaces in a straight line at natural points of division.
1.02 A.
B.
C.
D.
01120 - 1
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts E. Cutting and patching work shall comply with requirements of Section 01045, CUTTING AND PATCHING. Protect existing finishes, equipment, and adjacent work scheduled to remain from damage from weather and extremes of temperature. 1. Maintain existing interior work above 60oF. 2. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as necessary to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. G. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from existing building and from areas occupied by Owner, and to provide weather protection. Discovery of construction, furnishings, and articles with historic or private value shall remain in possession of Owner. 1. 2. 3. 4. Promptly notify Architect. Protect discovery from damage from weather conditions and construction operations. Architect will promptly transmit Owner's decision for disposition of discovery. Store items to be retained by Owner in safe, dry place on site. Dispose of items which Owner releases to Construction Manager's disposition.
F.
H.
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS SALVAGED MATERIALS FOR REUSE Salvage sufficient quantities of cut and removed materials to replace damaged work of existing construction when material is not readily obtainable on current markets. 1. Store salvaged items in dry, secure place on site. 2. Items not required for use in repair of existing work shall remain Owner's property. 3. Do not incorporate salvaged or used materials in new construction without Architect's approval.
2.02 A.
PATCHING, EXTENDING, AND MATCHING Provide same products or types of construction as those in existing structure, as needed to patch, extend, and match existing work. Generally, Contract Documents do not define products or standards of workmanship present in existing construction; determine products and workmanship by inspection and testing. Architect will judge workmanship and materials against existing as a sample of comparison. Provide products, finishes, and types of construction for patching, extending and matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent to identical standards of quality.
B.
C.
01120 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts PART 3 3.01 A. EXECUTION PERFORMANCE Patching of existing construction to accommodate work of various Sections shall be performed under Sections that specify methods and materials similar to adjacent existing construction, in the following areas: 1. Holes adjacent to penetrations for electrical conduit, plumbing pipes and ductwork where exposed to view. 2. Holes adjacent to penetrations through fire walls for electrical conduit, plumbing pipes and ductwork through fire walls as required by code. 3. Areas adjacent to installation of new doors and windows and other framed wall and partition penetrations. 4. Removal and patching of damaged material where indicated. B. Patch areas exposed to view after removal of existing construction such as chalkboard, tackboard, chair rails, base, cove and intersecting walls as indicated. Patch and extend existing work using skilled workers who are capable of matching existing quality of workmanship. Quality of patched or extended work shall be equal to that specified for new work. ADJUSTMENTS Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings, with finish materials to match existing. 1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. Where extreme change of plane of two inches or more occurs, request instructions from Architect as to method of making transition. B. 3.03 A. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors. DAMAGED SURFACES Patch and replace parts of existing finished surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored, or otherwise imperfect, with matching materials. 1. Provide adequate support of substrate before patching finish. 2. Refinish patched portions of painted and coated surfaces to produce uniform color and texture over entire surface. 3. When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.04 A. TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make smooth transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that patch or transition is not visible so from 5 ft. away. 01120 - 3 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
C.
3.02 A.
B.
When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along straight line at natural line of division. Provide trim appropriate to finished surface. CLEANING Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. At completion of work of each Section, clean area and prepare surfaces for work of other Sections. At completion of alterations work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to condition suitable for use by Owner. END OF SECTION
3.05 A.
B.
C.
01120 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.02 A. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
DEFINITIONS Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. Disposal: Removal off-site of construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Recycle: Recovery of construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. Salvage: Recovery of construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50, 75, and 95 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work. Salvage/Recycle Requirements: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous construction waste as possible including the following materials: 1. Construction Waste: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Site-clearing waste. Masonry and CMU. Lumber. Wood sheet materials. Wood trim. Metals. Roofing. Insulation. Carpet and pad.
B.
C.
D. E.
1.03 A.
B.
01524 - 1
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts j. k. l. m. Gypsum board. Piping. Electrical conduit. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 1.04 A. SUBMITTALS Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit three copies of report. Application for Payment will not be approved if Report is not submitted. Include separate reports for construction waste. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Material category. Generation point of waste. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes). Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes). Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes). Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes). Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. Paper. Cardboard. Boxes. Plastic sheet and film. Polystyrene packaging. Wood crates. Plastic pails.
B.
C.
Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, upload data and digitally sign the on-line LEED template, showing calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
D.
E.
F.
G.
01524 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts H. Qualifications Data: Submit qualifications of Waste Management Contractor and Waste Management Coordinator, as specified in Article 1.05, QUALITY ASSURANCE herein. QUALITY ASSURANCE Waste Management Contractor Qualifications: Waste Management Contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years documented experience in construction waste management contracting of projects of this size or larger. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.06 A. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.05 A.
B.
C.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Include separate sections in plan for construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
B.
C.
2. 3. 4.
01524 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 5. 6. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.
D.
Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Total quantity of waste. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). Revenue from salvaged materials. Revenue from recycled materials. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
E. PART 2 PART 3 3.01 A.
Forms: Prepare waste management plan on forms included at end of Part 3. PRODUCTS (Not Used) EXECUTION PLAN IMPLEMENTATION General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. 2. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
B.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
3.02
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
01524 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts A. B. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.
C.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.
3.03 A.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE Packaging: 1. 2. 3. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4.
B. C.
Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees at landfill facility. Wood Materials: 1. 2. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
D.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
01524 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.05 A. DISPOSAL OF WASTE General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
C. D.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION
01524 - 6
SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 1.01 A. GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Selectively demolish and remove materials, systems, equipment, and structures indicated on the Drawings, and as required to make way for new work. RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.03 A. Section 01045, CUTTING AND PATCHING. Section 01120, ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES. Division 15, MECHANICAL. Division 16, ELECTRICAL.
1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: technician. For demolition firm, professional engineer and refrigerant recovery
B.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.
C.
Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
D.
E.
01732 - 1
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.04 A. DEFINITIONS Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner at location directed by Owner. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1. Coordinate with Owner's project representative, who will establish special procedures for removal and salvage. 1.06 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
B.
C.
D.
1.05 A.
B.
C.
D. E.
01732 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.07 A. B. JOB CONDITIONS Occupancy: The building will be occupied during work of the Contract. Condition of Items and Structures: The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of items and structures to be demolished. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to the Contractor may be removed from the building as work progresses. Transport items from site as they are removed. Sale or storage of items at the site will not be permitted. Removal of Existing Steel Beams: Prior to cutting and removing of existing steel beams, provide all required shoring and bracing to ensure structural integrity of building. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work under a separate contract]. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. G. H. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.08 A. PROTECTION Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide and place bracing or shoring and be responsible for safety and support of structures. Assume liability for such movement, settlement, damage, or injury. Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of adjacent facilities or structures appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structures. Do not resume operations until safety is restored. Temporary Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to for protection of personnel from injury due to selective demolition operations. 1. Provide shoring and bracing as required to prevent collapse of existing systems and adjacent facilities or work to remain. 2. Protect existing finish work that is to remain from damage from demolition operations. 3. Construct temporary dustproof and insulated partitions where required to separate areas where noisy and dusty operations are performed. 4. Remove temporary protections at completion of the work. 01732 - 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
C.
D.
E.
F.
B.
C.
D. PART 2 2.01 A.
Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities. PRODUCTS SALVAGING Materials indicated on the Drawings or designated in the field by the Owner to be salvaged shall be carefully removed and delivered to the Owner at locations determined by Owner. Mechanical and electrical items to be salvaged shall be protected from the weather. EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.
B. PART 3 3.01 A. B.
C.
D.
E.
3.02 A.
B.
01732 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.02 A. PREPARATION Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities of the Owner. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.03 A. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
B.
01732 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area as directed by Owner. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 Sections for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
3.04 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
01732 - 6
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.05 A. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. C. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. Disposal: them. CLEANING Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
3.06 A.
01732 - 7
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts
SECTION 02230 SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 A.
W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists of removing the existing brick pavers from the indicated area and stockpiling a sufficient quantity of usable brick paver units to complete the brick paving indicated and specified in a related Section. RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Division 2 Section Unit Pavers.
1.02 A.
1.03 A.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING Coordinate this work with other site work, and stockpile salvaged pavers in a location that will not interfere with other operations. MATERIAL OW NERSHIP Except for sound, whole, undamaged and otherwise reusable brick paver units to be salvaged for reuse, or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.04 A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Inspect the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Contractor, with copy to the Architect, any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. SALVAGE AND STOCKPILING BRICK PAVERS Remove all brick paver units from the indicated areas taking due care to prevent damage. Salvage a sufficient quantity for reinstallation as indicated, including a sufficient quantity to provide for loss or breakage.
3.02 A.
02230_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02230 - 1
SITE PREPARATION
B. C.
Discard broken, damaged or otherwise unusable paver units. Clean all adherent dirt and setting materials from paver units, leaving them in good condition, suitable for reuse in the work as indicated. Stockpile paver units in a suitable location, and cover entirely with waterproof tarpaulins, weighted to prevent covers being blown off, so as to fully protect and conceal the pavers to prevent pilferage. DISPOSAL Disposal: Remove setting materials, surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 02230
D.
3.03 A.
02230_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02230 - 2
SITE PREPARATION
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS
SECTION 02410 DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section specifies demolition and removal of pavement, concrete sidewalks. portions of buildings, utilities, other structures and debris as shown. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Demolition and removal of roads, walks, curbs, and on-grade slabs outside buildings to be demolished: Section 02200, EXCAVATION, FILLING and GRADING. B. Safety Requirements: GENERAL CONDITIONS Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION. C. Disconnecting utility services prior to demolition: Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. D. Reserved items that are to remain the property of the Owner: Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. E. Asbestos Removal: Section 01732, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION. F. Lead Paint: Section. Section 01732, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION G. Environmental Protection: Section 01000, TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES.
1.3 PROTECTION: A. Perform demolition in such manner as to eliminate hazards to persons and property; to minimize interference with use of adjacent areas, utilities and structures or interruption of use of such utilities; and to provide free passage to and from such adjacent areas of structures. Comply with requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION. B. Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades, temporary fences, warning lights, and other similar items that are required for protection of all personnel during demolition and removal operations. Comply with requirements of Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. C. Maintain fences, barricades, lights, and other similar items around exposed excavations until such excavations have been completely filled. D. Provide overhead bridges of tight board or prefabricated metal construction to protect persons and property from falling debris.
02410 - 1
DEMOLITION
E. Prevent spread of flying particles and dust. Sprinkle rubbish and debris with water to keep dust to a minimum. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable condition such as, but not limited to; ice, flooding, or pollution. F. In addition to previously listed fire and safety rules to be observed in performance of work, include following: 1. No wall or part of wall shall be permitted to fall outwardly from structures. 2. Wherever a cutting torch or other equipment that might cause a fire is used, provide and maintain fire extinguishers nearby ready for immediate use. Instruct all possible users in use of fire extinguishers. 3. Keep hydrants clear and accessible at all times. Prohibit debris from accumulating within a radius of 4500 mm (15 feet) of fire hydrants. G. Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The contractor shall take necessary precautions to avoid damages to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the owner; any damaged items shall be repaired or replaced as approved by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural elements are not overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal works. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have Resident Engineers approval. H. The work shall comply with the requirements of Section 01000 , DISPOSAL OF CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS and Section 01524 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN.
1.4 UTILITY SERVICES: A. Demolish and remove outside utility service lines shown to be removed. B. Remove abandoned outside utility lines that would interfere with installation of new utility lines and new construction.
02410 - 2
DEMOLITION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DEMOLITION: A. Completely demolish and remove buildings and structures, including all appurtenances related or connected thereto, as noted below: 1. As required for installation of new utility service lines. B. Debris, including brick, concrete, stone, metals and similar materials shall become property of Contractor and shall be disposed of by him daily, off the Property to avoid accumulation at the demolition site. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Resident Engineer. Break up concrete slabs below grade that do not require removal from present location into pieces not exceeding 600 mm (24 inches) square to permit drainage. Contractor shall dispose debris in compliance with applicable federal, state or local permits, rules and/or regulations. C. Remove and legally dispose of all materials, other than earth to remain as part of project work, from any trash dumps shown. Materials removed shall become property of contractor and shall be disposed of in compliance with applicable federal, state or local permits, rules and/or regulations D. Remove existing utilities as indicated or uncovered by work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Resident Engineer. When Utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the Resident Engineer shall be notified prior to further work in that area. 3.2 CLEAN-UP: On completion of work of this section and after removal of all debris, leave site in clean condition satisfactory to Resident Engineer. Clean-up shall include off the Property disposal of all items and materials not required to remain property of the Owner as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from demolition operations. ---END---
02410 - 3
DEMOLITION
CLARENDON TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 02420
STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section specifies construction of outside, underground storm water quality separators. The storm water quality separators shall include a vortex motion (centripetal force, swirl separator) that provides enhanced settling characteristics. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Maintenance of Existing Utilities: Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. B. Excavation, Separator Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting, Bracing: Section 02200, EXCAVATION, FILLING AND GRADING. C. Concrete Work, Reinforcing, Placement and Finishing: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Products Criteria: 1. Multiple Units: When two or more separators are required on one project, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. 2. Identification: The separator manufacturers name, or identifiable trademark, shall be cast into the frame and cover(s) /grate of each separator. B. The separator must comply with the rules and regulations of the Public Utility having jurisdiction over the connection to public storm sewers and the extension, and/or modifications to Public Utility systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit in accordance with Section 01000 , SHOP DRAWINGS,. B. Manufacturers' Literature and Data: Submit the following as one package: 1. Sizing Calculations including Particle Size Distribution. 2. Operations and Maintenance Manual. 3. Independent Laboratory or Field Testing Results. 4. Frames and Covers / Grates. 5. CAD Detail of Separator
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
02420 - 1
CLARENDON TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 02420 A48-03/A48M-03 ....................... Gray Iron Castings A536-84(2004) .......................... Ductile Iron Castings A615-05/A615M-05 ................... Deformed and Plain-Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A655-04e1/A655M-04e1... Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C76-05a/C76M-05a................... Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C139-03.................................... Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C150-04ae1 .............................. Portland Cement C443-05/C443M-05................... Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets C478-03a/C478M-03a............... Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections C857-95(2001).......................... Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures C923-02/C923M-02................... Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Materials C1103-03/C1103M-03............... Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines D256......................................... Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics D570......................................... Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics D638......................................... Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics D648......................................... Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position D698-00ae1 .............................. Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m )) D785......................................... Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position D790......................................... Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials D792......................................... Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement D1056-00.................................. Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber
3 3
NOTE: ASTM test methods shall be the current version as of the date of advertisement of the project. C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
02420 - 2
CLARENDON TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 02420 HB17 ........................................ Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges (AASHTO Standard H20-44)
PART 2 - MATERIAL 2.1 SEPARATOR EXTERIOR A. The exterior shell of the separator shall be constructed of precast reinforced concrete rings, precast reinforced sections, or cast-in-place concrete. The following requirements must be adhered to for the concrete portion of the separator: 1. Precast Reinforced Concrete Rings: Rings or sections shall have an inside diameter as indicated on the drawings, and shall be not less than 1200 mm (48 inches) in diameter. Wall thickness shall conform to requirements of ASTM C76. Tops shall conform to ASTM C478. Top section shall be a flat top type. 2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Risers and Tops: Design, material and installation shall conform to requirements of ASTM C478. Top sections shall be flat. 3. Flat top manhole tops shall be reinforced concrete rated for AASHTO HS20-44 loading. 4. Concrete for precast sections shall have a minimum compressive strength of 35 MPa (5,000 psi) at 28 days, ASTM A615, Grade 60 reinforcing steel, rated for AASHTO HS20-44 loading with 30 percent impact, and conform to ASTM C-857. 5. Mortar mixture shall be by volume, 1 part of Portland cement and 2 parts sand. Water in mixture shall produce a stiff, workable mortar, but shall not exceed 21L (5-l/2 gallons) per sack of cement. 6. Flexible sealing compound shall be packaged in extruded preformed shape, sized to completely fill the joint between precast sections, and form permanently flexible watertight seal. The sealing compound shall be non-shrink and meet AASHTO M-198B. 2.2 CASTINGS: 1. Frames and covers shall be gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48 or cast ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. The frame and cover shall be rated for HS20-44 loading, and have the name of the separator manufacturer cast into the cover. The cover shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) in diameter. The bearing surface of the frame and cover shall be machine finished. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to traffic.
2. Frame and Grates shall be cast gray iron conforming to ASTM A48 or cast ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. The frame and grate shall be rated for HS20-44 loading, and have the name of the separator manufacturer cast into the grate. The grate shall be a
02420 - 3
CLARENDON TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 02420 minimum of 750 mm (30 inches) square or 800 mm (32) in diameter. The bearing surface of the frame and cover shall be machine finished. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to traffic. 2.3 CONCRETE: Concrete shall be in accordance with local State Department of Transportation standards. For concrete not specified in above standards, concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 20 MPa (4000 psi) at 28 days. The cement shall be Type III conforming to ASTM C150. 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 40 unless otherwise noted. 2.5 RESILIENT CONNECTORS: Resilient Connectors: Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets shall conform to ASTM C923. 2.6 INTERNAL BAFFLES: Internal baffles are to be made of co-polymer polypropylene conforming to a tensile strength of 4000 psi (ASTM D-638),an Izod impact value of 2.5 (ASTM D-256), water absorption of 0.01% (ASTM D-570), a density of 0.91 (ASTM D-792), a flexural modulus of 195000 (ASTM D-790), a heat distortion temperature of 190 F (ASTM D-648), and a Rockwell Hardness of 74 (ASTM D785). Thickness of baffles will be for 48 diameter separators, 3/8 for separators between 60 and 96 in diameter and for separators greater than 96 in diameter. Co-polymer polypropylene joints must be nitrogen welded. 2.7 FASTENERS: Internal baffles are to be fastened to the precast concrete structure using stainless steel hardware Grade 304 or 316. Stainless steel wedge anchors used to fasten the internal baffles to the concrete wall are to be in diameter and 4.5 long. Fender washers (2 diameter) are to be used with wedge anchors where the internal baffles are fastened to the concrete walls to disperse the anchor pressure over the baffle surface area.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION FOR STORM WATER SEPARATORS: Excavation and backfilling for storm water quality separators shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING. 3.2 SEPARATOR BEDDING: The bedding surface of the separator shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire area of the separator. If not otherwise instructed by the engineer or local or state requirements, the separator should be set on 12 of granular bedding. The bedding should
02420 - 4
CLARENDON TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 02420 conform to local or state standards and be free draining. In areas with high groundwater, dewatering shall be used to ensure the structure is installed in the dry. 3.3 SEPARATOR CONSTRUCTION: A. General: 1. Precast Concrete Base and Risers/Rings: a. Precast reinforced concrete rings and base shall be installed true and plumb. The joints between rings and between rings and the base and top shall be sealed with a preformed flexible gasket material specifically manufactured for this type of application. Adjust the length of the rings so that the flat top section will be at the required elevation pursuant to any local or project specific grade adjustment requirements. b. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops. Install as specified for precast reinforced concrete rings. 2. Lifting Holes: a. All lifting holes shall be filled with concrete plugs and sealed with non-shrink grout. 3. Concrete Structure Joints: a. All joint surfaces must be clean prior to the application of the joint gasket. The gasket shall be applied according to the manufacturers specifications to ensure water tightness. 4. Inlet and Outlet Pipes: a. The inlet and outlet pipes should be installed concentric in the pipe holes provided. The pipes can be connected to the concrete structure using either flexible rubber boots or non shrink mortar or grout. If grout is to be used, the annular space between the wall and the pipes shall be plugged with non-shrinking mortar or grout. The mortar or grout is to be applied and cured as per the manufacturers recommendations such that there is zero leakage through the annular space. The mortar shall be finished smooth and flush with the interior and exterior concrete wall surfaces. The inlet pipe may protrude several inches into the structure but the outlet pipe should be installed such that the edges of the pipe are flush with the interior wall surface. 5. Top Cap: a. The cap must be installed according to the approved drawings to ensure that the access openings are aligned properly for inspection and maintenance. 6. Frame and Covers / Grates:
a.
Install separator frames and covers/grates on a mortar bed, and flush with the finish pavement. Frames and covers/grates shall not move when subject to vehicular traffic. Install a concrete collar around the frame to protect the frame from moving until the
02420 - 5
CLARENDON TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 02420 adjacent pavement is placed. In unpaved areas, the rim elevation shall be 50 mm (2 inches) above the adjacent finish grade. Install a 100 mm (4 inches) thick, by 300 mm (12 inches) concrete collar around the perimeter of the frame. Slope the top of the collar away from the frame. b. Concrete grade adjustment rings (minimum 2 thick) or other acceptable materials to the engineer and local or state agencies shall be used to adjust the frame and covers/grates to the approved grade elevation. 3.4 BACKFILL: The unit must be backfilled with material acceptable to the engineer, and local and state authorities. The backfill should be placed in 12 lifts and compacted after each lift to the standards set forth by the engineer or local/state authorities. 3.5 INSPECTION OF SEPARATORS: Inspect and obtain the Resident Engineer's approval. Thoroughly clean out separator before inspection. 3.6 TESTING OF SEPARATOR WATER TIGHTNESS: 1. Exfiltration Test: a. Subject separator to hydrostatic pressure test produced by the head of water at the depth of the outgoing separator pipe invert (full tank). Maintain head of water for one hour for full absorption by concrete structure before testing. Leave separator for a 24 hour period without addition of water. Measure water loss in separator after 24 hour test by measuring water volume needed to fill the separator back up to outgoing pipe invert. During the 24 hour test period, the measured maximum allowable water loss due to exfiltration shall be 0.5% of the original permanent pool (separator) storage volume. b. If measurements indicate exfiltration is greater than maximum allowable leakage, take additional measurements until leaks are located. Repair and retest.
PART 4 PERFORMANCE 1. Annual TSS Removal: The storm water separator will be designed to satisfy all site specific, local, and state regulatory requirements. If the separator is designed for total suspended solids (TSS) removal, the design should be based on using continuous analysis with local precipitation data.
Designs based on TSS removal will be designed using the following particle size distribution and an annual load removal of 80% unless a different regulatory or site specific distribution and TSS removal rate are specified.
02420 - 6
CLARENDON TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 02420 Design Particle Size Distribution Percentage(%) by Mass Diameter (m) 50 50 150 25 250 10 500 10 1000 5
2. Trash Removal: The separator will remove 100% of floatable trash and sinking trash at all flow rates influent to the separator. 3. Treatment Flow Rate: The separator will fully treat the water quality flow rate without by-pass. The water quality flow rate will conform to local or state calculation requirements. In the absence of specific local or state calculation methods, the water quality flow rate will be calculated based on a Rational Method calculation using 1 inch per hour as the rainfall intensity, the area draining to the separator, and the imperviousness of the drainage area. 4. Oil Removal: The separator will remove 99% of free oil spills during dry weather conditions. The separator will remove a minimum of 85% of the free oil influent to the separator up to the water quality flow rate during wet weather conditions.
---END---
02420 - 7
SECTION 02515 UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all unit paver paving, including new stone edging units and salvaged or new brick paver units. RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.03 A. B. Salvaging existing brick pavers: Division 2 Section Site Preparation. Base courses for pavements: Division 2 Section Excavation, Filling, Grading. Asphaltic concrete base course: Division 2 Section Hot-mixed Asphalt Paving. Stone wall caps: Division 2 Section Garden Site Improvements.
1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Submit technical data sheets and MSDS for all products included in Part 2 of this Section. Submit product data for the following: 1. 2. Granite edging pavers. All setting and installation materials and accessories, including bituminous setting materials, mortar and grout constituents, and laboratory certified gradation and content analysis for base and setting course material.
C.
Samples for initial selection: 1. 2. For granite pavers, submit duplicate samples not less than 8 inches by 8 inches by indicated thickness in indicated finish. Duplicate Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection.
D.
Duplicate samples for verification in full-size units showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. For granite edging paver, provide a minimum of 4 full size paving units showing full range of colors and textures, and the relative distribution thereof, in the proposed product. After approval, pavers delivered to the site and determined by Architect to be beyond the approved appearance range shall be rejected and removed from the site. Provide samples of stockpiled salvaged brick paver units for comparison with the granite paver samples.
2.
E.
Shop Drawings: Submit complete fabrication and layout shop drawings prepared by the stone fabricator for all granite slab paver installations. Include profile drawings for each typical section and each special condition at full scale, complete layouts for each installation at not less than 1in = 1 ft 02515 - 1 UNIT PAVERS
02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts scale, piece fabrication details at not less than 1 in = 1 ft scale, and anchorage details, including indication of adjacent construction and substrate to which anchorage is to be made, at not less than 3 in = 1 ft scale. 1.04 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, type, and variety of unit pavers, joint materials, and setting materials from a single source with resources to provide products and materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the W ork. Mockups: Prior to installing unit pavers, construct mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. a. Minimum size for mockup installation shall be 5 ft x 5 ft, and shall include representative stone edge/border, paver pattern and expansion joint conditions, so as to represent the standard of workmanship throughout the work. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed W ork. a. W hen directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. b. Subject to Architects prior approval, mockup sample installations may be prepared in a location acceptable to the Architect within the area of final applications of each paver type and, when approved by the Architect, may remain in place as part of the finished installation.
B.
C.
2. 3. 4. 5.
1.05 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store all products in unopened original manufacturer's packaging. Store all materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect materials from all damage. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth and other materials. 1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel strapping.
B.
C. 1.06 A.
Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers. W ARRANTY In addition to the guarantee/warranty requirements of the Contract and General Conditions, the Contractor shall obtain in the name of the Owner the standard manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's 02515 - 2 UNIT PAVERS
02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts published product data. These guarantees are in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.07 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Cold-W eather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. W eather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply asphalt adhesive when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture. Install bituminous setting bed only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F and when base is dry.
B.
2.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. GRANITE PAVERS Product: Basis of Design: Woodbury Gray natural granite as produced by Swenson Granite W orks,Concord, NH. Granite Slab Pavers: Squared paving stones, 2-inch thickness, with thermal finish exposed surfaces, sawn underside, made from granite complying with ASTM C 615. 1. Size: As indicated on the Drawings and as confirmed in shop drawings. Size units for 1/4-inch joint widths.
B.
2.02 A.
BRICK PAVERS Brick pavers shall be units salvaged from existing site walks as indicated and specified in a related Section. 1. If stockpiled salvaged units are lost, damaged or otherwise rendered unsuitable for use during storage, due to any failure or action of the Contractor, as determined by the Architect, Contractor shall provide suitable brick pavers matching existing, satisfactory to the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.03 A.
ASPHALTIC SETTING BED FOR PAVERS Mixture: The approximate proportion of materials shall be 7% asphalt binder and 93% fine aggregate. Each ton shall be apportioned by weight in the approximate ratio of 145 pounds asphalt binder to 1,855 pounds sand. The dried fine aggregate shall be combined with asphalt binder and the mix shall be heated to approximately 300 degrees F at an asphalt plant. The Contractor shall determine the exact proportions to produce the appropriate mixture for construction of the asphalt setting bed to meet construction requirements. Asphalt Binder: Asphalt binder (7%) to be used in the asphalt setting bed shall conform to AASHTO MP-1, with a performance grade of PG58-28 or 64-22. 02515 - 3 UNIT PAVERS
B.
02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
C.
Fine Aggregate: Fine Aggregate (93%) for asphalt setting bed shall be clean, hard sand with durable particles and free from adherent coating, lumps of clay, alkali salts and organic matter. To be uniformly graded from coarse to fine with all passing the No. 4 sieve and meeting requirements when tested in accordance with the standard method of test for sieve or screen analysis of fine and coarse aggregate, AASHTO T 27. NEOPRENE ASPHALT ADHESIVE FOR BRICK Neoprene asphalt adhesive shall conform to the following: 1. Mastic (Asphalt Adhesive): a. Solids (base): 75 + 1% b. Pounds/Gallon: 8 - 8.5 pounds c. Solvent: Varsol (over 100F flash) 2. Base (2% Neoprene, 10% Non-Asbestos Fiber, 88% Asphalt): a. Melting Point: ASTM D-36, 200F Minimum b. Penetration: 77% F 100 gram load, 5 second (0.1 mm), 23-27 c. Ductility: ASTM D-137-79 @ 25C, 5 cms/per minute,125 cm minimum SAND Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. ACCESSORIES Cork Joint Filler: Preformed asphalt impregnated strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
2.04 A.
2.05 A.
B. 2.06 A.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Inspect all areas where unit pavers are to be installed and the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Contractor, with copy to the Architect, any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. 1. W here pavers are to be installed over bituminous concrete (asphalt), examine base course installation for proper grades and other conditions affecting paver installation.
B.
W here paver installation abuts curbs or other vertical surfaces, do not proceed with paver installation until adjoining work is completed and accepted by Architect. PREPARATION Vacuum clean asphaltic concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. Lay out work accurately before beginning installation and secure approval of layout from the Architect before proceeding. Work indicated to conform to a generally rectilinear pattern shall be laid out by centering areas to minimize use of pavers of less than half full dimension on perimeter, with 02515 - 4 UNIT PAVERS
3.02 A. B.
02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts balanced pattern as applicable, in indicated grid direction. Work indicated to have herringbone pattern shall be uniform and regular, with pattern aligned with building lines as indicated, and arranged so that units abutting the borders are uniform sizes. 3.03 A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. W here applicable, mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. 1. 2. Pavers shall be cut to a tolerance of not more than 1/8-inch from required dimension. W ork found by Architect to exceed specified tolerance, or with damaged or otherwise unacceptable units, shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B.
C.
D.
Conform to manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations for all products. Where pavers have a directional grain, consult with Architect before placing pavers to determine desired installation procedure. Place stone border pavers in accordance with approved shop drawings. Do not field cut or trim stone units on finished faces: trim only sawn edges and only as necessary to adjust to field conditions. Place brick pavers in herringbone pattern as indicated, with hand tight joints. Use only sound undamaged units. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at entire perimeter of paver installations abutting buildings, curbs and similar rigid construction, and at locations and of widths indicated. Provide joint filler as backing for sealant-filled joints where indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS Apply primer to asphaltic concrete base course immediately before placing setting bed. Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 3/4-inch- deep control bars approximately 11 feet apart and parallel to one another, to serve as guides for striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades required for accurate setting of paving units to finished grades indicated. 1. Verify thicknesses of paver units to be installed, and adjust depth of setting bed so that all pavers finish flush on the top surfaces. Stone borders may be of different thickness than brick pavers.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.04 A. B.
C.
Place bituminous setting bed where indicated, in panels, by spreading bituminous material between 02515 - 5 UNIT PAVERS
02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts control bars. Strike setting bed smooth, firm, even, and not less than 3/4 inch thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each pass of striking board. After each panel is completed, advance first control bar to next position in readiness for striking adjacent panels. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth-control bars. 1. 2. Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch while still hot. Adjust thickness as necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished grades indicated. Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or troweling so as to provide a bond under the pavers. If troweled on, use trowel with serrations not exceeding 1/16 inch. Proceed with setting of paving units only after adhesive is dry to the touch.
D.
Place pavers carefully by hand to indicated pattern, maintaining accurate alignment and uniform top surface. Place stone border units first in each area, and infill with brick pavers. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can stand. Advance protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas subject to continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting alignment of pavers. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll paving with power roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface from several days of hot weather. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints with sand by sweeping over paved surface until joints are filled. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later. REPAIR, CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove and replace unit pavers that are wobbly, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement. Cleaning: Remove extraneous material from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer that ensures that unit paver work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
E.
F. 3.05 A.
B. C.
END OF SECTION 02515
02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02515 - 6
UNIT PAVERS
SECTION 02520 GARDEN PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all exterior portland cement concrete paving for sidewalks and walkways in garden area locations indicated or required due to damage caused by work of this Contract. RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Division 2 Section 02300, "Excavation, Filling, Grading" for subgrade preparation, grading and subbase course. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general requirements of concrete. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants within concrete paving and at joints with adjacent construction.
1.02 A.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, and others if requested by Architect. 1. Submit technical data sheets and MSDS for all products included in Part 2 of this Section.
B.
Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with requirements. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Cementitious materials. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. Admixtures. Curing compounds. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. Joint fillers.
C.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: Pebble stone aggregate for exposed aggregate concrete paving, 10-lb (4.5-kg). QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of decorative 02520 - 1 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
1.04 A.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts cement concrete pavement systems. B. In general, conform to all requirements of Division 3 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete except where stated requirements herein are more stringent or require higher quality or greater quantities of work. Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. 2. 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice" and Placing Reinforcing Bars.
C.
Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of exposed aggregate cement concrete pavement to demonstrate typical texture, surface finish, color, joints, and standard of workmanship. 1. 2. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Minimum size shall be 48 by 48 inches. In presence of Architect, damage part of the exposed surface of decorative cement concrete pavement for each finish, color, and texture required, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair to match adjacent undamaged surfaces. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. Approved mockups made in full size panels between joints indicated may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Mockups of less than full panel size shall be removed.
3. 4. 5.
D.
Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. Coordinate with other pavement installations to ensure continuity of finished surfaces at indicated grades. Structure Loading: Verify that proposed installation equipment and operations will not impose loads upon the parking garage structure below that exceed the safe loading capacity of the structure.
E.
1.05 A.
B.
C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. FORMS Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02520 - 2 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. STEEL REINFORCEMENT Plain-Steel Welded W ire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 1. B. C. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls.
2.02 A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.
D.
2.03 A.
CONCRETE MATERIALS Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. W hite Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. 2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Aggregate for Exposed Aggregate Concrete Surfaces: Selected, hard, and durable; free of materials with deleterious reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap-graded coarse aggregate in 1/4- to 3/8-inch range washed river bed stone, as selected by Architect from available material. Aggregate shall be suitable for application to surface of freshly placed concrete, rather than as principal aggregate. 1. 2. Final selection of pebble aggregate shall be made only after viewing mockup sample installation. Consult with Landscape Architect regarding intended color range before acquiring samples for selection.
D. E. F.
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. 2.04 A. W ater-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. W ater-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
CURING MATERIALS Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. W ater: Potable. Evaporation Retarder: W aterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to: a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. Burke by Edeco; BurkeFilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. j. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Confilm. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. Symons Corporation; Finishing Aid. p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.
B. C. D.
2.05 A.
RELATED MATERIALS Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. CONCRETE MIXTURES Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method.
2.06 A.
B.
Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. 2. 3. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
C.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete 02520 - 4 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size
D. E.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. Use high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture or plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
F.
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 1. For exposed aggregate concrete flatwork, modify mix to account for broadcast aggregate to be added after placement of concrete.
2.07 A.
CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the W ork. 1. W hen air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Inspect all areas where cement concrete paving is to be installed and the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Contractor, with copy to the Architect, any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. 2. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Excavating, Filling, Grading."
B.
C.
Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. PREPARATION Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.02 A.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.03 A. EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION Set, brace, and secure edge form s, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Clean form s after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. STEEL REINFORCEMENT General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. JOINTS General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. W hen joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
3.04 A.
B. C.
D.
3.05 A.
B.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. 2. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
C.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m), unless otherwise indicated. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary 02520 - 6 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
D.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows and to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement where applicable: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius with flat float blade of width acceptable to Architect, to produce the finished border around panels as specified in Concrete Finishing article below. Sawed joints are not acceptable. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.
2. 3.
F.
Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius with flat float blade of width acceptable to Architect, to produce the finished border around panels as specified in Concrete Finishing article below. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
3.06 A.
B.
C.
D. E. F. G.
H.
I. J.
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts K. Cold-W eather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. W hen air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Do not place concrete when temperatures are expected to fall below 32 degF (0 degC) within 7 days after placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
2. 3. 4.
L.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
2. 3.
3.07 A.
CONCRETE FINISHING Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. Provide float finish for stair treads and where indicated. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform fine line texture finish after initial floating and leveling. Use for walks, ramps, etc. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, stair steps, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch.
B.
C.
D.
Joint tooling of walks shall produce a uniform width border with fine float texture around all sides of panels of broom textured surface, in pattern indicated or directed, made satisfactory to the Architect. Seeded Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of approved pebble stone aggregate uniformly to completely cover pavement surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete, and float finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 1. 2. Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting when 02520 - 8 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
E.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts ready to continue finishing operations. W ithout dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.
3. 4.
3.08 A.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. W ater. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
B. C.
D.
E.
2.
3.09 A.
PAVEMENT TOLERANCES Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.10 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 02520 - 9 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
B.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
1.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. W hen frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
C.
Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in W ork, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. REPAIRS AND PROTECTION Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.11 A.
B.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. W hen construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
D.
02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
SECTION 02710 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section specifies construction of outside, underground storm sewer systems, yard drains in the concrete parking deck and connection piping to the storm sewer system. The storm sewer systems shall be complete and ready for operation, including all drainage structures, frames, grate and covers, hangers, connections to new buildings and concrete garage decks, structure service lines, existing storm sewer lines and existing drainage structures and all required incidentals. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Maintenance of Existing Utilities: Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. B. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting, Bracing: Section 02200, EXCAVATION, FILLING AND GRADING. C. Concrete Work, Reinforcing, Placement and Finishing: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. D. Fabrication of Steel Ladders: Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Products Criteria: 1. Multiple Units: When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. 2. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name, or identifiable trademark, securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment. B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Public Utility having jurisdiction over the connection to public storm sewer lines and the extension, and/or modifications to Public Utility systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit in accordance with Section 01000, SUBMITTALS. B. Manufacturers' Literature and Data: Submit the following as one package: 1. Piping. 2. Jointing material. 3. Manhole, inlet and catch basin material.
02710 - 1
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
4. Frames and covers. 5. Steps. 6. Resilient connectors and downspout boots. C. One copy of State Department of Transportation standard details of MANHOLES, INLETS and catch basins. D. One copy of State Department of Transportation specification. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A48-03/A48M-03 .................. Gray Iron Castings A536-84(2004) ..................... Ductile Iron Castings A615-05/A615M-05 .............. Deformed and Plain-Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A655-04e1/A655M-04e1... Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe A742-03/A742M-03 .............. Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated and Polymer Precoated for Corrugated Steel Pipe A760-01a/A760M-01a .......... Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains A762-00/A762M-00 .............. Corrugated Steel Pipe, Polymer Precoated for Sewers and Drains A798-01/M798M-01.............. Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications A849-00................................ Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings, and Linings for Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe A929-01/A929M-01 .............. Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe C76-05a/C76M-05a .............. Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C139-03 ............................... Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C150-04ae1 ......................... Portland Cement C443-05/C443M-05 .............. Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets
02710 - 2
C478-03a/C478M-03a .......... Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections C506-05/C506M-05 .............. Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C507-05a/C507M-05a .......... Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C655-04e1/C655M-04e1 ...... Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C1433-04e1/C1433M-04e1 .. Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers C828-03 ............................... Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines C857-95(2001) ..................... Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures C923-02/C923M-02 .............. Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Materials C924-02/C924M-02 .............. Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low Pressure Air Test Method C1103-03/C1103M-03 .......... Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines D698-00ae1 ......................... Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) D1056-00 ............................. Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber D2412-02 ............................. Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel Plate Loading D2321-04e1 ......................... Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications . D3034-04a ........................... Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3212-96a(2003)e1 ............. Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals D3350-04 ............................. Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials D4101-05a ........................... Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials F477-02e1............................ Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe F679-03................................ Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings
02710 - 3
F714-05................................ Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter F794-03................................ Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter F894-98a.............................. Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe F949-03................................ Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with Smooth Interior F1417-92(2005).................... Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air NOTE: ASTM test methods shall be the current version as of the date of advertisement of the project. C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB17 .................................... Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges M190-04 ............................... Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches M198-05 ............................... Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets M294-04 ............................... Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300-1500 mm (12 to 60 inches) Diameter PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING: A. Gravity Lines (Pipe and Appurtenances): 1. Concrete: a. Reinforced pipe, ASTM C76. Class III, IV, or ASTM C655, 19.7kN/lm (1350 lbs/lf) per 300 mm (1 foot) inside dia (12 inches through 108 inches). Reinforced arch culvert and storm drainpipe shall comply with ASTM C506, Class A-III , AIV. Reinforced elliptical culvert and storm drainpipe shall comply with ASTM C507, Class HE III, HE IV. Joints shall be watertight flexible joints made with rubber-type gaskets conforming to ASTM C443. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): a. Pipe and Fittings, Type PSM PVC Pipe, shall conform to ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35. Pipe and fittings shall have elastomeric gasket joints providing a
02710 - 4
watertight seal when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477. Solvent welded joints shall not be permitted. b. Pipe and fittings, smooth wall, corrugated or ribbed PVC, shall conform to the following: 1) Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F949 corrugated sewer pipe with a smooth interior. The corrugated outer wall shall be fused to the smooth interwall at the corrugation valley. Pipe and fitting shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D 3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 345 kPa (50 psi) at 5 percent deflection, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2412. Corrugation shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe to allow gaskets to be installed on field cut sections of pipe without the requirement for special fittings. 2) Ribbed wall PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F794, Series 46. Ribbed sewer pipe with smooth interior pipe and fittings shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D 3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 320 kPa (46 psi) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2412, at 5 percent vertical deflection. Joints shall not leak at 7.6 m (25 feet) of head under 5 percent deflection. 3) Solid wall pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F 679, SDR 35 pipe and fittings shall gaskets conforming to ASTM F 477, and shall be able to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of 345 kPa (50 psi). 3. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE): a. Smooth Wall PE Pipe: Shall comply with ASTM F714, DR 21 for pipes 75 to 600 mm (3 to 24 inches), and SDR 26 for pipes 650 to 1200 mm (26 to 48 inches). Pipe shall be produced from PE certified by the resin producer as meeting the requirements of ASTM D3350, minimum cell class 335434C. .
b. Profile Wall PE Pipe: Shall comply with ASTM F894, Class 160, produced from PE certified by the resin producer as meeting the requirements of ASTM D3350, Minimum cell class 334433C. Pipe walls shall have following minimum properties:
02710 - 5
Nominal Size
Minimum Wall Area
Min. Moment of Inertia mm4/mm (in4/in) 850 (.052) 1150 (.070) 1330 (.081) 2050 (.125) 2050 (.125) 2640 (.161) 3310 (.202) 4540 (.277) 5540 (.338)
450 mm (18 in) 525 mm (21 in) 600 mm (24 in) 675 mm (27 in) 750 mm (30 in) 825 mm (33 in) 900 mm (36 in) 1050 mm (42 in) 1200 mm (48 in)
6300 mm/m (2.96 in/ft) 8800 mm/m (4.15 in/ft) 9900 mm/m (4.66 in/ft) 12500 mm/m (5.91 in/ft) 12500 mm/m (5.91 in/ft) 14800 mm/m (6.99 in/ft) 17100 mm/m (8.08 in/ft) 16500 mm/m (7.81 in/ft) 18700 mm/m (8.82 in/ft)
4. All overhead piping for the yard drains connections shall be cast iron or ductile iron pipe (Cl 152) secured with anchors and hangers installed in a workmanlike manner, and in accordance with local and state plumbing codes.
2.2 JOINTING MATERIAL: A. Concrete Pipe: Rubber gasket ASTM C443. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: 1. PVC Plastic Pipe: Joints shall comply with ASTM D3212, Elastomeric Gaskets shall comply with ASTM F477 and as recommended by the manufacturer. C. PE Plastic Pipe: 1. Smooth Wall PE Plastic Pipe: Pipe shall be joined using butt fusion as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Corrugated PE Plastic Pipe: Water tight joints shall be made using a PVC or PE coupling and rubber gaskets as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Rubber gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. Soil tight joints shall conform to requirements in AASHTO HB-17, Division II, for soil tightness and shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Profile Wall PE Plastic Pipe: Joints shall be gasket or thermal weld type with integral bell in accordance with ASTM F894.
02710 - 6
2.3 MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS: A. Manholes, inlets and catch basins shall be constructed of precast concrete segmental blocks, precast reinforced concrete rings, precast reinforced sections, or cast-in-place concrete. Manholes, inlets and catch basins shall be in accordance with State Department of Transportation standard details: 1. Precast Concrete Segmental Blocks: Blocks shall conform to ASTM C139 and shall not be less than 150 mm (6 inches) thick for manholes to a depth of 3.6 m (12 feet); not less than 200 mm (8 inches) thick for manholes deeper than 3.6 m (12 feet) deep. Blocks shall be not less than 200 mm (8 inches) in length. Blocks shall be shaped so that joints seal and bond effectively with cement mortar. Parge structure interior and exterior with 15 mm (1/2 inch) of cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface. 2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Rings: Rings or sections shall have an inside diameter as indicated on the drawings, and shall be not less than 1200 mm (48 inches) in diameter. Wall thickness shall conform to requirements of ASTM C76, except that lengths of the sections may be shorter as conditions require. Tops shall conform to ASTM C478. Top section shall be eccentric cone type. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover. 3. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Risers and Tops: Design, material and installation shall conform to requirements of ASTM C478. Top sections shall be eccentric. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover. 4. Flat top manhole tops shall be reinforced concrete as detailed on the drawings. 5. Precast Catch Basins: Concrete for precast sections shall have a minimum compressive strength of 35 MPa (5,000 psi) at 28 days, ASTM A615, Grade 60 reinforcing steel, rated for AASHTO HS20-44 loading with 30 percent impact, and conform to ASTM C-857. 6. Mortar: a. Precast Concrete Segmental Block Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement, l/4 part lime hydrate, and 3 parts sand. b. Precast Reinforced Concrete Ring and Riser Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement and 2 parts sand. Water in mixture shall produce a stiff, workable mortar, but shall not exceed 21L (5-l/2 gallons) per sack of cement.
02710 - 7
7. Flexible sealing compound shall be packaged in extruded preformed shape, sized to completely fill the joint between precast sections, and form permanently flexible watertight seal. The sealing compound shall be non-shrink and meet AASHTO M198B. 8. Frames and covers shall be gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48. The frame and cover shall be rated for HS20-44 loading, have a studded pattern on the cover, and the words storm sewer. The studs and the lettering shall be raised 8 mm (5/16 inch). The cover shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) in diameter and shall have four 19 mm (3/4 inch) vent holes and two lifting slots. The bearing surface of the frame and cover shall be machine finished. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to traffic. 9. Manhole steps shall be polypropylene plastic coated on a No. 4 deformed rebar conforming to ASTM C478, Polypropylene shall conform to ASTM D4101. Steps shall be a minimum of 250 mm (10 inches) wide and project a minimum of 125 mm (5 inches) away from the mall. The top surface of the step shall have a studded nonslip surface. Steps shall be placed at 300 mm (12 inch) centers. 10. Ladders, brackets and hardware shall be constructed of welded aluminum, rails shall be 9 mm (3/8 inch) by 63 mm (2-1/2 inches) spaced a minimum of 400 mm (16 inches) apart. Rungs shall be 35 mm (1-3/8 inches) in diameter and have a non-slip surface. Standoffs shall offset the ladder 180 mm (7 inches) from the wall. The ladder assembly shall be rated for a minimum of 2200 N (500 pounds). B. Prefabricated Corrugated Metal Manholes: Manholes shall be the type and design as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Prefabricated Plastic Manholes and Drain Basins: Plastic manholes and drain basins shall be as indicated on the drawings. D. Frame and Cover for Gratings: Frame and cover for gratings shall be // cast gray iron conforming to ASTM A48; cast ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 // in accordance with State Department of Transportation standard details
2.4 HEADWALLS: (N.I.C.) 2.5 CONCRETE: Concrete shall be in accordance with State Department of Transportation standard specification M4.02.02. For concrete not specified in above standards, concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 20 MPa (3000 psi) at 28 days. The cement
02710 - 8
shall be Type II conforming to ASTM C150. Concrete shall conform to the provisions of Division 03 of these specifications. 2.6 REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless otherwise noted. 2.7 FLARED END SECTIONS: (N. I. C.)
2.8 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX. (N. I. C.)
2.9 RESILIENT CONNECTORS AND DOWNSPOUT BOOTS: A. Resilient Connectors: Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets shall conform to ASTM C923. B. Downspout Boots: Boots used to connect exterior downspouts to the storm drainage system shall be of gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30B or 35B. 2.10 WARNING TAPE: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape non-detectable type, purple with black letters, and imprinted with CAUTION BURIED STORM SEWER BELOW. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION FOR STORM DRAINS AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES: Excavation of trenches and for appurtenances and backfilling for storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 02200, EXCAVATION, FILLING AND GRADING. 3.2 PIPE BEDDING: The bedding surface of the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of pipe. Concrete pipe requirements are such that when no bedding class is specified, concrete pipe shall be bedded in a soil foundation accurately shaped and rounded to conform with the lowest one-fourth of the outside portion of circular pipe. When necessary, the bedding shall be tamped. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall not be more than the length, depth, and width required for properly making the particular type of joint. Pipe bedding requirements shall meet the requirements of M1.04.0 Type b material.
3.3 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION:
02710 - 9
A. Lay pipes true to line and grade. Gravity flow sewer shall be laid with bells facing upgrade. B. Do not lay pipe on unstable material, in wet trench or when trench and weather conditions are unsuitable for the work. C. Support pipe on compacted bedding material. Excavate bell holes only large enough to properly make the joint. D. Inspect pipes and fittings, for defects before installation. Defective materials shall be plainly marked and removed from the site. Cut pipe shall have smooth regular ends at right angles to axis of pipe. E. Clean interior of all pipe thoroughly before installation. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be closed securely to prevent entrance of storm water, dirt or other substances. F. Lower pipe into trench carefully and bring to proper line, grade, and joint. After jointing, interior of each pipe shall be thoroughly wiped or swabbed to remove any dirt, trash or excess jointing materials. G. Do not lay sewer pipe in same trench with another pipe or other utility. H. Do not walk on pipe in trenches until covered by layers of shading to a depth of 300 mm (12 inches) over the crown of the pipe. I. Install gravity sewer line in accordance with the provisions of these specifications and the following standards: 1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Comply with manufacturers recommendations with // gasketed joints //. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: ASTM D2321. 3. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Piping: Comply with manufacturers recommendations with // gasketed joints // gaskets with fused joints J. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 300 mm (12 inches) above storm sewer piping.
3.4 REGRADING: A. Raise or lower existing manholes and structures frames and covers in regraded areas to finish grade. Carefully remove, clean and salvage cast iron frames and covers. Adjust the elevation of the top of the manhole or structure as detailed on the drawings. Reset
02710 - 10
cast iron frame and cover, grouting below and around the frame. Install concrete collar around reset frame and cover as specified for new construction. B. During periods when work is progressing on adjusting manholes or structures cover elevations, the Contractor shall install a temporary cover above the bench of the structure or manhole. The temporary cover shall be installed above the high flow elevation within the structure, and shall prevent debris from entering the wastewater stream. C. The Contractor shall comply with all OSHA confined space requirements when working within existing structures. 3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PUBLIC UTILITY MANHOLES: A. Comply with all rules and regulations of the public utility. B. The connection to the existing utility shall comply with the standard details and specifications of the public utility company, except as specifically modified on the plans and specifications. 3.6 MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS: A. General: 1. Circular Structures: a. Precast concrete segmental blocks shall lay true and plumb. All horizontal and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar. Parge exterior of structure with 15 mm (1/2 inch) or cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface. b. Precast reinforced concrete rings shall be installed true and plumb. The joints between rings and between rings and the base and top shall be sealed with a preform flexible gasket material specifically manufactured for this type of application. Adjust the length of the rings so that the eccentric conical top section will be at the required elevation. Cutting the conical top section is not acceptable. c. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops. Install as specified for precast reinforced concrete rings. 2. Rectangular Structures: a. Reinforced concrete structures shall be installed in accordance with Division 03, CONCRETE of these specifications. b. Precast concrete structures shall be placed on a 200 mm (8 inch) reinforced concrete pad, or be provided with a precast concrete base section. Structures
02710 - 11
provided with a base section shall be set on a 200 mm (8 inches) thick aggregate base course compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 698. Set precast section true and plumb. Seal all joints with preform flexible gasket material. 3. Do not build structures when air temperature is 0 degrees C (32 degrees F), or below. 4. Invert channels shall be smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Make changes in direction of flow with a smooth curve of as large a radius as size of structure will permit. Make changes in size and grade of channels gradually and evenly. Construct invert channels by one of the listed methods: a. Forming directly in concrete base of structure. b. Building up with brick and mortar. 5. Floor of structure outside the channels shall be smooth and slope toward channels not less than 1:12 (25mm per 300mm, 1-inch per foot) nor more than 1:6 (50mm per 300mm, 2 inches per foot). Bottom slab and benches shall be concrete. 6. The wall that supports access rungs or ladder shall be 90 degrees vertical from the floor of structure to manhole cover. 7. Install steps and ladders per the manufacturers recommendations. Steps and ladders shall not move or flex when used. All loose steps and ladders shall be replaced by the Contractor. 8. Install manhole frames and covers on a mortar bed, and flush with the finish pavement. Frames and covers shall not move when subject to vehicular traffic. Install a concrete collar around the frame to protect the frame from moving until the adjacent pavement is placed. In unpaved areas, the rim elevation shall be 50 mm (2 inches) above the adjacent finish grade. Install a 200 mm (8 inches) thick, by 300 mm (12 inches) concrete collar around the perimeter of the frame. Slope the top of the collar away from the frame.
3.8 CURB INLETS, CATCH BASINS, AND AREA DRAINS: Reinforced concrete as shown or precast concrete.
02710 - 12
3.9 INSPECTION OF SEWERS: Inspect and obtain the Resident Engineer's approval. Thoroughly flush out before inspection. Lamp between structures and show full bore indicating sewer is true to line and grade. Lip at joints on inside of sewer is prohibited. 3.10 TESTING OF STORM SEWERS: A. Gravity Sewers (New Pipes Only): 1. Air Test: Concrete Pipes conform to ASTM C924, Plastic Pipes conform to ASTM F1417, all other pipe material conform to ASTM C828 or C924, after consulting with pipe manufacturer. Testing of individual joints shall conform to ASTM C1103. ---END---
02710 - 13
SECTION 02770 ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This work shall cover the composition, mixing, construction upon the prepared subgrade and substrate, and the protection of hot asphalt concrete pavement. The hot asphalt concrete pavement shall consist of an aggregate or asphalt base course and asphalt surface course constructed in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and cross sections as shown. Each course shall be constructed to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and shall be rolled, finished, and approved before the placement of the next course. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Laboratory and field testing requirements: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. B. Subgrade Preparation: Section 02200, EXCAVATION, FILLING AND GRADING. C. Pavement Markings: Section 02700, SITE IMPROVEMENTS. 1.3 INSPECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT The Resident Engineer shall have access at all times to all parts of the material producing plants for checking the mixing operations and materials and the adequacy of the equipment in use. 1.4 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE CONTROL The Contractors Registered Professional Land Surveyor specified in Section 01000, GENERAL CONDITIONS shall establish and control the pavement (aggregate or asphalt base course and asphalt surface course) alignments, grades, elevations, and cross sections as shown on the Drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 01000, SUBMITTALS, furnish the following: B. Data and Test Reports: 1. Aggregate Base Course: Sources, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, percentage of wear, and other tests required by State Highway Department standards.
02770 - 1
ASPHALT PAVING
2. Asphalt Base/Surface Course: Aggregate source, gradation, soundness loss, percentage of wear, and other tests required by State Highway Department standards. 3. Job-mix formula. C. Certifications: 1. Asphalt prime and tack coat material certificate of conformance to State Highway Department requirements. 2. Asphalt cement certificate of conformance to Owner.
3. Job-mix certification - Submit plant mix certification that mix equals or exceeds the State Highway Specification. D. One copy of State Highway Department Specifications. E. Provide MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) for all chemicals used on ground. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Aggregate base , Asphaltic base and asphalt concrete materials shall conform to the requirements of the following and other appropriate sections of the latest version of the State Highway Material Specifications, including amendments, addenda and errata. Where the term "Engineer" or "Commission" is referenced in the State Highway Specifications, it shall mean the Resident Engineer. 2.2 AGGREGATES A. Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, gravel, sand, or other sound, durable mineral materials processed and blended, and naturally combined. B. Subbase aggregate (where required) maximum size: 38mm(1-1/2"). C. Base aggregate maximum size: 1. Base course over 152mm(6") thick: 38mm(1-1/2"); 2. Other base courses: 19mm(3/4"). D. Asphaltic base course: 1. Maximum particle size not to exceed 25.4mm(1). 2. Where conflicts arise between this specification and the requirements in the latest version of the State Highway Specifications, the State Specifications shall control. E. Aggregates for asphaltic concrete paving: Provide a mixture of sand, mineral aggregate, and liquid asphalt mixed in such proportions that the percentage by weight will be within:
02770 - 2
ASPHALT PAVING
Modified Top Course Massachusetts Standard
Sieve Sizes 19mm(3/4") 9.5mm(3/8") 6.4mm(1/4") 2.4mm(No. 8 mesh) 600m(No. 30 mesh) 75m(No. 200 mesh)
Percentage Passing 95 to100 60 to75 50 to 65 32 to 44 16 to 26 2 to 7
plus 50/60 penetration liquid asphalt at 5 percent to 6 percent of the combined dry aggregates. 2.3 ASPHALTS A. Comply with provisions of Mass Standards M3.0:
2.4 SEALER A. Provide a sealer consisting of suitable fibrated chemical type asphalt base binders and fillers having a container consistency suitable for troweling after thorough stirring, and containing no clay or other deleterious substance. B. Where conflicts arise between this specification and the requirements in the latest version of the State Highway Specifications, the State Specifications shall control. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL The Asphalt Concrete Paving equipment, weather limitations, job-mix formula, mixing, construction methods, compaction, finishing, tolerance, and protection shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate sections of the State Highway Specifications for the type of material specified. 3.2 MIXING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Provide hot plant-mixed asphaltic concrete paving materials. 1. Temperature leaving the plant: 143 degrees C(290 degrees F) minimum, 160 degrees C(320 degrees F) maximum. 2. Temperature at time of placing: 138 degrees C(280 degrees F) minimum.
02770 - 3
ASPHALT PAVING
3.3 SUBGRADE A. Shape to line and grade and compact with self-propelled rollers. B. All depressions that develop under rolling shall be filled with acceptable material and the area re-rolled. C. Soft areas shall be removed and filled with acceptable materials and the area re-rolled. D. Should the subgrade become rutted or displaced prior to the placing of the subbase, it shall be reworked to bring to line and grade. E. Proof-roll the subgrade with maximum 45 tonne (50 ton) gross weight dump truck as directed by VA Resident Engineer or VA Contracting Officer. If pumping, pushing, or other movement is observed, rework the area to provide a stable and compacted subgrade. 3.4 BASE COURSES A. Subbase (when required) 1. Spread and compact to the thickness shown on the drawings. 2. Rolling shall begin at the sides and continue toward the center and shall continue until there is no movement ahead of the roller. 3. After completion of the subbase rolling there shall be no hauling over the subbase other than the delivery of material for the top course. B. Base 1. Spread and compact to the thickness shown on the drawings. 2. Rolling shall begin at the sides and continue toward the center and shall continue until there is no movement ahead of the roller. 3. After completion of the base rolling there shall be no hauling over the base other than the delivery of material for the top course. C. Thickness tolerance: Provide the compacted thicknesses shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of minus 0.0mm (0.0") to plus 12.7mm (0.5"). D. Smoothness tolerance: Provide the lines and grades shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of 5mm in 3m (3/16 inch in ten feet). E. Moisture content: Use only the amount of moisture needed to achieve the specified compaction. 3.5 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING A. Remove all loose materials from the compacted base.
02770 - 4
ASPHALT PAVING
B. Apply the specified prime coat, and tack coat where required, and allow to dry in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations as approved by the Architect or Engineer. C. Receipt of asphaltic concrete materials: 1. Do not accept material unless it is covered with a tarpaulin until unloaded, and unless the material has a temperature of not less than 130 degrees C(280 degrees F). 2. Do not commence placement of asphaltic concrete materials when the atmospheric temperature is below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F), not during fog, rain, or other unsuitable conditions. D. Spreading: 1. Spread material in a manner that requires the least handling. 2. Where thickness of finished paving will be 76mm (3") or less, spread in one layer. E. Rolling: 1. After the material has been spread to the proper depth, roll until the surface is hard, smooth, unyielding, and true to the thickness and elevations shown own the drawings. 2. Roll in at least two directions until no roller marks are visible. 3. Finished paving smoothness tolerance: a. No depressions which will retain standing water. b. No deviation greater than 3mm in 1.8m (1/8" in six feet). 3.6 APPLICATION OF SEAL COAT A. Prepare the surfaces, mix the seal coat material, and apply in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations as approved by the Architect or Engineer. B. Apply one coat of the specified sealer. C. Achieve a finished surface seal which, when dry and thoroughly set, is smooth, tough, resilient, of uniform black color, and free from coarse textured areas, lap marks, ridges, and other surface irregularities. 3.7 PROTECTION Protect the asphaltic concrete paved areas from traffic until the sealer is set and cured and does not pick up under foot or wheeled traffic. 3.8 FINAL CLEAN-UP Remove all debris, rubbish, and excess material from the work area. ---END - - -
02770 - 5
ASPHALT PAVING
SECTION 02790 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing hot-mixed asphalt paving base course, to receive unit paver finish surfacing, over prepared subbase. Proof rolling of prepared subbase is included in this Section. RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.03 A. Salvaging existing brick pavers: Division 2 Section Site Preparation. Base courses for pavements: Division 2 Section Excavation, Filling, Grading. Division 2 Section Asphalt Paving for parking lot and other asphaltic pavements.
B. 1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Material Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. SITE CONDITIONS W eather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture. Construct hot-mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30 deg F and rising. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. Coordinate with placement of unit pavers to assure finished surface of pavers will be at indicated grades. Structure Loading: Verify that proposed installation equipment and operations will not impose loads upon the parking garage structure below that exceed the safe loading capacity of the structure.
1.04 A.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS General: Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record of previous installations. 02790 - 1 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING
02790_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
B.
Coarse Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured crushed blast furnace slag, complying with ASTM D 692-88. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, properly cured blast furnace slag, gravel, or combinations thereof, complying with ASTM D 1073. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with ASTM D 242. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-graded material. Prime Coat: Cut-back asphalt type, ASTM D 2027; MC-30, MC-70 or MC-250. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; ASTM D 977. Herbicide Treatment: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection Agency. Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE Provide plant-mixed, hot-laid asphalt-aggregate mixture complying with ASTM D 3515 and as recommended by local paving authorities to suit project conditions.
C.
D.
E.
F. G. H.
2.02 A.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. SURFACE PREPARATION General: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before applying herbicide treatment or prime coat. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Verify condition and grades of subbase and related work. Verify that underground structures and covers in pavement areas are properly placed and in condition to receive paving. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until deficient subbase areas and construction have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommended dosages and application instructions. Apply to compacted, dry subbase prior to application of prime coat. Prime Coat: Apply at rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gallons per sq. yd., over compacted subgrade. Apply material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into hot-mixed asphalt pavement. Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 02790 - 2 HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
02790_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
0.15 gallons per sq. yd. of surface. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving. G. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces. Remove and clean damaged surfaces. PLACING MIX General: Place hot-mixed asphalt mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 225 deg F. Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section, and compacted thickness. 1. 2. 3. Place total thickness of base course for pavers to provide compressed thickness as detailed on the Drawings. Minimum thickness: Unless otherwise indicated, binder course: 2-inches; finish course: 1-inch. Place paving to maintain indicated surface grades and to ensure proper drainage. Maintain required thicknesses throughout cross-section of pavement.
3.02 A.
B.
Pavement Placing: Place in strips not less than 10 feet wide, or width of indicated paving if narrower than 10 feet, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course. Immediately correct surface irregularities in finish course behind paver. Remove excess material forming high spots with shovel or lute. ROLLING General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained 95 percent laboratory density. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot hot-mixed asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. 1. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
C.
3.03 A. B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
02790_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02790 - 3
HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING
3.04 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL General: Testing in-place hot-mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owner's testing laboratory. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Architect. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549 will not be acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations: 1. Base Course for Pavers: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
B.
C.
Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each hot-mixed asphalt course for smoothness, using 10 feet straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness: 1. 2. 3. Surface: 3/16 inch. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. Puddling: no depression capable of forming puddles exceeding 1/16 inch depth or one sq ft area.
D.
Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 02790
02790_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02790 - 4
HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING
SECTION 02800 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing the following site improvements and furniture: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Planter/Seat Walls, including brick facing and cap stone on fountain perimeter. Benches. Trash Recepticals Bike Rack. Brick curbs and edging. Footings: For site improvements, lighting, and other items requiring footings not specified elsewhere.
1.02 A.
RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Salvaging of brick paver units for use as pavers and edging: Division 2 Section Site Preparation. Fountain: Division 2 Section Fountain. Granite Pavers: Division 2 Section Unit Pavers. Earthwork: Division 2 Section Excavation, Filling, Grading. Concrete pavement and related concrete work: Division 2 Section Portland Cement Concrete Paving. Site drainage systems: Division 2 Section Storm Drainage Utilities. Site Lighting: Division 16, Electrical.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive product data for each item or product to be supplied, including dimensioned layout of each unit. Submit technical data sheets and MSDS for all products included in Part 2 of this Section. 1. 2. Site Furnishings and Equipment: Submit manufacturers product data, installation instructions, and Contractor supplied fasteners for approval. W aterproofing and drainage products, filter fabric, and related items.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. W all Capstone Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required, including complete layout and details, prepared by the stone fabricator. a. Include profile drawings for each typical section and each special condition at full scale, complete layouts for each installation at not less than 1in = 1 ft scale, piece fabrication details at not less than 1 in = 1 ft scale, and anchorage details, including indication of 02800 - 1 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts adjacent construction and substrate to which anchorage is to be made, at not less than 3 in = 1 ft scale. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of concrete reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
2.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Face brick for wall construction. Granite for retaining wall capstone. Colored mortar. Joint sealant for capstone joints.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. Capstone unit, not less than 12 inches long by indicated finished width. Face Brick: Laid up sample not less than 2 square feet, using selected pigmented mortar, jointed as specified, showing full range of brick color that will occur in the finished work. Joint sealant for capstone joints.
E.
Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. Reinforcing bars and joint reinforcement. W all anchors, brick ties, and similar accessories.
1.04 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2. 3. Build mockup of typical seating/planter wall as shown on Drawings. Locate mockup as directed. Build mockup of typical wall with approved materials, including footing, masonry backup, reinforcement and anchorage, brick facing with approved pigmented mortar and with approved capstone, approximately 72 inches long by full height of wall, with corner and perpendicular return of not less than 24 inches. a. Show typical components, footing, anchorages, weepholes and methods of installation. b. Use approved mortar, with joints tooled as indicated or directed. c. Include sealant-filled capstone joint complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." d. Include waterproofing parging and subdrainage materials. 02800 - 2 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
B.
C.
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 4. 5. 6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of stone; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to stone colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.05 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store all products in unopened original manufacturer's packaging. Store all materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect materials from all damage. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars without protecting edges of stone units with wood or other rigid materials. Lift with wide belt type slings wherever possible. Do not use wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances which might cause staining. If required, use wood rollers with cushion at end of wood slide. PROJECT CONDITIONS Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.06 A.
B.
Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of exposed to view masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface.
C.
Cold-W eather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. 02800 - 3 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
D.
Hot-W eather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. CONCRETE Concrete for footings and walls shall conform to applicable requirements of Division 3 Sections Cast-In-Place Concrete and Cement and Concrete for Exterior Improvements. STONE UNITS Stone for Capstones: Granite, matching stone used for Division 2 Section Unit Pavers, dressed and squared dimension stones, with thermal finish exposed surfaces and sawn concealed surfaces, made from granite complying with ASTM C 615. 1. 2. 3. Granite Color and Grain: Basis of Design Product: W oodbury Gray natural granite as produced by Swenson Granite Works,Concord, NH, or approved equal. Size: As indicated. Provide stone units accurately shaped, with exposed faces dressed true, and with beds and joints at right angles to faces. a. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite."
2.02 A.
2.03 A.
BRICK All face brick shall be solid, hard burned, waterstruck or sand molded brick, conforming to ASTM C216, Grade SW , type FBA or FBS. In addition, brick shall have a compressive strength not less than 6,000 PSI (individual), or 8,000 PSI (average of 5), nor shall water absorption exceed 10% (individual), or 8% (average of 5) when subjected to 5 hour boiling test, all in accordance with testing procedures outlined in ASTM C67. Color range shall be as follows and be limited to samples approved by the Architect: 1. 2. All face brick shall be of color range and texture to closely match existing light colored or buff brick material on the existing residential buildings to the satisfaction of the Architect. Brick shall be standard modular size, nominal 8-inches long, 4-inches wide, and 3 courses in 8 inches high, for 3/8-inch joints.
B.
Brick pavers for edging shall be units salvaged from existing site walks as indicated and specified in a related Section. 1. If stockpiled salvaged units are lost, damaged or otherwise rendered unsuitable for use during storage, due to any failure or action of the Contractor, as determined by the Architect, Contractor shall provide suitable brick pavers matching existing, satisfactory to the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.04 A.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Normal Weight Masonry Unit Materials: Normal weight concrete masonry units (CMU) shall have nominal face dimensions of 8 by 16 inches and be of thicknesses as indicated on the Drawings. 1. All concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM Specification C-90, Grade N, Type 1, for 02800 - 4 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units and ASTM C-145 for solid load-bearing concrete masonry units (aggregate to conform to ASTM C-33) and all applicable Building Code requirements. Concrete masonry units shall be made by the autoclave process and cured to no more than the maximum moisture content allowed in the ASTM Specification. Physical properties: a. Minimum compressive strength, based on the solid net area, shall be 3,000 psi in accordance with ASTM C-140. Minimum compressive strength of any individual unit shall not be less than 80% of the required three (3) unit average. b. W ater absorption shall not exceed ten (10) pounds per cubic foot (average of three units). c. Moisture content at time of delivery to job site shall not exceed 35% of total absorption. d. No overall dimension (width, height or length) shall differ by more than 1/16 inch from the specified standard dimension, except that dimensions measured to a split-face face or end shall not be held to this tolerance. e. Provide normal weight aggregate units. Oven dry weight of concrete shall not be less than 130 pounds per cubic foot.
2.
2.05 A.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. Mortar Pigments: Natural mineral and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. Organic pigments, including carbon, are not acceptable. 1. Available Products: a. Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. c. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
B. C.
D.
E.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. 2. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
F.
W aterproofing compound used for mortar and setting beds shall be Toch Brothers "Toxement", Medusa waterproofing admixture, "Hydrocide" by Sonneborn Building Products, Inc., or "Omicron" by Master Builders. Manufacturer shall confirm that material is compatible with joint sealants to be used in conjunction with this work. Latex additive for all mortar, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, shall be "Laticrete" by Laticrete Corp., or approved equal, recommended by the manufacturer to provide a high strength, weather resistant mortar with enhanced bond to masonry and substrates. Latex additive may be either styrene butadiene rubber in factory prediluted form or acrylic in factory prediluted or concentrated form. Use of latex additive shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the installations indicated.
G.
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02800 - 5
GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts H. 2.06 A. W ater: Potable. JOINT REINFORCEMENT Provide horizontal joint reinforcement in concrete masonry unit walls over two courses high at 16 inches on center vertically. 1. Hot dipped galvanized to provide a Class B-2 finish of 1.50 ounce zinc per square foot conforming to ASTM A 153.
B.
Joint reinforcement shall be manufactured from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A-82 and shall consist of deformed horizontal rods welded in the same plane to a continuous diagonal cross rod forming a truss design. 1. 2. 3. 4. Longitudinal wires in exterior walls shall be 3/16 inch with No. 9 Ga. cross wires. W idth of reinforcement shall be 1-1/2 inch to 2 inch less than thickness of wall or wythe as applicable. Provide prefabricated corner and tee units. Product: Standard Truss by Dur-O-W all; Block Truss AA600 by AA Wire Products; Regular Truss Ty by Ty-W all; Truss Type by Wire Bond or equal.
2.07 A.
TIES AND ANCHORS Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with the paragraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304. Stainless Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304. Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel. Dovetail anchor slots shall be furnished under this Section for installation under related Sections: Heckman No. 100 or approved equal, 22 ga. steel, 1 inch wide, 1 inch deep, 5/8 inch throat width, hot dip galvanized. Dovetail anchors: Heckman No. 106 or approved equal, corrugated, 12 ga. steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication, of sufficient length to penetrate 2 inches min. into masonry bed joints. MASONRY CLEANERS AND ACCESSORIES Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.
B. C. D. E.
F.
2.08 A.
B.
Setting buttons, shims, spacers: lead or resilient plastic, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of stonework, without intruding into depths required for joint sealants, or causing third side adhesion between sealant and setting button. 02800 - 6 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
C.
Compressible Filler 1. Provide exterior compressible filler at following location: a. In horizontal and vertical joints between stonework and other types of construction and where shown on Drawings. Filler shall be preformed closed-cell polyethylene foam or sponge rubber joint filler of proper thickness to be compressed 50% when installed in joint. Filler shall be depth of joint less one inch. Hold filler back inch from exposed face of masonry units for sealing under Joint Sealant Section.
2.
D.
W eep Holes and Footing Drainage Pipe: PVC drainage pipe, white: 1. 2. W eep Holes: 1-inch diameter, with exposed end finishing flush with face of wall. Footing Drainage: 4-inch diameter.
E.
Setting buttons, shims, spacers: lead or resilient plastic, non-staining to masonry, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of work, without intruding into depths required for joint sealants, or causing third side adhesion between sealant and setting button. Prefabricated Drainage Course: 1. 2. A composite drainage system consisting of a three-dimensional, crush-proof, drainage core and a filter fabric. American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydrodrain 400 series or approved equal.
F.
G.
Filter Fabric Sheet: 1. W ater permeable polymeric fabric: American Hydrotech, Inc., Filter Fabric Sheet or approved equal.
H.
Flashing: 1. Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed or concealed complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and as follows: a. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere. b. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from copper, with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 1) Available Products: a) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail) or Cheney 3-W ay Flashing (Sawtooth). b) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-W ay Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior: a. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
2.
2.09 A.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 02800 - 7 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. 3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B.
Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. 1. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. Mix to match sample approved by Architect.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. 2. 3. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. For exterior, above-grade, work and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. All mortar shall contain latex additive in proportions recommended by manufacturer for masonry exposed to freezing conditions.
D.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. 2. Use grout of that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
2.10 A.
SEALANTS General: All joints in capstone shall be filled with sealant and backer rod as specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealants. 1. 2. Sealant shall be elastomeric compound of type specified in Joint Sealants Section, in color selected by Architect for this application. After tooling, apply mortar sand to texture joint.
2.11 A.
CAPSTONE FABRICATION General: Fabricate capstone in sizes and shapes necessary to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings. 1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite."
B.
Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. 1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.
C.
Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Joints between stone units shall be uniform in width as shown on the Drawings, or 1/4-inch if not shown.
D.
Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. 02800 - 8 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
E.
Carefully inspect finished stones at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements relative to qualities of appearance, material, and fabrication; replace defective stones with ones that do comply. SITE FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT Benches: DuMor, Inc., http://www.dumor.com/benches/, Model - 51-60R, 6' long. Redwood S-3 'gull wing' spread mounting on concrete. Contractor to anchor to paving surface with vandal resistant hardware. Trash receptacle: by DuMor, Inc., Model 70-22R, redwood. Contractor to anchor to paving surface with vandal resistant hardware. Bike Rack: By: AAA Ribbon Rack co., Division of Brandir International, Inc., 521 Fifth Avenue, 17th Floor, New York, NY 10175-1799 USA, 800-849-3488 or 212-505-6500 Fax: 212-505-6813; http://www.ribbonrack.net/: Model: RB-07-I-G; Finish: Hot Dip Galvanized (Standard); extended legs for in-ground anchorage.
2.12 A.
B.
C.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Inspect all locations where Site Improvements are to be installed and the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Contractor, with copy to the Architect, any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. PREPARATION Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement, veneer and capstone anchors, flashing, and similar items to be built into, or to receive, work of this Section. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. CONCRETE W ORK Concrete slab bases for all exposed to view-and-weather conditions shall conform to requirements of Portland Cement Concrete Paving and Cement and Concrete for Exterior Improvements Sections. Concrete footings and concealed concrete wall construction shall conform to requirements of Division 3 Section Cast-In-Place Concrete. Dowel footings to underslab as indicated. Provide holes to receive dowels -inch larger than dowel diameter for dowels to be set with non-shrink cement grout, or as recommended by epoxy system manufacturer for epoxy set installation. Step footing as necessary to maintain top of footing not less than the indicated minimum depth below adjacent grade at all points, coordinated with masonry unit dimensions. Place PVC drainage pipe through footing at 48 inches on center maximum to ensure full drainage 02800 - 9 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
3.02 A.
B.
3.03 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts of all areas. 3.04 A. BRICK EDGING Place salvaged brick paver units on edge, embedding units in concrete as indicated as the work progresses, with hand tight joints. Maintain straight true lines. PLANTER/SEATING WALLS AND RELATED W ORK In general, all capstone units shall be shop fabricated to approved shop drawings, and field modification of fabricated stone units will be permitted only in limited situations, which must be specifically noted on the shop drawings, where field alterations must be anticipated to adapt to field conditions. Perform necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. Examine stone on delivery and before it is placed in work and remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. Promptly replace such units with units conforming to requirements. All masonry shall be laid by skilled workers under adequate supervision, and shall be laid true to lines and levels with joints of uniform thickness, all surfaces true and corners straight and plumb. Concrete Masonry Unit Backup Walls: 1. 2. Lay masonry units in running bond, with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Do not wet masonry units. Install reinforcing, wall ties and anchors for capstones in proper locations and as required by conditions of construction. a. Place reinforcement in bed joint above the starting block course, in every second block joint above, and in the bed joint of the top most course. All units shall be laid in such a manner that joints are completely filled with mortar. End joints must be filled by shoving the unit into place with sufficient mortar to squeeze out on both sides. Slushing end joints after unit is in place is not acceptable. The bed joint must also be completely filled. All masonry joints, unless otherwise noted herein, both inside and outside block, shall be made full of mortar and struck flush. The exposed masonry surfaces shall be brushed or scraped to remove all projections of mortar. Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners. Build in through-wall flashing as indicated and in accordance with SMACNA recommendations as applicable to conditions. Grout wall solid, embedding anchor dowels for stone cap. Parge plant bed side of walls with specified latex modified mortar: a. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. b. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. Apply drainage mat material after parging has cured for not less than seven days, in sequence with placement of fills. Extend drainage mat from finished grade level to top of footing vertically, horizontally over footing, and down back of footing to underlying drainage course to ensure a continuous path for drainage of water.
3.05 A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
E.
Brick Veneer Facing: 1. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths 02800 - 10 GARDEN SITE IMPROVEMENTS
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in running bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. No chipped masonry units shall be used on surfaces exposed in final structure. Masonry units must have final adjustment before mortar has set. Masonry units shall be cut only with appropriate type of power cutting wheels or saws, and holes shall be made only with power drills or similar equipment that will give neat, sharp edges. Replace with new material all cracked, damaged or marred surfaces. Lay brick as follows: a. Lay units with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs. b. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with nominal 3/8-inch joints. Tool exposed joints when thumbprint hard: rake out all joints to a uniform depth of approximately 1/4-inch, and compact with flat jointer. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
F.
Set capstone in accordance with approved shop drawings in full bed of latex modified mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated, with embedded dowel anchors. Provide no fewer than two anchors for each stone unit. Build anchors into mortar joints as wall stone is set, or grout dowels set in top surface of substrate construction solidly. Rake out joints in top of capstone installation to receive backer rods and elastomeric sealant finish. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Remove and replace masonry work of the following descriptions as determined by the Architect. Replace in a manner that results in work matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement: 1. 2. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged brick or stone units. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. Defective joints.
3.06 A.
B.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean surfaces as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry work as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone veneer assemblies. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. W et work surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Clean work first by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. Only if bucket and brush method cannot produce satisfactory results, clean masonry assemblies with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02800 - 11
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.07 A. SITE FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT Install site furnishings as indicated in accordance with approved manufacturers instructions and recommendations applicable to the Project conditions. For surface mounting, use approved vandal resistant fasteners only. W here practicable, locate fasteners so as to be inconspicuous or covered by escutcheons or trim. W here applicable, weld nuts to threaded rod anchors to render them unremovable. Install bike rack in core drilled holes in concrete pavement as recommended by manufacturer. Seal top of grout around posts with pourable joint sealant as specified in Section 7 Section Joint Sealants. MASONRY W ASTE DISPOSAL Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. Masonry Waste: Remove all masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK All exposed work under this Section shall be protected by the Contractor from damage. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing protective boxing or other suitable means of protection wherever required without specific instruction from the Architect. All work shall be left clean and in perfect condition at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
C.
3.08 A.
B. 3.09 A.
B.
02800_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02800 - 12
SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists of the design and installation of complete systems for automatic-control irrigation of the garden area of the site. Performance Specification: except where specifically indicated, it is not intended to specify products for all components of the required system. Components described herein are believed to be necessary for the intended function of the system, but may not include all components required for the complete system. Under the delegated design provisions herein the installer assuming responsibility for the fountain system shall determine and specify the operating and performance requirements for all components so as to provide complete and fully functional irrigation systems conforming to the indicated design intent. RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Division 2 Section "Drainage and Utilities" for water supply from water service piping, water meters, and backflow preventers. Division 2 Section "Excavation, Filling, Grading" for building and utility trench excavation, backfilling, compacting and grading requirements, and soil materials. Division 2 Sections "Planting" for tree and shrub planting, tree support systems, and soil materials, and Lawns for lawn areas.
B.
1.02 A.
1.03 A.
DEFINITIONS Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic. PE: Polyethylene plastic. PP: Polypropylene plastic. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 02810 - 1 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
B. C.
D.
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
1.04 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Design 100 percent water-coverage irrigation system for lawns and exterior plants in the Garden area and as indicated. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig (1380 kPa). Circuit Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa). Drain Piping: 100 psig (690 kPa).
B.
1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. W ater regulators. W ater hammer arresters. General-duty valves. Specialty valves. Control-valve boxes. Sprinklers. Irrigation specialties. Controllers. Include wiring diagrams. Control cables. Include splice kits and conduit.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components. Include water meters, backflow preventers, valves, piping, sprinklers and devices, accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable. Coordination Drawings: Show piping and major system components. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For irrigation systems, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "General Requirements," include data for the following: 1. 2. 3. Automatic-control valves. Sprinklers. Controllers.
C.
D. E.
1.06 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02810 - 2
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.07 A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 1.09 A. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Architect's written permission.
B. 1.08 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2.02 A. B.
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) and ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C), water tube, drawn temper. 1. 2. 3. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
C.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper. 1. 2. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. 02810 - 3 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
D.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40. 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466.
E.
PVC, Pressure-Rated Pipe: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21 and SDR 26. 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467.
F.
PE, Controlled OD Pipe: ASTM F 771 and ASTM D 3035, PE 3408 compound, DR 9 and DR 11. 1. 2. PE Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2683. PE Butt-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261.
G.
PE, Controlled ID Pipe: ASTM F 771 and ASTM D 2239; PE 3408 compound; SIDRs 9, 11.5, and 15. 1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, PA or PP. Include bands or other fasteners.
2.03 A.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES AW W A, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: AW W A C500, metal-seated or AW W A C509, resilient-seated, nonrising-stem, gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet gate valve; with bronze stem and stem nut. 1. 2. 3. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig (1380 kPa). End Connections: Mechanical joint. Interior Coating: Complying with AW W A C550.
B.
Valve Boxes: Comply with AW W A M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "W ATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 5-inch- (125-mm-) diameter barrel. 1. Operating Wrenches: Furnish total of one steel, tee-handle operating wrench with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
C.
MSS, Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, Class 125, with solid wedge and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim, cast-iron body, and handwheel. MSS, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, Class 125, with solid wedge and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim, cast-iron body, and handwheel. Curb Valves: AW W A C800. Include bronze body, ball or ground-key plug, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching piping material. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AW W A M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "W ATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over curb valve, and approximately 3-inch(75-mm-) diameter barrel. 1. Shutoff Rods: Furnish total of one steel, tee-handle shutoff rod(s) with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.
D.
E.
F.
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02810 - 4
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts G. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: MSS SP-110, one-piece brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CW P rating. Bronze Gate Valves: MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 1, nonrising-stem, bronze body with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable-iron handwheel. Bronze Globe Valves: MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 2, with bronze body and nonmetallic disc. SPECIALTY VALVES Bronze Automatic Control Valves: Cast-bronze body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Buckner by Storm. b. Ceres Products Corp. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Hasslinger Manufacturing Corp. e. Hunter Industries Incorporated. f. Netafim USA. g. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. h. Superior Controls Co., Inc. i. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. j. W eathermatic.
H.
I. 2.04 A.
B.
Automatic Drain Valves: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig (17 to 20 kPa). Quick-Couplers: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. 1. 2. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant, locking feature. Include one matching key. Available Manufacturers: a. Buckner by Storm. b. Ceres Products Corp. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. e. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. W eathermatic. h. W estern Brass W orks.
C.
2.05 A.
CONTROL-VALVE BOXES Plastic Control-Valve Boxes: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service. 1. 2. 3. 4. Shape: Rectangular. Sidewall Material: PE, ABS, or FRP. Cover Material: PE, ABS, FRP, or polymer concrete. a. Lettering: IRRIGATION. Available Manufacturers: a. Armorcast Products Co. 02810 - 5 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. B. Carson Industries LLC. Dallas/Fort Worth Plastics, Inc. NewBasis. Normandy Products. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. Plymouth Products Inc. Synertech Molded Products, Inc. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum to 3 inches (75 mm) maximum. PIPING SPECIALTIES W ater Regulators: ASSE 1003, single-seated, direct-operated, water-pressure regulators, rated for 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum initial-inlet working pressure, with size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed Y-pattern strainer that is compatible with unit for size and capacity. 1. 2. 3. 4. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. Available Manufacturers: a. BERMAD. b. Cashco, Inc. c. CLA-VAL Co. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. FLOMATIC Corp. f. GA Industries, Inc. g. Honeywell. h. IMI Cash Valve, Inc. i. W atts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Operation.
2.06 A.
B.
W ater Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston-type pressurized cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201, Sizes A to F. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter dial, dial range of 2 times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet. SPRINKLERS Description: Brass or plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Buckner by Storm. b. Ceres Products Corp. c. Champion Irrigation Products. d. Hit Products Corp. e. Hunter Industries Incorporated. f. Irritrol Systems. g. K-RAIN Manufacturing Corp. h. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. 02810 - 6 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
C.
2.07 A.
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts i. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. j. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. k. Senninger Irrigation, Inc. l. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. m. W eathermatic. n. W estern Brass W orks. Flush, Surface Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-steel retraction spring.
2. 3. 4. 5.
2.08 A.
SPRINKLER SPECIALTIES Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), with corrosion-resistant internal parts, and capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig (138 kPa). Strainer/Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit. Emitters: PE or vinyl body. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Agrifim. b. Amiad Filtration Systems. c. Aquapore Moisture Systems, Inc. d. Buckner by Storm. e. Dig Corporation. f. Hit Products Corp. g. Irritrol Systems. h. Netafim USA. i. NIBCO INC. j. Olson Irrigation Systems. k. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. l. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. m. RAINDRIP Inc. n. Salco Products, Inc. o. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
B.
C.
2.09 A.
AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM Available Manufacturers: 1. Buckner by Storm. 2. Champion Irrigation Products. 3. Heliotrope General. 4. Hit Products Corp. 5. Hunter Industries Incorporated. 6. Hydro-Electronics, Inc. 7. Irritrol Systems. 8. K-RAIN Manufacturing Corp. 9. Nelson, L. R. Corporation. 10. Netafim USA. 11. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc. 12. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. 02810 - 7 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 13. Superior Controls Co., Inc. 14. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. 15. W eathermatic. B. Interior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, dripproof, with locking cover and two matching keys. 1. 2. C. D. Material: Enameled-steel, sheet metal. Mounting: Surface type for wall mounting.
Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each station. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic operations to skip operation any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate 2 or more times daily. 1. 2. 3. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset automatic operation. Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically powers timing device during power outages. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and primary power.
E.
F.
W iring: UL 493, Type UF-B multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. 1. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AW G minimum, between building and controllers. 2. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AW G minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench. 3. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete with opening for wiring.
G.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. EARTHW ORK Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grades, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavement and slabs. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. 1. D. Install piping sleeves by boring or jacking under existing paving if possible.
C.
Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches (19 to 75 mm), to 12 inches (300 mm) below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. 02810 - 8 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
E.
Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches (300 mm). Drain Piping: 12 inches (300 mm).
3.02 A.
PREPARATION Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Architect's approval before excavation. PIPING APPLICATIONS Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead of joints indicated. Aboveground Irrigation Main Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. 2. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Type L (Type B) or Type M (Type C) hard copper tube, wroughtor cast-copper fittings, and soldered joints. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Schedule 40, PVC pipe; socket-type PVC fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3.03 A. B. C.
D.
Underground Irrigation Main Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. 2. 3. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Type L (Type B) soft copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: SDR 21, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 80, PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
E.
Circuit Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: SDR 26, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: DR 9 or DR 11, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE socket or butt-fusion fittings; and heat-fusion joints. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: SIDR 7 or SIDR 9, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and banded or coupled joints. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
F.
Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints. 1. Option: Plastic piping manufactured for this application may be used instead of pipe and fittings specified. Type L (Type B) hard copper tube,
G.
Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 02810 - 9
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
H.
Drain Piping: Use the following piping materials: 1. All Sizes: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
I. J.
Sleeves: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. Transition Fittings: Use transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the following: 1. Couplings: a. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. b. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AW W A transition coupling. Fittings: a. Aboveground Piping: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings. b. Underground Piping: Union with plastic end of same material as plastic piping.
2.
K.
Dielectric Fittings: Use dielectric fittings for dissimilar-metal pipe connections according to the following: 1. Underground Piping: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Prohibited except in valve box. Aboveground Piping: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Dielectric flanges. Piping in Valve Boxes or Vaults: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Dielectric flanges.
2.
3.
3.04 A.
VALVE APPLICATIONS Aboveground, Shutoff-Duty Valves: 1. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze ball valve. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, nonrising-stem gate valve.
B.
Underground, Shutoff-Duty Valves: Use the following: 1. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Curb stop with tee head, curb-stop service box, and shutoff rod. NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AW W A cast-iron gate valve with elastomeric gaskets and stem nut, valve box, and shutoff rod.
C. D.
Underground, Manual Control Valves: Bronze globe valve with control-valve box and valve key. Control Valves: 1. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: [Bronze] [Plastic] automatic control valve. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): Bronze automatic control valve.
E.
Drain Valves: 1. 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 3/4 (DN 15 and DN 20): Automatic drain valve. NPS 1 to NPS 2 (DN 25 to DN 50): [Bronze] [Plastic] ball valve. 02810 - 10 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
3.05 A. B. C. D. E.
PIPING INSTALLATION Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller pipe connection. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger pipe connection. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F 5 deg C. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F 5 deg C before testing unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. W ater Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves in valve box. VALVE INSTALLATION Underground Gate Valves: Install in valve box with top flush with grade. 1. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints.
F.
G. H. I. J.
K.
L.
3.06 A.
B. C. D. E. 3.07 A. B. C.
Underground Curb Stops: Install in service box with top flush with grade. Underground, Manual Control Valves: Install in manual control-valve box. Control Valves: Install in control-valve box. Drain Valves: Install in control-valve box. SPRINKLER INSTALLATION Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches (100 mm) from walls and 02810 - 11 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2 inches (50 mm) from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 A. AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches (900 by 600 by 100 mm) thick, and not less than 6 inches (150 mm) greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches (50 mm) below[ or beside] piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas if irrigation piping is installed in sleeve. CONNECTIONS Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. LABELING AND IDENTIFYING Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller. 1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
B.
3.09 A. B. C.
3.10 A.
B.
W arning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape over underground piping, during backfilling of trenches. Refer to Division 2 Section "Excavation, Filling, Grading" for warning tapes. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect[, test, and adjust] field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections[, and to assist in field testing]. Report results in writing. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. 3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. 3.11 A.
B.
C.
Remove and replace units and [retest] [reinspect] as specified above.
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02810 - 12
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.12 A. B. C. STARTUP SERVICE Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. ADJUSTING Adjust settings of controllers. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. Adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) above, finish grade. CLEANING Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controller and automatic control valves. Refer to Division 1 Section "General Requirements." END OF SECTION 02810
D. 3.13 A. B.
C. 3.14 A. 3.15 A.
02810_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02810 - 13
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
SECTION 02850 FOUNTAIN
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists of the complete fountain indicated, including: 1. 2. 3. B. Concrete base pool, with proprietary colored pebble finish and tile strip at waterline. All plumbing within fountain system, from connection to water supply, including pumping equipment and fountain spray nozzles. Electrical lighting fixtures, conduit, and equipment indicated within the fountain installation.
Performance Specification: except where specifically indicated, it is not intended to specify products for all components of the required system. Components described herein are believed to be necessary for the intended function of the system, but may not include all components required for the complete system. Under the delegated design provisions herein the professional engineer assuming responsibility for the fountain system shall determine and specify the operating and performance requirements for all components so as to provide a complete and fully functional fountain system conforming to the indicated design intent. 1. All components of the system exposed to view shall be subject to approval of the Architect for conformance with visual characteristics of the design intent.
1.02 A.
RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Brick facing and stone copings: Division 2 Section Garden Site Improvements. W ater supply to the fountain system: Division 15 Section Plumbing. Electrical wiring and connections: Division 16, Electrical.
1.03 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Design: Provide complete design for the complete fountain installation indicated, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Proprietary Systems: The indicated and specified construction of the fountain pool is based on the proprietary products of the indicated manufacturer. Design and construction of the fountain pool shall be performed by an experienced pool installer firm authorized to construct pools using the specified proprietary system acceptable to the Architect. SUBMITTALS Delegated-Design Submittal: For complete fountain installation indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 02850 - 1 FOUNTAIN
B.
1.04 A.
02850_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
1.
Compliance Review: Qualified professional engineer responsible for fountain system design shall review and approve submittals and source and field quality-control reports for compliance of materials and construction with design.
B. C.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and pool installer. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Manufacturer's model number. Options, accessories, and components that will be included for Project. Clearance requirements for access and maintenance. Utility service connections for water, drainage, and power; include roughing-in dimensions.
D.
Shop Drawings: For complete systems of equipment and construction. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions, fabrication details, utility service requirements, and attachments to other work. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. 2. 3. Colored pebble finish for pool. Tile waterline strip. Finish options available for other components of systems exposed to view.
E.
F.
Samples for Verification: For each factory-applied or integral color or texture finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operating equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "General Requirements," include the following: 1. Product Schedule: For each equipment item, include the following: a. Designation indicated on Drawings. b. Manufacturer's name and model number. c. List of factory-authorized service agencies including their addresses and telephone numbers.
G.
1.05 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer: Provide an experienced swimming pool installation firm licensed by the specified pool finish manufacturer to be responsible for the installation of all work under this Section. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety standards and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use. Regulatory Requirements: Install systems and equipment to comply with the following: 1. 2. Massachusetts State Plumbing Code. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
B.
C.
1.06 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store all products in unopened original manufacturer's packaging. Store all materials 02850 - 2 FOUNTAIN
02850_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect materials from all damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. CONCRETE Concrete for footings and walls shall conform to applicable requirements of Division 3 Section CastIn-Place Concrete. Concrete for installation as slabs for pool and other exposed locations shall conform to applicable provisions of Division 2 Section Portland Cement Concrete Paving. POOL Design of pool finish is based on the Pebble Tec system, a proprietary product of Pebble Technology, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ; www.pebbletec.com. Colored pebble stone aggregate finish: Provide finish color and texture selected by Architect from manufacturers full product range. W aterline Tile: 2 by 2 inch glazed ceramic tile, rated for exterior applications and cold temperature resistant, in gray color selected by Architect from full available range. OPERATING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING Pump: External HP Self Priming Pump, 115V 5.6 A, (123 gpm at 5 head minimum). Ultra Violet Clarification (UVC): 40W Ultraviolet Clarifier (w/ internal pressure switch if available). Pump Vault Housing Unit: Extra Large Valve Control Box (17 x 30 x 18 inches minimum) with allotment space for proper drainage considerations Nozzles: Foam Jets, 1 NPT Female, Water Level Independent, Adjustable Flow, Bronze. Qty: 6 Side wall drain' with 2" diam. sch. 40 pipe to feed into the pump. Internal Plumbing: 2 Sch40 External: Bronze, or similar aesthetically appealing substitute Autofill: Mechanical, -1 ELECTRICAL Coordinate with Division 16 to provide dedicated 15A circuit minimum to fountain specific operation. Not to be included in lighting circuit specs.
B.
2.02 A.
B.
C.
2.03 A. B. C.
D. E. F. G. H. 2.04 A.
02850_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02850 - 3
FOUNTAIN
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Inspect area where fountain is to be installed and the conditions under which the work must be performed. Report in writing to the Contractor, with copy to the Architect, any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. END OF SECTION 02850
02850_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02850 - 4
FOUNTAIN
SECTION 02950 PLANTING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED The work under this Section consists generally of the following, without limitation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. 1.02 A. Trees. Shrubs. Ground covers and planting. Topsoil and soil amendments. Fertilizers and mulches. Stakes and guys. Landscape edgings. Maintenance. W arranty.
Topsoil taken from borrow on site shall be subject to requirements herein. RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 2 Section "Excavation, Filling, Grading" for excavation, filling, rough grading, and subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill. Division 2 Sections Unit Pavers, Hot-Mixed Asphalt Pavement, and Portland Cement Concrete Paving for paving and related work. Division 2 Section Irrigation Systems. Division 2 Section Lawns for lawn and grass planting.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Submit a complete, detailed list of all materials proposed for use in this work, demonstrating complete conformance with the specified requirements, including without limitation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. List of all plant materials, indicating source of supply, characteristics, etc. Fertilizers, related materials. Treatment materials, pesticides, etc. Loam, indicating source, including complete pH and soil analysis for review. Peat. Mulch.
B.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. 2. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established 02950 - 1 PLANTING
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs, and planting materials comply with specified requirements. Certified testing report of a recognized laboratory of loam.
3. 4. C.
Samples of each of the following: 1. 2. 3. 5 lbs of bark mulch, in labeled plastic bags. Edging materials and accessories to verify color selected. Accessory materials, including stake, guy wire, hose, tree wrap, etc.
D.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and address of architects and owners, and other information specified. Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil. Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscaping during an entire year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful landscape establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that landscaping is in progress.
E. F. G.
1.04 A.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the W ork. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated, complying with applicable requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock." All plant materials shall be true to name according to Standardized Plant Names, published by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, 1942 edition. Each plant of bundle shall be tagged with the name and size of plants, in accordance with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen (AAN). In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common names. 1. Substitutions of plant material: refer to Division 1 for procedures and requirements for substitutions. Substitutions of plant species may be made only on demonstration by Contractor to the Architect that the indicated species is not commercially available, within a distance from the Project site where suitable transportation could not reliably deliver healthy plants to the site. Substitutions of plant materials shall only be by similar species, of the same or better characteristics to those specified, to satisfaction of the Architect.
C.
D.
Topsoil Analysis: Furnish a soil analysis made by a qualified independent soil-testing agency stating percentages of organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay, and sand), deleterious material, pH, and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02950 - 2
PLANTING
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Report suitability of topsoil for growth of applicable planting material. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and any limestone, aluminum sulfate, or other soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.
E.
Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip. Observation: Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality, at expense of the Contractor. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING Coordinate and schedule planting of trees and shrubs during normal planting seasons for such work in location of Project. 1. Plant frost-tender trees and shrubs only after danger of frost is past or before frost season to allow establishment before first frost. Do not plant in frozen ground.
F.
1.05 A.
B.
Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. W hen planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
C.
Utilities: determine location of underground utilities, and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. W eather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. Planting may be done whenever weather and soil conditions are favorable, or as otherwise authorized by Architect. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store all products in unopened original manufacturer's packaging. Store all materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect materials from all damage. Deliver freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery. 1. Immediately after digging bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
D.
1.06 A.
B.
C.
Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball. 02950 - 3 PLANTING
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
D.
Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. 2. 3. 4. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for 2 hours if dried out. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. W ater root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
E.
Immediately remove from site all plants which are not true to name, all materials which do not comply with the specified requirements, and all materials that are damaged or found defective at any time. W ARRANTY In addition to the guarantee/warranty requirements of the Contract and General Conditions, the Contractor shall obtain in the name of the Owner the standard manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. These guarantees are in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. Special Warranty: W arrant living trees, shrubs and other plantings for a period of one year after date of Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents which are beyond Contractor's control. At the end of the Guarantee period, a final inspection will be carried out to determine whether any plant material replacements are required. Each plant shall show at least 75% healthy growth, and shall have the natural characteristics of its species, as determined by the Architect. Plants found unacceptable shall be removed promptly from the site and replaced during the normal planting season, until the plants live through one year. During the Guarantee period, remove dead trees and shrubs immediately and re-plant in the succeeding planting season. Replace trees and shrubs that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.
1.07 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL General: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming to ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide wellshaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and 02950 - 4 PLANTING
B.
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts shrubs required. 1. 2. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls, at no increase in contract price. Undersized plants: not more than ten percent (10%) in any one variety or grade may be approved by Architect, provided sufficient plants of same species and grade to make overall average equal to or above that required are furnished. Undersized plants shall be larger than average size of next smaller grade.
C.
Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 1. W here formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.
2.02 A.
SHADE AND FLOW ERING TREES Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. 1. Branching Height: 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height.
B.
Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, and with relationship of caliper, height, and branching recommended by ANSI Z60.1, and stem form as follows: 1. Form: Single stem; Multistem, clump, with 2 or more main stems; or Multistem, shrub, with multiple stems, as indicated in Drawings.
C.
Provide balled and burlapped trees except where bare-root trees are indicated. 1. Container-grown trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped trees subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
2.03 A.
DECIDUOUS SHRUBS Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. Provide balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs except where bare-root deciduous shrubs are indicated. 1. Container-grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
B.
2.04 A.
CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1. Provide balled and burlapped coniferous evergreens. 1. Container-grown coniferous evergreens will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped coniferous evergreens subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock. 02950 - 5 PLANTING
B.
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
2.05 A.
BALLED AND BURLAPPED STOCK Provide trees and shrubs dug with firm, natural ball of earth in which they are grown. Fabricated balls are unacceptable. Ball Size: Not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required, unless otherwise indicated. Increase ball size or modify ratio of depth to diameter to encompass enough fibrous and feeding-root system necessary for full recovery of trees and shrubs. W rap, tie, and rigidly support earth ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for size of balls required. Drum-lace balls with a diameter of 30 inches or greater. CONTAINER-GROW N STOCK Provide healthy, vigorous, well-rooted shrubs or ground cover plants established in container. Provide balled and burlapped stock when required trees or shrubs exceed maximum size recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for container-grown stock. 1. Established container stock is defined as a tree or shrub transplanted into container and grown in container long enough to develop new fibrous roots, so that root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from container.
B.
C.
2.06 A.
B.
Containers: Rigid containers that will hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping. Provide trees and shrubs established in containers of not less than minimum sizes recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of trees and shrubs required. PLANTS Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed. Fast-Growing Vines: Provide vines of species indicated complying with requirements in ANSI Z60.1 as follows: 1. 2. Two-year plants with heavy, well-branched tops, with not less than 3 runners 18 inches450 mm or more in length, and with a vigorous well-developed root system. Provide field-grown vines. Vines grown in pots or other containers of adequate size and acclimated to outside conditions will also be acceptable.
2.07 A.
B.
C.
2.08 A.
LOAM Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, fertile, friable, naturally loamy, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent decayed organic material minimum, free of toxic materials, subsoil, stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, clods, sticks, roots, debris and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth, typical of local cultivated topsoil. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with imported 02950 - 6 PLANTING
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Test existing, amended and proposed imported topsoil for acidity, fertility, and general texture by qualified testing agency. Report findings and recommendations to Architect as required under Submittals article above. Use no topsoil in frozen or muddy condition.
2.
3. 2.09 A.
SOIL AMENDMENTS Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No. 8 sieve and a minimum 95 percent passing a No. 100 sieve. 1. Provide lime in the form of ground dolomitic limestone.
B. C. D.
Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch13-mm sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. 2. 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.
E.
Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. Manure: W ell-rotted, unleached cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. Dehydrated manure (Bovung) is acceptable. Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer. W ater: Potable. Planting Mixture: topsoil thoroughly incorporated with well rotted manure or equivalent, dehydrated manure or bone meal, and peat proportioned 1 c.y. to 7 c.y. topsoil. FERTILIZER Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid. Superphosphate: phosphoric acid. Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available
F.
G. H. I.
2.10 A.
B.
C.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fastand slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 02950 - 7 PLANTING
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
1. 2. 3.
Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight, for plant materials. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency, for topsoil amendment. Deliver mixed as specified in standard sized, unopened containers, showing weight, analysis and manufacturer. Store protected from weather. If bulk spreading is authorized, provide Architect with notarized affidavit certifying analysis and spreading rate.
2.11 A.
MULCH Organic Mulch: Aged shredded pine bark consisting of the outer bark of pine trees, with minimum hardwood bark. Bark shall be thoroughly mixed and aged in stock piles a minimum of six months, partially decomposed, dark brown in color, and generally free of chunks of wood thicker than inch, or other foreign m atter. Aged pine bark containing an excess of fine particles, or bark of other species, will not be acceptable. W EED-CONTROL BARRIERS Sheet Polyethylene: Black, 0.006-inch minimum thickness. Tape: Transparent, 2 inch wide plastic pressure-sensitive adhesive tape manufactured for use with plastic film as produced by 3M. STAKES AND GUYS Deadmen: Galvanized steel rod, 1/2-inch diameter, or galvanized steel pipe, 1-inch pipe size, not less than 30-inches long, driven into firm ground and buried not less than 12-inches below grade. 1. W ood shall not be used for deadmen.
2.12 A. B.
2.13 A.
B.
Guy and Tie W ire: ASTM A 641, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turn buckles, 3inch- long minimum, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage. 1. Fabric tree straps, fabricated for this purpose, may be used instead of hose.
C.
D.
2.14 A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's instructions. Trunk-W rap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4-inchwide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent.
B.
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02950 - 8
PLANTING
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Inspect all areas where planting operations are to be done and the conditions under which the work has to be performed. Report in writing to the Contractor, with copy to the Architect, any conditions which might adversely affect the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. PREPARATION Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's and Landscape Architects acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as may be required. Do not begin planting operations until approval of layout by Landscape Architect is obtained. Notify Architect and Landscape Architect at least one week before beginning planting operations. TOPSOIL Rough grading of subsoil shall be performed under other Sections. Preparation of Topsoil: 1. 2. 3. 3.04 A. Before mixing topsoil, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. For tree pit and trench backfill, mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site.
3.02 A.
B. 3.03 A. B.
EXCAVATION Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to assist drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. Unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2. 3. 4.
Bare-Root Trees and Shrubs: Excavate at least 18 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to allow setting of roots on a layer of planting soil and with collar set at same grade as in nursery, but 1 inch below finish grade, unless otherwise indicated. Balled and Burlapped Trees and Shrubs: Excavate approximately 1-1/2 times as wide as ball diameter and equal to ball depth, plus the indicated 6-inch setting layer depth. Container-Grown Trees and Shrubs: Excavate to container width and depth, plus the Setting Layer: Allow 3 inches of planting soil. W here drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile.
B.
Dispose of subsoil removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1. Remove obstructions to 36-inches minimum below grade, or to 12-inches below bottom of ball 02950 - 9 PLANTING
C.
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts or roots, whichever is greater. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out, before placing setting layer and positioning trees and shrubs. PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 6 inches150 mm. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. 2. Apply approved fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix before spreading. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 8 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil mix.
E.
3.05 A.
3.
4.
B.
Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting. PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent finish grades as indicated. 1. 2. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil mixture of indicated depth. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. W hen pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
C. 3.06 A.
3.
B.
Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent finish grades as indicated. 1. 2. 3. Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. W hen pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
C.
Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 3-inch- high mound around the rim of the pit. Do not cover 02950 - 10 PLANTING
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts top of root ball with backfill. D. W rap trees of 2-inch caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping. PRUNING Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Architect in the field. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice unless otherwise directed. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are size after pruning. GUYING AND STAKING Upright Staking: not permitted. Guying and Staking: Guy and stake trees exceeding 14 feet and more than 3-inch caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. 1. 2. 3. 3.09 A. B. Anchor guys to specified deadmen 48 inches long buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide turn buckles for each guy wire and tighten securely. Attach warning flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade. Paint turn buckles with luminescent-white paint.
3.07 A. B.
3.08 A. B.
MULCHING Mulch backfilled surfaces of plant beds, pits, trenches, and other areas indicated. W eed-Control Barriers: Install the following weed-control barriers according to manufacturer's recommendations, before mulching. Completely cover area to be mulched, lapping edges a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Material and Seam Treatment: continuously taped. Sheet polyethylene with seams lapped 6 inches and
C.
Organic Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of approved pine bark mulch and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems. 1. Thickness: 1 inch minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 A.
INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Apply antidesiccant using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage. 1. W hen deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full-leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again 2 weeks after planting.
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02950 - 11
PLANTING
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.11 A. MAINTENANCE Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until a minimum of thirty days after the completion of all planting operations or Substantial Completion, whichever is later. Maintenance shall consist of all operations and procedures necessary to keep all plants in a healthy, growing condition, and shall include, but is not limited to, watering, weeding, cultivating, re-mulching, tightening and repairing of guys, removal of dead material, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, and maintaining the planting saucer. 1. 2. 3. Plants shall be inspected for watering needs at least twice each week, and watered as necessary to promote plant growth and health. Guys, wires and anchoring cables shall be tightened and repaired weekly. Replace missing or deteriorated warning flags. Planting beds and individual plant pits shall be kept free of weeds, and mulch shall be replaced as required, to maintain the specified layer of mulch. Beds and individual pits shall be neat in appearance and maintained to the designed layout. Plants that die during the maintenance period shall be removed and replaced at once, unless otherwise directed by Architect. Spraying for both insect pests and disease shall be included during the maintenance period as required or directed.
B.
4. 5.
C.
If, during the maintenance period, any decline in condition of any planting is observable, Contractor shall promptly take action to identify potential problems and institute corrective measures. If required, Contractor shall engage professional arborists and/or horticulturalists to inspect plant materials and to identify problems and recommend corrective procedures, which Contractor shall promptly institute. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION During tree and shrub work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Protect trees and shrubs from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.12 A. B.
3.13 A.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02950
02950_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02950 - 12
PLANTING
SECTION 02960 LAWNS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. W ORK INCLUDED This Section includes the preparation, planting, establishment and maintenance of all lawns and grass planting work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein, including without limitation the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.02 A. Providing all topsoil required for work of this Section, including modification of existing topsoil obtained from the site and furnishing additional topsoil as required. Loam borrow. Fine grading and loaming. Seeding and sodding. Replanting unsatisfactory or damaged lawns. Maintenance. Guarantee/warranty.
RELATED W ORK Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this Section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 2 Section "Excavation, Filling and Grading" for excavation, backfilling, compacting and grading requirements, and soil materials. Division 2 Section "Drainage and Utilities" for subsurface drainage. Division 2 Section Irrigation Systems. Division 2 Section "Planting" for tree and shrub planting and transplanting, tree support systems, and soil materials.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Product data for each type of product specified or required for proper completion of this work, including, without limitation, the following: 1. 2. 3. Loam, indicating source, including complete pH and soil analysis for review. Aluminum sulfate. Fertilizers.
B.
Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for sod, identifying sod source, including name and telephone number of supplier.
C.
Certification by product manufacturer that the following products supplied comply with requirements:
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 1
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. Certified testing report of a recognized laboratory of loam. Limestone. Fertilizers. Lawn seed. Sod.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1. Include complete description of seeding method and equipment proposed for the work for approval.
E. F.
Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for lawn planting. Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of lawns during an entire year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful grass establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that lawn planting is in progress.
1.04 A.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the W ork. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING Planting Season: Sow lawn seed during normal planting seasons for type of lawn work required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. W eather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecast weather conditions are suitable for work. Perform lawn installation only after completion of irrigation systems installation in each area. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver and store all products in unopened original manufacturer's packaging. Store all materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect materials from all damage. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.
1.05 A.
B.
C. 1.06 A.
B.
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 2
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.07 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities, irrigation and structures, and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed. Excavation: W hen conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before proceeding.
B.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. SEED Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed Analysts' "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. 1. Seed Mixture: Clean, new crop seed, composed of a mixture of varieties, mixed in proportion by weight, and tested for minimum percentages of purity and germination. Seed shall be of the following varieties, mixed in proportion by weight and testing the minimum percentages of purity and germination. % by Weight 50% 45% 5% Name of Seed "A-34" Kentucky Bluegrass "Penn Lawn" Red Fescue Perennial Rye Grass % Purity 85% 97% 98% % Germination 80% 80% 90%
2.
3.
W eed seed shall not exceed 0.5% by weight. Seed which has become wet, moldy or otherwise damaged will not be acceptable. Submit to Architect manufacturer's certificate of compliance to the Specifications prior to sowing seed. If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above seed mixtures, submit a written request to the Architect stating conditions, and proposed variance. Permission for variance will be given if, in the opinion of the Architect, the variance is warranted.
2.02 A.
SOD Sod: Certified turfgrass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine-cut thickness, size, strength, moisture content, and mowed height, and free of weeds and undesirable native grasses. Provide viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture of the following turfgrass species, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. 1. Species: Provide sod of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed as follows:
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 3
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Sun and Partial Shade: Min. Pct. Germ. 80 85 90 85 Min. Pct. Pure Sd. 85 98 98 92 Max. Pct. W eed Sd. 0.50 0.50 0.50 1.00
Proportion 50 pct. 30 pct. 10 pct. 10 pct.
Name Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis) Chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety) Perennial rye grass (Lolium perenne) Redtop (Agrostis alba)
2.03 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site if determined to conform to requirements. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean on-site and imported topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and debris and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. All topsoil shall also be free of Quackgrass rhizomes, Agropyron repens, and the nut-like tubers of Nutgrass, Cyperus esculentus, and all other primary noxious weeds. Topsoil shall not be delivered or used for planting in frozen or muddy condition. Gradation: Sieve Analysis " " #40 #100 #200 % passing by weight 100 95 60 45 30 -
2.
3. 4.
100 75 60 50
B. Soil Analysis: Refer to Quality Assurance and Submittals articles above. Architect may require retesting at any time of stockpiled material on site or delivered off-site topsoil if material appears to vary from that approved, and to ensure that treatment performed is producing uniform results. 2.04 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone containing no less than 50% total carbonates and 25% total magnesium, with a neutralizing value of at least 100%. 1. 2. 3. The material shall be ground to such a fineness that a minimum of 40% will pass through a No. 100 U.S. Standard Sieve, and 98% will pass through a No. 20 U.S. Standard Sieve. Provide lime in the form of ground dolomitic limestone. Lime shall be uniform in composition, dry and free-flowing, and shall be delivered to the site in manufacturers original, unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturers guaranteed analysis. Any lime which becomes caked or otherwise damaged shall not be used, and shall be removed from the site.
4.
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 4
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. C. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials. D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. E. Peat Humus: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, composed of partially decomposed moss peat (other than sphagnum), peat humus, or reed-sedge peat. F. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
G. Herbicides, Pesticides and Fungicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer. Use only if specifically approved by Architect in each case. H. Compost: W ell-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. a. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.
I. J.
W ater: Potable. If recommended by laboratory analysis to modify on-site topsoil or proposed imported topsoil, provide other types of amendments, such as sulfur or sulfates, agricultural gypsum, peat, etc.
2.05 FERTILIZER A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fastand slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Starter Fertilizer: Manufactured product with pre-emergence weed control, containing active ingredient, Siduron, 3,1%. Analysis: 16-21-3. Composition: a minimum of 75% in form of minimum of 22% shall be water insoluble nitrogen, and 77.5% nitrogen derived from urea and methylene ureas and a minimum of 24.4% from monoammonium phosphate; 21 percent phosphorous, and 3 percent potassium, by weight. General Lawn Fertilizer: complete, standard product complying with State and Federal Fertilizer laws, uniform in composition, dry and free-flowing. Minimum Available Plant Food Composition: 5 percent Nitrogen, 3 percent Phosphorous, and 4 percent potassium, unless otherwise recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 5
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.06 MULCH A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive lawns for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Grading and compaction of subsoil is to be performed under related Division 2 Section. Verify proper grading and substrate conditions before proceeding. 1. Proof-roll all lawn areas to verify proper conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare soil as follows: 1. 2. Remove and dispose of existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not turn over into soil being prepared for lawns. Till surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply required soil amendments and initial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Trim high areas and fill in depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Remove waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
3. 4.
D. Ensure an adequate supply of clean water at all lawn areas before beginning planting. 3.03 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future. B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. C. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. Either mix soil before spreading or apply
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 6
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts soil amendments on surface of spread topsoil and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of topsoil before planting. 1. 2. Provide soil amendments in not less than the quantities recommended by the approved soil analysis and testing agency recommendations. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before tilling, at the rate indicated.
D. Spread planting soil mixture to depth required to meet thickness, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen. 1. 2. Minimum depth of topsoil in all areas shall be 6 inches. Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required. W ork into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture. Mix lime with top 2-inches of dry soil after placement. Apply lime at the following rate per 1,000 square feet of topsoil area, corresponding to the acidity of the soil (pH) shown by the soil chemical analysis: pH 4.5 to 5.0 5.0 to 5.5 5.5 to 6.0 6.0 to 6.8 Over 6.8 Rate (lbs) 50 50 35 20 0
3.
E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. W ater thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting.
G. Grade lawn and grass areas as indicated on the Drawings to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture, sloping for drainage. Roll with 200 lb roller and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension, and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations. H. Apply 16-21-3 starter fertilizer at the rate of 4.4 lbs per 1,000 sf over all topsoil shortly before seeding. 3.04 SEEDING NEW LAWNS A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.
B. Sow seed at rate of 5 to 8 lb per 1000 sq. ft C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes or banks with 3 to 1 slope or greater against erosion by spreading straw mulch after completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 7
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment.
E. Protect seeded areas against hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24 hours after completion of seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 3/16 inch thick and roll to a smooth surface. 3.05 SODDING NEW LAWNS A. Lawn areas indicated to be seeded may be sodded at the option of the Contractor. B. Lay sod within 24 hours of stripping. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen. Sod may be placed from April 15 th to November 1 st as long as the ground is not frozen. C. Before sod is laid, and after all grading is complete, the topsoil shall be irrigated within 12 to 24 hours prior to laying the sod. Sod shall not be laid on soil that is dry and powdery. D. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. W ork sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. 2. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.
E. Saturate sod with fine water spray within 2 hours of planting, or earlier if necessary, to prevent drying. All areas shall be thoroughly irrigated sufficient that the underside of the new sod pad, and topsoil immediately below the sod, are thoroughly wet. During first week, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below the sod. 3.06 RECONDITIONING LAWNS A. Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor's operations, including storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. Also recondition lawn areas where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. 1. Recondition other existing lawn areas as indicated.
B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury into soil. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new topsoil. C. W here substantial lawn remains, mow, de-thatch, core aerate, and rake. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use preemergence herbicides. D. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. E. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a depth of 6 inches.
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 8
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. Apply required soil amendments and initial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Provide new planting soil as required to fill low spots and meet new finish grades.
G. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns. H. At Contractors option, in lieu of seeding and mulching, apply sod as required for new lawns. I. W ater newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass is established.
3.07 SATISFACTORY LAW N A. Seeded lawns will be satisfactory provided requirements, including maintenance, have been met and a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass is established, free of weeds, bare spots exceeding 5 by 5 inches, and surface irregularities. B. Sodded lawns will be satisfactory provided requirements, including maintenance, have been met and healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable lawn is established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. C. Replant lawns that do not meet requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance of lawns immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Lawns: until 90 days after date of Substantial Completion. a. W hen full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if lawn is not fully established at that time, continue maintenance during next planting season. Sodded Lawns: until 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.
2.
B. Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. 1. 2. 3. Replant bare areas with same materials specified for lawns. Add new mulch in areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations sufficiently to nullify its purpose. Anchor as required to prevent displacement. Maintenance shall include providing all temporary fencing, barriers, signs or other devices necessary to prevent persons and vehicles from entering into lawn areas when damage to lawn may result.
C. W atering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawns uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Lay out temporary lawn-watering system and arrange watering schedule to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly seeded areas. W ater lawns daily and at the minimum rate of 1 inch per week. If necessary to establish satisfactory lawns, continuous watering throughout an 8-hour working day may be required.
2. 3.
D. Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified height for principal species planted. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height without cutting
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 9
LAW NS
CLARENDON HILL TOW ERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts more than 40 percent of the grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain following grass height: 1. 2. Initial Mowing: Mow grass to not less than 2-inches high. Subsequent Mowings: Mow grass from 1 to 2 inches high.
E. Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use a complete fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb per 1000 sq. ft. of lawn area.
3.09 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto surface of roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period until lawn is established. 3.10 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. The Architect and Landscape Architect will inspect the lawns upon written request, delivered at least ten (10) days before the date of requested inspection, of the Contractor. B. If the lawns meet requirements for Satisfactory Lawns established herein, and all requirements have been met, Contractors care and maintenance responsibilities will end, provided all other requirements have been satisfied. If the grass stand is not satisfactory, Contractors maintenance responsibility shall continue, including the normal program of mowing, until a satisfactory lawn is achieved. The Contractor shall fertilize the seeded lawns again at no additional cost to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Architect, it is needed in order to achieve an acceptable lawn. END OF SECTION 02960
02960_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW
02960 - 10
LAW NS
SECTION 030130 - MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Removal of deteriorated concrete and reinforcement and subsequent replacement and repair. Floor joint repair. Epoxy crack injection. Corrosion-inhibiting treatment. Polymer sealers.
1.2 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Qualification Data: For installers. 1. For products required to be installed by workers approved by product manufacturers, include letters of acceptance by product manufacturers certifying that installers are approved to apply their products.
C. D.
Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated, signed by manufacturers. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for bonding agents, repair mortars and epoxy adhesives.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Installer that employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to apply corrosion-inhibiting treatments, concrete repair and rebuilding materials, epoxy crack injection materials and polymer sealers. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer that employs factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 A.
BONDING AGENTS Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: Product that consists of waterinsensitive epoxy adhesive, portland cement, and water-based solution of corrosion-inhibiting chemicals that forms a protective film on steel reinforcement.
030130 - 1
MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Corr-Bond. Kaufman Products, Inc; Surepoxy HM EPL. Sika Corporation; Armatec 110 EpoCem. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Sonoprep. Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Bonding and Anti-Corrosion Agent. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Duralprep A.C.
B.
Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type [II] [V].
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Poly-Epoxy Bonding #100. Dayton Superior Corporation; Resi-Bond (J-58). Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco #352 Epoxy System
2.2 A.
REPAIR MORTAR Repair Mortar, General: 1. 2. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use any of the products specified in this Article. Overhead Repair Mortar: For overhead repairs, use repair mortar recommended by manufacturer for overhead use and as specified in this Article. Coarse Aggregate for Adding to Repair Mortar: Washed aggregate complying with ASTM C 33, Size No. 8, Class 5S. Add only as permitted by repair mortar manufacturer.
B.
Cementitious Repair Mortar: Packaged, dry mix complying with ASTM C 928. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cementitious Repair Mortar: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) Kaufman Products, Inc.; Hicap. Sika Corporation; Sikarepair 223. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Deep Pour Mortar. Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Full-Depth Repair Mortar. ThoRoc, Div. of ChemRex; LA Repair Mortar. Jamms Industries: Duraltop Gel. Silpro: Vo Patch. BASF, The Chemical Company: Emaco S88 CI Sika Corp: Sikaquick 2500. Silpro: Fastcrete. Symons: Dot Patch HD Tamms Industries: Duraltop Fastset Or Approved Equal.
b.
Cementitious Repair Mortar, Rapid Setting:
030130 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) CGM, Incorporated; Pro Repair Cement. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco-Speed. Fox Industries, Inc.; FX-928 Rapid Hardening Mortar. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Duracrete. Sika Corporation; Sikaset Roadway Patch. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Road Patch. Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Rapid Repair Mortar. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Speed Crete 2028. Unitex; Patch Set 928. US MIX Products Company; US Spec Transpatch. Watson Bowman Acme Corp., Degussa AG; Wabo Renew 100.
2.3 A. B.
CONCRETE Concrete Materials and Admixtures: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Steel and Fiber Reinforcement and Reinforcement Accessories: Section Cast-in-Place Concrete. Comply with Division 03
C.
Form-Facing Materials: Comply with Division 03 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.4 A.
MIXES Mix products, in clean containers, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3. Add clean silica sand and coarse aggregates to products only as recommended by manufacturer. Do not add water, thinners, or additives unless recommended by manufacturer. When practical, use manufacturer's premeasured packages to ensure that materials are mixed in proper proportions. When premeasured packages are not used, measure ingredients using graduated measuring containers; do not estimate quantities or use shovel or trowel as unit of measure. Do not mix more materials than can be used within recommended open time. Discard materials that have begun to set.
4.
B.
Dry-Pack Mortar: Mix with just enough liquid to form damp cohesive mixture that can be squeezed by hand into a ball but is not plastic. Concrete: Comply with Division 03 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Notify Architect and Structural Engineer seven days in advance of dates when areas of deteriorated or delaminated concrete and deteriorated reinforcing bars will be located. Locate areas of deteriorated or delaminated concrete using hammer or chain drag sounding and mark boundaries. Mark areas for removal by simplifying and squaring off boundaries and
B.
030130 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts as directed by Architect or Structural Engineer. At columns and walls make boundaries level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated. C. Locate at least three reinforcing bars using a pachometer, and drill test holes to determine depth of cover. Calibrate pachometer, using depth of cover measurements, and verify depth of cover in removal areas using pachometer.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Protect people, motor vehicles, equipment, surrounding construction, Project site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from concrete rehabilitation work. 1. 2. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and dispose of by legal means off Owner's property. Dispose of runoff from wet operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.
B. C.
Shoring: Install temporary supports before beginning concrete removal. Concrete Removal: 1. 2. 3. 4. Saw-cut perimeter of areas indicated for removal to a depth of 1/2 inch. Make cuts perpendicular to concrete surfaces and no deeper than cover on reinforcement. Remove deteriorated and delaminated concrete by breaking up and dislodging from reinforcement. Remove additional concrete, if necessary, to provide a depth of removal of at least 1/2 inch over entire removal area. Where half or more of the perimeter of reinforcing bar is exposed, bond between reinforcing bar and surrounding concrete is broken, or reinforcing bar is corroded, remove concrete from entire perimeter of bar and to provide at least a 3/4-inch clearance around bar. Test areas where concrete has been removed by tapping with hammer, and remove additional concrete until unsound and disbonded concrete is completely removed. Provide fractured aggregate surfaces with a profile of at least 1/8 inch that are approximately perpendicular or parallel to original concrete surfaces. At columns and walls, make top and bottom surfaces level, unless otherwise directed. Thoroughly clean removal areas of loose concrete, dust, and debris.
5. 6.
7. D.
Reinforcing Bar Preparation: Remove loose and flaking rust from reinforcing bars by abrasive blast cleaning and/or wire brushing until only tightly bonded light rust remains. 1. Where section loss of reinforcing bar is more than 20 percent, add rebar of equal size. Remove additional concrete as necessary to provide at least 3/4-inch clearance at existing and replacement bars. Splice replacement bars to existing bars according to ACI 318 by lapping, welding, or using mechanical couplings.
E.
Preparation of Floor Joints for Repair: Saw-cut joints full width to edges and depth of spalls, but not less than 3/4 inch deep. Clean out debris and loose concrete; vacuum or blow clear with compressed air.
030130 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.3 A. APPLICATION General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for application of products, including surface preparation. Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: Apply to reinforcing bars by stiff brush or hopper spray according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply to reinforcing bars in two coats, allowing first coat to dry two to three hours before applying second coat. Allow to dry before placing repair mortar or concrete. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Apply to concrete by brush, roller, or spray according to manufacturer's written instructions, leaving no pinholes or other uncoated areas. Apply repair mortar or concrete while epoxy is still tacky. If epoxy dries, recoat before placing repair mortar or concrete. Repair Mortar: Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply as follows: 1. 2. Wet substrate thoroughly and then remove standing water. Scrub a slurry of neat repair mortar into substrate, filling pores and voids. Place repair mortar by troweling toward edges of patch to force intimate contact with edge surfaces. For large patches, fill edges first and then work toward center, always troweling toward edges of patch. At fully exposed reinforcing bars, force repair mortar to fill space behind bars by compacting with trowel from sides of bars. For vertical repair, place material in lifts per manufacturer recommendations. Do not feather edge. For overhead repair, place material in lifts per manufacturer recommendations. Do not feather edge. After each lift is placed, consolidate material and screed surface. Where multiple lifts are used, score surface of lifts to provide a rough surface for application of subsequent lifts. Allow each lift to reach final set before placing subsequent lifts. Allow surfaces of lifts that are to remain exposed to become firm and then finish to a smooth surface with a wood or sponge float. Wet-cure cementitious repair materials, including polymer-modified, cementitious repair materials, for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.
B.
C.
D.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
E.
Dry-Pack Mortar: Use for deep cavities. Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply as follows: 1. 2. 3. Provide forms where necessary to confine patch to required shape. Wet substrate and forms thoroughly and then remove standing water. Place dry-pack mortar into cavity by hand, and compact into place with a hardwood drive stick and mallet or hammer. Do not place more material at a time than can be properly compacted. Continue placing and compacting until patch is approximately level with surrounding surface. After cavity is filled and patch is compacted, trowel surface to match profile and finish of surrounding concrete. A thin coat of repair mortar may be troweled into the surface of patch to help obtain required finish. Wet-cure patch for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.
4.
5.
F.
Concrete: Place according to Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." and as follows:
030130 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Apply epoxy-modified, cementitious bonding and anticorrosion agent to reinforcement. Apply bonding agent to concrete substrate. Use vibrators to consolidate concrete as it is placed. At unformed surfaces, screed concrete to produce a surface that when finished with repair mortar will match required profile and surrounding concrete. Wet-cure concrete for not less than seven days by leaving forms in place or keeping surfaces continuously wet by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover. Fill placement cavities with dry-pack mortar and repair voids with repair mortar. Finish to match surrounding concrete.
3.4 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to sample materials and perform tests as follows: 1. 2. Repair Mortar, Packaged Mixes: Ten randomly selected samples tested according to ASTM C 928. Concrete: As specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
030130 - 6
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION: This section specifies cast-in-place structural concrete and materials and mixes for other concrete required for the encasement of catchbasin walls exposed to traffic in the lower level of the parking garage and foundations for the drop over drain manholes.
1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Materials testing and inspection during construction: Section 03013, MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Concrete roads, walks, and similar exterior site work: Section 02700, SITE IMPROVEMENTS.
1.3 TESTING AGENCY FOR CONCRETE MIX DESIGN: A. Testing agency retained and reimbursed by the Contractor and approved by Resident Engineer. B. Testing agency maintaining Commonwealth of Massachusetts certification for Testing Laboratory and shall furnish equipment and qualified technicians to establish proportions of ingredients for concrete mixes. 1.4 NOT USED
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI 301 Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. 1.6 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit in accordance with Section 01000, SUBMITTALS. B. Samples: 1. Portland cement: 3.5 kg (8 pounds). 2. Fly ash: 2.25 kg (5 pounds). C. Shop Drawings: Reinforcing steel: Complete shop drawings
03300 - 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D. Mill Test Reports: 1. Reinforcing Steel. 2. Cement. E. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. Abrasive aggregate. 2. Lightweight aggregate for structural concrete. 3. Air-entraining admixture. 4. Chemical admixtures, including chloride ion content. 5. Waterproof paper for curing concrete. 6. Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete. 7. Non-shrinking grout. 8. Liquid hardener. 9. Waterstops. 10. Expansion joint filler. 11. Adhesive binder. F. Testing Agency for Concrete Mix Design: Approval request including qualifications of principals and technicians and evidence of certification. Test Report for Concrete Mix
Designs: Trial mixes including water-cement , fly ash, ratio curves, concrete mix ingredients, and admixtures. H. Shoring and Reshoring Sequence: Submit for approval a shoring and reshoring sequence, prepared by a registered Professional Engineer. As a minimum, include timing of form stripping, reshoring, number of floors to be reshored and timing of reshore removal to serve as an initial outline of procedures subject to modification as construction progresses. Submit revisions to sequence, whether initiated by Resident Engineer or Contractor. I. Test reports on splitting tensile strength (Fct) of lightweight concrete. (N.I.C.)
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Conform to ACI 304. Store aggregate separately for each kind or grade, to prevent segregation of sizes and avoid inclusion of dirt and other materials. B. Deliver cement in original sealed containers bearing name of brand and manufacturer, and marked with net weight of contents. Store in suitable watertight building in which floor is raised at least 300 mm (1 foot) above ground.
03300 - 2
C. Deliver other packaged materials for use in concrete in original sealed containers, plainly marked with manufacturer's name and brand, and protect from damage until used. 1.8 PRE-CONCRETE CONFERENCE: A. General: At least 15 days prior to submittal of design mixes, conduct a meeting to review proposed methods of concrete construction to achieve the required results. B. Agenda: Includes but is not limited to: 1. Submittals. 2. Coordination of work. 3. Availability of material. 4. Concrete mix design including admixtures. 5. Methods of placing, finishing, and curing. 6. Finish criteria required to obtain required flatness and levelness. 7. Timing of floor finish measurements. 8. Material inspection and testing. C. Attendees: Include but not limited to representatives of Contractor; subcontractors involved in supplying, conveying, placing, finishing, and curing concrete; lightweight aggregate manufacturer; admixture manufacturers; Resident Engineer; Consulting Engineer; Department of Veterans Affairs retained testing laboratories for concrete testing and finish (F-number) verification. D. Minutes of the meeting: Contractor shall take minutes and type and distribute the minutes to attendees within five days of the meeting. 1.9 MOCK-UP: NOT USED 1.10 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 117-06 .................................. Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 211.1-02 ............................... Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete 211.2-04 ............................... Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete 214R-02 ............................... Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete 301-05 .................................. Structural Concrete
03300 - 3
304R-2000 ........................... Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 305R-06 ............................... Hot Weather Concreting 306R-(2002) ......................... Cold Weather Concreting 308R-(2001) ......................... Standard Practice for Curing Concrete 309R-05 ............................... Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 31808 ................................... Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary 347R-04 ............................... Guide to Formwork for Concrete SP-66-04 .............................. ACI Detailing Manual C. American National Standards Institute and American Hardboard Association (ANSI/AHA): A135.4-2004......................... Basic Hardboard D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A82/A82M-07 ....................... Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement A185/185M-07...................... Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement A615/A615M-08 ................... Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A653/A653M-07 ................... Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process A706/A706M-06 ................... Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A767/A767M-05 ................... Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A775/A775M-07 ................... Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars A820-06................................ Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete A996/A996M-06 ................... Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement C31/C31M-08 ....................... Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field C33-07 ................................. Concrete Aggregates C39/C39M-05 ....................... Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens C94/C94M-07 ....................... Ready-Mixed Concrete
03300 - 4
C143/C143M-05 ................... Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete C150-07 ............................... Portland Cement C171-07 ............................... Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete C172-07 ............................... Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete C173-07... ............................ Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method C192/C192M-07 ................... Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory C231-08 ............................... Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method C260-06 ............................... Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete C309-07 ............................... Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete C330-05 ............................... Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete C494/C494M-08 ................... Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C496-06 ............................... Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens C567-05 ............................... Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete C618-05 ............................... Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete C666/C666M-03 ................... Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing C881/C881M-02 ................... Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete C1107/1107M-07.................. Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink) D6-95(R2006)....................... Loss on Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds D297-93(R2006)................... Rubber Products-Chemical Analysis D1751-04 ............................. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) D4397-02 ............................. Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications E1155-96(R2008)................. Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers E. American Welding Society (AWS):
03300 - 5
D1.4-05 ................................ Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel F. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): Handbook 2008 G. National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP): Report On............................. Concrete Sealers for the Protection of Bridge Structures H. U. S. Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS): PS 1 ..................................... Construction and Industrial Plywood PS 20 ................................... American Softwood Lumber I. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Handbook for Concrete and Cement: CRD C513............................ Rubber Waterstops CRD C572............................ Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.1 FORMS: A. Wood: PS 20 free from loose knots and suitable to facilitate finishing concrete surface specified; tongue and grooved. B. Plywood: PS-1 Exterior Grade B-B (concrete-form) 16 mm (5/8 inch), or 20 mm (3/4 inch) thick for unlined contact form. B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay optional. C. Metal for Concrete Rib-Type Construction: Steel (removal type) of suitable weight and form to provide required rigidity. D. Permanent Steel Form for Concrete Slabs: Corrugated, ASTM A653, Grade E, and Galvanized, ASTM A653, G90. Provide venting where insulating concrete fill is used. E. Corrugated Fiberboard Void Boxes: Double faced, completely impregnated with paraffin and laminated with moisture resistant adhesive, size as shown. Design forms to support not less than 48 kPa (1000 psf) and not lose more than 15 percent of their original strength after being completely submerged in water for 24 hours and then air dried. F. Form Lining: 1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 2 with one (S1S) smooth side) 2. Plywood: Grade B-B Exterior (concrete-form) not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick. 3. Plastic, fiberglass, or elastomeric capable of reproducing the desired pattern or texture. G. Form Ties: Develop a minimum working strength of 13.35 kN (3000 pounds) when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in length to permit tightening of forms and not have any lugs, cones, washers to act as spreader within form, nor leave a hole larger than 20
03300 - 6
mm (3/4 inch) diameter, or a depression in exposed concrete surface, or leave metal closer than 40 mm (1 1/2 inches) to concrete surface. Wire ties not permitted. Cutting ties back from concrete face not permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or II. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F including supplementary optional requirements relating to reactive aggregates and alkalies, and loss on ignition (LOI) not to exceed 5 percent. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33. 1. Size 67 or Size 467 may be used for footings and walls over 300 mm (12 inches) thick. 2. Coarse aggregate for applied topping, encasement of steel columns, and metal pan stair fill shall be Size 7. 3. Maximum size of coarse aggregates not more than one-fifth of narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of depth of slabs, nor three-fourth of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. D. Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete: ASTM C330, Table 1. Maximum size of aggregate not larger than one-fifth of narrowest dimension between forms, nor three-fourth of minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars. Contractor to furnish certified report to verify that aggregate is sound and durable, and has a durability factor of not less than 80 based on 300 cycles of freezing and thawing when tested in accordance with ASTM C666. E. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33. Fine aggregate for applied concrete floor topping shall pass a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, 10 percent maximum shall pass a 150 m (No. 100) sieve. F. Mixing Water: Fresh, clean, and potable. G. Admixtures: 1. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. 2. Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. 3. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.
03300 - 7
4. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. Admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory of at least one year duration using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential measures. 5. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. 6. Microsilica: Use only with prior review and acceptance of the Resident Engineer. Use only in conjunction with high range water reducer. 7. Calcium Nitrite corrosion inhibitor: ASTM C494 Type C. 8. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted. 9. Certification: Written conformance to the requirements above and the chloride ion content of the admixture prior to mix design review. H. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D4397, 0.25 mm (10 mil). I. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, or ASTM A996, deformed, grade as shown.
J. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. K. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706. L. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A767. M. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A775. N. Cold Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A82. O. Reinforcement for Concrete Fireproofing: 100 mm x 100 mm x 3.4 mm diameter (4 x 4W1.4 x W1.4) welded wire fabric, secured in place to hold mesh 20 mm (3/4 inch) away from steel. Mesh at steel columns shall be wired to No. 10 (No. 3) vertical corner steel bars. P. Reinforcement for Metal Pan Stair Fill: 50 mm (2 inch) wire mesh, either hexagonal mesh at .8Kg/m2 (1.5 pounds per square yard), or square mesh at .6Kg/m2 (1.17 pounds per square yard). Q. Supports, Spacers, and Chairs: Types which will hold reinforcement in position shown in accordance with requirements of ACI 318 except as specified. R. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1751. S. Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete: ASTM C171.
03300 - 8
T. Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds for Curing Concrete: ASTM C309, Type I, with fugitive dye. Compound shall be compatible with scheduled surface treatment, such as paint and resilient tile, and shall not discolor concrete surface. U. Abrasive Aggregate: Aluminum oxide grains or emery grits. V. Ommitted . W. Liquid Densifier/Sealer: 100% active colorless aqueous siliconate solution. X. Penetrating Sealer: For use on parking garage ramps and decks. High penetration silane sealer providing minimum 95 percent screening per National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) No. 244 standards for chloride ion penetration resistance. Requires moist (non-membrane) curing of slab. Y. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. ASTM C1107, pre-mixed, produce a compressive strength of at least 18 MPa at three days and 35 MPa (5000 psi) at 28 days. Furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 percent bearing under a 1200 mm x 1200 mm (4 foot by 4 foot) base plate. 2. Where high fluidity or increased placing time is required, furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95 percent under an 450 mm x 900 mm (18 inch by 36 inch) base plate. Z. Adhesive Binder: ASTM C881. 1. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop: CRD C572. 2. Rubber Waterstops: CRD C513. 3. Bentonite Water Stop: Flexible strip of bentonite 25 mm x 20 mm (1 inch by 3/4 inch), weighing 8.7 kg/m (5.85 lbs. per foot) composed of Butyl Rubber Hydrocarbon (ASTM D297), Bentonite (SS-S-210-A) and Volatile Matter (ASTM D6). 4. Porous Backfill: Crushed stone or gravel graded from 25 mm to 20 mm (1 inch to 3/4 inch). 5. Synthetic Fibers: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers for secondary reinforcing of concrete members. Use appropriate length and 0.9 kg/m3 (1.5 lb. per cubic yard). Product shall have a UL rating. 6. Steel Fibers: ASTM A820, Type I cold drawn, high tensile steel wire for use as primary reinforcing in slab-on-grade. Minimum dosage rate 18 kg/m3 (30 lb. per cubic yard).
03300 - 9
7. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two component, 100 percent solids compound, with a minimum shore D hardness of 50. 8. Bonding Admixture: Non-rewettable, polymer modified, bonding compound.
9. Architectural Concrete: For areas designated as architectural concrete on the Contract Documents, use colored cements and specially selected aggregates as necessary to produce a concrete of a color and finish which exactly matches the designated sample panel. 2.3 CONCRETE MIXES: A. Mix Designs: Proportioned in accordance with Section 5.3, "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318. 1. If trial mixes are used, make a set of at least 6 cylinders in accordance with ASTM C192 for test purposes from each trial mix; test three for compressive strength at 7 days and three at 28 days. 2. Submit a report of results of each test series, include a detailed listing of the proportions of trial mix or mixes, including cement, fly ash, admixtures, weight of fine and coarse aggregate per m3 (cubic yard) measured dry rodded and damp loose, specific gravity, fineness modulus, percentage of moisture, air content, water-cement -fly ash ratio, and consistency of each cylinder in terms of slump. include dry unit weight of lightweight structural concrete. 3. Prepare a curve showing relationship between water-cement -fly ash ratio at 7-day and 28-day compressive strengths. Plot each curve using at least three specimens. 4. If the field experience method is used, submit complete standard deviation analysis. B. Fly Ash Testing: Submit certificate verifying conformance with specifications initially with mix design and for each truck load of fly ash delivered from source. Notify Resident Engineer immediately when change in source is anticipated. Prior to beginning trial mixes submit to the Resident Engineer the following representative samples of material to be used, properly identified source and project description and number, type of testing (complete chemical and physical), suitably packaged for shipment, and addressed as specified. Allow 60 calendar days for test results after submittal of sample. 1. Fly ash - 2.25 kg (five pounds). 2. Portland cement - 3.5 kg (8 pounds):
03300 - 10
Address Finegold Alexander & Associates, Inc. 77 North Washington Street Boston, MA 02114 ATTN: Daniel Ricciarelli C. After approval of mixes no substitution in material or change in proportions of approval mixes may be made without additional tests and approval of Resident Engineer or as specified. Making and testing of preliminary test cylinders may be carried on pending approval of cement and fly ash, providing Contractor and manufacturer certify that ingredients used in making test cylinders are the same. Resident Engineer may allow Contractor to proceed with depositing concrete for certain portions of work, pending final approval of cement and fly ash and approval of design mix. D. Cement Factor: Maintain minimum cement factors in Table I regardless of compressive strength developed above minimums. Fly ash may be substituted for up to 20 percent of the minimum cement factor at option of Contractor, except fly ash may not be used in concrete designated as architectural concrete.
03300 - 11
TABLE I - CEMENT AND WATER FACTORS FOR CONCRETE Concrete Strength Min. 28 Day Comp. Str. MPa (psi) 35 (5000)1,3 30 (4000) 25 (3000) 25 (3000)
1,3 1,3 1,2
Non-AirEntrained Max. Water Cement Ratio 0.45 0.55 0.65

*
Air-Entrained Min. Cement kg/m3 (lbs/c. yd) 385 (650) 340 (570) 290 (490) 310 (520) Max. Water Cement Ratio 0.40 0.50 0.55
*
Min. Cement kg/m3 (lbs/c. yd)
375 (630) 325 (550) 280 (470) 300 (500)
1. If trial mixes are used, the proposed mix design shall achieve a compressive strength 8.3 MPa (1200 psi) in excess of f'c. For concrete strengths above 35 Mpa (5000 psi), the proposed mix design shall achieve a compressive strength 9.7 MPa (1400 psi) in excess of fc. 2. Lightweight Structural Concrete. Pump mixes may require higher cement values. 3. For concrete exposed to high sulfate content soils maximum water cement ratio is 0.44. * Determined by Laboratory in accordance with ACI 211.1 for normal concrete or ACI 211.2 for lightweight structural concrete. E. Maximum Slump: Maximum slump, as determined by ASTM C143 with tolerances as established by ASTM C94, for concrete to be vibrated shall be as shown in Table II. TABLE II - MAXIMUM SLUMP, MM (INCHES)* Type of Construction Reinforced Footings and Substructure Walls Slabs, Beams, Reinforced Walls, and Building Columns * Normal Weight Concrete 75mm (3 inches) 100 mm (4 inches) Lightweight Structural Concrete 75 mm (3 inches) 100 mm (4 inches)
Slump may be increased by the use of the approved high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). Tolerances as established by ASTM C94. Concrete
03300 - 12
containing the high-range-water-reducing admixture may have a maximum slump of 225 mm (9 inches). The concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 50 mm to 75 mm (2 inches to 3 inches), and 75 mm to 100 mm (3 inches to 4 inches) for lightweight concrete. This should be verified, and then the high-range-water-reducing admixture added to increase the slump to the approved level. F. Air-Entrainment: Air-entrainment of normal weight concrete shall conform with Table III. Air-entrainment of lightweight structural concrete shall conform with Table IV. Determine air content by either ASTM C173 or ASTM C231. TABLE III - TOTAL AIR CONTENT FOR VARIOUS SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATES (NORMAL CONCRETE) Nominal Maximum Size of Total Air Content 10 mm (3/8 in).6 to 10 20 mm (3/4 in).4 to 8 40 mm (1 1/2 in).3 to 6 TABLE IV AIR CONTENT OF LIGHTWEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Nominal Maximum size of Total Air Content Greater than 10 mm (3/8 in) 4 to 8 Coarse Aggregate, mms (Inches) Percentage by Volume 10 mm (3/8 in) or less 5 to 9 Coarse Aggregate, mm (Inches) Percentage by Volume 13 mm (1/2 in).5 to 9 25 mm (1 in).3-1/2 to 6-1/2
G. High early strength concrete, made with Type III cement or Type I cement plus noncorrosive accelerator, shall have a 7-day compressive strength equal to specified minimum 28-day compressive strength for concrete type specified made with standard Portland cement. H. Lightweight structural concrete shall not weigh more than air-dry unit weight shown. Air-dry unit weight determined on 150 mm by 300 mm (6 inch by 12 inch) test cylinders after seven days standard moist curing followed by 21 days drying at 23 degrees C 1.7 degrees C (73.4 3 degrees Fahrenheit), and 50 (plus or minus 7) percent relative humidity. Use wet unit weight of fresh concrete as basis of control in field. I. Concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 10 degrees C (50 degrees Fahrenheit) use non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Concrete required to be air entrained use
03300 - 13
approved air entraining admixture. Pumped concrete, synthetic fiber concrete, architectural concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water/cement ratio below 0.50 use high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). J. Durability: Use air entrainment for exterior exposed concrete subjected to freezing and thawing and other concrete shown or specified. Air content as shown in Table III or Table IV. K. Enforcing Strength Requirements: Test as specified in Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES, during the progress of the work. Seven-day tests may be used as indicators of 28-day strength. Average of any three 28-day consecutive strength tests of laboratory-cured specimens representing each type of concrete shall be equal to or greater than specified strength. No single test shall be more than 3.5 MPa (500 psi) below specified strength. Interpret field test results in accordance with ACI 214. Should strengths shown by test specimens fall below required values, Resident Engineer may require any one or any combination of the following corrective actions, at no additional cost to the Government: 1. Require changes in mix proportions by selecting one of the other appropriate trial mixes or changing proportions, including cement content, of approved trial mix. 2. Require additional curing and protection. 3. If five consecutive tests fall below 95 percent of minimum values given in Table I or if test results are so low as to raise a question as to the safety of the structure, Resident Engineer may direct Contractor to take cores from portions of the structure. Use results from cores tested by the Contractor retained testing agency to analyze structure. 4. If strength of core drilled specimens falls below 85 percent of minimum value given in Table I, Resident Engineer may order load tests, made by Contractor retained testing agency, on portions of building so affected. Load tests in accordance with ACI 318 and criteria of acceptability of concrete under test as given therein. 5. Concrete work, judged inadequate by structural analysis, by results of load test, or for any reason, shall be reinforced with additional construction or replaced, if directed by the Resident Engineer.
03300 - 14
2.4 BATCHING AND MIXING: A. General: Concrete shall be "Ready-Mixed" and comply with ACI 318 and ASTM C94, except as specified. Batch mixing at the site is permitted. Mixing process and equipment must be approved by Resident Engineer. With each batch of concrete, furnish certified delivery tickets listing information in Paragraph 16.1 and 16.2 of ASTM C94. Maximum delivery temperature of concrete is 380C (100 degrees Fahrenheit). Minimum delivery temperature as follows:
Atmospheric Temperature -1. degrees to 4.4 degrees C (30 degrees to 40 degrees F) -17 degrees C to -1.1 degrees C (0 degrees to 30 degrees F.)
Minimum Concrete Temperature 15.6 degrees C (60 degrees F.)
21 degrees C (70 degrees F.)
1. Services of aggregate manufacturer's representative shall be furnished during the design of trial mixes and as requested by the Resident Engineer for consultation during batching, mixing, and placing operations of lightweight structural concrete. Services will be required until field controls indicate that concrete of required quality is being furnished. Representative shall be thoroughly familiar with the structural lightweight aggregate, adjustment and control of mixes to produce concrete of required quality. Representative shall assist and advise Resident Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK: A. General: Design in accordance with ACI 347 is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall retain a registered Professional Engineer to design the formwork, shores, and reshores. 1. Form boards and plywood forms may be reused for contact surfaces of exposed concrete only if thoroughly cleaned, patched, and repaired and Resident Engineer approves their reuse. 2. Provide forms for concrete footings unless Resident Engineer determines forms are not necessary.
03300 - 15
3. Corrugated fiberboard forms: Place forms on a smooth firm bed, set tight, with no buckled cartons to prevent horizontal displacement, and in a dry condition when concrete is placed. B. Treating and Wetting: Treat or wet contact forms as follows: 1. Coat plywood and board forms with non-staining form sealer. In hot weather, cool forms by wetting with cool water just before concrete is placed. 2. Clean and coat removable metal forms with light form oil before reinforcement is placed. In hot weather, cool metal forms by thoroughly wetting with water just before placing concrete. 3. Use sealer on reused plywood forms as specified for new material. C. Size and Spacing of Studs: Size and space studs, wales and other framing members for wall forms so as not to exceed safe working stress of kind of lumber used nor to develop deflection greater than 1/270 of free span of member. D. Unlined Forms: Use plywood forms to obtain a smooth finish for concrete surfaces. Tightly butt edges of sheets to prevent leakage. Back up all vertical joints solidly and nail edges of adjacent sheets to same stud with 6d box nails spaced not over 150 mm (6 inches) apart. E. Lined Forms: May be used in lieu of unlined plywood forms. Back up form lining solidly with square edge board lumber securely nailed to studs with all edges in close contact to prevent bulging of lining. No joints in lining and backing may coincide. Nail abutted edges of sheets to same backing board. Nail lining at not over 200 mm (8 inches) on center along edges and with at least one nail to each square foot of surface area; nails to be 3d blued shingle or similar nails with thin flatheads. F. Architectural Liner: Attach liner as recommended by the manufacturer with tight joints to prevent leakage. G. Wall Form Ties: Locate wall form ties in symmetrically level horizontal rows at each line of wales and in plumb vertical tiers. Space ties to maintain true, plumb surfaces. Provide one row of ties within 150 mm (6 inches) above each construction joint. Space through-ties adjacent to horizontal and vertical construction joints not over 450 mm (18 inches) on center. 1. Tighten row of ties at bottom of form just before placing concrete and, if necessary, during placing of concrete to prevent seepage of concrete and to obtain a clean line.
03300 - 16
Ties to be entirely removed shall be loosened 24 hours after concrete is placed and shall be pulled from least important face when removed. 2. Coat surfaces of all metal that is to be removed with paraffin, cup grease or a suitable compound to facilitate removal. H. Inserts, Sleeves, and Similar Items: Flashing reglets, steel strips, masonry ties, anchors, wood blocks, nailing strips, grounds, inserts, wire hangers, sleeves, drains, guard angles, forms for floor hinge boxes, inserts or bond blocks for elevator guide rails and supports, and other items specified as furnished under this and other sections of specifications and required to be in their final position at time concrete is placed shall be properly located, accurately positioned, and built into construction, and maintained securely in place. 1. Locate inserts or hanger wires for furred and suspended ceilings only in bottom of concrete joists, or similar concrete member of overhead concrete joist construction. 2. Install sleeves, inserts and similar items for mechanical services in accordance with drawings prepared specially for mechanical services. Contractor is responsible for accuracy and completeness of drawings and shall coordinate requirements for mechanical services and equipment. 3. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists or columns except where shown or permitted by Resident Engineer. Install sleeves in beams, joists, or columns that are not shown, but are permitted by the Resident Engineer, and require no structural changes, at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Minimum clear distance of embedded items such as conduit and pipe is at least three times diameter of conduit or pipe, except at stub-ups and other similar locations. 5. Provide recesses and blockouts in floor slabs for door closers and other hardware as necessary in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Construction Tolerances: 1. Set and maintain concrete formwork to assure erection of completed work within tolerances specified and to accommodate installation of other rough and finish materials. Accomplish remedial work necessary for correcting excessive tolerances. Erected work that exceeds specified tolerance limits shall be remedied or removed and replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner.
03300 - 17
2. Permissible surface irregularities for various classes of materials are defined as "finishes" in specification sections covering individual materials. They are to be distinguished from tolerances specified which are applicable to surface irregularities of structural elements. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT: A. General: Details of concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 315, unless otherwise shown. B. Placing: Place reinforcement conforming to CRSI DA4, unless otherwise shown. 1. Place reinforcing bars accurately and tie securely at intersections and splices with 1.6 mm (16 gauge) black annealed wire. Secure reinforcing bars against displacement during the placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other similar supports. Portions of supports, spacers, and chairs in contact with formwork shall be made of plastic in areas that will be exposed when building is occupied. Type, number, and spacing of supports conform to ACI 315. Where concrete slabs are placed on ground, use concrete blocks or other non-corrodible material of proper height, for support of reinforcement. Use of brick or stone supports will not be permitted. 2. Lap welded wire fabric at least 1 1/2 mesh panels plus end extension of wires not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in structural slabs. Lap welded wire fabric at least 1/2 mesh panels plus end extension of wires not less than 150 mm (6 inches) in slabs on grade. 3. Splice column steel at no points other than at footings and floor levels unless otherwise shown. C. Spacing: Minimum clear distances between parallel bars, except in columns and multiple layers of bars in beams shall be equal to nominal diameter of bars. Minimum clear spacing is 25 mm (1 inch) or 1-1/3 times maximum size of coarse aggregate. D. Splicing: Splices of reinforcement made only as required or shown or specified. Accomplish splicing as follows: 1. Lap splices: Do not use lap splices for bars larger than Number 36 (Number 11). Minimum lengths of lap as shown. 2. Welded splices: Splicing by butt-welding of reinforcement permitted providing the weld develops in tension at least 125 percent of the yield strength (fy) for the bars.
03300 - 18
Welding conform to the requirements of AWS D1.4. Welded reinforcing steel conform to the chemical analysis requirements of AWS D1.4. a. Submit test reports indicating the chemical analysis to establish weldability of reinforcing steel. b. Submit a field quality control procedure to insure proper inspection, materials and welding procedure for welded splices. c. The retained testing agency shall test a minimum of three splices, for compliance, locations selected by Resident Engineer. 3. Mechanical Splices: Develop in tension and compression at least 125 percent of the yield strength (fy) of the bars. Stresses of transition splices between two reinforcing bar sizes based on area of smaller bar. Provide mechanical splices at locations indicated. Use approved exothermic, tapered threaded coupling, or swaged and threaded sleeve. Exposed threads and swaging in the field not permitted. a. Initial qualification: In the presence of Resident Engineer, make three test mechanical splices of each bar size proposed to be spliced. Department of Veterans Affairs retained testing laboratory will perform load test. b. During installation: Furnish, at no additional cost to the Owner, one companion (sister) splice for every 50 splices for load testing. The retained testing laboratory will perform the load test. E. Bending: Bend bars cold, unless otherwise approved. Do not field bend bars partially embedded in concrete, except when approved by Resident Engineer. F. Cleaning: Metal reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, shall be free from loose flaky rust, mud, oil, or similar coatings that will reduce bond. G. Future Bonding: Protect exposed reinforcement bars intended for bonding with future work by wrapping with felt and coating felt with a bituminous compound unless otherwise shown. 3.3 VAPOR BARRIER: A. Except where membrane waterproofing is required, interior concrete slab on grade shall be placed on a continuous vapor barrier. 1. Place 100 mm (4 inches) of fine granular fill over the vapor barrier to act as a blotter for concrete slab. 2. Vapor barrier joints lapped 150 mm (6 inches) and sealed with compatible waterproof pressure-sensitive tape.
03300 - 19
3. Patch punctures and tears. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: A. Unless otherwise shown, location of construction joints to limit individual placement shall not exceed 24,000 mm (80 feet) in any horizontal direction, except slabs on grade which shall have construction joints shown. Allow 48 hours to elapse between pouring adjacent sections unless this requirement is waived by Resident Engineer. B. Locate construction joints in suspended floors near the quarter-point of spans for slabs, beams or girders, unless a beam intersects a girder at center, in which case joint in girder shall be offset a distance equal to twice width of beam. Provide keys and inclined dowels as shown. Provide longitudinal keys as shown. C. Place concrete for columns slowly and in one operation between joints. Install joints in concrete columns at underside of deepest beam or girder framing into column. D. Allow 2 hours to elapse after column is cast before concrete of supported beam, girder or slab is placed. Place girders, beams, grade beams, column capitals, brackets, and haunches at the same time as slab unless otherwise shown. E. Install polyvinyl chloride or rubber water seals, as shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to form continuous watertight seal./ 3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Clean expansion joint surfaces before installing premolded filler and placing adjacent concrete. B. Install polyvinyl chloride or rubber water seals, as shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to form continuous watertight seal. 3.6 PLACING CONCRETE: A. Preparation: 1. Remove hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris from forms. 2. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from interior surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment. 3. Have forms and reinforcement inspected and approved by Resident Engineer before depositing concrete. 4. Provide runways for wheeling equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit. Keep equipment on runways which are not supported by or bear on reinforcement. Provide similar runways for protection of vapor barrier on coarse fill.
03300 - 20
B. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has been set, thoroughly roughen and clean existing surfaces of laitance, foreign matter, and loose particles. 1. Preparing surface for applied topping: a. Remove laitance, mortar, oil, grease, paint, or other foreign material by sand blasting. Clean with vacuum type equipment to remove sand and other loose material. b. Broom clean and keep base slab wet for at least four hours before topping is applied. c. Use a thin coat of one part Portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, bonding admixture; and water at a 50: 50 ratio and mix to achieve the consistency of thick paint. Apply to a damp base slab by scrubbing with a stiff fiber brush. New concrete shall be placed while the bonding grout is still tacky. C. Conveying Concrete: Convey concrete from mixer to final place of deposit by a method which will prevent segregation. Method of conveying concrete subject to approval of Resident Engineer. D. Placing: For special requirements see Paragraphs, HOT WEATHER and COLD WEATHER. 1. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation, or when concrete has attained its initial set, or has contained its water or cement content more than 1 1/2 hours. 2. Deposit concrete in forms as near as practicable in its final position. Prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of placing concrete. 3. Do not drop concrete freely more than 3000 mm (10 feet) for concrete containing the high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) or 1500 mm (5 feet) for conventional concrete. Where greater drops are required, use a tremie or flexible spout (canvas elephant trunk), attached to a suitable hopper. 4. Discharge contents of tremies or flexible spouts in horizontal layers not exceeding 500 mm (20 inches) in thickness, and space tremies such as to provide a minimum of lateral movement of concrete. 5. Continuously place concrete until an entire unit between construction joints is placed. Rate and method of placing concrete shall be such that no concrete between construction joints will be deposited upon or against partly set concrete, after it's
03300 - 21
initial set has taken place, or after 45 minutes of elapsed time during concrete placement. 6. On bottom of members with severe congestion of reinforcement, deposit 25 mm (1 inch) layer of flowing concrete containing the specified high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). Successive concrete lifts may be a continuation of this concrete or concrete with a conventional slump. 7. Concrete on metal deck: a. Concrete on metal deck shall be minimum thickness shown. Allow for deflection of steel beams and metal deck under the weight of wet concrete in calculating concrete quantities for slab. 1) The Contractor shall become familiar with deflection characteristics of structural frame to include proper amount of additional concrete due to beam/deck deflection. E. Consolidation: Conform to ACI 309. Immediately after depositing, spade concrete next to forms, work around reinforcement and into angles of forms, tamp lightly by hand, and compact with mechanical vibrator applied directly into concrete at approximately 450 mm (18 inch) intervals. Mechanical vibrator shall be power driven, hand operated type with minimum frequency of 5000 cycles per minute having an intensity sufficient to cause flow or settlement of concrete into place. Vibrate concrete to produce thorough compaction, complete embedment of reinforcement and concrete of uniform and maximum density without segregation of mix. Do not transport concrete in forms by vibration. 1. Use of form vibration shall be approved only when concrete sections are too thin or too inaccessible for use of internal vibration. 2. Carry on vibration continuously with placing of concrete. Do not insert vibrator into concrete that has begun to set. 3.7 HOT WEATHER: Follow the recommendations of ACI 305 or as specified to prevent problems in the manufacturing, placing, and curing of concrete that can adversely affect the properties and serviceability of the hardened concrete. Methods proposed for cooling materials and arrangements for protecting concrete shall be made in advance of concrete placement and approved by Resident Engineer.
03300 - 22
3.8 COLD WEATHER: Follow the recommendations of ACI 306 or as specified to prevent freezing of concrete and to permit concrete to gain strength properly. Use only the specified non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Do not use calcium chloride, thiocyantes or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. Methods proposed for heating materials and arrangements for protecting concrete shall be made in advance of concrete placement and approved by Resident Engineer. 3.9 PROTECTION AND CURING: A. Conform to ACI 308: Initial curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation. Protect exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying, wash by rain and running water, wind, mechanical injury, and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Keep concrete not covered with membrane or other curing material continuously wet for at least 7 days after placing, except wet curing period for high-early-strength concrete shall be not less than 3 days. Keep wood forms continuously wet to prevent moisture loss until forms are removed. Cure exposed concrete surfaces as described below. Other curing methods may be used if approved by Resident Engineer. 1. Liquid curing and sealing compounds: Apply by power-driven spray or roller in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Apply immediately after finishing. Maximum coverage 10m2/L (400 square feet per gallon) on steel troweled surfaces and 7.5m2/L (300 square feet per gallon) on floated or broomed surfaces for the curing/sealing compound. 2. Plastic sheets: Apply as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage. Utilize widest practical width sheet and overlap adjacent sheets 50 mm (2 inches). Tightly seal joints with tape. 3. Paper: Utilize widest practical width paper and overlap adjacent sheets 50 mm (2 inches). Tightly seal joints with sand, wood planks, pressure-sensitive tape, mastic or glue. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS: A. Remove in a manner to assure complete safety of structure after the following conditions have been met. 1. Where structure as a whole is supported on shores, forms for beams and girder sides, columns, and similar vertical structural members may be removed after 24
03300 - 23
hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage and curing is continued without any lapse in time as specified for exposed surfaces. 2. Take particular care in removing forms of architectural exposed concrete to insure surfaces are not marred or gouged, and that corners and arises are true, sharp and unbroken. B. Control Test: Use to determine if the concrete has attained sufficient strength and curing to permit removal of supporting forms. Cylinders required for control tests taken in accordance with ASTM C172, molded in accordance with ASTM C31, and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. Control cylinders cured and protected in the same manner as the structure they represent. Supporting forms or shoring not removed until strength of control test cylinders have attained at least 70 percent of minimum 28-day compressive strength specified. C. Reshoring: Reshoring is required if superimposed load plus dead load of the floor exceeds the capacity of the floor at the time of loading. In addition, for flat slab/plate, reshoring is required immediately after stripping operations are complete and not later than the end of the same day. Reshoring accomplished in accordance with ACI 347 at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Metal Removal: Unnecessary metal items cut back flush with face of concrete members. B. Patching: Maintain curing and start patching as soon as forms are removed. Do not apply curing compounds to concrete surfaces requiring patching until patching is completed. Use cement mortar for patching of same composition as that used in concrete. Use white or gray Portland cement as necessary to obtain finish color matching surrounding concrete. Thoroughly clean areas to be patched. Cut out honeycombed or otherwise defective areas to solid concrete to a depth of not less than 25 mm (1 inch). Cut edge perpendicular to surface of concrete. Saturate with water area to be patched, and at least 150 mm (6 inches) surrounding before placing patching mortar. Give area to be patched a brush coat of cement grout followed immediately by patching mortar. Cement grout composed of one part Portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, bonding admixture, and water at a 50:50 ratio, mix to achieve consistency of thick paint. Mix patching mortar approximately 1 hour before placing and remix occasionally during this period without addition of water. Compact mortar into place and screed slightly higher than surrounding surface. After initial shrinkage has occurred, finish to
03300 - 24
match color and texture of adjoining surfaces. Cure patches as specified for other concrete. Fill form tie holes which extend entirely through walls from unexposed face by means of a pressure gun or other suitable device to force mortar through wall. Wipe excess mortar off exposed face with a cloth. C. Upon removal of forms, clean vertical concrete surface that is to receive bonded applied cementitious application with wire brushes or by sand blasting to remove unset material, laitance, and loose particles to expose aggregates to provide a clean, firm, granular surface for bond of applied finish.
3.12 CONCRETE FINISHES: A. Vertical and Overhead Surface Finishes: 1. Unfinished areas: Vertical and overhead concrete surfaces exposed in pipe basements, elevator and dumbwaiter shafts, pipe spaces, pipe trenches, above suspended ceilings, manholes, and other unfinished areas will not require additional finishing. 2. Interior and exterior exposed areas to be painted: Remove fins, burrs and similar projections on surfaces flush, and smooth by mechanical means approved by Resident Engineer, and by rubbing lightly with a fine abrasive stone or hone. Use ample water during rubbing without working up a lather of mortar or changing texture of concrete. 3. Interior and exterior exposed areas finished: Give a grout finish of uniform color and smooth finish treated as follows: a. After concrete has hardened and laitance, fins and burrs removed, scrub concrete with wire brushes. Clean stained concrete surfaces by use of a hone stone. b. Apply grout composed of one part of Portland cement, one part fine sand, smaller than a 600 m (No. 30) sieve. Work grout into surface of concrete with cork floats or fiber brushes until all pits, and honeycombs are filled. c. After grout has hardened slightly, but while still plastic, scrape grout off with a sponge rubber float and, about 1 hour later, rub concrete vigorously with burlap to remove any excess grout remaining on surfaces.
03300 - 25
d. In hot, dry weather use a fog spray to keep grout wet during setting period. Complete finish of area in same day. Make limits of finished areas at natural breaks in wall surface. Leave no grout on concrete surface overnight. 4. Textured: Finish as specified. Maximum quantity of patched area 0.2 m2 (2 square feet) in each 93 m2 (1000 square feet) of textured surface.
B. Slab Finishes: 1. Monitoring and Adjustment: Provide continuous cycle of placement, measurement, evaluation and adjustment of procedures to produce slabs within specified tolerances. Monitor elevations of structural steel in key locations before and after concrete placement to establish typical deflection patterns for the structural steel. Determine elevations of cast-in-place slab soffits prior to removal of shores. Provide information to Resident Engineer and floor consultant for evaluation and recommendations for subsequent placements. 2. Place slabs monolithically. Once slab placement commences, complete finishing operations within same day. Slope finished slab to drains where they occur, whether shown or not. 3. Omitted 4. Use straightedges specifically made for screeding, such as hollow magnesium straightedges or power strike-offs. Do not use pieces of dimensioned lumber. Strike off and screed slab to a true surface at required elevations. Use optical or laser instruments to check concrete finished surface grade after strike-off. Repeat strikeoff as necessary. Complete screeding before any excess moisture or bleeding water is present on surface. Do not sprinkle dry cement on the surface. 5. Immediately following screeding, and before any bleed water appears, use a 3000 mm (10 foot) wide highway straightedge in a cutting and filling operation to achieve surface flatness. Do not use bull floats or darbys, except that darbying may be allowed for narrow slabs and restricted spaces. 6. Wait until water sheen disappears and surface stiffens before proceeding further. Do not perform subsequent operations until concrete will sustain foot pressure with maximum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) indentation. 7. Scratch Finish: Finish base slab to receive a bonded applied cementitious application as indicated above, except that bull floats and darbys may be used.
03300 - 26
Thoroughly coarse wire broom within two hours after placing to roughen slab surface to insure a permanent bond between base slab and applied materials. 8. Float Finish: Slabs to receive unbonded toppings, steel trowel finish, fill, mortar setting beds, or a built-up roof, and ramps, stair treads, platforms (interior and exterior), and equipment pads shall be floated to a smooth, dense uniform, sandy textured finish. During floating, while surface is still soft, check surface for flatness using a 3000 mm (10 foot) highway straightedge. Correct high spots by cutting down and correct low spots by filling in with material of same composition as floor finish. Remove any surface projections and re-float to a uniform texture. 9. Steel Trowel Finish: Concrete surfaces to receive resilient floor covering or carpet, monolithic floor slabs to be exposed to view in finished work, future floor roof slabs, applied toppings, and other interior surfaces for which no other finish is indicated. Steel trowel immediately following floating. During final troweling, tilt steel trowel at a slight angle and exert heavy pressure to compact cement paste and form a dense, smooth surface. Finished surface shall be smooth, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. 10. Broom Finish: Finish exterior slabs, ramps, and stair treads with a bristle brush moistened with clear water after surfaces have been floated. Brush in a direction transverse to main traffic. Match texture approved by Resident Engineer from sample panel. 11. Finished slab flatness (FF) and levelness (FL) values comply with the following minimum requirements: a. Areas covered with carpeting, or not specified otherwise in b. below: Slab on Grade: Specified overall value Minimum local value FF 25/FL 20 FF 17/FL 15 FF 25/FL 20 FF 17/FL 15
Level suspended slabs (shored until after testing) and topping slabs: Specified overall value Minimum local value Unshored suspended slabs: Specified overall value Minimum local value FF 17 FF 25
03300 - 27
Level tolerance such that 80 percent of all points fall within a 20 mm (3/4 inch) envelope +10 mm, -10 mm (+3/8 inch, -3/8 inch) from the design elevation. b. Areas that will be exposed, receive thin-set tile or resilient flooring, or roof areas designed as future floors: Slab on grade: Specified overall value Minimum local value FF 36/FL 20 FF 24/FL 15
Level suspended slabs (shored until after testing) and topping slabs Specified overall value Minimum local value Unshored suspended slabs: Specified overall value Minimum local value FF 24 FF 30 FF 30/FL 20 FF 24/FL 15
Level tolerance such that 80 percent of all points fall within a 20 mm (3/4 inch) envelope +10 mm, -10 mm (+3/8 inch, -3/8 inch) from the design elevation. c. "Specified overall value" is based on the composite of all measured values in a placement derived in accordance with ASTM E1155. d. "Minimum local value" (MLV) describes the flatness or levelness below which repair or replacement is required. MLV is based on the results of an individual placement and applies to a minimum local area. Minimum local area boundaries may not cross a construction joint or expansion joint. A minimum local area will be bounded by construction and/or control joints, or by column lines and/or halfcolumn lines, whichever is smaller. 12. Measurements a. The Contractor retained testing laboratory will take measurements as directed by Resident Engineer, to verify compliance with FF, FL, and other finish requirements. Measurements will occur within 72 hours after completion of concrete placement (weekends and holidays excluded). Make measurements before shores or forms are removed to insure the "as-built" levelness is accurately assessed. Profile data for above characteristics may be collected using a laser level or any Type II apparatus (ASTM E1155, "profileograph" or "dipstick"). Contractor's surveyor shall establish reference elevations to be used by Department of Veterans Affairs retained testing laboratory.
03300 - 28
b. Contractor not experienced in using FF and FL criteria is encouraged to retain the services of a floor consultant to assist with recommendations concerning adjustments to slab thicknesses, finishing techniques, and procedures on measurements of the finish as it progresses in order to achieve the specific flatness and levelness numbers. 13. Acceptance/ Rejection: a. If individual slab section measures less than either of specified minimum local FF/FL numbers, that section shall be rejected and remedial measures shall be required. Sectional boundaries may be set at construction and contraction (control) joints, and not smaller than one-half bay. b. If composite value of entire slab installation, combination of all local results, measures less than either of specified overall FF/FL numbers, then whole slab shall be rejected and remedial measures shall be required. 14. Remedial Measures for Rejected Slabs: Correct rejected slab areas by grinding, planing, surface repair with underlayment compound or repair topping, retopping, or removal and replacement of entire rejected slab areas, as directed by Resident Engineer, until a slab finish constructed within specified tolerances is accepted. 3.13 SURFACE TREATMENTS: A. surfaces of exterior concrete ramps and platforms. Trowel concrete surface to smooth dense finish and then apply broom finish. 3.14 APPLIED TOPPING: B. Placing: Place continuously until entire section is complete, struck off with straightedge, leveled with a highway straightedge or highway bull float, floated and troweled by machine to a hard dense finish. Slope to floor drains as required. Do not start floating until free water has disappeared and no water sheen is visible. Allow drying of surface moisture naturally. Do not hasten by "dusting" with cement or sand. 3.15 RESURFACING FLOORS: OMITTED
3.16 RETAINING WALLS: A. Use air-entrained concrete. B. Expansion and contraction joints, waterstops, weep holes, reinforcement and railing sleeves installed and constructed as shown.
03300 - 29
C. Exposed surfaces finished to match adjacent concrete surfaces, new or existing. D. Place porous backfill as shown. 3.17 PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS: Precast concrete items, not specified elsewhere. Cast using 25 MPa (3000 psi) air-entrained concrete to shapes and dimensions shown. Finish to match corresponding adjacent concrete surfaces. Reinforce with steel for safe handling and erection. ---END---
03300 - 30
SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. 2. Architectural precast concrete units with surfaces that are smooth with appearance and surface texture of limestone. Connection and anchorage devices.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 07900, JOINT SEALERS; Sealant for joints in precast units.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 318 Building Code Concrete Requirements for Reinforced
347 2.
Concrete Formwork
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Code Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 36 A 82 Structural Steel Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
03450 - 1
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts A 123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware Welded Steel Reinforcement Wire Fabric for Concrete
A 153 A 185
A 239
Locating the Thinnest Spot in a Zinc (Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulfate Dip) Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars Carbon Steel Fasteners Externally Threaded Standard
A 283
A 307
A 569
Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Reinforcement Concrete Aggregates Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Natural Building Stone Portland Cement Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete Chemical Admixtures for Concrete Bars for Concrete
A 615
A 767
C 33 C 39
C 97
C 150 C 260 C 494 4.
Portland Cement Association (PCA): Ref. 1 Forms for Architectural Concrete
5.
Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI): MNL-117 Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products
03450 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts MNL-122 1.04 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication and erection of all parts of the work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections, lifting devices, and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by others and embedded in other construction. Provide information on erection sequence with plans coded to numbered precast units. Calculations: Provide professionally prepared calculations and certification of the performance of this work. Show how design load requirements and other performance criteria have been satisfied. Initial Selection Samples: Submit individual cube samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each precast color and texture required for the Project. Verification Samples: After approval of cube samples, submit minimum 12 in. x 12 in. samples of each finish that is to be exposed in the finished work, showing full range of color and finish variations expected. Test Reports: Submit certified reports for tests performed and required. TESTING AND INSPECTION Testing by Independent Agency: Materials and workmanship furnished under this Section are subject to inspection and testing in plant and field by Architect and an independent testing agency, approved by Architect, selected and paid for by Owner. Such inspection and testing shall not relieve Precaster of responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. The Architect retains the right to inspect placing of concrete; to make slump tests of concrete; and to test concrete cylinder samples for compressive strength. Architect will review materials proposed for use by Precaster, and he may, to extent deemed advisable, inspect batching operations at plant from time to time. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide pecast concrete work conforming to ACI 318, Chapter 16, and PCI MNL-122. Plant quality control program shall comply with PCI MNL-117. Inspection: Permit the Architect or his authorized representative to conduct unlimited inspections at the precast plant and the site. The Architect or his authorized representative reserves the right to inspect precast units at the plant before shipping, upon delivery to the site, and during and after erection. Precast units may be rejected at any time, even if previously inspected and approved. Architectural Precast Concrete
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. 1.05 A.
B.
1.06 A.
B.
03450 - 3
C.
Engineering and Design: Provide the services of a Professional Engineer, registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, to design, engineer, and certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the requirements specified in this section. The engineer shall assume professional responsibility for precast and connection design and safety. Design decisions and modifications which affect visual characteristics shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver, store and handle precast in strict compliance with fabricator's instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Protect from all possible damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Design: Engineer and design architectural precast concrete units to withstand stresses induced by wind loads, live loads, dead loads, temperature, shrinkage, fabrication, handling and erection in accordance with applicable codes. Furnish engineer's certificate stating that precast design meets or exceeds requirements of Contract Documents. 1. Design Wind Load: at corner zones. Positive and negative pressure of 25 psf at typical areas; 35 psf
1.07 A.
B. 1.08 A.
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS Formwork, General: Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 347, and with PCA Ref. 1. Provide form facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or other acceptable material that is non-reactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces. Form Coating: Provide non-staining form release agent that will not interfere with adhesion of sealants, glazing compound, insulation adhesives or applied finishes. Do not use castor oil or form release agents containing castor oil or retardants. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767, Class II, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending. Test galvanized reinforcing for uniformity of coating by a ten (10) cycle Preece test conforming to ASTM A 239. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. Reinforcing Supports: Provide reinforcing supports, including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for fastening, spacing, and supporting reinforcing. Concrete Materials: Provide normal weight, 28 day 5,000 psi minimum compressive strength concrete with 4% to 6% total air content. Provide concrete materials as follows:
B.
C.
D. E. F.
G.
03450 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. Use only one brand, type, color, and source of cement throughout the Project. Cement Color: Provide white Portland Cement for facing concrete mix if required to match Architect's sample. Water: Clean, clear, potable and free from deleterious chemicals and substances. Course Aggregate: ASTM C 33, specially selected for color, supplied from a single source for entire Project. Provide aggregate washed, clean, hard and durable, inert, material, free of staining or deleterious material. Provide aggregate color as required to match Architect's sample. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33 manufactured sand of same material as course aggregate, unless approved otherwise by Architect. Provide aggregate color as required to match Architect's sample. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260, manufacturer and product as Approved by Architect. Water Reducing Admixture: Approved by Architect. ASTM C 494, Type A, manufacturer and product as
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Connection and Erection Materials: Provide ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 283 steel shapes and plate. Provide ASTM A 569 and A 307 bolts as indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Hot dip galvanize all connection and erection materials after fabrication in compliance with ASTM A 123 and A 153. Provide minimum 1.5 oz./ft2 zinc coating.
J. K.
Stainless Steel Dowels and Shapes: AISI Type 302/304. Slotted Inserts: Heavy malleable iron inserts with a depth of not less than 2-1/2 in. and a length of 4-1/2 in., with 3/4 in. steel nuts, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. Threaded Inserts: Malleable iron, with 3/4 in. sound standard threaded steel bolts, unless otherwise shown on Drawings, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. Lifting Devices: Design and place lifting devices so as not to weaken unit during manufacture and handling. Anchors: Design and place anchors to permit proper installation without forcing. Do not induce or superimpose any undue loads or stresses onto other work. Design anchors to allow for leveling, plumbing and positioning of precast units to accepted tolerances in structural steel as defined by AISC Code. Plastic Washers and Shims: Multipolymer plastic material with a minimum compressive strength of 8,000 psi, equal to Korolath, manufactured by the Koro Corporation, or approved equal. Neoprene Bearing Pads: 70 durometer hardness. 03450 - 5 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
2.02 A.
CONCRETE MIX Submit proposed concrete mix proportions to Architect for approval prior to fabrication. Show batch weights, gradations, specific gravity, absorption of aggregates, slump, fresh unit weight and air content. Verify mix design and provide four compression tests, two at 7days, and two at 28 days, on 6 in. diameter x 12 in. high cylinders filled with proposed mix materials in proposed proportions. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each type of concrete required, complying with ACI 318. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test result, or other circumstances warrant. Admixtures: Use admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust admixture quantities as required to maintain quality control. FABRICATION General: Design and fabricate precast concrete units to comply with manufacturing and testing procedures, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances of PCI MNL-117, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate units straight, smooth, and true to size and shape, with exposed edges and corners precise and square unless otherwise indicated. Built-In Items: Provide reglets, slots, holes, embeds, anchors, and other accessories in units to receive windows, cramps, dowels, reglets, waterstops, flashings, light fixtures and other similar work as indicated. Provide all necessary cast in embeds and anchors. Anchorages: Provide loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other miscellaneous steel shapes not provided by other trades, necessary for securing precast units to supporting and adjacent members. 1. Design and provide items to be embedded in and attached to other work. Design and engineer support systems to support precast units.
B.
C.
D.
2.03 A.
C.
D.
E.
Repairs: Surface defects may be repaired when acceptable to the Architect and when indistinguishable in finish, color, texture and quality from acceptable unrepaired surfaces. Demonstrate repair techniques, including curing; obtain Architect's approval of repair results before continuing work. Replace units that cannot be repaired as directed. 1. Determine repair mix formulas by trial to obtain finish, color, and texture match when both repaired and acceptable unrepaired concrete are cured and dry. Fill holes, if any, using the same source of cement, sand, and pigment used in the parent concrete.
03450 - 6
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3. Moist cure repaired units for 7 days. Keep units continually damp by covering with damp flannel and polyethylene. Do not wash out repair mortar.
F.
Pre-delivery Cleaning: Clean objectionable stains or spots off units as directed by the Architect using brushes, soap and clean, running water before delivery to site. Acid cleaning is not acceptable unless approved by Architect. Identification: Mark each unit on a surface concealed from view in final installation with a non-staining, non-migrating paint. Coordinate marking with approved erection drawings. FINISH Smooth Surface Texture: Where smooth surface is indicated, provide mechanical or chemical light etching to create a fine surface texture similar to limestone. Obtain Architect's approval and match approved samples and mock-ups. EXECUTION INSPECTION The Installer/Erector shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of installation means Installer accepts substrates and conditions. INSTALLATION General: Deliver anchorage items which are to be embedded in other construction before start of such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions as required for installation. Do not install precast units until concrete has attained its design compressive strength. Install precast concrete members plumb, level, and in alignment within PCI MNL-117 specified limits of erection tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment as members are permanently connected. Accessories: Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for erection of precast units to supporting members and back-up materials. Anchor units in final position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise designed. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring is completed. 1. At bolted connections use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts. At welded connections apply rust inhibitive coating on damaged areas, same as shop applied material. Use galvanizing repair coating on galvanized surfaces. All connections shall be concealed within building finishes.
G.
2.04 A.
PART 3 3.01 A.
3.02 A.
B. C.
D.
E.
2.
3.
03450 - 7
F.
Cleaning: Clean exposed facings to remove dirt and stains which may be on units after erection and completion of joint treatments. Wash and rinse in accordance with precast manufacturer's recommendations. Protect other work from damage due to cleaning operations. Do not use cleaning materials or processes which could change the character of exposed concrete finishes.
END OF SECTION
03450 - 8
SECTION 04420 STONE PANELS PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Summary A. Section Includes: Natural Stone Honeycomb Reinforced Wall Cladding System(s) / Stone Panels, Inc. / including installation anchors and accessories. 1. Stone Panels Inc. system(s) StoneLite honeycomb reinforced natural stone wall cladding
a. Exterior Natural Stone Honeycomb Reinforced Wall Cladding System 1 nominal total thickness dimension b. Interior Natural Stone Honeycomb Reinforced Wall Cladding System 5/8 nominal total thickness dimension. 2. Stone Sills: Granite sills at locations indicated. 1.02 A. B. C. D. 1.03 A. References (Industry Standards) ASTM E 283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration AAMA 501.1 Test Method for Dynamic Water Penetration ASTM E-84 Test Method for Measuring Flame Spread System Description Panel System Performance Requirements: 1. Accelerated Aging by Acid Freeze Thaw by Wiss, Janney, Elstner Assoc. Test Method: Flexural strength loss not to exceed 20% following 100 cycles + 170 (F) to -10(F) while immersed in 4-pH sulfuric acid solution. 2. Large Missile Impact in accordance with Dade County Protocol PA 201-94: Resists large missile impact when fired at 50 ft. per second. 3. Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading in accordance with Dade County Protocol PA 203-94: Resist 1342 repetitions of positive negative 90 psf design wind pressure. 4. ASTM E-84 Flame Spread: 5 maximum smoke development: 5 maximum. Fuel contributed: 0. 5. Toxicity evaluation according to the University of Pittsburgh test method: No more toxic than Douglas fir wood. 6. ASTM D-2015 Potential heat of combustion: 1150 BTU/lb. Maximum. 7. UBC 17-6 Multi Story fire evaluation: Meet acceptance criteria. 8. Modified ASTM E-108 Fire evaluation: Resist 30 minute fire exposure. 9. Flat wise tension bond capacity: 385 psi following accelerated aging by rapid temperature cycling from -40 degrees (F) to +160 degrees (F). 04420 - 1 STONE PANELS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 10. Flat wise tension bond tests following ASTM C-67, section 8 freeze thaw: 290 psi flat wise tension bond following 100 cycles freeze thaw consisting of 20 hours freezing at 0 degrees (F) and 4 hours thawing in water at 75 degrees (F). 11. ASTM E-72 Transverse load test: Average 215 lbs. per sq. ft. uniform load on 35.5 inch simple span causing 0.49 inch deflection average. 12. Racking shear load tests: No disengagement or major damage following application of 4,000 lb. load and 0.05 to 1.5 deflection on an 8 ft x 8ft specimen. 13. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air 2 infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf. 14. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 10 psf as defined in AAMA 501. 1.04 A. SUBMITTALS General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit shop drawings, samples, and product data in accordance with Division 1. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit independent laboratory certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics. 2. Building Authority Acceptance: Submit documentation confirming Building Code Authority Acceptance. 1.05 A. B. WARRANTY Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. Manufacturers Product Warranty: Submit, for Owners acceptance, manufacturers warranty as follows: 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from Date of Substantial Completion that the panel will be free from defects in lamination or separation of panel components. 1.06 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years demonstrated capability to produce reinforced stone veneer panels of the quality and scope required. Manufacturer shall have completed independent laboratory tests verifying performance capabilities and shall be able to furnish a list of references and previous projects of similar size and scope. Manufacturer must have acceptance by the appropriate building code authority with established ongoing building authority quality control. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing detailed shop drawings, field service representation during construction, and approval of acceptable installers and approval of application method. 2. Installer Qualifications: Installer to demonstrate experience (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section and who has specialized in the installation of 04420 - 2 STONE PANELS
B.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts work similar to that required for this project and is deemed acceptable to product manufacturer. B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturers installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Ordering: Comply with manufacturers ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after installation. PRODUCTS GRANITE SILLS
1.07 A.
B.
C.
PART 2 2.01
A.
Granite for Sills: Granite shall be equal to Milford Hopkington Pink, or equal as approved by Architect; profile and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 1. Use only one type of granite for sills throughout the entire project. 2. Finish: Honed Finish.
B.
Granite Sill Anchors: Units fabricated with tabs or dowels designed to engage kerfs or holes in stone trim units and holes for fasteners or postinstalled anchor bolts for fastening to substrates or framing as required. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
B.
2.02 A.
Materials: Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. Fabricate dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.
STONE PANEL MATERIALS Acceptable Manufacturers: Stone Panels, Inc. 1. Address: 100 S. Royal Lane, Coppell, TX 75019 2. Telephone: 800-328 6275 / Fax: 800-752 0783 3. Product: StoneLite: color of stone as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard choices.
04420 - 3
STONE PANELS
B.
Natural Stone Honeycomb Reinforced Wall Cladding System: 1. Material Standard: Natural stone bonded to lightweight (aircraft quality) aluminum honeycomb having epoxy impregnated glass cloth skins. 2. Facing: 3/16 in. (4.8mm) +- 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) natural stone. 3. Reinforcing: in. (19mm) or 3/8 in. (10mm) aluminum honeycomb bonded by high strength epoxy impregnated reinforced glass cloth.
C.
Connection and anchorage hardware, including interlocking channels, anchor plates, Zsections, angle clips and threaded inserts. RELATED MATERIALS Sealants: Sealant materials specified in Section 07920, JOINT SEALANTS shall be tested for compatibility with the natural stone honeycomb reinforced wall cladding specified. FABRICATION General: Fabricate components on the structure intended to receive panels per manufacturers installation instructions and with minimum clearances and shim spacing. EXECUTION EXAMINATION Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Verify modules are sized to receive natural stone honeycomb reinforced wall cladding system in accordance with manufacturers acceptable tolerances. 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication. Confirm recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
2.03 A.
2.04 A. PART 3 3.01 A.
3.02 A.
INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE SILLS Anchor stone masonry to back-up with screw-attached veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Space anchors to provide not less than 1 anchor per 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (300 mm) of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm).
B.
C.
04420 - 4
STONE PANELS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.03 A. STONE PANEL INSTALLATION General: Install lightweight honeycomb reinforced natural stone panel systems plumb, level and true to line, with manufacturers prescribed tolerances and installation instructions. Provide supports and anchor in place. 1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points. 2. Weather Tight Construction: Refer to installation instructions & consult sealant manufacture for project specific application. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of construction. 3.04 A. PROTECTION AND CLEANING Protection: Protect installed products finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect stone facing from damage from harmful contaminants. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturers instructions prior to owners acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. END OF SECTION
B.
04420 - 5
STONE PANELS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Structural steel & shelf angles attached to structural steel. Architecturally exposed structural steel. Prefabricated building columns. Grout.
RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: 1. 2. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. Division 9 painting Sections and Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for surface preparation and priming requirements.
4.
1.2 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, and Part 9 AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4 Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections.
2.
1.3 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. 2. 3. 4. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Include embedment drawings. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
05120 - 1
STRUCTURAL STEEL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed and prepared by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. D. E.
Welding certificates. Mill test reports. Source quality-control test reports.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Martins Construction Company, Danvers, MA.
B.
C.
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. 2. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
1.6 A.
COORDINATION Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS All steel shall be galvanized A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992 (Fy = 50 ksi min.)
05120 - 2
STRUCTURAL STEEL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. C. D. E. F. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A36. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36 Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B structural tubing. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS a. A. Finish: Plain
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A490, tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A563heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F1852, Type 1, heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain.
B.
C.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configuration: Hooked (min. 3 return) Nuts: ASTM A 563 [heavy ]hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain
D.
2.3 A.
PRIMER Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.
2.4 A.
GROUT Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 1. Grout manufacturer to provide field assistance to Contractor
05120 - 3
STRUCTURAL STEEL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.5 A. FABRICATION Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design 1. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
B.
Bolt Holes: Drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces (mechanically thermal cut holes shall not be accepted. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. 2. 3. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
C.
D.
2.6 A.
SHOP CONNECTIONS High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. B. Joint Type: Snug tightened
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
2.7 A.
SHOP PRIMING Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. Surfaces to be field welded. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Galvanized surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
05120 - 4
STRUCTURAL STEEL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
2.8 A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be [tested and] inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. 2. 3. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
C.
D.
E.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. 2. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. Proceed with installation ONLY after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
05120 - 5
STRUCTURAL STEEL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.2 A. PREPARATION Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-inplace concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 A.
ERECTION Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting bearing and leveling plates. Clean bottom surface of bearing and leveling plates. 1. 2. 3. Set bearing and leveling plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing and leveling plates before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bearing and leveling plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
B.
4.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. 2. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.
D. E.
Splice members only where indicated. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
G.
05120 - 6
STRUCTURAL STEEL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.4 A. FIELD CONNECTIONS High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. B. Joint Type: Snug tightened
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
3.5 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect all field welds and high-strength bolted connections. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Welded Connections: Fillet field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. b. c. d. D. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94.
B.
C.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. 2. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
E.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.
05120 - 7
STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 1.00 A.
GENERAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of the Specifications. WORK INCLUDED The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. Steel lintels. Miscellaneous framing and supports. Aluminum frames and enclosures to conceal light fixtures.
1.01 A.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY; Rough hardware for rough carpentry work. Section 09910, PAINTING; Field painting.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): PA 1 SP 3 SP 6 Paint Application Specification No. 1 Power Tool Cleaning Commercial Blast Cleaning
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of work showing size and thickness of each member, type of material, method of connection and assembly. Show dimensions, clearances, anchorages, relationships to surrounding work, coatings, and other pertinent details of fabrication and installation. 05500 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS
2.
Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations, and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials comply with requirements. Welders Certification: Provide certifications, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders employed at project comply with requirements specified under AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE Shop fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Label each piece in shop to facilitate field assembly. Welding: Perform welding in conformance with AWS D1.1 and D1.3. as applicable. PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE Store work off ground and under cover. Protect from damage. Repair and clean work before erection. PRODUCTS MATERIALS General: Provide products and materials of new stock, free from defects, and of best commercial quality for each intended purpose. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or A 501, hot or cold rolled, as required for design loading. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, schedule 40, Type S (seamless), black except where galvanized is indicated, Grade A for cold-bending. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, A 570, or A 611, grade required for design loading. Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, or A 48, grade and class are manufacturer's options. Extruded Aluminum Angles, Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063T5/T52. Extruded Structural Aluminum Pipe and Round Tubing : ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6. 1. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
1.05 A.
B. 1.06 A.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B. C. D.
E. F. G.
H.
I. J.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. Aluminum, Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.
05500 - 2
METAL FABRICATIONS
K. L.
Bolts and fasteners: ASTM A 307 and A 325. Provide anchors, bolts, sockets, sleeves, and other parts required for securing each item of work to other construction. 1. Anchor bolts, bolts smaller than 5/8 in., and fasteners shall be steel castings conforming to ASTM A 307. Bolts larger than 5/8 in. shall conform to ASTM A 325.
M.
Provide exposed fastenings of same material and finish as metal to which applied, unless otherwise noted. Welding rods: manufacturer. Conform to AWS Standards and recommendations of welding rod
N.
O.
Grout for Interior Applications: Pre-mixed, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-shrink, nonmetallic complying with CE CRD-C-621, Type D. Grout for Exterior Applications: Provide Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project site. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating. Provide Super Por-Rok, Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement, manufactured by Minwax Construction Products Division, or equal as approved by Architect. FABRICATION - GENERAL Fabricate work of this Section to be straight, plumb, level and square, and to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated on approved shop drawings. Ease exposed edges. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal work as required for proper assembly. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fabricate miscellaneous supports, brackets, braces and the like required to fully complete the work. Obtain loading requirements from suppliers of work to be supported. Design and support systems with a safety factor of at least 6 unless otherwise indicated. Allow for thermal movement resulting from 100F change in ambient temperature. Shear and punch metals accurately. Remove burrs. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 in., unless indicated otherwise. Form bent corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or impairing work. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. Weld seams continuously. Spot welding is permitted for temporary welding only.
P.
2.02 A.
6. 7. B.
Work Exposed to View: For work exposed to view, select materials with special care. Provide materials which are smooth and free of blemishes such as pits, roller marks, trade names, scale and roughness. Fabricate work with uniform hairline joints. Form welded joints and seams continuously. Grind welds flush to be smooth after painting. For exposed fasteners, use hex head bolts or Phillips head machine screws.
05500 - 3
METAL FABRICATIONS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize exterior metal fabrications, items located in exterior wall assemblies, and other items indicated to be galvanized, in compliance with ASTM A 123, ASTM A 153, or ASTM A 386. Provide minimum 1.5 oz./ft.2 zinc coating. Galvanize after fabrication. D. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate miscellaneous framing and supports to adequately support live and dead loads with a safety factor of 5. Provide necessary anchors, inserts, and fasteners. Fabricate support system to carry entire load of work being supported to structure above. Do not transfer any loads to ceiling systems. 1. 2. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers and similar items. Coordinate loading and attachment requirements for miscellaneous framing and supports with manufacturers of items being supported.
2.03 A.
FINISHING General: Shop prime work to greatest extent possible, except those items indicated to be embedded in concrete, and those items indicated to receive fireproofing. Field touch-up shop applied coatings after installation. Prepare non-galvanized work for shop priming in compliance with SSPC SP6. Primer for Non-Galvanized Ferrous Surfaces (except for interior handrails): Provide highquality, lead-free, rust-inhibitive primer, equal to one of the following: 1. 2. 3. Series 37H ChemPrime, Tnemec. IPC Equal. Valspar equal.
B. C.
D.
Galvanizing: All ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use, including steel lintels in exterior walls, and including all bolts, nuts, washers, and other related ferrous metal items used therewith, shall be hot-dip galvanized by dipping into a bath of molten zinc to which at least 0.5% nickel and other state of the art alloys have been added. 1. Hot-dip galvanizing process shall comply with ASTM A123, A153, A385, and A386 as applicable. After galvanizing, processed items shall be straightened to remove all warpage and distortion caused by the process. Furnish a certified statement that galvanizing complies fully with this Specification. Unpainted galvanized steel shall bear mill stamp.
2.
G.
Shop Painting of Galvanized Steel: 1. Galvanized Surfaces: Galvanized steel work indicated to be painted under this Section shall be shop painted at the galvanizer's plant with high-performance epoxy primer and polyurethane top coat. a. Primer: Within 12 hours after the galvanizing process has been completed, all exposed to view hot-dip galvanized steel shall be thoroughly cleaned, pretreated for positive paint adhesion, and then given one coat of galvanizing processor's performance-guaranteed polyamide-epoxy primer, "Primergalv" system by Duncan Industries, using paint by Tnemec Co., Carboline Co., or DuPont Co., as 05500 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts approved by Architect, at the galvanizing plant, in strict accordance with manufacturer's published specification standards. b. Polyurethane Top Coat: Top coat applied over epoxy primer coat shall be Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel equal to Duncan "Colorgalv" system, using Tnemec Series 73 Endura Shield III, DuPont Imron 333 or Hempel's 551U Urethane. Dry film thickness shall be 1.5-2.5 mils.
H.
Aluminum Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss.
I.
Bituminous-based paint for electrolytic isolation shall be cold applied black asphaltic mastic conforming to SSPC Paint 12, with no asbestos fibers EXECUTION PREPARATION Coordinate and furnish anchorage devices, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items to be embedded or attached to concrete work, masonry work, or structural steel work. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners necessary for securing work of this Section to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors required. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of work of this Section. Erect work square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, and with tight joints and intersections. All anchors, inserts and other members to be set in concrete or masonry shall be furnished loose by this trade to be built-into concrete and masonry by those trades. Avoid field cutting or drilling to greatest extent possible. Brace work rigid and secure to surrounding construction. Provide temporary bracing or anchors where required.
PART 3 3.01 A.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
D.
05500 - 5
METAL FABRICATIONS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Shop weld connections, except when work cannot be shop welded due to shipping size or galvanizing limitations. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 and D1.2 for procedures of manual metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and correction methods for defective welds. Where members other than expansion bolts or inserts are fastened into concrete, set such members in proprietary-type expanding grout manufactured specifically for such purpose. Use grouts strictly in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Form to receive members with galvanized metal sleeves, or other approved method to provide at least 1/2 in. clearance around entire perimeter. At exposed applications, hold expanding grout back 1/2 in. from finish surface and fill voids with Portland cement grout to match color and texture of surrounding concrete surface. Electrolytic Isolation: Where dissimilar metals are to come into contact with one another, isolate by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on contact surfaces in addition to shop coat specified above. Do not permit the bituminous paint in any way to remain on surfaces to be exposed or to receive sealant. INSTALLATION Steel Lintels: Furnish steel lintels required at openings throughout project for installation. Miscellaneous Items: Carefully review Drawings for miscellaneous metal items required by various trades but not specifically listed above, such as miscellaneous clip angles, miscellaneous steel bracketing, and other miscellaneous metal items as indicated on Drawings, reasonably implied therefrom, or reasonably necessary for thorough completion of work. REPAIRING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION Non-Galvanized Surfaces: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed surfaces with same material as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC PA 1. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint in compliance with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION
F.
G.
H.
3.03 A. B.
3.04 A.
B.
05500 - 6
METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide all rough carpentry work, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Rough carpentry shall include but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Rough hardware, inserts, and related metal components. Rough carpentry framing, sleepers, blockings, curbs, cants, edgings, grounds, nailers, and furring. Wood preservative treatments and applications. Plywood backing panels for electrical and telephone equipment. Plywood sheathing.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 4. Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; Installation of inserts and anchor bolts. Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY. Section 07210, THERMAL INSULATION.
1.03 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide lumber and plywood bearing the grade-trademark of the association under the rules or standards of which it was produced. Grade-trademarks shall conform to the rule or standard under which the material is produced, including requirements for qualifications and authority of the inspection organization, usage of authorized identification, and information included in the identification. 1. 2. 3. 4. Grades specified are the minimum acceptable. Lumber grades shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 245. Lumber shall bear the grade mark of an American Lumber Standards Committee, Board of Review-approved agency. Lumber shall conform to USDC PS 20. Lumber shall bear a mark of mill identification. Plywood shall comply with APA Ref. 1 grading requirements, USDC PS 1, and ANSI A199.1.
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of wood blocking installation and other rough carpentry work. Describe proposed methods of installation and anchorage to structure
06100 - 1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts showing sizes, types, thicknesses, connections of wood blocking and related items, including adjoining work by other trades. B. C. Samples: Submit representative samples of all materials for use under this Section. Product Data: Submit product data consisting of manufacturers product description and specifications. Certificates: Submit certificates of grading, treatment, and conformance to specified standards. Certifications shall state date of treatment, conformance with Specifications, and agency grading of wood. COORDINATION Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections to assure the steady progress of all the work of the Contract. PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE Stack and store materials above ground under protective coverings, or indoors in such a manner to insure proper drainage, ventilation, and protection. Do not place kiln dried materials in the building until concrete and masonry work have been completed, and are sufficiently dry. Store rough carpentry materials stickered in elevated piles to allow for air circulation below. Wrapped lumber completely, including bottoms, in waterproof tarps. Tie tarps down to protect against wind blow-off. Stored lumber in covered storage trailers during project delays. PRODUCTS LUMBER Scope: Provide lumber for miscellaneous wood framing, blocking, cant strips, nailers, etc. for all work of the Project, including, but not limiting to, handrails, railings, roofing, flashing, sheet metal work, and the like. Provide new lumber of consistent size, free of stains and mildew, kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19% by weight. Where exposed or semi-exposed, provide wood members selected for best possible appearance from the grade of stock specified. Provide lumber in longest practical lengths. Use single length pieces wherever possible. General Carpentry Material Schedule shall be as follows: Item Lumber 2 in. nominal thickness or greater Lumber less than 2 in. nominal thickness Grade Construction Grade Species Spruce-Pine-Fir
D.
1.05 A.
1.06 A.
B.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B.
C. D.
Construction Grade
Spruce-Pine-Fir
06100 - 2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
E.
Pressure Preservative Treated Lumber: Pressure preservative treat lumber above ground and in contact with roofing, flashing, sheet metal, masonry, concrete, dampproofing, and waterproofing in conformance with AWPA C2. Provide pressure preservative treated lumber with a minimum net retention of 0.25 pcf. Dry lumber to maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment. Use only waterborne preservatives which conform to AWPA P5. Creosote preservatives are not acceptable. 1. Pressure preservative treat lumber in contact with ground in compliance with AWPA C2 with a minimum net retention of 0.40 pcf.
2.02 A.
FIRE RETARDANT TREATED LUMBER General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. 2. 3. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. Use Interior Type A, at interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. 2. 3. Framing for raised platforms. Concealed blocking. Plywood backing panels.
C.
2.03 A.
CONSTRUCTION PANELS Scope: Construction panels required to complete the work of this Section include, but is not limited to the following: 1. 2. Plywood sheathing. Electrical and telephone equipment backing panels.
B.
Comply with USDC PS 1 and APA Ref. 1 as applicable. Factory mark each panel with APA trademark showing compliance with requirements. Plywood: Provide APA trademarked, Performance-Rated Sheathing, C-D Veneered, Exterior Grade plywood with span rating for spans indicated. Plywood Backing Panels for Telephone and Electrical Equipment: Provide APA trademarked, Performance-Rated sheathing, UL fire-retardant treated, C-D Plugged, Exposure 1 panels, not less than 5/8 in. thick. Provide fire-retardant treatment which yields a flame spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in conformance with ASTM E 84, and conforms to AWPA C 27, Interior Type A. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15%.
C.
D.
06100 - 3
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.04 A. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Inserts, Anchors, and Fasteners: Provide inserts, anchors, anchor bolts, lag bolts, screws, washers, nuts, nails, and other rough hardware. Assist other trades as necessary in the placement of inserts and anchor bolts in concrete and masonry. Furnish full instructions regarding locations, sizes, and other requirements to ensure proper preparation. Provide rough hardware which complies with requirements of the governing laws and codes. Rough Hardware: Provide rough hardware items for use at roof and other exterior uses hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153. Provide other concealed items cadmium plated or zinc chromate plated. Provide hammer drive anchors and fasteners for securing wood framing, blocking or plywood into masonry of sufficient length to penetrate the receiving member a minimum of 1-1/2 in. Adhesives for Gluing Wood Members to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B.
C.
D.
PART 3 3.01 A. B.
EXECUTION ROUGH CARPENTRY WORK, GENERAL Refer to Drawings to determine the major extent of the rough carpentry work required. The Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity, connections, and anchorage of rough carpentry work. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate. Set rough carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line, cut and fitted. Provide wood sleepers, blockings, curbs, cants, edgings, grounds, nailers, and furring where required for screeding or attachment to other work. Coordinate locations with other work to be supported. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 in. wide, and of thickness required. Unless indicated otherwise, blockings, nailers, etc., of 2 in. nominal thickness or greater shall be bolted to back-up material with 1/2 in. bolts (galvanized at exterior locations and at roofs) located 4 in. from ends and splices, and spaced not greater than 32 in. on center along lengths of the members. Provide nails of sufficient length to penetrate receiving member a minimum of 1-1/2 in.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
06100 - 4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
I.
Unless indicated otherwise, secure 2 in. thick or smaller wood framing, nailers, furring, etc., to back-up material by use of appropriate fasteners located 4 in. from ends and spaced not greater than 16 in. on center along lengths of the members. Provide type and length of fastening devices to develop positive and secure anchorage to the back-up material. Refer to FM Data Sheet 1-49 concerning anchorage spacing and size requirements for perimeter blocking. Spacings shall be halved in the zone from building corner to eight feet from corner, both directions from corner. Roof Sheathing: Attach sheathing to roof deck with mechanical fasteners spaced according to Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet I-28 for I-90 Windstorm Resistance Classification. Cut boards to fit around roof penetrations and projections. Trim edges of boards so that no edge is left unsupported. Stagger transverse joints in boards 2 ft. in adjacent rows and butt edges tightly. Joints between boards shall be less than 1/4 in. wide. Butt joints in wood shall be flush to provide smooth, uniform line with no irregularities. Builtup blocking shall have butt joints staggered 4 in. minimum layer to layer. The minimum length of any individual piece of lumber shall be 12 in. Lengths of lumber shall have a minimum of four fasteners. Construct all rough carpentry work plumb, level, and true with tight, close fitting joints, securely attached and braced to surrounding construction. Counterbore for bolt heads, nuts, and washers where required to avoid interference with other materials. Install all wood grounds at gypsum wallboard work, including those required by other trades, to properly attach their work, such as grounds to assure proper lines and levels and for attachment of fixtures, louvers, grilles, registers, diffusers, etc. Do not include fixture support blockings at steel stud framed or furred gypsum finished walls or partitions as work of this Section. Repair all damage caused by puncturing of conduits, pipes, ducts, etc. When nailing, drilling, or powder-driving into concrete or masonry. FASTENING OF WOODWORK Fasten wood to masonry with hammer driven anchors through predrilled holes spaced 8 in. on center maximum. Predrill the hole, insert fastener sleeve, and secure in place with nail. Install plywood on masonry surfaces hammer driven anchors through predrilled holes spaced 12 in. on center along the top and bottom edges. Keep fasteners 3 in. minimum from the board edge. Drive fastener heads flush with surface. Secure plywood to wood substrate with nails at same spacing as hammer driven anchors. Secure plywood to metal studs with screws approved by metal stud manufacturer. END OF SECTION
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
3.02 A.
B.
06100 - 5
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 1.00 A.
GENERAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of the Specifications. WORK INCLUDED Provide all finish carpentry and millwork as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to: 1. 2. 3. Interior standing and running trim. Plastic laminate countertops and computer work stations. Cedar soffit boards.
1.01 A.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. Section 09910, PAINTING; Field finishing of work of this Section.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A161.2 Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops Particleboard, Mat-Formed Wood
A208.1 2.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
06200 - 1
FINISH CARPENTRY
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LD 3 4. High Pressure Decorative Laminates
The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Certifications: Provide certifications stating that materials and fabrication complies with specification requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide large scale detailed plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Field Measurements: Take accurate field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job progress; allow for field cutting and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication is not possible. Verification Samples: Submit at least two fully finished representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in the finished work, showing the full range of color and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum area of 144 square inches. QUALITY STANDARDS Quality Standard: Provide work complying with applicable requirements of AWI Quality Standards. Where not otherwise indicated, fabricator may choose among options permitted by AWI for grade of work specified. 1. 2. Panel Products: Provide minimum 45 pounds per cubic foot medium density particleboard. Do not use hardboard. Fire Performance: All concealed work in this section shall be UL labeled fire-retardant treated. Exposed woodwork shall have a flame spread of less than 200 when tested in compliance with ASTM E 84.
B.
C.
D.
1.05 A.
1.06 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and products only after wet work has been completed and environmental conditions similar to those of the finished work are established and maintained. Store and handle work to prevent deterioration and damage. Comply with AWI Quality Standards and recommendations. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain optimum environmental conditions to prevent woodwork from shrinkage, swelling and all other forms of damage.
1.07 A.
06200 - 2
FINISH CARPENTRY
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts PART 2 2.01 A. PRODUCTS FINISH CARPENTRY, GENERAL Do not deliver materials to site until building has been closed in, wet work is completed and sufficiently dry, and building is continuously maintained at a temperature above 65oF. Obtain Architect's approval before delivering materials or fabricated items. Store materials off the floor, fully protected from damage. B. Provide fasteners and hardware required to complete the work. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. Provide cadmium plated or zinc chromate plated fasteners at concealed locations; stainless steel or chrome plated at exposed interior locations. Provide materials and products which meet or exceed the requirements of the indicated AWI Quality Standards specified for each type of work. Provide solid lumber, kiln-dried to moisture content of 5% to 10% by weight, with average not to exceed 8%. Furnish lumber in longest practical lengths. Use single-length pieces wherever possible. Take necessary field measurements before starting fabrication of built-in work. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. 1. Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C.
D.
E. F. G.
H.
Installation Adhesive: Product recommended for indicated use by manufacturer. 1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
I.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.02 A.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM Scope: Standing and running trim work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. 2. Standing and running trim. Miscellaneous molding and trim.
B.
Quality Standard: Provide AWI Premium Grade materials and workmanship.
06200 - 3
FINISH CARPENTRY
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Wood Species and Cuts: Provide as follows: 1. Painted Work: Standards. Provide any FSC Certified wood complying with AWI Quality
D.
Shop Assembly: Shop assemble casings and frames with accurately mitered joints, pressure glued with lemon shaped splines. PLASTIC LAMINATE PRODUCTS Plastic Laminate Manufacturers: Provide plastic laminate materials that meet or exceed specified requirements from one of the following manufacturers, or Architect approved equals: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Formica Decorative Laminates; Formica Corporation, Cincinnati, OH 45241 Laminart Decorative Laminate; Laminart, Elk Grove, IL 60007. Nevamar Decorative Laminates; Nevamar Corporation; Odenton, MD 21113. Pioneer Decorative Laminates; Sterling Engineered Products, Auburn, ME 04210. Wilsonart Decorative Laminates., Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.; Temple, TX 76501
2.03 A.
B.
Provide laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces (Except Postformed Surfaces): General Purpose Standard Grade, GP-50 (0.050 in. nominal thickness). Postformed Surfaces: Postforming Type, PF-42 (0.042 in. nominal thickness). Balance Sheet: Backer Type, BK-20 (0.020 in. nominal thickness). Color/Texture/Pattern: As selected by Architect.
C.
Scope: Plastic laminate work includes, but is not limited to: 1. 2. Countertops. Computer workstations.
D.
Core: Provide Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) core for all plastic laminate countertop, slat wall, and shelving work. 1. 2. Provide cores for counter tops with sinks or in wet areas fabricated from formaldehyde-free Medex, as manufactured by SierraPine. Provide all other tops, shelving and slat wall using formaldehyde-free Medite II, as manufactured by SierraPine.
E.
Countertop Construction: Provide balancing sheets for all work. Fabricate work for use in wet environment at kitchens and bathrooms. Exposed surfaces of core shall be covered with laminate. Exposed-to-view surfaces shall be covered with "face" laminate. 1. Splashes: Provide loose splashes with all six sides covered with laminate.
F.
Preparation for Related Work: Prepare countertops for all related appliances and plumbing work. Cut holes to fit templates of appliances and fixtures. Trim openings so that all core materials are covered with laminate.
06200 - 4
FINISH CARPENTRY
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts G. H. Fabricate countertops with fewest possible seams. Conceal fasteners. Shelving: Provide as follows: 1. 2.04 A. Plastic Laminate Shelves: Provide GP-50 plastic laminate and solid Maple edge.
CEDAR SOFFIT BOARDS Provide Clear, All Heart Western Red Cedar, tongue and groove boards in sizes indicated. 1. Fasteners: Provide stainless steel nails or screws.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Dressed and sand finish carpentry work free from machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grain, or other defects on surfaces exposed to view. Provide tight joints formed to conceal shrinkage. Fit butt joints with concealed spline. Glue and dowel shop miters which are four inches or greater. Glue and spline miters less than 4 in., with spline concealed. Blind nail finish work to the greatest extent possible. Where surface nailing is used, set and fill nails to match adjacent wood. Wherever nailing into concrete is done, care shall be taken to protect pipes or conduits embedded in the slab. No puncturing of pipes or conduits will be allowed. Damage to embedded work shall be corrected without further cost to Owner. Inserts and anchor bolts shall be placed before the pouring of concrete. Secure work to prevent checks or warps. Finish carpentry work shall be properly framed, closely fitted, and accurately set to the required lines and levels and shall be rigidly secured in place. PAINTING AND FINISHING Field painting and finishing is specified under Section 099100, PAINTING. All finish carpentry items shall be primed or sealed, as work of this section, before installation. Paint or seal coats must be dry before items are installed. Sand all finish work at field joints and where required by installation. Leave work in perfect condition for finishing under Section 099100, PAINTING. SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS Important Note: No attempt is made in the following specific instructions to list all elements of finish carpentry and architectural woodwork required on this project. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine for himself from the Drawings the scope and nature of the work required. These specific instructions are intended only to provide additional instructions regarding those portions of the finished carpentry and architectural woodwork for which information beyond that given on the Drawings or covered in the AWI
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.02 A.
B.
3.03 A.
06200 - 5
FINISH CARPENTRY
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Quality Standards seems needed to properly describe the work. Where the scope of a category is listed it is done in a general manner to assist the Contractor in determining the general nature of work he shall look for as being required in said category, and not to limit the work. 3.04 A. FINISH CARPENTRY WORK Fabricate and install finish carpentry work in accordance with the Drawings, the specifications, and AWI Quality Standards applicable or referenced to this work. Miscellaneous Items: Install all required standing and running trim and other miscellaneous items throughout, as indicated on the Drawings and as required to satisfactorily complete the entire work, whether or not each and every required piece is specifically indicated on the Drawings. Trim shall be of same material and finish as the larger member to which applied. COMPLETION Just prior to completion of work of this Section, inspect work in the company of Architect and make adjustments and corrections to work leaving operating parts in perfect operating condition, all jointing to adjacent material tight, all surfaces without blemishes or stains, all work properly executed and complete, and all defects and damaged work replaced or corrected. END OF SECTION
B.
3.05 A.
06200 - 6
FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide dampproofing as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to cold-applied, asphalt emulsion dampproofing at the following locations: 1. Below grade foundation walls.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D 1187 Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Built Up Roofing.
D 1227
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. QUALITY CONTROL Source: For each material type required for work of this Section, provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. Installer: A firm with a minimum of three years experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.
1.05 A.
B.
07115-1
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
1.06 A.
PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed containers with seals and labels intact and legible identifying brand name and contents. Store materials in an enclosed space protected from weather and out of direct sun rays. Observe manufacturer's minimum and maximum temperature range. JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Weather conditions must be dry and of proper temperature during application operations. Surfaces to receive dampproofing materials shall be clean and dry. Such conditions shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations for products used. Protection: Protect adjacent work from damage by work performed under this Section. Finished surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive dampproofing shall be adequately protected from soiling, staining, splatters, and other damage. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: a. b. c. d. e. ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div. Euclid Chemical Co. Karnak Chemical Corporation. Koppers Industries, Inc. Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
B.
1.07 A.
B.
PART 2 2.01 A.
2.02 A. B.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: Asphalt-based emulsions recommended by the manufacturer for dampproofing use when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Semimastic Grade: Emulsified asphalt semimastic, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying agents and containing fibers other than asbestos, complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or IV.
07115-2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.03 A. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Protection Course, Board Type: Premolded, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, multi-ply, semirigid board, consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on one side with polyethylene film. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. 2. 3. PART 3 3.01 A. Protection Course II; ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div. Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. PC-2 Protection Course; Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
EXECUTION PREPARATION Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not shown. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, where indicated to precede application of dampproofing. Comply with details shown and with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay particular attention to requirements at building expansion joints, if any. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces. 1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of exterior concrete or masonry walls in contact with earth or other backfill and where space is enclosed on opposite side.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
Cold-Applied Asphalt Dampproofing: For exterior surfaces, provide either emulsified or cutback, asphalt dampproofing materials, at Contractor's option. For interior surfaces, provide only emulsified asphalt materials. Apply vertical dampproofing down walls from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is completed.
D.
07115-3
3.03 A.
COLD-APPLIED, ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING Semimastic Grade: Brush or spray apply a coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing at a rate of 5 gal./100 sq. ft., to produce a uniform, dry-film thickness of not less than 30 mils. INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE General: Where indicated, install protection course of type indicated over completed-andcured dampproofing treatment. Comply with dampproofing materials manufacturer's recommendations for method of support or attaching of protection materials. Support with spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION
3.06 B.
07115-4
SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide building insulation work as indicated on Drawings, and as specified, including but not limited to: 1. 2. Fiberglass blanket/batt insulation. Rigid extruded polystyrene foundation insulation.
1.02 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 578 Specifications for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. Specifications for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. Specifications for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
C 612
C 665
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each insulation material. Provide samples having minimum size of 100 sq. in. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire Performance: Provide products which meet or exceed flammability ratings indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction. Thickness: Where R values are indicated, provide thicknesses of insulation materials required to achieve value specified.
B.
1.04 A.
B.
07210 - 1
BUILDING INSULATION
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.05 A. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Materials shall be delivered to site in original, unopened packages or containers bearing manufacturer's names, brand names, and types and thicknesses of contents. Store off floor in interior spaces, adequately protected against damage from all sources. PRODUCTS FIBERGLASS BLANKET/BATT INSULATION Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. 2. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.
B. PART 2 2.01 A.
2.03 A.
RIGID EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION Rigid Insulation: Provide extruded polystyrene insulation conforming to ASTM C 578, minimum 25 lbs. per sq. in. compressive strength at 0.1 in. deformation, 2.0 lbs. per cu. ft. density "K" factor of 0.185 at 40oF. and 0.20 at 75oF. per in. thickness, water vapor transmission of 1.0 perm, and water absorption by volume of 0.1%. Provide products of one of the following, or Architect approved equal: 1. 2. Amoco Foam Products Company. Dow Chemical Co.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL Insulating materials and installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and specific recommendations, and health and safety precautions, for each of project conditions and in accordance with governing laws and building code. FIBERGLASS BLANKET/BATT INSULATION Install continuous application of fiberglass blanket/batt insulation where indicated. Fit batts tightly together and to framing members, furring strips, penetrations, and abutting construction for positive thermal seal. Carry continuously behind light cans, junction boxes, etc. Install blanket/batt insulation, fully filling spaces between stud wall system members. Fit batts tightly together at joints. Pack tightly into corners, and fill double studs and box headers and sills, and other similar voids, with insulation to maintain insulation integrity across entire wall area. Coordinate work with that of other Sections.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
07210 - 2
BUILDING INSULATION
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.04 A. RIGID PERIMETER INSULATION Install indicated thickness of rigid insulation as indicated. At vertical applications secure with daubs of compatible adhesive. CLEANING Upon completion of building insulation work in any area, remove rubbish and debris from work area and leave in broom clean condition. END OF SECTION
3.05 A.
07210 - 3
BUILDING INSULATION
SECTION 07430 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. 1.2 Insulated metal wall panels. Flashing and trim integral to insulated panels. Clips, anchoring devices, fasteners, and accessories for installation of panel system.
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers
1.3
REFERENCES A. B. C. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Penetration Using Dynamic Pressure. AAMA 1503.1 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. ANSI/FM Approvals 4880 - Evaluating Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies, Plastic Interior Finish Materials, Plastic Exterior Building Panels, Wall/Ceiling Coating Systems, and Interior or Exterior Finish Systems. ASTM A 653/A 653M-01a - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C (1382 degrees F).
D. E. F. G. H. I. J.
07430-1
METAL WALL PANELS
K. ASTM E 283 - Standard Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ASTM E 1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel System. CAN 4-S101 - Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. CAN/ULC S102 - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. CAN/ULC S126 - Standard Method of Test for Fire Spread Under Roof-Deck Assembly. CAN/ULC S127 - Standard Corner Wall Method of Test for Flammability Characteristics of Non-Melting Building Materials.
L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Material type, metal thickness and finish. 4. Installation methods. Shop Drawings: Including elevations, fastening patterns, sections of each condition and details as required. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. Panel Sample: Submit 1 foot (305 mm) high by full width sample panel for each profile specified indicating the metal, texture and finish. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
C. D. E. F. G. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing factory foamed in place insulated metal panels with a minimum documented experience of ten years.
07430-2
METAL WALL PANELS
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing factory laminated insulated metal panels with a minimum documented experience of ten years. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of the products specified for projects of similar size and scope with minimum five years documented experience.
C.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store products off the ground, with panels sloped for drainage and covered to protect factory finishes from damage. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces.
1.7
WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's two year limited warranty that panels are free from defects in materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of shipment of panels, but excluding coil coatings (paint finishes) covered under a separate warranty. Warranty does not include interior painted surface of panels. Submit manufacturer's written five year limited warranty providing panels to be free from gas blister formation of the foam core to the exterior panel facing, beginning from the date of shipment of panels.
B.
PART 2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Acceptable Manufacturer: Metl-Span LLC, which is located at: 1497 N. Kealy ; Lewisville, TX 75057; Toll Free Tel: 877-585-9969; Tel: 972-221-6656; Fax: 972-
MATERIALS A. Panel - General Requirements: Roll-formed exterior and interior steel sheet faces chemically bonded to continuously foamed-in-place polyurethane core; laminated panels are not acceptable; Metl-Span III. 1. Exterior and Interior Faces: ASTM A 653/A 653M, minimum Grade 33, stucco embossed, G90 galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interior Face Profile: Lightly corrugated, stucco embossed; "Mesa", unless otherwise indicated. 3. Longitudinal Joint Sealants: Field applied. 4. Foam Core: Non-CFC, Class I, polyurethane. 5. Exterior Finish: One coat 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride, nominal 0.7 mil (0.02 mm) thick, over 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) primer; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Interior Finish: One coat, factory applied coil coating in standard Igloo White, nominal 0.7 mil (0.02 mm) thick, over 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) primer; color USDA compliant.
07430-3
METAL WALL PANELS
B. Metl-Span III Wall Panel System Requirements: Provide panel system with the following characteristics in addition to those specified: 1. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding positive 20 psf (0.96 kPa) wind load when tested in accordance with ASTM E 72 Air Bag Method, without damage and without deflection exceeding L/180 for exterior walls, L/120 for interior walls and L/240 for ceiling panels. 2. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.06 cfm (0.33 meters cubed/second) per square foot of wall area when tested in accordance ASTM E 283 at static pressure of 12.0 psf (0.576 kPa). 3. Static Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration through panel joints at static pressure of 20.0 psf (0.96 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. 4. Dynamic Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration through panel joints when subjected to 95 mph (153 kph) slipstream airflow and application of water for 15 minute period in accordance with AAMA 501.1. 5. Condensation Resistance Factor: 92, minimum, when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. 6. Fire Performance: FMRC Approvals 4880 Class I approved with no height restrictions. 7. Thermal Transmission (K-factor): .127 btu/sf/hr/deg F at a 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) mean temperature when tested in accordance ASTM C 518. 8. Fatigue Resistance: Capable of withstanding deflection cycling at L/180 to 2 million alternate cycles with no evidence of delamination, core cracking or permanent bowing. 9. Freeze/Heat Resistance: No delamination, surface blistering or permanent bowing when subjected to cyclic temperature extremes of minus 20 degrees F (28 degrees C) to plus 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) for 21 eight-hour cycles. 10. Humidity Resistance: No delamination or metal corrosion at interface when subjected to 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) temperature and 100 percent relative humidity for total of 1200 hours. 11. Autoclave Test: No delamination of the core from metal skins when exposed to 2 psi (0.122 kg/sq cm) pressure at temperature of 212 degrees F (100 degrees C) for total of 2-1/2 hours. Architectural Wall Panels: Metl-Span III CF-24A/30A/36A; concealed fastener wall panels with offset double tongue and groove joinery and an extended metal shelf allowing fasteners to penetrate both metal faces with clips concealed in the side joint. 1. Face Profile: Flat, stucco embossed. 2. Module Width: As indicated. 3. Exterior Face: 22 gauge, 0.0312 inch (0.793 mm). 4. Interior Face: 24 gauge, 0.0250 inch (0.635 mm). 5. Thickness: 2 inches (5.08 cm). Flashing and Trim: Brake-formed sheet metal in the same thickness and finish to match the panels. Trim: Extruded aluminum finished to match panels. Fasteners: Clips, anchoring devices, fasteners, and accessories for installation of panel system as recommended by panel manufacturer for the system specified. Sealant: Sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer.
C.
D. E. F. G.
07430-4
METAL WALL PANELS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. 3.2 Examine structural members before beginning installation to ensure that all supporting members are straight, level, plumb and satisfactory for panel installation. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located. Correct defective conditions before beginning work.
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations including approved shop drawings, installation guidebook and manufacturer's handbook of construction details. Form panel shape as indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Install flashing and trim true and in proper alignment. Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids, to ensure weather tightness and integrity of the vapor barrier.
B. C. D. 3.3
CLEANING A. B. Replace damaged panels and other components of work, which cannot be repaired by finish touch-up or similar minor repair. Wipe finished surfaces clean of any filings caused by drilling or cutting to prevent rust staining.
3.4
PROTECTION A. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
07430-5
METAL WALL PANELS
SECTION 07530 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide fully adhered thermoplastic sheet roofing work as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein, including, but not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. Fully adhered membrane. Roof flashings. Roof insulation.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. Section 05310, STEEL DECK. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY; Wood blocking, cants and nailers. Section 07620, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM; Sheet metal work and gravel stops.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 578 C 728 D 1622 E 96 2. Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation Perlite Thermal Insulation Board Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): HH-I-529 HH-I-1972 Insulation Board, Thermal (Mineral Aggregate) Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Faced
07530 - 1
SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for installation of all parts of the work. Provide plans, and details of seams, connections and accessory items. Show layouts of tapered insulation and locations of drains. Show interfaces and relationships to work of other trades. Test Reports: Provide certified reports for all specified tests. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: For each material type required for the work of this section, provide primary materials which are the product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. Installer: A firm with a minimum of three years experience in type of work required by this Section and that is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. UL Listing: Provide roof system that has been tested and listed by UL as Class A for roof deck, slope and application indicated. Manufacturer's Representative: Make arrangements and pay costs to have manufacturer's authorized representative on roof at beginning of roofing work to advise installer of proper procedures and quality control techniques. WARRANTY Furnish manufacturer's warranty stating that manufacturer shall maintain roofing and elastomeric membrane flashings in watertight condition at his own expense for ten years from date of Substantial Completion, provided that Owner gives manufacturer written notice of any leak within thirty days from the discovery of such leak. Warranty is solely intended to cover any condition caused by defective materials, installation, or ordinary wear and tear. Warranty shall not cover damage from lightning, full gales, hurricanes, or similar unusual natural occurrences or any condition caused by any deliberate act or by negligence in maintenance. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather: Perform work of this Section only when existing or forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by manufacturers of the materials and products used. Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetration work is complete. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in
B.
C. 1.05 A.
B.
C.
D.
1.06 A.
1.07 A.
B.
1.08 A.
07530 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Store under cover and protect from weather damage. B. C. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. Adhesives, cements, mastics and sealers shall be stored between 60oF. and 80oF. should they be exposed to lower temperatures, restore to room temperature for three to five days prior to use. Do not use materials damaged in handling or storage. Store insulation and provide full protection against dampness before laying. Insulation boards shall be dry when applied, and shall be protected from the weather during installation. Any materials damaged by exposure to the elements or other cause shall be rejected and removed promptly from site. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Provide materials and roofing systems from one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. 2.02 A. VersiWeld Roofing System; Versico Inc. Hi-Tuff EP; Stevens Roofing Systems Firestone Building Products.
D.
PART 2 2.01 A.
ROOF SYSTEM Provide Hi-Tuff EP, by JP Stevens; or Versiweld adhered TPO, reinforced thermo-plastic membrane roof system, manufactured by Versico, Inc.; Akron, Ohio, or Architect approved equal from another specified manufacturer. Materials and installation shall conform to manufacturer's standard specifications, and work of this Section shall be executed by roofing installer licensed by manufacturer. Provide reinforced, thermo-plastic roofing system consisting of adhered single-ply TPO sheet and mechanically-attached recovery board over insulation, over roof deck. Roof system shall conform to Factory Mutual Windstorm Resistance Classification I-90. RIGID ISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION Isocyanurate Board Insulation: Provide indicated thickness of flat and tapered rigid isocyanurate foam roof insulation consisting of isocyanurate integrally laminated on top and bottom with non-reflective facer. Provide insulation conforming to Fed. Spec. HH-I-1972, and that is acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 1. Rigid isocyanurate shall have minimum density of 2 lb. cu. ft., minimum compressive strength (ASTM D 1621) of 25 psi, maximum moisture vapor transmission (ASTM E 96) of 2.0 perm, "C" factor of 0.16 (1 in.) or better, and "R" value of 6.67 (1 in.). Insulation shall be approved by Factory Mutual (FM) for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Construction and shall be UL listed Class A.
B.
2.03 A.
2.
B.
Mechanical fasteners for insulation shall be equal to "Perma-Fastner Mechanical Attachment System", manufactured by International Permalite, Inc. Fastener system shall 07530 - 3 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts consist of 3 in. by 3 in. by 0.018 in. thick galvanized steel plates, 3-1/8 in. diameter plastic plates, and self-drilling, self-tapping corrosion resistant screws. 2.05 A. SUBSTRATE BOARDS Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 in. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Deck" by GeorgiaPacific Corporation, or designer approved equal.
2.06 A.
COVER BOARDS Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 in. thick. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Deck" by GeorgiaPacific Corporation, or designer approved equal.
2.07 A.
MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIAL Membrane: Provide 0.060 in. thick "Hi-Tuff EP", or "Versiweld TPO, Sheet Membrane", ultraviolet and ozone resistant, or Architect approved equal. 1. Membrane Color: Provide manufacturer's standard White color.
B.
Flashing: Provide "Versiweld Flashing", ultraviolet and ozone resistant, 0.045 in. minimum thickness where concealed. RELATED MATERIALS Bonding Adhesive: Provide bonding adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. Provide adhesive compatible with all materials and substrates. Prefabricated elastomeric accessories (pipe seals, inside and outside corners, etc.) shall be as manufactured and recommended by membrane manufacturer. Nailing Strips and Fasteners: Nailing strips shall be extruded rubber and mechanical fasteners for insulation shall be FM-approved, threaded, non-corrosible. Roofing Nails: 11 gauge hot-dip galvanized, length to penetrate wood members at least 7/8 in., with 5/8 in. diameter heads, as recommended by membrane manufacturer. EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place.
2.08 A.
B.
C.
D.
PART 3 3.01 A.
07530 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 3.02 A. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. 2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
C.
3.03 A.
3.04 A.
INSULATION INSTALLATION Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 4 inches (100 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
B.
C. D.
07530 - 5
E.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
F.
G.
Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. 2. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
H.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. 2. Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
3.05 A.
ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. Bonding Adhesive: Apply water-based bonding adhesive to substrate at rate required by manufacturer and immediately install roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. G.
07530 - 6
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. 3. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements.
H.
Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
3.06 A.
B. D.
E.
3.07 A.
B.
C.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. PROTECTING AND CLEANING Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION
3.08 A.
B.
C.
07530 - 7
SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide all flashing and sheet metal work as required to complete the work of the Contract. Include, but do not limit to: 1. 2. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae. Metal flashing.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY; Wood blockings, nailers, etc., and plywood backing for work of this Section. Section 07530, SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING; Membrane roof flashing.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 48 B 209 D 2822 2. Grey Iron Castings Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate Asphaltic Roof Cement
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Manual Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details.
B.
07620 - 1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
C.
Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 8-in. square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.
D.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store, and handle materials in manufacturer's sealed containers and rolls. Store indoors or under cover, on raised platforms, fully protected from damage. COORDINATION Conference: Convene a preinstallation conference to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Coordination: Perform work of this Section in coordination with other trades to provide the highest quality work. PRODUCTS METALS
1.05 A.
1.06 A. B. 1.07 A.
B.
PART 2 2.01
A.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: 1. 2. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.060 in., unless otherwise indicated. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T52, with a minimum thickness of 0.080 in. for primary legs of extrusions that are anodized, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 A.
ELASTOMERIC FLASHING Elastomeric sheet flashing/membrane shall be polyethylene reinforced sheet flashing 60 mil thick rubberized asphalt sheet, equal to Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing, manufactured by W. R. Grace & Company, or approved equal.
07620 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Material shall be 40 mil thick consisting of 8 mil thick high-strength cross-laminated polyethylene integrally bonded to 32 mil thick layer of rubberized asphalt.
2.03 A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Mastic Sealant: sealant. Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating
B.
C.
D.
Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style 1b. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil thick black polyethylene film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. FABRICATION, GENERAL Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 ft. with no joints allowed within 24 in. of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form
E.
F.
G.
H. 2.04 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
07620 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 in. deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured.
H.
I.
J.
2.05 A.
ALUMINUM FINISHES General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss.
B.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION INSPECTION OF SURFACES Carefully inspect surfaces to receive sheet metal for all conditions affecting sheet metal application and performance. Carefully check wood blockings, inserts, nailers, etc., for adequate anchorage. Defects shall be reported in writing to the Architect and sheet metal work shall not proceed until defects have been corrected. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of conditions of surfaces to which this work is to be applied.
B.
07620 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.02 A. INSTALLATION General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 ft. with no joints allowed within 24 in. of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 in. deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. F. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.
G.
2.
H.
Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 in. and bed with sealant.
07620 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.04 A. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
B.
07620 - 6
SECTION 07811 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK Provide firestop systems consisting of a material, or combination of materials, installed top retain the integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, or gases through penetrations in fire-rated barriers. Firestops shall be used in locations including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable trays, conduit, piping, electrical busways, and electrical raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor slabs and floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shafts. Openings between floor slab edges and exterior walls. Openings between structurally separate sections of walls or floors. Between stories unless within a fire-rated shaft. Above walls or partitions extending to underside of ceiling or roof assemblies above. Concealed furring spaces behind finishes. Where pipes, conduits, ducts, and other items pass through fire-rated assemblies. Openings for items mounted on or within fire-rated assemblies.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. Section 09260, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES; Acoustical (sound attenuation) insulation. Division 15 - MECHANICAL; Pipe and duct insulation.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Test Requirements: ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" (July 1983). Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their designation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually with a midyear supplement. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR) 07811 - 1 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
B.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts b. c. d. e. C. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) Forming Materials (XHKU)
Test Requirements: UL 2079, Tests for Resistance of Building Joint Systems (November 1994). International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code NFPA 70 - National Electric Code
D.
E.
F. G. H.
1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 1300. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no UL system is available for an application. Engineer judgment must include both project name and contractors name who will install firestop system as described in drawing. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration and the proposed UL system number for firestopping each penetration, (see attached sample schedule). QUALITY ASSURANCE: A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814, UL 1479 or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction.
B.
C. D.
1.06 A.
B.
C.
07811 - 2
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994). Source: For each material type required for work of this Section, provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. Installer: A firm with a minimum of three years experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. UL Listed Designs: Firestopping materials and systems shall be installed in each location and type of installation conforming to listed UL designs. 1. Firestopping materials shall be UL Classified as "Fill, Void, or Cavity Material" for use in through-penetration firestop systems. Provide firestop systems that are UL listed with a fire-resistance rating equal to the hourly resistance rating of the fire-rated barrier being penetrated.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.
1.07 A. B. C. 1.08 A.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials in unopened factory-labeled packages. Store off floor in interior spaces, protected against damage. Schedule deliveries to minimize on-site storage. TESTS Fire-Resistance: Provide materials and construction identical to fire-rated assemblies tested in compliance with ASTM E 119, ASTM E 814, UL 263, or NFPA 251, by independent agencies acceptable to Designer and governing authorities. Burning Characteristics: Provide products with maximum ASTM E 84 surface burning characteristics of flame spread 25 and smoke developed 25. Firestop systems shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 under a minimum positive pressure of 0.01 in. of water. PROJECT CONDITIONS Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
B.
C.
1.09 A.
07811 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. conditions before proceeding. Correct unsatisfactory
C.
D.
Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. PRODUCTS FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) and joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma; 800-879-8000 Tremco Sealants & Coatings, Beechwood, Ohio; (216) 292-5000 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, Minnesota; (612) 736-0203 Other manufacturers listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
E.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B.
2.02 A.
2.03 A.
MATERIALS Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL 2079 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance. Sealants or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 07811 - 4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
B.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 4. 5. C. Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
D.
Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use with fire-rated construction joints and other gaps, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Hilti CP 672 Firestop Spray Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 3M Firestop Sealant 2000 Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
E.
Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
F.
Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
G.
Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
H.
Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 1
07811 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts I. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. J. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collar Hilti CP 643 Firestop Collar 3M Fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
Cast-in place firestop devices for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems) penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. Hilti CP 680 Cast-In Place Firestop Device Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
K.
Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Hilti FS 635 Trowelable Firestop Compound Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3M Firestop Foam 2001 3M Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
L.
Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
M.
Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections of wall and floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Hilti CP 672 Firestop Spray Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 3M Fire Barrier CP 25 WB Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory Volume 2
N.
Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. FASTENERS Provide anchorage accessories complying with UL designs and other components and accessories as needed. 07811 - 6 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
O.
2.04 A.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION INSPECTION Examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which work shall be performed. Report of conditions detrimental to performance of work in writing to Designer. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work shall establish acceptance of substrates and conditions. PREPARATION Review extent and types of required firestopping with governing authorities before beginning work. Obtain approval of thicknesses and installation methods, including nontypical locations. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified. Provide firestopping material and thickness as required to provide indicated ratings. Where not indicated otherwise, comply with UL standard designs. In multiple layer work, offset joints at least 6 in. Anchor with manufacturers' recommended system and in compliance with UL standard designs. Install without gaps and voids. Do not use damaged materials. Remove and replace nonfitting or disturbed work. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Coordinate installation of firestopping work with other work to minimize cutting and removal of installed fireproofing. As work of other Sections is completed, review firestopping work and repair or replace work which has been damaged or removed. PROTECTION Provide temporary protection to protect work from damage and deterioration until final acceptance. Remove protection and rework as necessary immediately before final acceptance. END OF SECTION
3.02 A.
3.03 A.
B.
C.
D.
3.04 A.
3.05 A.
07811 - 7
SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Caulk and seal joints as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Include, but do not limit to: 1. Sealing of joints in exterior construction. 2. Sealing of interior joints.
1.02 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M 220 Preformed Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals for Concrete
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 719 Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants under Cyclic Movement Use of Latex Sealing Compounds Latex Sealing Compounds Elastomeric Joint Sealants Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension Test Method for Rubber Property - Tear Resistance Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements
C 790 C 834 C 920 C 962 D 412 D 624 D 2628
3. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): TT-S-00227 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, MultiComponent (For Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in
07920 - 1
JOINT SEALANTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Buildings and Other Structures) TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each sealant material used. Provide certifications that sealant materials comply with specified requirements. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples manufacturer's color charts showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. Verification Samples: Submit actual representative samples of each sealant material that is to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide sealant samples having minimum size of 4 in. long. Test Reports: Provide certified reports for all specified tests. COMPATIBILITY Provide sealant and sealant joint backing materials suitable for the use intended and compatible with the materials with which they will be in contact. Compatibility of sealant and accessories shall be verified by the sealant manufacturer. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Source: For each sealant material type required for the work of this section, provide primary materials which are the product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials. Installer: A firm with a minimum of five years experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather: Perform work of this Section only when existing or forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by manufacturers of the materials and products used. Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetration work is complete. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Materials under this Section shall be delivered to, and stored at, the job site in unbroken factory sealed containers with labels intact.
B.
C.
D. 1.05 A.
1.06 A.
B.
1.07 A.
B.
1.08 A.
07920 - 2
JOINT SEALANTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.09 A. WARRANTY Furnish joint sealant manufacturer's written single-source performance warranty that joint sealant work will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for five years from date of Substantial Completion of the Project. PRODUCTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Before installation check each sealant for compatibility with adjacent materials and surfaces and with indicated exposures. Select sealers which are recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated. Where exposed to pedestrian or vehicular traffic, provide sealants which are non-tracking and are strong enough to withstand the traffic without damage. Provide colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard and special (Tremco Fastpak) colors. Where specifically requested, provide custom color matches. SELF-LEVELING POLYURETHANE SEALANT (Sealant Type 1) Provide two or more part, self-leveling, polyurethane based elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227E Type 1 Class A, having Shore A hardness of not less than 30 when tested according to ASTM C 920, cured modulus of elasticity at 100% elongation of not more than 150 psi when tested according to ASTM D 412, and tear resistance of not less than 50 lbs./inch when tested according to ASTM D 624. Where joint surfaces contain bituminous materials, provide modified sealants which are compatible with bituminous materials encountered. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. Pecora Urexpan NR-200. Mameco Vulkem 245 or 255. Sika 2C, SL. Sonneborn Sonolastic PvJtSt. Tremco THC 900.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B.
2.02 A.
B.
C.
Extent: Provide self-leveling polyurethane sealant for paving and floor joints not indicated to be sealed with another type of sealant. NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT (Sealant Type 2) Provide multi-part, non-sag, polyurethane based elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C 920 Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227E Class A, having Shore A hardness of 20 to 30, cured modulus of elasticity at 100% elongation of not more than 75 psi, and tear resistance of not less than 50 lbs./inch when tested according to ASTM D 624. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. Mameco International Vulkem 227 2. Sika Sikaflex 2c NS.
2.03 A.
B.
07920 - 3
JOINT SEALANTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 2. 4. Tremco Dymeric C. Extent: Provide non-sag polyurethane sealant for all metal panel to metal panel joints, metal panel to precast joints, metal panel to metal window joints, masonry to metal panel joints, masonry to masonry joints, masonry to precast joints, precast-to-precast joints, precast to metal window joints, Metal window joints to adjacent materials; door frames to adjacent materials; and other joints not indicated to be sealed with another type of sealant. SILICONE RUBBER SEALANT (Sealant Type 3) Provide one part, silicone rubber based elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C 920 Type S, Class 25, Grade NS and Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543A Class A. Provide mold and mildew resistant, sanitary interior type sealant. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D. Dow 786. General Electric 1702 Sanitary. Pecora 863. Rhodorsil 6b White. Sonneborn OmniPlus. Tremco Proglaze.
2.04 A.
B. C.
Extent: Provide silicone rubber sealant for interior joints around plumbing fixtures and tile to tile joints in ceramic tile work. ACRYLIC LATEX SEALANT (Sealant Type 4) Provide permanently flexible, latex rubber modified acrylic emulsion sealant, complying with ASTM C 834. Provide one of following products that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. Pecora AC-20 2. Tremco Acrylic Latex 834 3. Sonneborn Sonolac
2.05 A.
B.
C.
Extent: Provide acrylic latex sealant for use at mirrors, for exposed acoustical sealant, and for interior joints except where silicone rubber sealant is indicated. At interior joints greater than 1/2 in. in width or subjected to periodic building movement, substitute exterior type sealant specified above. Where surrounding wall surfaces are to be left unpainted, substitute exterior type sealant as specified above. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Provide primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be adhered to.
D.
E.
2.06 A.
07920 - 4
JOINT SEALANTS
B.
Bond Breaker Tape: Provide polyethylene or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to prevent three-sided adhesion. Backer Rod: Provide compressible rod of durable nonabsorptive material recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Backer Rod Manufacturing and Supply Co. Dow Chemical Co. W. R. Meadows, Inc. Williams Products, Inc. Woodmont Products, Inc.
C.
D.
Joint backing for general use at joints in horizontal surfaces shall consist of two rows of butyl rubber or neoprene foam rod in contact with one another, and each compressed to approximately 2/3 original width when in place. Provide miscellaneous materials of type that will not bleed through sealant, discolor surface, or produce other deleterious effects. Select size to provide compression to approximately 2/3 original width when in place. Provide backing material profile concave to the rear of the sealant, and equipped with a bond-breaking film. EXECUTION INSPECTION The Installer shall examine substrates and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of sealant work means Installer's acceptance of joint surfaces and conditions. PREPARATION Strictly comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealants, primers, tapes and fillers. Remove substances which could interfere with bond. Etch or roughen joint surfaces to improve bond. Surfaces which have been given protective coatings and those that contain oil or grease shall be thoroughly cleaned with xylol or MEK solvent, with due precautions taken to minimize hazards. Unless otherwise indicated, use of sealants shall conform to the following: ASTM C 790 for latex sealants and ASTM C 1193 for other sealants. Tape or mask adjoining surfaces to prevent spillage and migration problems. Prime surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
E.
PART 3 3.01 A.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
D. E.
07920 - 5
JOINT SEALANTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.03 A. INSTALLATION Schedule work as long as possible after completion of concrete work and finished brick paving and granite work. Provide backer rods for liquid sealants except where specifically recommended against by sealant manufacturers. Prevent three sided adhesion by use of bond breaker tapes or backer rods. Force sealant into joints to provide uniform, dense, continuous ribbons free from gaps and air pockets. Completely wet both joint surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except in hot weather, make sealant surface slightly concave. Install sealants so that compressed sealants do not protrude from joints. Dry tool sealants to form a smooth dense surface. At horizontal joints form a slight cove to prevent trapping water. Provide sealants to depths indicated, or if not indicated, follow manufacturer's recommendations. EXTENT OF SEALANT WORK General Extent: Seal joints indicated, and all interior and exterior joints, seams, and intersections between dissimilar materials. Provide elastomeric sealant installation with backer rod in all interior and exterior control joints. Exterior Sealing: Without limitation, the work of this Section includes sealing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C. Masonry to masonry joints. Masonry to other exterior wall materials, including precast concrete, metal, and wood. Metal to metal joints. Wood to wood and wood to metal joints. Concrete to concrete joints. Precast concrete to precast concrete. Precast concrete to other exterior wall materials including masonry, wood, and metal. Joints between window and door frames and surrounding materials. Joints and cracks in paving and walks. Joint fillers for all joints.
B.
C. D.
E.
F.
3.04 A.
B.
Interior Sealing: Without limitation, the work of this Section includes sealing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Perimeters of door frames, window frames, and metal and wood frames. Metal to gypsum drywall joints. Top of wall base along irregular walls. Between acoustical ceiling edge angle and irregular walls. Tile to tile joints inside corners, tile to metal joints, and tile to gypsum drywall joints. Splash to counter joints and splash to wall joints at countertops. Completely around plumbing fixtures, fittings, and trim to countertops, walls and floors. Exposed acoustical sealants, at tops and bottoms of stud partition walls around mechanical rooms, elevator machine rooms, toilet rooms, and at other acoustic partitions as indicated.
07920 - 6
JOINT SEALANTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Thresholds of exterior doors shall be set in full beds of exterior sealant, not less than 3/8 in. thick. At Contractor's option, a polybutene or polyisobutylene sealant by same manufacturer may be used at thresholds. CURING Cure sealants in strict compliance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations to obtain highest quality surface and maximum adhesion. Make every effort to minimize accelerated aging effects and increase in modulus of elasticity. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove smears from adjacent surfaces immediately, as the work progresses. Exercise particular care to prevent smearing or staining of surrounding surfaces which will be exposed in the finished work, and repair any damage done to same as result of this work without additional cost to Owner. Remove and replace work that is damaged or deteriorated. Clean adjacent surfaces using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protection immediately before final acceptance. END OF SECTION
3.05 A.
3.06 A.
B. C.
D.
07920 - 7
JOINT SEALANTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS SECTION 07922
INTENSIVE GARDEN ROOF ASSEMBLY APPLICATION: ASSEMBLY: ROOFING INTENSIVE GARDEN ROOF W/FABRIC REINFORCED MM 6125 (215 MILS)
LONG FORM SPECIFICATION PART I GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY This specification serves as a guideline and shall be adapted to suit the needs of each individual project by the architect. It is prepared in accordance with the CSI three-part section format and shall be included as a separate section under DIVISION 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection. Improvements and other changes to the contents shall be made only with the written approval of the architect. RELATED SECTIONS DIVISION 2 - Sitework [Section 02200/02700] - Paving/Site Furnishings as supplied by American Hydrotech, Inc. See Division 7 for specific details. DIVISION 3 - Concrete [Section 03300] - Roof Deck Surface/Substrate The coordination of this section is necessary to facilitate the successful installation of the waterproofing membrane. Cast in Place Concrete/Composite Deck A. B. C. Strength/density: minimum 2,500 psi (17,235 kPa) compressive strength minimum 115 pcf (1842 kg/m3) density Finish: Wood-float or wood-troweled equivalent finish. Steel troweled is not desirable. Concrete Hydration (Cure): 1. 2. Method of Cure: Water cure, wet coverings, paper sheets, plastic sheets or approved liquid curing compound (sodium silicate preferred). Contact Hydrotech for other alternatives. Duration of Cure/Dry: a. Structural Weight Concrete: recommend 28 days, minimum 14 days, prior to application of the membrane. b. Lightweight Structural Concrete: recommend 60 days, minimum 28 days, prior to application of membrane. Venting of the deck from the underside is recommended to facilitate drying. c. The above minimum cure/dry times are recommended based upon basic concrete fundamentals and experience. Depending on conditions (i.e., ambient temperature, humidity) the concrete may be dry enough to receive application of the membrane in less than the 14 day minimum recommendation. Consult Hydrotech for specifics when less than the minimum is desired.
1.02 A. B.
07922-1 .06 copyright

INTENSIVE GARDEN ROOF ASSEMBLY
*REFER TO SECTION 3.02 PREPARATION FOR ADDITIONAL DECK TYPES.* C. D. E. F. G. H. I. I. 1.03 A. B. C. D. 1.04 A. B. DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION [6] - Wood blocking and curbing [7] Insulation [6] - Sheet metal flashing and counterflashing [7] - Prefabricated roof specialties [7] - Caulking and sealants [22] - Plumbing specialties [n/a] - Roof hatches [32] - Landscaping
REFERENCES American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Canadian General Standards Board, CGSB-37.50-M89, Standard for Asphalt, Rubberized, Hot Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Class A. Dow Chemical Company, TechNote 508 Ballast Design Guide for IRMA Roofs. DEFINITIONS Green Roof -- An area of planting/landscaping, built up on a waterproofed substrate at any level that is separated from the natural ground by a man-made structure. Extensive Green Roof -- Low to no maintenance landscaping consisting of shallow soil depths (< 6 inches (152mm) with plant varieties restricted to primarily mosses, herbs and succulents capable of withstanding harsh growing conditions. Intensive Green Roof -- Landscaping requiring regular maintenance, consisting of deeper soil depths (> 8 inches (203mm) with a wider variety of plant species possible including shrubs and small trees. Shallow-Intensive/Lawn Green Roof - Landscaping requiring more regular maintenance than an extensive condition but limited in plant selection due to shallower soil depths, (i.e., sod grass lawn). Garden Roof -- Patented system of drainage, water retention and root barrier components utilized in the construction of green roofs over Hydrotech's MM 6125EV roofing membrane. Steep Slope Green Roof -- Defined as a slope exceeding 3:12 pitch. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Furnish and install a completed Intensive Garden Roof Assembly including concrete surface conditioner, Monolithic Membrane 6125EV-FR and flashings, protection course/root barrier protection, STYROFOAM brand insulation (if required), water retention mat (if required), drainage/water retention component, filter fabric, lightweight engineered growing medium (soil) and vegetation. SUBMITTALS Certification from an approved independent testing laboratory experienced in testing rubberized asphalt material, that the material meets the CGSB-37.50-M89 standard for rubberized asphalt membranes, including applicable ASTM procedures.
C. D.
E. F. 1.05 A.
1.06 A.

B.
Certification showing full time quality control of production facilities responsible for the manufacture of the rubberized asphalt and that each batch of material is tested to insure conformance with the manufacturers published physical properties. Certification showing that all components of the green roof assembly are being supplied and warranted by a single-source manufacturer. Evidence that the roof membrane assembly is currently Class A listed with Underwriters Laboratories. Evidence that the extruded polystyrene insulation if used is free from CFC's. The plant manufacturing the rubberized asphalt material must have IS0 9001-2000 approval as evidenced by a notarized copy of the official certificate. Provide product data on all components of the green roof assembly. QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Section 1.06 SUBMITTALS. Include items A., B., C. & D. The Roofing/Waterproofing Contractor shall demonstrate qualifications to perform the work of this Section by submitting the following documentation: 1. 2. Certification or license by the membrane manufacturer as a locally based, authorized applicator of the product the installer intends to use, for a minimum of five (5) years. List of at least three (3) projects, satisfactorily completed within the past five (5) years, of similar scope and complexity to this project. Previous experience submittal shall correspond to specific membrane system proposed for use by applicator.
C. D. E. F. G. 1.07 A. B.
C. D.
Refer to Section 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION. Include single-source for all components from the manufacturer. The rubberized asphalt membrane product shall contain an inert clay filler and crumb rubber to enable the product to be resistant to acids (fertilizers, building washes and acid rain) and maintain membrane thickness during application. Membrane Manufacturer shall have available an in-house technical staff to assist the contractor, when necessary, in application of the products and final inspection of the assembly. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall demonstrate qualifications to supply materials of this section by certifying the following: 1. Membrane Manufacturer must show evidence that the specified rubberized asphalt has been manufactured by the same source for fifteen (15) years and successfully installed on a yearly basis for a minimum of fifteen (15) years on projects of similar scope and complexity. Membrane Manufacturer must not issue warranties for terms longer than they have been manufacturing their hot fluid rubberized asphalt membrane.
E.
F.
2.

G.
Pre-Construction Conferences. The manufacturer will meet with the necessary parties at the jobsite to review and discuss project conditions as it relates to the integrity of the roofing assembly. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials in original unopened containers of packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, instruction for use, all identifying numbers, and U.L. labels. Materials shall be stored in a neat, safe manner, not to exceed the allowable structural capacity of the storage area. Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight. Store all adhesives at temperatures between 60F (15.5C) and 80F (26.6C). If exposed to lower temperatures, restore materials to 60F (15.5C) minimum temperature before using. PROJECT CONDITIONS Application of the membrane shall not commence nor proceed during inclement weather. All surfaces to receive the membrane shall be free of water, dew, frost, snow and ice. Application of membrane shall not commence nor proceed when the ambient temperature is below 0F (-17.7C). Preparation and application of membrane must be conducted in well ventilated areas. Over its service life, do not expose membrane or accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180F (82C) (i.e., hot pipes and vents or direct steam venting, etc.). Adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are extremely flammable. Do not breathe vapors or use near an open fire. Do not use in confined areas without adequate ventilation. Consult container or packaging labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety information. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat, etc.) to come in contact with the roof membrane. Any exposure to foreign materials or chemical discharges must be presented to membrane manufacturer for evaluation to determine any impact on the roof membrane assembly performance. Concrete Deck Surface Condition. IMPORTANT - Refer to 1.02 Related Sections. Deck Preparation; refer to Section 3.02 Preparation. Deck slopes greater than 3 inches in 12 inches (approx. 15 degrees or 25%) shall be limited to extensive and shallow-intensive applications and require special installation considerations. CONTACT Hydrotech for specifics. Ballasting requirements vary depending on height of roof deck, parapet height and design wind speed based upon building location. Vegetated green roofs also require proper
1.08 A.
B. C. D.
1.09 A. B. C. D. E.
F.
G. H. I.
J.

ballasting and the possible use of wind erosion mats. CONTACT Hydrotech for ballasting recommendations. K. 1.10 A. B. General Contractor shall assure that adequate protection is provided after installation so other trades do not damage membrane. WARRANTY Upon completion of the work, the contractor must supply the owner with a single-source warranty of U.S. origin direct from the manufacturer. Each warranty varies in scope and terms. Contact Hydrotech for exact warranty terms and conditions to meet the specific project requirements. Warranties available from the manufacturer: (Edit to project requirements) 1. 2. 3. 4. Material Warranty; excludes labor. Duration: 2-, 5-, 10-, 20-year Watertightness Warranty; includes labor and material. Duration: 5-, 10-, 15-, 20-year Thermal Warranties; includes 80% retention of the original thermal value and remain on the deck at 70 mph wind gust. Duration 5-, 10-, 15-, 20-year Total System Warranties; covers components of the green roof assembly, including membrane, flashing, insulation, Garden Roof components and pavers. Includes removal and replacement of the Garden Roof components, pavers and soil (24 inches deep) when supplied by and installed per Hydrotech's requirements. A. Duration of Membrane/Flashing: 5-, 10-, 15-, 20-year (watertight condition) B. Duration of Insulation: 5-, 10-, 15-, 20-year (80% of original thermal value; remain on the deck withstanding wind speeds not to exceed 70 mph) C. Material Integrity of Garden Roof Components: 5-, 10-, 15-year D. Duration of Pavers: 5-, 10-year (will not crack, split or disintegrate due to freeze-thaw)
C.
**CONTACT HYDROTECH FOR EXACT WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDITIONS.** PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 A. GENERAL Refer to Section 1.04, System Description. All components must be obtained as a singlesource from the membrane manufacturer to ensure total system compatibility and integrity. Manufacturer: American Hydrotech, Inc. 303 East Ohio Street Chicago, Illinois 60611-3318 800-877-6125 or 312-337-4998 FAX: 312-661-0731 Web Site: http://www.hydrotechusa.com

2.02 A.
MATERIALS Membrane 1. Membrane shall be a hot, fluid applied, rubberized asphalt membrane meeting the CGSB-37.50-M89 standard and other pertinent physical properties: - American Hydrotech, Inc., Monolithic Membrane 6125EV (minimum 25% postconsumer recycled-content) TEST METHOD ASTM D-92 CGSB-37.50-M89 ASTM D-5329 CGSB-37.50-M89 ASTM D-5329 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 TYPICAL RESULT <500F* (260C) 98 mm @77F (25C) 187 mm @122F (50C) 1.0 mm @ 140F (60C) 16.0 Joules 0.069
PROPERTY Flash point Penetration Flow Toughness Ratio of Toughness to Peak Load
Water Vapor Permeability
ASTM E-96, PROCEDURE E CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89
0.3 ng/Pa(s)M2
Water Absorption Low Temperature Flexibility (-25C) Low Temperature Crack Bridging Capability Heat Stability
.11 gram weight gain No delamination, adhesion loss, or cracking No cracking, adhesion loss, or splitting No change in viscosity, penetration, flow or low temperature flexibility 11.0 seconds No delamination, blistering, emulsification, or deterioration
CGSB-37.50-M89
Viscosity Water Resistance (5 days/50C)
CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89

Softening Point Elongation Resiliency Bond to Concrete Acid Resistance Resistance to Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance to Salt Water
ASTM D-36 ASTM D-5329 ASTM D-3407 ASTM D-3407 ASTM D-896 Procedure 7.1 (N-8) ASTM D-08.22 Draft 2 ASTM D-896 similar 20% sodium chloride sodium carbonate calcium chloride ASTM D-896 similar undiluted, 15/5/5, nitrogen/phosphorus potash 3-year exposure
180F (82C) 1000% minimum 40% minimum Pass 0F (-18C) Pass-50% Nitric Acid -50% Sulfuric Acid 100 psi (equals 231 foot of head water) No delamination, blistering, emulsification or deterioration No delamination, blistering, emulsification or deterioration No deterioration 100%-no solvents 10 years (sealed) 1.23 + .02
Resistance to Fertilizer
Resistance to Animal Waste Solids Content Shelf Life Specific Gravity
*102F more than the application temperature recommended by the manufacturer. B. Surface Conditioner 1. C. Asphaltic surface conditioner for concrete surfaces meeting ASTM D41 - American Hydrotech, Inc., Surface Conditioner
Reinforcing 1. 2. Spunbonded polyester fabric (standard duty) reinforcing sheet. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash F 60-mil (1.5 mm) thick, uncured neoprene (heavy duty) reinforcing sheet. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash UN
D.
Flashing (Edit to project requirements) 1. 60-mil (1.5 mm) thick, uncured neoprene sheet. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash UN

2. E.
157-mil (4 mm) thick, torch-grade, modified asphalt, reinforced flashing membrane. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex-Flash MB
Adhesives/Sealant 1. 2. 3. Contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing together. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Splicing Cement Contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing to an approved substrate. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Bonding Adhesive Sealant to seal elastomeric flashing seam edge. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Lap Sealant
F.
Separation/Root Barrier Protection Course (Edit to project requirements) 1. 2. For intensive conditions; a 160-mil (4 mm) thick polyester reinforced, modified asphalt sheet with granular surface and root inhibiting additive. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydroflex RB, or A combination of a fiberglass reinforced rubberized asphalt sheet and polyethylene root barrier. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydroflex 30/Root Stop HD, or - American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydroflex 30/Root Stop Bamboo
G.
Prefabricated Drainage Course (If required, consult Hydrotech) 1. A composite drainage system consisting of a three-dimensional, crush-proof, drainage core and a filter fabric. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydrodrain 300
H.
Insulation (If required) 1. An extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation. - STYROFOAM Brand insulation [TYPE] as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Company, marketed by American Hydrotech, Inc. a. Insulation shall meet ASTM C-578, Type VI or VII. b. Minimum compressive strength, ASTM D-1621, 40 or 60 psi (276 or 414 kPa) (variance by type of product) c. Maximum water absorption by volume per ASTM C-272,0.1% d. Water vapor permeance for 1" product per ASTM E-96, 1.0 perm (max.) (63 ng/Pa/s/m2) e. Insulation shall have an R value of 5.0F ft2 h/Btu/in. (0.88 K m2/W) of thickness when tested at 75F (23.9C) mean temperature in accordance with ASTM C-518 f. Product shall be free of CFC's Product types available: STYROFOAM Brand, RoofMate; Ribbed RoofMate; PlazaMate; and High Load 100. CONSULT Hydrotech for recommended product type.
I.
Air Layer (If required, consult Hydrotech) 1. Required air space over STYROFOAM insulation when moisture mat is required shall be composed of a crush-proof core and non-woven filter fabric. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydrodrain AL or Hydrodrain 300.

J.
Water Retention Mat (If required, consult Hydrotech) 1. Non-woven, synthetic fiber mat capable of retaining additional moisture for potential use by vegetation. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Moisture Mat
K.
Drainage/Water Retention Component (Edit to project requirements) 1. Three-dimensional, molded panels of recycled polyethylene with drainage channels top and bottom sides and water retention reservoirs top side. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Gardendrain a. Intensive Conditions: - Gardendrain GR30 or Gardendrain GR50
L.
Filter Fabric 1. Non-woven, polymeric, geotextile fabric. - American Hydrotech, Inc., SystemFilter
M.
Soil 1. Custom growing media mix capable of supporting vigorous growth of the specified vegetation, complying with the following specification. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Intensive LiteTop Growing Media Intensive* 0-2 % 5-15 % 10-25 % 20-50 % 55-95 % 90-100 % 0.7 - 1.1 g/cm3 (44 lbs 68 lbs/cf) 1.0 - 1.5 g/cm3 (62 lbs - 93 lbs/cf) 0.6 -1.1 g/cm3 (38 lbs - 68 lbs/cf) >40 % >10 % >0.5 mm/min (>1.0 in/hr) 5.5 - 7.5 <25 g/l <3.0 g/l (2.0 mmhos/cm)
Property Grain Size Distribution clay fraction passing #200 sieve passing #60 sieve passing #18 sieve passing 1/8-inch sieve passing 3/8-inch sieve Density Application Density Saturated Density Dry Density Water & Air Management (% vol.) saturated water capacity saturated air content Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity pH, Lime, and Salt Content pH (saturated paste) carbonate content salts content (water extract)

Organics OM content 6 12 mass % C/N ratio <20 Nutrients** (plant available) nitrogen (NO3) 3 15 phosphorus 17 potassium 6 15 calcium 19 65 magnesium 3 15 >6 cmol/kg CEC Capacity Compost Fraction 1) Meet or exceed USEPA Class A standard, 40 CFR 503.13, Tables 1 & 3 (chemical contaminants) and 40 CFR 503.32(a) (pathogens) and/or be permitted in the state of origin to produce Class A material. 2) Meet US Compost Council STA/TMECC criteria or equal for Class I or II stable, mature product. * Values shall be adjusted due to availability of local materials or special project conditions related to plant * Values shall be adjusted due to availability of local materials or special project conditions related to plant selection and/or environmental conditions. ** Nutrients shall be adjusted with appropriate slow-release fertilizer with micronutrient additions if below lower target range. 2. Expanded lightweight aggregate for use as fill material for drainage/water retention component as required. - American Hydrotech, Inc., LiteTop Lightweight Aggregate a. 3/8 - 3/4 (9.5 - 20 mm) expanded, lightweight aggregate
N.
Erosion Control Mat & Stakes (Edit to project requirements, consult Hydrotech) 1. Erosion Control Mat Composed of straw and/or coconut fiber stitched together with biodegradable thread forming top and bottom netting. - American Hydrotech, Inc., GardMatTM ST, ET, LT or P Stakes 100% biodegradable 4-inch organic plastic stakes used to fasten GardMat Erosion Control Mat - American Hydrotech, Inc. GardMatTM Stakes
2.
O.
Hardscape / Roof Ballast (Edit to project requirements) 1. Pavers a. Ballast Pavers - American Hydrotech, Inc., Ballast Pavers, meeting the following physical properties: TEST METHOD ASTM C140 ASTM C293 ASTM C140 ASTM C67 VALUES >7,000 psi average min. >600 psi average min. Not greater than 5% <1% loss/dry weight (50 cycles)
PROPERTY Compressive Strength Flexural Strength Water Absorption Freeze/Thaw

Centerload b.
Min. 1,750 lbs.
Architectural Finish Pavers - American Hydrotech, Inc., Architectural Pavers, meeting the following physical properties: TEST METHOD ASTM C140 ASTM C293 ASTM C140 ASTM C67 VALUES >7,000 psi average min. >600 psi average min. Not greater than 5% <1% loss/dry weight (50 Cycles) Min. 1,750 lbs.
PROPERTY Compressive Strength Flexural Strength Water Absorption Freeze/Thaw Centerload 2.
Stone Ballast Well screened and washed stone gravel meeting ASTM D-448-80, gradations #57, 2, 4 or 5 (as directed by Dow Chemical Company, TechNote 508 Ballast Design Guide for IRMA Roofs). Concrete Pour Topping Note to specifier: Dow Chemical Company, manufacturers of STYROFOAM Brand insulation, recommends the incorporation of an air layer between the insulation and concrete. Hydrotech suggests the use of Hydrodrain AL for this purpose.
3.
2.03 RELATED MATERIALS A. Plants desired shall be selected by the landscape architect/ designer in keeping with the overall plan intended. Metal counterflashing is typically required to provide protection to vulnerable flashing materials from damage due to gardening activities.
B.
PART III EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSPECTION The roofing contractor shall examine all surfaces to receive the roofing assembly to verify it is acceptable and proper for the application of the membrane. Refer to American Hydrotech's Pre-Installation & Application Guidelines. The roofing contractor shall not proceed with the installation of the roof membrane assembly until all roof defects have been corrected. PREPARATION All surfaces must be dry, smooth, free of depressions, voids, protrusions, clean and free of unapproved curing compounds, form release agents and other surface contaminants. (Edit to project requirements)
B. 3.02 A.

1.
Cast in-place concrete/Composite deck a. b. Poured in place concrete must be monolithic, smooth, free of voids, spalled areas, laitance, honeycombs, and sharp protrusions. Refer to Section 1.02 of this specification, Division 3.
2.
Precast concrete decks a. Precast units shall be mechanically secured to minimize differential movement and all joints between units shall be grouted.
3.
Plywood decks a. b. c. Minimum thickness of 1/2" (12.7 mm) is required with adequate structural support. Tongue and groove joint edges shall be required. Adequate number and type of fasteners shall be used to comply with applicable codes and maintain structural integrity.
4.
Metal Deck with Gypsum board a. b. Gypsum board (min. 5/8" thickness - 15.9 mm) must be fire rated type "X" board mechanically attached to minimum 22 gauge steel decking with adequate structural support. Adequate number and type of fasteners shall be used to comply with board manufacturers minimum requirements and applicable codes and maintain structural integrity.
5.
Re-Roof/Tear-Off Application a. b. Asphalt, coal tar pitch or other existing membrane must be removed. CONTACT Hydrotech. Deck type acceptable to Hydrotech.
B.
Substrate cleaning 1. 2. 3. Thoroughly sweep the substrate which is to receive the roof membrane. Substrate must also be blown clean using an air compressor to remove any remaining loose debris. Final check to determine if concrete has been properly cleaned is to apply a test patch of Monolithic Membrane 6125 to the surface and check its adhesion.
3.03 A.
INSTALLATION Surface conditioner application (to concrete) 1. 2. Apply the surface conditioner only to concrete using a hand held sprayer evenly at a rate of 300 to 600 SF/gallon (7.4 - 14.7 m2/L) depending on surface texture. Surface conditioner shall "tan" the surface, not blacken it. Allow sufficient time for the surface conditioner to thoroughly dry prior to the membrane application.

B.
Membrane preparation 1. The membrane shall be heated in double jacketed, oil bath or hot air melter with mechanical agitation, specifically designed for the preparation of a rubberized asphalt membrane. Heat membrane until membrane can be drawn-free flowing at a temperature range between 350F (176C) and 375F (190C).
2. C.
Detailing/Flashing 1. 2. 3. All detailing and flashing shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's standard guideline details. All detailing and flashing shall be completed before installing the membrane over the field of the substrate. Substrate board joints shall be pre-detailed with membrane and fabric reinforcing prior to full membrane application.
D.
Membrane Application 1. Apply the rubberized asphalt membrane at a rate to provide a continuous, monolithic coat of 90 mil minimum (approximately 2.3 mm), into which is fully embedded a layer of the spunbonded polyester fabric reinforcing sheet, followed by another continuous monolithic coat of membrane at an average thickness of 125 mil (approx. 3.2 mm). Total membrane thickness is to be 215 mils average (approx. 5.5 mm), 180 mils minimum. Overlap fabric reinforcing sheet 1-2 inches (25.4 mm - 50.8 mm) with membrane between sheets. Pre-detailing of joints between plywood and gypsum board decks is required for warranties greater than 10 years.
2. 3. 3.04 A.
SEPARATION/PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION Separation/Protection course shall be installed as follows: (Edit to project requirements) 1. Embed the Hydroflex RB protection/root barrier protection course into the membrane while it is still hot to insure a good bond. a. Overlap adjoining sheet edges 4 (100 mm) and seal the laps with a propane torch. Embed the Hydroflex 30 separation/protection course into the membrane while it is still hot to insure a good bond. Installation of a separation course is necessary in order to carry out the water test. a. Overlap adjoining sheet edges (dry) a minimum of 2"-3" (50.8 mm 76.2 mm) to insure complete coverage.
2.

3.05 A.
WATER TEST The roof area or portions thereof shall be leak tested by means of electronic testing or by ponding water at a minimum depth of 2" (50.8 mm) for a period of 48 hours to check the integrity of the membrane installation. VERIFY that the structure can support the deadload weight of a watertest before testing. If leaks should occur the water must be drained completely and the membrane installation repaired. GARDEN ROOF COMPONENTS INSTALLATION Root Barrier Protection. 1. 2. Where Hydroflex RB was previously installed, no additional root protection is required. Root Stop shall be laid over previously installed Hydroflex 30, lapping adjacent sheets 5 feet (1.5 m), or 1 foot (300 mm), overlap is acceptable if Seam Tape is used. The Root Stop shall be turned up all vertical, roofed/flashed surfaces to completely protect waterproofing and flashings.
B. C. 3.06 A.
B.
Insulation. Where specified, STYROFOAM brand insulation shall be installed loose-laid in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Air Layer. When insulation and Moisture Mat are specified an air layer is required between the surface of the insulation and the water retention mat. A layer of Hydrodrain AL or 300 shall be installed over the insulation. The 4 inch (100 mm) salvage edge of the geotextile fabric overlaps adjoining sheets and can be held in place with duct tape. Moisture Mat. Where specified, a layer of Moisture Mat shall be installed over the root barrier (when no insulation is specified) or air layer/ insulation, lapping adjacent rolls a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). The Moisture Mat shall be turned up all vertical, roofed/flashed surfaces a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) beyond the anticipated soil level. Any excess shall be trimmed down to the level of the soil. Drainage/Water Retention Component. (Edit to project requirements) 1. Gardendrain GR30 or Gardendrain GR50, shall be installed with holes through the dimples on top, over the root barrier protection, water retention mat (if used) or STYROFOAM insulation (if used). Adjacent panels may be butt together or overlapped approximately 1 inch (25 mm). Gardendrain shall be cut to fit around penetrations, etc. with a heavy-duty utility knife or small toothed saw. The cups of the Gardendrain shall be filled with lightweight aggregate level with the top surface of the panels where required due to loading conditions.
C.
D.
E.
2. F.
Filter Fabric. (Edit to project requirements) 1. A layer of SystemFilter shall be laid over the Gardendrain, lapping adjacent rolls a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Enough material shall be left to be drawn up above the

3.07 A.
anticipated soil level. Any excess shall be trimmed down to the level of the soil. a. For slopes 2:12 and <3:12 (approx. 10 - 15, 17 - 25%) filter fabric shall not be installed over the Garden Drain GR30 or GR50 throughout the field of the roof so that the growing media may be placed directly into the cups. Filter fabric shall be laid at penetrations, terminations, etc. HARD SCAPE/ACCESSORY INSTALLATION Stone and/or paver ballast shall be installed at all roof perimeters, building walls, penetrations, and access hatches and as required for flashing vegetation barriers, proper wind design, fire breaks, and as walkway/maintenance paths. a. Ballast design shall be in accordance with Dow Chemical Company TechNote 508 Ballast Design Guide for IRMA Roofs and other applicable codes or wind design guides.
B.
All drains shall be fitted with inspection/maintenance boxes and grills, built up to ensure access at soil level. SOIL INSTALLATION LiteTop soil shall be placed carefully to avoid damage or displacement of other materials such as walls, paving, drainage components, filter fabric, and roofing membrane. LiteTop soil shall be placed to within 1 inch greater than final grade or to a depth of no greater than 8 inches and compacted as described in 3.08.C. below. For final grades less than 8 inches only one round of compaction shall be performed and remaining soil loosely placed such that top of soil exceeds final grade by 1 inch (see 3.08.D. below). For final grades greater than 8 inches, place soil at no greater than 6 inches and repeat procedure until soil has been compacted within 1 inch of final grade. Compaction shall be performed with a 200 300 lb. landscape roller or lightly compacted with a hand held mechanical compactor to achieve a 50 60 % compaction as determined by ASTM D1557. After compaction remaining soil shall be placed at 1 inch greater than final grade and thoroughly watered or jetted over entire area. Low settled areas shall be filled with additional soil and re-wet to achieve uniform prescribed final grade. Erosion Control Mat. (Edit to project requirements) 1. The erosion control mat shall be installed directly over the growing media and properly staked into place. a. Stake fastening pattern is based on local wind speed, building height and roof slope. CONTACT Hydrotech for specific guidelines.
3.08 A. B.
C.
D.
E.
3.09 A.
VEGETATION INSTALLATION Supply and install specified vegetation strictly in accordance with the landscape architect/designers instructions, plans and good practice.

END OF SECTION

MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR APPLICATION: ASSEMBLY: WATERPROOFING FABRIC REINFORCED 215 MILS
LONG FORM SPECIFICATION PART I GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY This specification serves as a guideline and shall be adapted to suit the needs of each individual project by the architect. It is prepared in accordance with the CSI three-part section format and shall be included as a separate section under DIVISION 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection. Improvements and other changes to the contents shall be made only with the written approval of the architect. RELATED SECTIONS (Edit to project requirements) DIVISION 2 - Sitework [Section 02500/02870] - Paving/Site Furnishings as supplied by American Hydrotech, Inc. See Division 7 for specific details. DIVISION 3 - Concrete [Section 03300] - Deck Surface/Substrate The coordination of this section is necessary to facilitate the successful installation of the waterproofing membrane. Cast In Place Concrete/Composite Deck A. B. C. minimum 2,500 psi (17,235 kPa) compressive strength minimum 115 pcf (1842 kg/m3) density Finish: Wood-float or wood-troweled equivalent finish. Steel troweled is not desirable. Concrete Hydration (Cure): 1. 2. Method of Cure: Water cure, wet coverings, paper sheets, plastic sheets or approved liquid curing compound (sodium silicate preferred). Contact Hydrotech for other alternatives. Duration of Cure/Dry: a. Structural Weight Concrete: recommend 28 days, minimum 14 days, prior to application of the membrane. b. Lightweight Structural Concrete: recommend 60 days, minimum 28 days, prior to application of membrane. Venting of the deck from the underside is recommended to facilitate drying. Strength/density:
1.02 A. B.
6 copyright
07925-1
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR c. The above minimum cure/dry times are recommended based upon basic concrete fundamentals and experience. Depending on conditions (i.e., ambient temperature, humidity) the concrete may be dry enough to receive application of the membrane in less than the 14 day minimum recommendation. Consult Hydrotech for specifics when less than the minimum is desired. Form Release Agents: Contact Hydrotech
3.
*REFER TO SECTION 3.02 PREPARATION, FOR ADDITIONAL SUBSTRATE TYPES*
1.03 A. B. 1.04 A.
REFERENCES American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Canadian Government Specification Board CGSB-37.50-M89, Standard for "Asphalt, Rubberized, Hot Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing." SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Furnish and install a completed vertical or horizontal waterproofing assembly including surface conditioner, a monolithic, reinforced rubberized asphalt membrane, protection course, flashings, extruded polystyrene insulation (if required), drainage course (if required) and pavers (if required). To ensure total system compatibility all products shall be purchased from a single-source manufacturer. SUBMITTALS Certification from an approved independent testing laboratory experienced in testing this type material, that the material meets the CGSB-37.50-M89 standard for rubberized asphalt membranes, including applicable ASTM procedures. Testing shall be done by Ortech International or other national testing laboratory acceptable to the engineer. Certification showing full time quality control of production facilities and that each batch of material is tested to insure conformance with the manufacturer's published physical properties. Evidence that extruded polystyrene insulation is free from CFC's. Certification showing that all waterproofing components are being supplied and warranted by a single-source manufacturer. The plant manufacturing this type material shall have ISO 9001-2000 approval as evidenced by a copy of the official certificate. QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Section 1.05 SUBMITTALS. Include items A., B., C. & D.
1.05 A.
B.
C. D. E. 1.06 A.
6 copyright
07925-2
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR B. The Waterproofing Contractor shall demonstrate qualifications to perform the work of this Section by submitting the following documentation: 1. Certification or license by the membrane manufacturer as a locally based, authorized applicator of the product the installer intends to use, for a minimum of five (5) years. List of at least three (3) projects, satisfactorily completed within the past five (5) years, of similar scope and complexity to this project. Previous experience submittal shall correspond to specific membrane system proposed for use by applicator. Include single-source for all
2.
C. D. E.
Refer to Section 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION. components from the manufacturer.
The rubberized asphalt membrane product shall contain an inert clay filler to enable the product to be resistant to acids (fertilizers, building washes and acid rain). Membrane Manufacturer shall have available an in-house technical staff to assist the contractor, when necessary, in application of the products and final inspection of the assembly. Membrane Manufacturer Qualification: Manufacturer shall demon-strate qualifications to supply materials of this section by certifying the following: 1. Membrane Manufacturer shall show evidence that the specified rubberized asphalt has been manufactured by the same source for fifteen (15) years and successfully installed on a yearly basis for a minimum of fifteen (15) years on projects of similar scope and complexity. Membrane Manufacturer shall not issue warranties for terms longer than they have been manufacturing their hot fluid rubberized asphalt membrane.
F.
2. G.
Pre-Construction Conferences. The manufacturer will meet with the necessary parties at the jobsite to review and discuss project conditions as it relates to the integrity of the waterproofing assembly. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials in original unopened containers of packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, instruction for use and all identifying numbers. Materials shall be stored in a neat, safe manner, not to exceed the allowable structural capacity of the storage area. Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight. Store all adhesives at temperatures between 60F (15.5C) and 80F (26.6C). If exposed to lower temperatures, restore materials to 60F (15.5C) minimum temperature before using. 07925-3 MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR
1.07 A. B. C. D.
copyright
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR 1.08 A. B. C. D. E. PROJECT CONDITIONS Application of the membrane shall not commence nor proceed during inclement weather. All surfaces to receive the membrane shall be free of water, dew, frost, snow and ice. Application of membrane shall not commence nor proceed when the ambient temperature is below 0F (-17.7C). Preparation and application of membrane shall be conducted in well ventilated areas. Over its service life, do not expose membrane or accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180F (82C) (i.e., hot pipes and vents or direct steam venting, etc.). Adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are extremely flam-mable. Do not breathe vapors or use near an open fire. Do not use in confined areas without adequate ventilation. Consult container or packaging labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety information. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat, etc.) to come in contact with the waterproofing membrane. Any exposure to foreign materials or chemical discharges shall be presented to membrane manufacturer or evaluation to determine any impact on the waterproof membrane assembly performance. Concrete Deck/Wall Surface Condition. Sections. IMPORTANT - Refer to 1.02 Related
F.
G. H. I. 1.09 A. B. C.
Deck/Wall Preparation; refer to Section 3.02 Preparation. General contractor shall assure adequate protection during installation of the waterproofing assembly. WARRANTY Upon completion of the work, the contractor shall supply the owner with a single-source warranty of U.S. origin direct from the manufacturer. Each warranty varies in scope and terms. Contact Hydrotech for exact warranty terms and conditions to meet the specific project requirements. Warranties available from the manufacturer: (Edit to project requirements) 1. 2. 3. Material Warranties; excludes labor. Duration: 2-, 5-, 10-year Watertightness Warranties; includes labor and material. Duration: 5-, 10-year Thermal Warranties; includes 80% retention of the original thermal value. Duration 5-, 10-year 07925-4 MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR
6 copyright
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR 4. Total System Warranties; covers components of the waterproofing assembly, including membrane, flashing, insulation and pavers. Includes removal and replacement of the pedestal installed pavers when installed per Hydrotech's requirements. a. b. c. Duration of Membrane/Flashing: 5-, 10-year (watertight condition) Duration of Insulation: 5-, 10-year (80% of original thermal value) Duration of Pavers: 5-, 10-year (crack, split or disintegrate due to freeze-thaw)
**CONTACT HYDROTECH FOR EXACT WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDITIONS.** PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 A. GENERAL Refer to Section 1.04, System Description. All components shall be obtained as a single-source from the membrane manufacturer to ensure total system compatibility and integrity. Manufacturer: American Hydrotech, Inc. 303 East Ohio Street Chicago, Illinois 60611-3318 1/800-877-6125 or 1/312-337-4998 FAX: 312-661-0731 Web Site: http://www.hydrotechusa.com
2.02 A.
MATERIALS Membrane 1. Membrane shall be a hot, fluid applied, rubberized asphalt membrane meeting the CGSB-37.50-M89 standard and other pertinent physical properties: (Edit to project requirements) a. American Hydrotech, Inc., Monolithic Membrane 6125 b. American Hydrotech, Inc., Monolithic Membrane 6125-EV (25% post consumer recycled content)
6 copyright
07925-5
PROPERTY Flash point Penetration Flow Toughness Ratio of Toughness to Peak Load
TEST METHOD ASTM D-92 CGSB-37.50-M89 ASTM D-5329 CGSB-37.50-M89 ASTM D-5329 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89
TYPICAL RESULT 502F* (261C) <500F (260C)
98 mm @77F (25C) 187 mm @122F (50C) 1.0 mm @ 140F (60C) 16.0 Joules 0.069
Water Vapor Permeability Water Absorption Low Temperature Flexibility (25C) Low Temperature Crack Bridging Capability Heat Stability
ASTM E-96, PROCEDURE E 0.3 ng/Pa(s)M2 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89 .11 gram weight gain No delamination, adhesion loss, or cracking No cracking, adhesion loss, or splitting No change in viscosity, penetration, flow or low temperature flexibility 11.0 seconds No delamination, blistering, emulsification, or deterioration
CGSB-37.50-M89
Viscosity Water Resistance (5 days/50C)
CGSB-37.50-M89 CGSB-37.50-M89
Softening Point Elongation
ASTM D-36 ASTM D-5329
180F (82C) 1000% minimum
6 copyright
07925-6
Resiliency Bond to Concrete Acid Resistance
ASTM D-3407 ASTM D-3407 ASTM D-896 Procedure 7.1 (N-8)
40% minimum Pass 0F (-18C) Pass-50% Nitric Acid -50% Sulfuric Acid 100 psi (equals 231 foot of head water) No delamination, blistering, emulsification or deterioration No delamination, blistering, emulsification or deterioration No deterioration 100%-no solvents 10 years (sealed) 1.23 + .02
Resistance to Hydrostatic Pressure ASTM D-08.22 Draft 2 Resistance to Salt Water ASTM D-896 similar 20% sodium chloride sodium carbonate calcium chloride ASTM D-896 similar undiluted, 15/5/5, nitrogen/phosphorus potash 3-year exposure
Resistance to Fertilizer
Resistance to Animal Waste Solids Content Shelf Life Specific Gravity
*102F more than the application temperature recommended by the manufacturer. B. Surface Conditioner 1. Asphaltic surface conditioner for concrete surfaces. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Surface Conditioner
6 copyright
07925-7
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR C. Flashing/Reinforcing (Edit to project requirements) 1. 2. 3. D. 60-mil (1.5 mm) thick, uncured neoprene flashing/(heavy duty) reinforcing sheet. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash UN Spunbonded polyester fabric (standard duty) reinforcing sheet. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash F Woven fiberglass fabric reinforcing sheet (vertical applications only) - American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash FV (vertical)
Adhesives/Sealant 1. 2. 3. Contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing together. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Splicing Cement Contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing to an approved substrate. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Bonding Adhesive Sealant to seal elastomeric flashing seam edge. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Lap Sealant
E.
Protection Course (Edit to project requirements) 1. 2. 3. Fiberglass reinforced rubberized asphalt sheet. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydroflex 30 Extruded polystyrene, rigid, insulating, drainage board (vertical applications only) - American Hydrotech, Inc., Thermaflo Extruded polystyrene, rigid, insulation board (vertical applications only) - STYROFOAM brand insulation as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Company, marketed by American Hydrotech, Inc., Protection Board, SM, RM
**Certain project conditions may warrant additional protection. CONTACT Hydrotech** F. Prefabricated Drainage Course (if required) (Edit to project requirements) 1. Composite drainage system consisting of a three-dimensional, crush-proof, drainage core and a filter fabric meeting the following physical properties. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydrodrain 300, 400, 700 or 1000 series
6 copyright
07925-8
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR PROPERTY CORE: Compressive Strength TEST METHOD ASTM D-1621 VALUES 300/302/1000 - 30,000 psf (14.66 kg/cm2) 400/420 - 15,000 psf (7.32 kg/cm2) 700 - 18,000 psf (8.79 kg/cm2) 1000 - .25 in (.64 cm) 300/302 - .22 in (.56 cm) 400/420/700 - .40 in (1.016 cm) 300/1000 - 7 gpm/ft width (72.00 lpmin/m width) 302 - 5.5 gpm/ft width (68.30 lpmin/m width) 400/420 - 15 gpm/ft width (183.3 lpmin/m width) 700 - 18 gpm/ft width (223.52 lpmin/m width) 300/302/1000 - 150 gpm/ft2 (6105 lpmin/m2) 400/420 - 150 gpm/ft2 (6105 lpmin/m2) 700 - 110 gpm/ft2 (4475 lpmin/ft2) Fully Stabilized 300/302/400/420/1000 70 (.212mm) 700 30 (.60 mm) 300/302/400/420/1000 - 90 lbs. (0.4 kN) 700 360x260 lbs. (445x355 N)
Thickness
ASTM D-1777
Flow, Q @ 3600 psf & hydraulic gradient of 1
ASTM D-4716
FABRIC: Flow
ASTM D-4491
U.V. Resistance Apparent Opening Size (EOS) Grab Tensile
ASTM D-4355 CW-02215 ASTM D-4632
2. G. OMITTED H.
Extruded polystyrene, rigid, insulating, drainage board (vertical applications only) - American Hydrotech, Inc., Thermaflo
Filter Fabric Sheet (if required) 1. Water permeable polymeric fabric. - American Hydrotech, Inc., Filter Fabric Sheet
6 copyright
07925-9
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR I. Topping Materials (Edit to project requirements) 1. Pavers a. Architectural Finish Pavers - American Hydrotech, Inc., Architectural Pavers, meeting the following physical properties: TEST METHOD ASTM C140 ASTM C293 ASTM C140 ASTM C67 VALUES >8,500 psi average min. >1,100 psi average min. Not greater than 5% <1% loss/dry weight (50 Cycles) Min. 1,750 lbs.
PROPERTY Compressive Strength Flexural Strength Water Absorption Freeze/Thaw Centerload b.
Paver Accessories 1. Fixed Height pedestals as recommended by American Hydrotech, Inc. 2. Adjustable Height pedestals as recommended by American Hydrotech, Inc.
2.
Concrete Pour Topping
Note to specifier: Dow Chemical Company, manufacturers of STYROFOAM Brand insulation, recommends the incorporation of an air layer between the insulation and concrete. Hydrotech suggests the use of Hydrodrain AL for this purpose. CONTACT Hydrotech for specific recommendations. 3. Asphalt Paving Overlay
Note to specifier: When asphalt paving will be placed directly over the waterproofing, CONTACT Hydrotech for suggestions and recommendations. PART III EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSPECTION The waterproofing contractor shall examine all surfaces to receive the waterproofing assembly to verify it is acceptable and proper for the application of the membrane. Refer to American Hydrotech's Pre-Installation & Application Guidelines. The waterproofing contractor shall not proceed with the installation of the waterproofing membrane assembly until all deck defects have been corrected. PREPARATION All surfaces shall be dry, smooth, free of depressions, voids, protrusions, clean and free of unapproved curing compounds, form release agents and other surface contaminants. 07925-10 MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR
B. 3.02 A.
6
copyright
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR 1. Cast in-place concrete (slab or wall)/Composite deck a. Poured in place concrete shall be monolithic, smooth, free of voids, spalled areas, laitance, honeycombs, and sharp protrusions. b. Refer to Section 1.02 of this specification, Division 3. Precast concrete decks a. Precast units shall be mechanically secured to minimize differential movement and all joints between units shall be grouted. b. Joints shall be pre-detailed with membrane and fabric reinforcing prior to full membrane application.
2.
B.
Retrofit/Tear-Off Application a. Asphalt, coal tar pitch or other existing membrane shall be removed. CONTACT Hydrotech. b. Deck type acceptable to Hydrotech. Substrate cleaning 1. Thoroughly sweep the substrate which is to receive the waterproofing membrane. 1. 2. Substrate shall also be blown clean using an air compressor to remove any remaining loose debris. Final check to determine if concrete has been properly cleaned is to apply a test patch of Monolithic Membrane 6125 to the surface and check its adhesion.
3.
3.03 A.
INSTALLATION Surface conditioner application (to concrete) 1. Apply the surface conditioner to the concrete using a hand held sprayer evenly at a rate of 300 to 600 SF/gallon (7.4 - 14.7 m2/L) depending on surface texture. Surface conditioner shall "tan" the surface, not blacken it. Allow sufficient time for the surface conditioner to thoroughly dry prior to the membrane application.
2. B.
Membrane preparation 1. The membrane shall be heated in double jacketed, oil bath or air jacketed melter with mechanical agitation, specifically designed for the preparation of a rubberized asphalt membrane. Heat membrane until membrane can be drawn-free flowing at a temperature range between 350F (176C) and 400F (204C).
2.
Note to specifier: Upper limit heating temperature for MM 6125-EV shall be 375F (190C).
6 copyright
07925-11
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR C. Detailing/Flashing 1. 2. 3. D. All detailing and flashing shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's standard guideline details. All detailing and flashing shall be completed before installing the membrane over the field of the substrate. Substrate board joints shall be pre-detailed with membrane and fabric reinforcing prior to full membrane application.
Membrane Application 1. Apply the rubberized asphalt membrane at a rate to provide a continuous, monolithic coat of 90 mil minimum (approximately 2.3 mm), into which is fully embedded a layer of the spunbonded polyester fabric reinforcing sheet, followed by another continuous monolithic coat of membrane at an average thickness of 125 mil (approx. 3.2 mm). Total membrane thickness shall be 215 mils average (approx. 5.5 mm), 180 mils minimum.
Note to specifier: For foundation wall application woven fiberglass, fabric reinforcing sheet shall be used in lieu of spunbonded polyester. 2. Overlap fabric reinforcing sheet 1-2 inches (25.4 mm - 50.8 mm) with membrane between sheets. 3.04 A. SEPARATION/PROTECTION LAYER INSTALLATION Protection layer shall be installed as follows: 1. 2. Embed the protection sheet/rigid insulation board into the membrane while it is still hot to insure a good bond. Overlap adjoining sheet edges (dry) a minimum of 2"-3" (50.8 mm - 76.2 mm) to insure complete coverage. Rigid insulation board materials shall not to be overlapped. The completed membrane/protection assembly shall be covered with subsequent topping materials as soon as possible, within 30 days of membrane installation.
3. 3.05 A.
WATER TEST The deck area or portions thereof shall be water tested by means of electronic testing or ponding water to a minimum depth of 2" (50.8 mm) for a period of 48 hours to check the integrity of the membrane installation. VERIFY that the structure can support the deadload weight of a watertest before testing. If leaks should occur, the water shall be drained completely and the membrane installation repaired.
07925-12
B. C.
6 copyright
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR 3.06 A. DRAINAGE COURSE/INSULATION/FILTER FABRIC SHEET/PAVER PLACEMENT General 1. Contractor shall examine the deck area to be covered with subsequent topping materials in order to insure that all deck areas have received the membrane, the membrane is free of damage, it is properly protected, and all flashing has been properly installed, before placing the insulation. The drainage course (if required), insulation (if required), and other subsequent topping materials shall be installed as each section is completed.
2. B.
Prefabricated Drainage Course Placement (if required) 1. 2. 3. 4. Install drainage course on horizontal and vertical surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Layout and position drainage course and allow to lay flat. Cut and fit drainage course to perimeter and penetrations. Bond all geotextile overlap edges to adjacent drainage course geotextile with an acceptable adhesive to insure geotextile integrity. Place subsequent topping materials as soon as possible.
C.
Note to specifier: If drainage layer is being installed as an AIR LAYER, placement of the drainage course follows installation of insulation (if required). CONTACT Hydrotech. Insulation Placement (if required) 1. Loose lay (horizontal applications) in a staggered manner and tightly butt together all insulation boards. The maximum acceptable opening between insulation boards is 3/8" (9.5 mm). Insulation shall be installed within 3/4" (19 mm) of all projections, penetrations, etc. When multi-layer insulation applications are involved the bottom layer of insulation shall be the thickest layer and shall be a minimum of 2" thick (50.8 mm). All layers shall be installed unadhered to each other and all joints in relation to underlying layers staggered. For vertical, multi-layer applications, second layer of insulation board shall be spot adhered to the protection layer with appropriate adhesive or additional rubberized asphalt membrane.
2.
3.
D.
Architectural Finish Paver Placement (if required) 1. Install architectural finish pavers on tabs or pedestals in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and architectural layout.
6 copyright
07925-13
MONOLITHIC MEMBRANE 6125-FR Note to specifier: Fabric is not required under full paver installations, however, may be desirable to mask insulation color at joints between pavers. 2. Black, fabric-covered insulation shall not be left exposed in ambient temperatures greater than or equal to 90F. Measures to maintain temperatures at insulation surface below 165F shall be implemented.
3.07 A.
JOB COMPLETION Contractor and a representative of the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the waterproofing assembly and notify the contractor of any defects. All defects shall be corrected. Clean up all debris and equipment.
B.
END OF SECTION
6 copyright
07925-14
SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 1.00 A.
GENERAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of the Specifications. WORK INCLUDED Provide steel doors and frames and related items as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to, the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames.
1.01 A.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 09910, PAINTING; Field finishing of steel doors and frames.
1.03 A.
DEFINITIONS Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions specified herein, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Elevations of each door design. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of each different wall opening condition. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
1.04 A.
B.
08110 - 1
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
C.
Coordination Drawings: Drawings of each opening, including door and frame, drawn to scale and coordinating door hardware. Show elevations of each door design type, showing dimensions, locations of door hardware, and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory-finished doors and frames. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. QUALITY ASSURANCE Steel Door and Frame Standard: requirements are indicated. Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent
D.
E.
1.06 A.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled firerated door assemblies except for size. 3. Temperature-Rise Rating: Labeled fire doors within an interior exitway stairway shall have a label indicating a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450F. above ambient at the end of 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Source Limitations: Obtain custom steel doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factoryfinished doors and frames. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a
D.
1.07 A.
B.
C.
08110 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. 1.08 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating custom steel frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.09 A. COORDINATION Coordinate installation of anchorages for custom steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.02 A. Amweld Building Products, Inc. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. Curries Company. Kewanee Corporation (The). Pioneer Industries Inc. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
PART 2 2.01 A.
MATERIALS Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
C.
D.
E.
08110 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching custom steel door frames of type indicated. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of 4 inches (102 mm) for custom steel door frames built into concrete or masonry, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. STEEL DOORS General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs specified herein. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 Seamless, with face thickness of minimum 0.042 in. thick (18 gage). 2.04 A. FRAMES General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Frames of 0.053-inch (16 Gage) thick steel sheet for: a. Interior door openings less than 48 inches. 2. Frames of 0.067-inch (15 Gage) thick steel sheet for: a. Interior door openings more than 48 inches. B. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch (18 Gage) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
G.
H.
I.
2.03 A. B.
C.
D.
08110 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. FABRICATION General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the following material: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. C. Core Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials that produce a door complying with SDI standards: 1. Vertical steel stiffeners. D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge, unless beveled edge is indicated. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers (if any), provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. K. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.
2.05 A.
B.
E. F. G.
H.
I.
J.
08110 - 5
O.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. FINISHES General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish steel door and frames after assembly.
P.
2.06 A.
B.
Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm). 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 4 For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames. 5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
B.
08110 - 6
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 6. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.02 A. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
B.
END OF SECTION
08110 - 7
SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces. 2. Hollow core Panel doors.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. Section 08411, ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS. Section 08800, GLAZING. Section 09910, PAINTING; Painting and finishing of doors in field.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A208.1 Mat Formed Wood Particle Board
2. American National Standards Institute/National Wood Window and Door Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NWWDA): I.S. 1 Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E 152 Fire Tests for Door Assemblies
4. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards Architectural Woodwork, Guide Specification and Quality Certification Standards
08210 - 1
WOOD DOORS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Window
6. National Wood Window and Door Manufacturer's Association (NWWDA): Ref. 1 How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating location and size of each door, details of construction, elevations for each door type, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data. Samples: Submit cutaway door samples to Architect for approval showing core construction, cross banding, and face veneer of each door type. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, details of core and edge construction, fire test results, trim for openings and louvers, complete installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. QUALITY ASSURANCE Doors shall conform to ANSI/NWWDA I.S. 1 and AWI Quality Standards Section 1300-G-3. Mark each flush door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with ANSI/NWWDA I.S. 1. FIRE-RATING REQUIREMENTS Doors indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label shall bear a UL label of Class and hour-rating scheduled on Drawings. Fire-rated doors and frame assemblies shall conform to requirements of NFPA 80. Provide certification that labeled doors provide maximum heat transmission of 250oF. in 30 min. Test methods shall conform to ASTM E 152.
B.
C.
1.05 A. B.
1.06 A.
B.
1.07 A.
WARRANTIES Provide written manufacturer's warranties in Owner's name for materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in published product data, in addition to, and not instead of, other liabilities established by law and other provisions of Contract Documents. Include, but do not limit to, standard manufacturer's warranties as follows: 1. Life of installation for solid core flush interior doors; 2. One year for hollow core interior doors;
B.
08210 - 2
WOOD DOORS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.08 A. PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING Doors shall be properly packaged by manufacturer and fully protected during shipment, unloading, and storage, in conformance with NWMA Ref. 1. Doors shall not be delivered to job site until building has thoroughly dried out. Doors shall be stored flat, above floors, in dry area(s) until installation. Doors shall be stored and hung in buildings that maintain a humidity range of between 30 and 60%. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Interior flush-type mineral core fire-rated wood doors shall be as manufactured by Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Marshfield Door System Company; Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division; or approved equal. Non-rated interior hollow core wood doors shall be as manufactured by Algoma Hardwoods Inc.; Marshfield Door System Company; Masonite, Inc.; or approved equal. SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS General: AWI PC-5 construction as specified in AWI Quality Standards Section 1300-G-3. Core, stiles, and rails shall be glued together before sanding. Wood for stiles and rails shall be thoroughly seasoned, kiln-dried stock with 5% to 8% moisture content. 1. Core for non-fire-rated doors shall be 28 to 32 lb./cu. ft., Grade 1-L-1 particleboard conforming to ANSI A208.1, consisting of wood particles bonded together with synthetic resins, except as specified otherwise. 2. Core for fire-rated doors shall be manufacturer's standard mineral core conforming to ANSI A208.1, Algoma Weldrok core, or approved equal. 3. Core for stave core doors shall be lumber staves, edgeglued, kiln-dried softwood lumber of single species, with horizontal joints staggered in contiguous rows. 4. Crossbands shall be 1/16 in. thick hardwood, full width of door, with grain at right angle to face veneer grain. 5. Veneers for painted finish shall be at least 1/50 in. thick medium density overlay phenolic resin impregnated cellulose fiber sheet, bonded to 1/16 in. hardwood crossband backing, and adhered to core, rail and stile by hot-press method, suitable for painted finish as specified in Section 09900, PAINTING. B. Mineral Core Flush Wood Fire-Rated Doors: Flush wood-faced mineral core doors, 1-3/4 in. thick, five-ply, with crossbanding and face veneers bonded to both faces, of fire-rated construction, equal to Superstile Edge Architectural Wood Composite Fire Door manufactured by Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. or approved equal doors by above listed manufacturers. Provide blocking for hardware so that screws fasten into hardwood for entire length. Furnish UL Label of indicated Class and Hour rating affixed to hinge jamb of each door. Provide loose glazing stops as required for use under Section 08800, GLASS AND GLAZING.
B.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B.
2.02 A.
08210 - 3
WOOD DOORS
C.
Solid Core Flush Interior Wood Doors: Flush type, Algoma Grade Novodor of five-ply construction with crossband and veneers bonded to both faces. Doors shall be 1-3/4 in. thick. HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOORS Hollow Core Interior Wood Doors: Shall be type as detailed, 1-3/8 in. thick, standard hollow core. 1. Veneers for painted finish shall be medium density overlay phenolic resin impregnated cellulose fiber sheet, bonded to 1/16 in. hardwood crossband backing, and adhered to core, rail and stile by hot-press method, suitable for painted finish.
2.03 A.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver wood doors to Project site. Protect during shipment to prevent damage. Store in interior areas fully protected from moisture and damage. COORDINATION Examine steel door frame installations. Verify that frames meet tolerances and other requirements of wood door manufacturer, for type, size, and swing characteristics. Submit list of conditions detrimental to wood door installation and do not begin door installation until such conditions are corrected. PREPARATION Condition doors to ambient temperature and humidity at points of installation before hanging. Supervise sealing of wood doors in field under Section 09910, PAINTING. PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE Prefit and premachine wood doors at factory. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI Quality Standards for prefitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors with templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame submittals and other information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. Clearances shall be as follows: Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. 1. Non-rated doors: provide clearances of 1/8 in. at jambs and heads; 1/16 in. per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8 in. from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 in. clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
3.02 A.
B.
3.03 A.
B. 3.04 A. B.
C.
08210 - 4
WOOD DOORS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. For fire-rated doors, provide clearances complying with NFPA 80. 3. Bevel non-rated doors 1/8 in. in 2 in. at lock and hinge edges. 4. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 in. in 2 in. in lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 3.05 A. INSTALLATION Installations shall conform to approved submittals, including manufacturer's published instructions, to AWI Quality Standards, and to NWWDA Ref. 1 recommendations. Fire door installation shall conform to NFPA 80. Hang doors plumb and true. Apply door hardware so that opening and closing movement of doors is smooth and free. PAINTING AND FINISHING Field painting and finishing will be provided under Section 09910, PAINTING. Ensure that doors are primed or sealed before installation. Paint or seal coats shall be dry before doors are installed. Finish work shall be sandpapered at field joints and where required by installation and shall be left in perfect conditions for finishing under Section 09910, PAINTING. Finish work shall conform to NWWDA Ref. 1 recommendations. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of primer or sealant and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating conditions, in coordination with work of hardware supplier. CLEAN-UP Remove cartons and debris as work progresses and leave work areas in broom clean conditions at completion of work of this Section. COMPLETION Before completion of work of this Section inspect work in company of Architect. Make adjustments and corrections to work leaving operating parts in perfect operating condition, jointing to adjacent material tight, surfaces without blemishes or stains, work properly executed and complete, and defects and damaged work replaced or corrected. Rehang or replace doors that cannot be made to operate properly, as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION
B.
3.06 A.
B.
C. 3.07 A.
B.
C.
3.08 A.
3.09 A.
B.
08210 - 5
WOOD DOORS
SECTION 08332 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide overhead coiling grilles and related items. Provide complete operating assemblies including curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism, hardware, and accessories. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, rough-in and wiring diagrams, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide operating instructions and maintenance manuals. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work not fully described by manufacturer's product data. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by others. Field Measurements: Take accurate field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job progress. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Open-Curtain Grille: 18-inch- (457-mm-) square assembly with full-size components consisting of rods, spacers, and links as required to illustrate each assembly.
1.02 A.
B.
C.
D.
1.03 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. Source Limitations: manufacturer. Obtain overhead coiling grilles from single source from single
B.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling grille manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
D.
08332-1
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION Open-Curtain Grilles: Fabricate aluminum grille curtain as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are formed and spaced as indicated and are free to rotate on the rods. Endlocks: Continuous end links, chains, or other devices at ends of rods; locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintaining grille curtain alignment, and preventing lateral movement. Bottom Bar: match grille. Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, finished to
B.
C.
1. Astragal: Equip each grille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. 2. Provide motor-operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge. D. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 1. Removable Posts and Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard. 2.02 A. HOODS AND ACCESSORIES General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. Mounting Frame: Manufacturer's standard mounting frame designed to support grille; factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M structural-steel tubes or shapes, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 123/A 123M; fastened to floor and structure above grille; to be built into wall construction; and complete with anchors, connections, and fasteners. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated grille with lifting handles on each side of grille, finished to match grille. 1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for grilles more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high. 2.03 A. LOCKING DEVICES Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
B.
C.
B.
08332-2
1. Keys: Two for each cylinder. 2.04 A. COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM General: Counterbalance grilles by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of parts and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load. Spring Balance: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ALUMINUM FINISHES Anodized Aluminum: Provide manufacturers standard clear anodized finish. EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine locations of electrical connections. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.06 A.
B.
2.07 A. PART 3 3.01 A.
B. C.
08332-3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.02 A. INSTALLATION Install overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. Install overhead coiling grilles, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each grille. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling grilles, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. ADJUSTING Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that grilles operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles. END OF SECTION
B.
C.
3.03 A.
B. 3.04 A.
08332-4
SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide aluminum entrances and storefront work as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein, including, but not limited to the following: 1. 2. Entrance doors and frames. Vestibule doors and frames.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY; Wood blocking. Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. Section 08210, WOOD DOORS. Section 08800, GLAZING.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): GS001 Voluntary Guide Specifications for Aluminum Architectural Windows Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections
1502.7
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A117.1 Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People Door Controls (Closers)
A156.4
08411 - 1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 164 A 386 B 209 B 221 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Structural Performance Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors of Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
D 2287
E 283
E 330
E 331
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by others. Show interfaces and relationships to work of other trades. Field Measurements: Take necessary field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay progress of job. If field measurements are not possible prior to fabrication, allow for field cutting and fitting. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Source: For each material type required for work of this Section, provide primary materials which are products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. 08411 - 2 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.05 A.
B.
Installer: A firm with a minimum of three years experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Store under cover and protect from weather damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. WARRANTIES Special Product Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units (including reglazing) which fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration, faulty operation, and deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period for aluminum entrances and storefront is 3 years after the date of substantial completion.
1.06 A.
B. 1.07 A.
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Provide storefronts and entrance systems from one of the following manufacturers that meets or exceeds requirements of these specifications: 1. 2. Kawneer. EFCO
2.02 A.
MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES Aluminum Members: Provide 6063-T5 alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish. Comply with ASTM B 221 for extrusions, and ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate. Provide 0.125 in. thick extrusions for door stiles and storefront framing. Provide 0.050 in. thick aluminum for glazing moldings. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components. Exposed fasteners shall match finish of members and hardware being fastened. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum, or extruded aluminum, 0.062 in. minimum, of an alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components.
B.
C.
08411 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast-iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable stripping of molded neoprene or PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287. FABRICATION Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, including profile requirements, are indicated on Drawings. Any variable dimensions are indicated, together with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. Prefabrication: To greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible, in coordination with installation and hardware requirements. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes.
E.
F.
G.
2.03 A.
B.
2.
3.
C.
Welding: Comply with recommendations of American Welding Society to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator to prevent corrosion. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. Provide EPDM/vinyl blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
D.
E.
F. G.
H.
08411 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.04 A. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES Aluminum entrance doors shall be style and profiles as indicated on Drawings, factoryglazed aluminum doors with standard aluminum frames, manufactured by Kawneer, or approved equal. Aluminum entrance doors shall be stile and rail type swing doors. Aluminum shall be extruded aluminum conforming to ASTM B 221, 0.166 in. thick minimum for door stiles and 0.050 in. thick for glazing molding. 1. Sections shall be of sizes and profiles indicated; shall present straight, sharply defined lines and arrises; and shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability, and appearance. Fasteners where exposed shall be aluminum stainless steel or plated steel conforming to ASTM A 164.
B.
2.
C.
Each door shall be factory glazed with 1 in. thick, clear insulated tempered glass set in neoprene glazing gasket. Glass shall conform to requirements of Section 08800, GLAZING. STOREFRONT FRAMING Type: Storefront framing shall be Series 451T manufactured by Kawneer Company, Inc., or approved equal. General: Provide inside-outside matched resilient flush-glazed system with provisions for glass replacement. Shop fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate aluminum storefront framing system with integrally concealed, low conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members, in manner which eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. Provide manufacturer's standard construction which has been in use for similar projects for at least three years. Framing shall be glazed with 1 in. clear insulated glass or tempered glass (where required by law) meeting requirements of Section 08800, GLAZING. FINISH General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
2.05 A.
B.
C.
D.
2.06 A.
B.
C.
08411 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install aluminum entrance doors and storefront framing in openings prepared under other Sections plumb, square, level, in exact alignment with surrounding work, with proper clearances, and securely and positively anchored to building structure, in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and approved submittals. Use only skilled representative. mechanics for erection, under supervision of manufacturer's
B.
C.
Provide protection against galvanic action. Isolate dissimilar materials with bituminous coating or non-absorptive dielectric tape. Install aluminum entrance doors, storefront frame, and finish hardware. Carefully fit and adjust doors and hardware to frames and weatherstripping. After erection check and adjust operating hardware for smooth and proper operation. PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF ALUMINUM Protect finished metal surfaces from damage during fabrication, shipping, storage, and erection, and from then until acceptance by Owner. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage. Remove excess sealant, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF GLASS Replace glass that is broken, cracked or chipped prior to time of final acceptance of Project by Owner. END OF SECTION
D.
3.02 A.
B.
3.03 A.
08411 - 6
SECTION 08461 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 = 1.01 A.
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior and bi-parting-sliding, automatic entrance door assemblies.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY; Wood blocking. Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. Section 08210, WOOD DOORS. Division 16, ELECTRICAL.
1.03 A.
DEFINITIONS Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing. REFERENCES Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062, 847-272-8800, American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 11 W. 42nd St., 13th Floor, New York, NY 10036, 212-642-4900. Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA), 355 Lexington Ave., New York, NY 10017, 212-661-4261. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 800344-3555, 617-770-3000. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM), 1300 Sumner Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44115-2851, 216-241-7333.
B. 1.04 A. B.
C.
D.
E.
08461 - 1
AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc., 5360 Workman Mill Road, Whittier, CA 90601-2998, 562699-0543. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Structural Loads: 1. C. Wind Loads: 25 psf.
1.05 A.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide automatic entrance doors that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttimesky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): deg C), material surfaces. 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100
D. E.
Operating Range: Minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) to 130 deg F (54 deg C). Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 cfm/sq. ft. (6.4 L/s x sq. m)] of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). Opening-Force Requirements: 1. Egress Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
F.
2. G.
Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent door from closing. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by others. Show interfaces and relationships to work of other trades.
1.07 A.
B.
08461 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Field Measurements: Take necessary field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay progress of job. If field measurements are not possible prior to fabrication, allow for field cutting and fitting. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in. Product Certificates: For each type of emergency-exit automatic entrance door, signed by product manufacturer. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for automatic entrance door assemblies. Maintenance Data: For door operators and control systems to include in maintenance manuals. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
D.
E.
F.
G. H. I.
J.
K. 1.08 A.
1.
Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
C.
D.
E.
08461 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating automatic entrance door assemblies without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
G. H.
I.
1.09 A.
B.
Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks and recessed control mats that control automatic entrance doors. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. Templates: Obtain and distribute, to the parties involved, templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrance doors. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic entrance doors to comply with indicated requirements. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies and security access control system. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Store under cover and protect from weather damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. WARRANTIES Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrance door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
D.
1.10 A.
B. 1.11 A.
08461 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts a. b. c. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering or use.
2. B.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.12 A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance door assembly Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance door assembly operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Engage a certified inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair, and at end of maintenance period. Submit completed inspection form to Owner. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
2. 3. PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Basis-of-Design Product: The design for sliding automatic entrance doors is based on the "Unislide OC-S" overhead concealed, full breakout, narrow stile bi-parting sliding door system, as manufactured by Besam Automated Entrance Systems. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc. DORMA Automatics; Div. of DORMA Group North America. Horton Automatics; Div. of Overhead Door Corporation. Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works.
B.
Automatic Sliding Door System: Shall be Unislide OC-S (full breakout design). The system shall consist of glazed sliding aluminum door(s) with sidelight(s), header with belt drive operator, threshold / track with all activating and safety sensors. The system shall be completely engineered, manufactured and assembled by Besam Automated Entrances, Inc. All operator components shall be factory assembled within the header, fully adjusted and tested. Field wiring is not required; other than connection to job-site power. Door
08461 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts functions shall be in accordance with ANSI A156.10 and an AAADM compliance inspection shall be completed after the door system is completely installed, including glazing. B. Sliding Aluminum Doors: Provide door units to dimension heights and widths with corresponding glazing as shown on construction documents. Door opening restrictor arms shall be provided for all panels to control and limit the opening angle of the door(s) as they swing in the direction of egress. Glass stops for 1 in. (25mm) insulated glazing. All doors shall have standard 3.25 in. (83mm - including glass stops) intermediate muntin and 7.5 in. (190.5mm - including glass stop) bottom rail. The bi-part sliding door system shall include a two-point lock: one being secured at the lead edges of the door panels and the other to the carrier assembly above the locking stile. The door package shall include interlock clips that latch the sliding panel(s) to the sidelight panel(s) when the door system is in the fully closed position. The active sliding door shall be provided with a maximum security hookbolt lock, with a key cylinder on the exterior and a thumb turn on the interior in accordance with NFPA 101. Door Operation: Shall be bi-part slide. In compliance with NFPA 101, all panel(s) shall allow "breakout" to the full and open position to provide egress at any point in the door's movement or position. To allow safe egress, automatic operation shall be discontinued when any panel is in the "breakout" mode by way of a non-contact cut-off switch. Door(s) and sidelight(s) shall be sized and positioned to provide a minimum 0.75 in. (19mm) finger protection to prevent pinch points at the meeting stiles when fully opened. Aluminum Frame and Extrusions: Door panels shall be 1.75" (44mm) deep and all structural sections shall be .125" minimum thickness to properly self-support the functionality of the sliding door system. The framing materials [including the jambs and header] shall be 4.5" (114mm) deep. Sidelights: Provide sidelight door panel(s) to dimension height(s) and width(s) as shown on construction documents with corresponding glazing. All sidelights shall have standard intermediate 3.25" (82.5mm) overall muntin. The sidelights shall swing out and allow the sliding doors to break away to the full open position for egress at any point in the door's movement per NFPA 101. Header: Shall be 4.5" wide by 7.5" high (114 mm wide by 190.5 mm high), with a minimum wall thickness of .125", a 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy - capable of supporting door panels of 1 x 220 lbs. (single slide) or 2 x 190 lbs. (bi-part slide). All materials shall have a minimum wall thickness of .125". The header shall contain the door operator and door mounting components. The header cover shall have a continuous self-locking hinge design and open flush with the top of the header. The roller track shall be a separate extrusion from the header and sound dampened by separating the track from the header with an extruded EPDM rubber gasket. Door Hanger Wheels: Shall be 1.5" (44 mm) diameter Delrin wheels with self lubricating sealed ball bearing cores. The sliding door(s) shall be stabilized on the track by 1.625" (36mm) diameter anti-riser wheels. This assembly shall allow the sliding doors to freely swing outward for emergency egress. The door height shall have an upward or downward adjustment of 3/16" +/- (5mm) as required by field conditions. Threshold Track: Shall be required adjacent to the sidelight(s) (SO panels). [Continuous threshold is available - specify if required]. 08461 - 6 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Door Operator and Controller: Shall be manufacturers standard system powered by an electro-mechanical operator with microprocessor controller. The operator components shall consist of: a DC permanent magnet motor, a self lubricating drive system, wear-free digital rotary encoder all linked to [and managed by] a fully integrated digital microprocessor controller. Microprocessor Controller: The microprocessor controller is a fully integrated digital design that is self-learning and self-monitoring. Performance parameters shall not exceed applicable ANSI A156.10 and / or UL standards. The controller shall continuously monitor all critical door functions and safety sensors. All door functions - such as opening speed, closing speed, check locations, partial open dimensions, etc., shall be fully programmable without the use of limit switches. This shall be accomplished by utilizing a portable hand terminal connected to the microprocessor controller. Threshold Sensors: Shall be self-monitored active infrared safety sensors. The sensors shall be self-contained and fully functioning during the opening and closing cycle of the door Activation Sensor: Shall be motion sensor. The unit shall utilize K-band frequency (24.125 GHz) for improved detection of slow-moving pedestrian traffic, and shall be switchable between bi-directional and uni-directional operation. Circuitry is included to eliminate Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). The relay hold time shall be adjustable from 0.5 seconds to 9 seconds. The motion sensor shall be mounted to the header at 120" (3,048mm) maximum above the finished floor. Using the adjustable antenna the detection pattern shall be semi-circular. When installed at a height of 96" (2,438mm) and set at the highest sensitivity, the sensor can provide a "wide pattern set-up" of approximately 12'-0" wide by 6'-6" deep (3,658 x 1,981mm), or a "narrow pattern set-up" of approximately 6'-6" wide by 8'-0" deep (1,981 x 2,438mm). The location of the detection zone shall be adjustable by moving the antenna. Vertical antenna adjustments are possible from 0? to 90? in 15? increments and lateral adjustment from 30? left to 30? right and anywhere in between. The operational temperature range for the sensor is between 30?F (-35? C) to + 131? F (55?C). Power shall be provided by the microprocessor control. Electrical adjustments can be made with a universal coded infrared remote control. Accessories: The automatic sliding door system shall include the following accessories to reduce energy loss: track-in pile weather-stripping on the bottom of sliding door(s) and sidelight(s), track-in double pile weather-stripping on the sliding door lead edges, track-in single pile weather-stripping between the carrier and the header on the sliding door(s), track-in double pile weather-stripping at the interlock rails between sliding door(s) and sidelight door(s), track-in pile weather-stripping between sidelight door(s) and jamb(s). Interior side jamb mounted program switches consisting of: Main Switch = AUTO-OFFOPEN (operates door in fully automatic mode or turns it off or keeps it fully open), Exit Only Switch = OFF - ON (only the exit side motion detector will initiate door opening) and Partial Open Switch = OFF - ON (reduces the opening width according to weather and traffic conditions). MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 08461 - 7 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.02 A.
1. 2. 3. B. C.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
Sealants and Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 07920, JOINT SEALANTS. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107; of consistency suitable for application. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.76-mm) thickness per coat. AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation. 1. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors, with two sliding leaves and sidelite on each side. a. b. c. d. Traffic Pattern: Two way. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only. Mounting: As indicated. Security Operation: Set up to be operated after hours with Owner provided Card Key system.
D.
2.03 A.
2.
Activation Device: Motion detector mounted on each side of door header to detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door during normal operating hours; and Owner provided Card Key Activation to activate door operator during night and weekend hours. Safety Devices: Two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.
3.
B.
Aluminum Finish: Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System; Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, and fluoropolymer color coat, with color coat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. 1. Color: As selected by Architect.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrance doors. 08461 - 8 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS
1. 3.02 A.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
2.
B.
Entrances: Install automatic entrance doors plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. 2. 3. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.
C.
Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 16 Sections. Activation and Safety Devices: indicated. Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions
D.
E. F.
Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 08800, GLAZING. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07920, JOINT SEALANTS to provide weathertight installation. 1. 2. Set framing members, thresholds, bottom-guide track system, and flashings in full sealant bed. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
G.
Signage: Provide caution signs on each automatic entrance door, visible from both sides of door. Mount caution signs with centerline 58 inches (1475 mm) above finished floor. 1. Emergency Breakaway Panels: Provide emergency breakaway sign visible to egress side of each automatic entrance door that has emergency breakaway capability. Mount signs adjacent to lock stile with centerline between 36 and 60 inches (900 and 1525 mm) above finished floor.
3.03 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspector: Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrance doors and prepare test and inspection reports. 08461 - 9 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS
B.
Testing Services: Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards. 1. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.
C.
Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. ADJUSTING Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for weathertight closure, and complying with requirements in BHMA A156.10. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts. Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 4 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. DEMONSTRATION Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrance doors and door operators. END OF SECTION
D.
3.04 A.
B. C.
D.
3.05 A.
3.06 A.
08461 - 10
SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Provide finish hardware for interior and exterior doors to provide correct functions for intended use. Provide related items and services, as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Furnish hardware schedules and templates as required for fabrication of doors and frames under other Sections. Provide hardware that complies with applicable codes and requirements of authorities that have jurisdiction. RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.03 A. Section 01020, ALLOWANCES; Description of allowance for finish hardware. Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY; Cabinet and shelving hardware. Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES; Steel doors and frames. Section 08210, WOOD DOORS; Wood doors. Section 08410, ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS. DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL; Magnetic holders and sensors.
1.02 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A117.1 2. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): Ref. 1 Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Hardware Schedule: Provide six copies of final hardware and keying schedule. Format schedule vertically. List each door opening using same designations indicated on Drawings. Installation Templates: Provide installation templates for work installed or prepared for installation by others. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, catalog cuts, descriptive data, UL listings, and other pertinent technical data for each hardware item used. Submit 08710 - 1 FINISH HARDWARE
B. C.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts certifications of fire-ratings for hardware items located in rated assemblies. D. Samples: Submit samples of each finish to be exposed. Show full range of color and finish variations expected. 1. Submit actual finished items of hardware when directed by Architect. Acceptable items may be used in the completed work. 1.05 A. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: For each type of hardware required for the work of this Section, provide products of a single manufacturer. Consultant: Provide the services of a certified hardware consultant, acceptable to the Architect, to prepare hardware and keying schedules and to certify that the work of this Section meets or exceeds requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. TESTS Fire-Resistance Ratings: When fire-resistance ratings are indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide hardware items identical to those which have been tested and labeled for fire-rated use by independent testing agencies acceptable to Architect. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Packaging: Package and label each hardware item separately with all screws, bolts and accessories required for a complete and proper installation. Coordinate the labeling of packages with hardware set numbers. Store hardware items in locked spaces. Replace all hardware items lost or damaged. Provide copies of supplier receipts for hardware items delivered to the Project.
1.06 A.
1.07 A.
B.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. FINISH HARDWARE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS One or more manufacturers are listed for each type of hardware specified herein. Catalog numbers listed for each specified type of hardware are those of the underlined manufacturer. These catalog numbers are listed to set the standard of quality required. Provide the specified hardware item, or an equal product from one of the other named manufacturers which meet or exceed the standard as judged soley by the Architect. Provide the proper hardware which permits the swing and hand of each door as indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturer's names or trademarks displayed in a visible location will not be permitted on any piece of hardware. Base Metal: Provide hardware items of plated steel where located on interior doors with the exception of stainless steel, aluminum, or plastic items. For hardware on exterior doors, provide plated brass or bronze with the exception of stainless steel, aluminum, and plastic items. 08710 - 2 FINISH HARDWARE
B. C. D.
E. 2.02 A.
Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. Do not use through-bolts unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. HARDWARE FINISHES Provide US 32 polished stainless for hardware on exterior doors, toilet room doors, and other heavy-use doors. Provide US 32D dull stainless for hardware that is located on toilet room side of toilet room doors. Provide US 26 polished chrome for remaining door hardware, except as indicated. Provide plated finishes which uniformly match lock or latchset for each door. Closer Covers: Provide plated metal closer covers matching lock and latch finishes on wood doors with transparent finishes. Provide painted plastic covers on other closers with covers. Provide uncovered closers where "utility type" closer is indicated. LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Schlage 2. Corbin/Russwin 3. Sargent 4. Yale Security, Inc.
B.
2.03 A.
B. C. D. E.
Provide lock and latchset functions listed in the hardware schedule at the end of this Section. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: Except where scheduled otherwise, provide Sargent Cylindrical (B) Lever Locks. Where knobs are scheduled, provide Line #8. Cylinder Locksets and Latchsets: Provide Assa Abloy with lever handles. Electric Stair Door Locksets: Provide lever handle mortise locksets matching trim and appearance of other mortise locks on project. Provide lock modification to provide locksets with electromechanical function control from the building fire-command center. Lock levers shall always be free from floor side of stair door to allow for immediate exit. Stair side of locksets shall ordinarily be locked and require the use of a key for entry. When modification switch is activated by the fire-command center, locks will function as passage locksets in order to permit free and unrestricted travel in both directions, while still maintaining fire-rated latching of doors. Throws: Provide 1/2 in. minimum. Comply with UL requirements for fire-rated hardware. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard box strike with extended curved lip. Finish strikes and lips to match lock or latch. Electric Strikes: Provide Folger Adams No. 712 or 732. Rabbeted Doors: Provide rabbeted locks and latches where rabbeted door stiles are indicated or required. 08710 - 3 FINISH HARDWARE
F. G. H. I.
2.04 A.
KEYING AND LOCK CYLINDERS Provide interchangeable core cylinders, removable by use of special key, for all locking devices on this project. Provide temporary cores during construction. Remove and replace temporary cores when directed Comply with Owner's instructions for keying of Project. Provide grandmaster key system unless otherwise indicated. Metals: Provide cylinders and keys from stainless steel, brass, or nickel silver. Provide three keys for each lock, five master keys, and five grand master keys. Provide one blank key for each lock. Provide twelve additional cores, keyed only into this system. KEY CONTROL SYSTEM Provide key control system consisting of labels, tags, card index, and metal wall mounted cabinet. Set up control system, label and identify each key, type index cards, and deliver to Owner complete and ready for use. HINGES AND BUTTS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements of these specifications: 1. Hager 2. Lawrence 3. McKinney 4. H. Soss 5. Stanley
B. C. D. E. 2.05 A.
2.06 A.
B.
Provide hinges template produced, full mortise, five knuckle-type, except as otherwise scheduled, and as follows: 1. For major corridor doors, entrance doors, lobby doors, and public toilet room doors, provide four-ball bearing hinges. 2. For doors with closers not listed above, provide standard weight, two-ball bearing hinges. 3. For all other doors not listed above, provide standard weight, non-ball bearing hinges.
C. D. E.
Hinge Height: 4-1/2 in. Hinge Width: Consultant shall determine proper hinge width based upon door thickness and trim conditions. Provide minimum 4-1/2 in. wide hinges. Hinge Quantity: Provide three hinges for doors up to 7 ft.-6 in. high, and one additional 08710 - 4 FINISH HARDWARE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts hinge for each additional 2 ft.-6 in. of height. Provide one additional hinge for doors over 3 ft.-6 in. wide. F. Pins: Provide flat button pins matching hinges in finish and material. Provide nonremovable pins on outswinging exterior and corridor doors. Provide non-rising pins for all other hinges. Spring Hinges: Where scheduled, provide concealed bearing, adjustable coil spring, nonhanded, mortise spring hinges that resemble standard hinges in appearance as closely as possible. Concealed Hinges: Provide Model No. 218 as manufactured by SOSS Hinge Division, Universal Industrial Products Company. CLOSER/PIVOT SETS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Dorma 2 LCN
G.
H. 2.07 A.
3. Rixson/Firemark B. C. D. E. 2.08 A. Provide offset or center hung closer/pivot sets as indicated, finished to match other door hardware, with closer concealed in head. Floor Concealed Closer/Pivot Sets: Provide Model No. 30, 40, 50, or 51, as required for size of door and operation scheduled. Head Concealed Closer/Pivot Sets: Provide units equal to Rixson/Firemark Series 800 closers concealed in head, and sized for weight of door and operation scheduled. Provide barrier-free closers which comply with ANSI A117.1 and requirements of Massachusetts Architectural Barriers Board for opening force and delayed action closing. BOLTS AND COORDINATORS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Ives 2. Glynn-Johnson 3. Rixson/Firemark B. C. D. E. Flush-Bolt for Rated Doors: 358 or 458. Flush-Bolt for Non-Rated Doors: 258. Automatic Flush-Bolts: 359. Do not use on egress doors. Coordinator: 956 with 903 fillers and brackets as required. 08710 - 5 FINISH HARDWARE
F. G. H. 2.09 A.
Carry Bars: 478 or 478-1/2. Provide carry bars on doors where astragals are scheduled. Dutch Door Bolt: 54 with strike. Strikes: Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts and standard strikes for head bolts. EXIT DEVICES Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed requirements specified: 1. Von Duprin 2. Adams Rite 3. Monarch 4. Sargent 5. Yale
B. C.
Provide Series 99 for flush and wide stile doors, and Series 33 for narrow stile doors. At locked doors with exit devices, provide lever handle outside trim with cylinder lock and function which allows for key in cylinder to lock or unlock outside lever. Lever in turn retracts bolt. Provide mortise locks for single doors and concealed vertical rods for pair doors, except provide surface mounted rods on wood doors in pairs. Provide rim type device where scheduled. Provide keyed dogging device on non-rated doors. PUSH/PULL HARDWARE Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Ives 2. Brookline 3. Hiawatha.
D.
E. 2.10 A.
B. 2.11 A.
Provide No.1050-8 pull handle, No. 220B-LP push bar, and No. 80 x 4 x16 push plate with radius corners. FLUSH PULL HARDWARE Provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Brookline 2. Burns 08710 - 6 FINISH HARDWARE
3. Ives B. 2.12 A. Provide No.780 flush pull. CLOSERS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. LCN 2. Norton 3. Sargent 4. Yale B. C. D. Provide 4030/4130 Series for low frequency interior doors. Provide 4010/4110 Series for toilet room doors, major corridor doors, stairwell doors, smoke and fire doors, and exterior doors not indicated to receive another type. Provide 2030 Series where noted as concealed in thin (1-3/4 in. x 4 in. minimum) metal transom bar or head frame. Provide 2010 S eries where indicated as concealed in deep (4 in. x 4 in. minimum) wood or metal transom bars or head frames. Provide Super Stock series where indicated as "Utility Type". Provide closers with hold-open features where indicated. Provide closers with built-in door stop function at an adjustable angle where indicated. Mount closers on the least public side of doors to the greatest extent possible. Provide closers with parallel arms wherever closers are on the stop side of doors which swing out into corridors and public spaces. Where parallel arms are used, provide closers which are one size larger than manufacturer's recommendation. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for size of closer based upon size and weight of door, exposure, and frequency of use. Provide barrier-free closers which comply with ANSI A117.1 and requirements of Massachusetts Architectural Barriers Board for opening force and delayed action closing. Automatic Opening Device: Where automatic opening devices are indicated, provide the LCN Auto-Equilizer closer, complete with compressor, wall plate actuator switches, control box, 1/8 in pneumatic tubing, muffler, and all other necessary components. OVERHEAD HOLDERS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Glynn - Johnson 2. Rixson 08710 - 7 FINISH HARDWARE
E. F. G.
H. I. J.
2.13 A.
3. Yale Security, Inc. B. Provide Series 70 surface mounted overhead holders, except provide 100/200 Series concealed holders on entrance and vestibule doors and 320 Series holders where indicated to be concealed. ELECTROMAGNETIC HOLD-OPEN DEVICES Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Sargent 2. Rixson 3. Yale Security, Inc. B. C. 2.15 A. Provide 1500 Series, recessed wall mounted units, unless indicated otherwise. Provide electromagnetic hold-open devices which release self-closing doors when electric current is interrupted or when the fire detection system is activated. MAGNETIC CATCHES Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Epco 2. Ives B. 2.16 A. Provide Catalog #543 for overhead use, and #594 for floor use. PROTECTION PLATES AND KICK PLATES Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Brookline 2. Burns 3. Hiawatha B. C. D. E. Provide protection and kick plates beveled on all four sides. Width: Provide protection and kick plates which are 1/2 in. less than door width when mounted on the pull side, and 1-1/2 in. less than door width when mounted on stop side. Height: 42 in. high for protection plates, 10 in. high for kick plates. Material: 18 gage solid metal closely matching lockset/latchset finish. Plated metal door trim units are not acceptable.
2.14 A.
08710 - 8
FINISH HARDWARE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.17 A. 2.18 A. ALARMED EXIT DEVICE Provide Catalog No. ECL-2200 Exit Control Lock with AC Battery Eliminator. Provide unit with manufacturer's standard horn alarms. INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Grant 2. Stanley B. Provide complete interior sliding door hardware set, including, but not limited to extruded aluminum overhead track with apron, adjustable carriages, bumpers, floor guides, flush pulls and all other necessary components to suite the number, size, weight and thickness of doors indicated. Provide Catalog #6036 or #6066 as recommended by manufacturer for door weight, size, and conditions. Provide catalog #436 flush pulls for each door. POCKET DOORS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Grant 2. Stanley B. Provide complete pocket door hardware set, including, but not limited to extruded aluminum overhead track, adjustable carriages, galvanized steel split studs, resilient bumpers, nylon glides, brackets, and other necessary components to suite the number, size, weight and thickness of doors indicated. Provide set #2826. BI-FOLD DOORS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Grant 2. Stanley B. Provide complete bi-fold door hardware set, including, but not limited to extruded aluminum overhead track, adjustable carriages and pivots, resilient bumpers, nylon or roller glides, brackets, and other necessary components to suite the number, size, weight and thickness of doors indicated. Provide Series #1600. Provide heavy-duty sets for doors which weigh more than 75 lbs. 08710 - 9 FINISH HARDWARE
C. D. 2.19 A.
C. 2.20 A.
C.
D. 2.21 A.
Pulls: Provide Catalog #2637 STOPS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Ives 2. Brookline 3. Glynn-Johnson
B.
Provide wall stops #406, 407 or 408 to suite wall condition. Where indicated or where wall stop is not practical, provide floor stops 436 or 438 to suit floor conditions and clearances. Provide carpet risers where required. WEATHERSTRIPPING, SOUNDSTRIPPING, AND THRESHOLDS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Reese 2. National Guard Products 3. Pemko 4. Zero
2.22 A.
B. C.
Thresholds for General Applications: Provide Catalog # S256A, or as recommended to suit conditions. Weatherstripping: Provide weatherstripping for every exterior door, doors with unheated spaces on one side, and wherever scheduled. Weatherstripped doors are required to provide a continuous seal at the entire perimeter of door with no cracks. 1. Drop Seals: Provide Catalog #430 drop seals for wood doors and #372 drop seals for metal doors. 2. Gaskets: Provide Catalog #797 gaskets at door heads and jambs.
D. 2.23 A.
Soundstripping: Provide Catalog #771 at head and jambs. Provide Catalog #430 drop seals for wood doors and #372 drop seals for metal doors. MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed the requirements specified: 1. Reese 2. National Guard Products
08710 - 10
FINISH HARDWARE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3. Pemko 4. Zero B. C. D. Astragals: Provide Reese Catalog #87. Drip Caps: For doors that swing directly out into the rain, provide Reese Catalog #R199 drip cap. Silencers: For wood and steel frames, provide grey resilient silencers to suit frame type. Provide three silencers for single doors, and two silencers for doors hinged in pairs.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSPECTION Examine doors, frames and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Commencing work means Installer accepts substrates and conditions. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. Install hardware on doors and frames at locations conforming to ANSI and NAHM standards, and DHI Ref. 1 mounting heights, except where specifically indicated otherwise or required by authorities having jurisdiction. Set hardware plumb, level, and in exact alignment and location. Conceal and countersink fasteners wherever possible. Set exterior thresholds in bed of sealant provided under Section 07900, JOINT SEALERS. ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION Adjust hardware items to work smoothly, easily, and correctly. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of hardware being cleaned. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned, as judged solely by the Architect. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protections and reclean as necessary immediately prior to final acceptance. 1. Cover knobs, levers, pulls, and push plates with heavy cloth to protect against damage until Final Acceptance of the Project. 3.04 A. COMPLETION AND CONTINUED MAINTENANCE Before completion of work of this Section, inspect work with Architect and adjust and correct work to leave operating parts in perfect operating condition, jointing to adjacent material tight, surfaces without blemishes or stains, work properly executed and complete, 08710 - 11 FINISH HARDWARE
3.02 A. B.
C. D. 3.03 A. B.
C.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts and defects and damaged work replaced or corrected. B. 3.05 A. Provide services of hardware supplier's representative to inspect hardware six months after Final Acceptance of Project. Readjust and restore hardware. PRELIMINARY HARDWARE SCHEDULE Provide hardware items scheduled below in strict compliance with these Specifications: HS 1: Cylinders Only
This Set is for overhead coiling doors and grilles, rolling counter shutters, access doors and building entrance doors of all types. All other hardware required for these doors is specified with those doors and not in this section. HS 2a: Lobby Aluminum Storefront Exit Device Automatic opening device Refer to Section 08411 for additional hardware HS 2b: Security Aluminum Storefront Mortise door lockset Refer to Section 08411 for additional hardware stop HS 3: HC Tenant Standard Entrance Door butts mortise office lockset, levers closer stop silencers HS 4: Storeroom, Computer room butts cylinder classroom lockset D80, levers closer stop silencers HS 4a: Bathroom butts cylinder bathroom lockset, levers, tactile warning closer stop silencers
08710 - 12
FINISH HARDWARE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts HS 5: HC Bedroom Door butts privacy lockset, levers stop silencers HS 6: Closet Bi-fold Door Bi-fold hardware
HS 6a:
HC Bedroom, bathroom Pocket Door Pocket door silencers
HS 7:
Aluminum Sliding Door Hardware for these doors is specified under Section 08461
HS 8:
Tenant Standard Entrance (Hardware only) mortise office lockset, levers closer stop silencers
HS 9:
Computer closet mortise storeroom lockset, levers lever pull, interior deadbolt (1 door) stop silencers END OF SECTION
08710 - 13
FINISH HARDWARE
SECTION 08800 GLAZING
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install glass and glazing, as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to glass and glazing for the following: 1. 2. Interior glass partitions, doors, and windows. Exterior entrances, and storefronts.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES; Doors and sidelights to be glazed. Section 08210, WOOD DOORS. Section 08411, ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; Entrances and storefronts to be glazed.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): 804.1 Voluntary Specification for Ductile Back-Bedding Glazing Tapes
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 509 Cellular Elastomeric Materials Preformed Gasket and Sealing
08800 - 1
GLAZING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C 719 Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movements Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers Specifications for Flat Glass Specifications for Heat Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass Methods of Fire Test of Window Assemblies Specifications for Sealed Insulating Glass Units
C 794 C 864
C 1036 C 1048
E 163 E 774 4.
Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.): DD-G-451D Glass, Float or Plate Sheet, Figured (Flat for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses) Glass, Plate (Float) Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered)
DD-G-1403B(1)
5.
Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): Manual Glazing Manual
6.
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association (SIGMA): 65-7-2
1.03 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
C.
D.
08800 - 2
GLAZING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.04 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). Source Limitations for Clear Glass: manufacturer. Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass
B.
C.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
E.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. 2. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide." SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and SIGMA TB3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
1.05 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.06 A.
08800 - 3
GLAZING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts PART 2 2.01 A. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/FABRICATORS Provide glass products by the following, or approved equal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 2.02 A. B. Advanced Coating Technology. Architectural Glass. Falcomer Glass Industries. Ford Glass Division. Guardian Industries. Hordis Brothers. Interpane Coatings, Inc. Libbey Owens Ford. PPG Industries. Saint-Gobain. Solar Seal Company. Spectrum Glass Products. Viracon, Inc.
GLASS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036 ,Type I-Transparent, Flat, Class 1-Clear, Quality q3. Clear Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A-Uncoated, Type ITransparent, Flat, Class 1-Clear, Quality q3, Kind HS. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A-Uncoated, Type I-Transparent, Flat, Class 1-Clear, Quality q3, Kind FT. Exterior Low 'E' Coated Clear Insulating Glass: Provide high-performance, clear, metallic coating, equal to VE1-2M #2, as manufactured by Viracon. Provide Low 'E' coating which has the following performance characteristics when applied to the No. 2 surface of 1 in. insulating units, both lites 1/4 in.: 1. 2. 3. 4. Visible Light Transmittance: 70%. Shading Coefficient: 0.43. Solar Energy Transmittance: 31%. U Value: 0.06 or less, in compliance with requirements of IECC as adopted by State of CT.
C.
D.
Note: Where new insulating glass is being used as infill panels next to existing glass in storefronts, provide sputter coated low-E film to match existing adjacent units. F. Mirrors: 1/4 in., Quality q2, clear float glass with silver, copper, and organic coating, and as follows: 1. 2.03 A. Edges: Uniformly ground and polished.
LAMINATED GLASS Glass Units: ASTM C 1172 and complying with other specified requirements.
08800 - 4
GLAZING
B.
Laminated-Glass Interlayer: Of type and thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass plies and installation. 1. Refer to Glazing Schedule at the end of this Section for laminated glass interlayer colors and manufacturers.
C.
Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. Laminated-Glass Units: Consisting of two outer plies of glass with PVB or cured-resin interlayer and complying with other specified requirements. 1. 2. 3. 4. Kind and Construction: Kind LHS, consisting of two plies of heat-strengthened glass. Glass Ply Thickness: As indicated in Glazing Schedule at the end of this Section. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). Interlayer Material Color: As indicated in Glazing Schedule at the end of this Section.
D.
2.04 A.
GLAZING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS General: Provide sealants and gaskets with performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated. Ensure compatibility of glazing sealants with insulated glass sealants, with laminated glass interlayers, and with any other surfaces in contact. General Glazing Sealant: Provide sealant with maximum Shore A hardness of 50. Provide one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dow Corning 795. General Electric Silglaze N 2500 or Contractors SCS-1000. Rhodorsil 3B, 5C, or 6B. Tremco Proglaze.
B.
C.
Preformed Glazing Tape: Provide solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene rubber with 100% solids content complying with AAMA A 804.1. Provide preformed glazing tape in extruded tape form. Provide one of the following: 1. 2. 3. Protective Treatments 303 or 606. Tremco Preshimmed 440. Woodmont Chem-Tape 40.
D.
Setting Blocks: Provide neoprene or silicone blocks with Shore A hardness of 80-90. Provide products certified by manufacturer to be compatible with silicone sealants. 1. 2. Shims: For shims used with setting blocks, provide same materials, hardness, length and width as setting blocks. Structural Silicone Glazing: Provide silicone setting blocks where structural silicone occurs at sills and at insulated units with silicone edge seals.
E.
Edge Blocks: Provide neoprene or silicone as required for compatibility with glazing sealants. Provide blocks with Shore A hardness of 55+5.
08800 - 5
GLAZING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide sealant backer rods, primers, cleaners, and sealers of type recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers. EXECUTION INSPECTION The Installer/Glazier shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this work is to be performed. Notify Contractor in writing, outlining conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of installation will be construed as glazier accepting substrates and conditions. INSTALLATION General Installation Requirements: Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. Comply with FGMA Manual. Do not glaze when ambient temperature is below 40oF. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Prior to installing glass, clean glazing channels and framing members. Remove coatings not completely bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where in contact with sealants. Protect glass from edge damage at all times. Use roller blocks and suction cups. Replace glass with edge damage or other imperfections which could weaken glass. Install setting and side blocks in locations recommended by referenced standards, and as required to prevent glass displacement. 7. Center glass in openings. Provide 1/2 in. minimum glass bite and 1/8 in. edge clearances. 8. Install glass and glazing in such a manner as to allow for easy replacement of glass and glazing without dismantling of frames. 9. Install glazing tapes and gaskets. Prepare for exterior cap seal. 10. Prevent metal to glass contact at all times. Protect edges of insulated units from moisture and solvents. 11. Clean, prime, and install stops. B. Mirrors: Adhere mirrors to walls plumb and level. Support mirror bottoms with stainless steel clips spaced at quarter-points. Provide safety glass at all doors, at locations within 18 in. of a door or floor, and elsewhere as required by code. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean exposed surfaces using manufacturer recommended materials and methods. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned. Clean glass and framing members frequently to protect from build-up of harmful construction contaminants. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes. Eliminate visible evidence of repair. Re-clean glass within one week of final acceptance.
PART 3 3.01 A.
3.02 A.
C.
3.03 A.
B. C.
08800 - 6
GLAZING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Provide temporary protection at all times during course of work, and immediately after completion to ensure work of this Section is not damaged or deteriorated in any way at time of final acceptance. Remove temporary protections and reclean as necessary immediately prior to final acceptance. Remove and replace broken, chipped, cracked, or otherwise damaged glass. GLASS SCHEDULE Provide following glass types. 1. 2. Type GL-1: 1/4 in. clear glass (tempered where required by code). Type GL-2: 1 in. thick Exterior Insulating Glass with Low 'E' coating on #2 surface; tempered where required by code. END OF SECTION
E. 3.04 A.
08800 - 7
GLAZING
SECTION 08920 CANOPY GLAZING SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide glazed, aluminum framed and stopped canopy work as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Include, but do not limit to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Factory finishing of exposed aluminum members. Flashing and counterflashing of canopy system. Components and accessories required to complete framing for the canopy system. Glazing of canopy system.
1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that skylight system complies with specified requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by others. Show all interfaces and relationships to work of other trades. Provide shop drawings stamped and signed by a professional engineer, licensed to practice in the State of Connecticut. Field Measurements: To the greatest extent possible, take all necessary field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay progress of the job. Calculations: Provide professionally prepared calculations and certifications of the performance of the work. Provide calculations and certifications stamped and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the jurisdiction in which the Project is being built. Show how design load requirements and other performance criteria have been satisfied. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in. Test Reports: Provide certified reports for all specified tests.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
08920 - 1
CANOPY GLAZING SYSTEM
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.03 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: For each material type required for the work of this section, provide primary materials which are the product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials. Installer: A firm with a minimum of five years experience in type of work required by this section and which is acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Performance Requirements: Provide framing system supporting glazing, complete with all components necessary to provide a weathertight system, including perimeter flashing and sealants within the structure. 1. 2. 3. 4. Provide structural design, engineering, and fabrication by manufacturer. Design to withstand uniform structural load of 40 psf (195 kg/sq meter), or as required by code. Design framing system and glazing material to support design loads as prescribed by the governing building code. Design to withstand thermal variations of 60 degrees F (15.5 degrees C) from ambient temperature without causing bucking, stresses on glass, failure of seals, undue stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Any Framing Member Normal to Plane of Glazing: Not more than L/175. No uncontrolled water leakage in system under normal circumstances.
B.
1.04 A.
5. 6. 1.05 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. 2. 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods.
C.
D.
Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings and structural calculations prepared specifically for the project by manufacturer; provide stamp or seal of licensed professional engineer if required by authorities having jurisdiction. Selection Samples: Two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of standard colors. Verification Samples: 1. 2. 4. Aluminum Finish: Two samples, minimum size 2 by 3 inches (50 by 75 mm), representing actual product and color. Glass: Two samples, minimum size 12 inches (300 mm) square, of specified glass. Assembly Sample: 12 by 12 inch (300 by 300 mm) assembly complete with glazing, gaskets, fasteners, anchors, and finish; do not proceed with fabrication until workmanship and color are approved by Architect.
E.
08920 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. 1.06 A. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years experience in fabrication and erection of glazed structures for projects of similar scope. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in performing work of this section that has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, covered to protect factory finishes from damage, precipitation, and construction dirt until ready for installation. Protect factory finishes from damage, precipitation and construction materials until ready for installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. Perform structural silicone sealant work when air temperature is above 10 degrees F (minus 12 degrees C). WARRANTY Provide glazed structure manufacturer's warranty that installed structure will be free from significant defects in material, workmanship, and uncontrolled water leakage for two years from date of Substantial Completion. For stock color PPG Duranar 70 percent fluoropolymer finishes, provide paint manufacturer's warranty for color and film integrity for at least 10 years from date of application. PRODUCTS
B.
1.07 A.
B.
1.08 A.
B.
1.09 A.
B.
PART 2
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solar Innovations; 234 East Rosebud Road, Myerstown, PA 17067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 618-0669. Tel: (717) 933-4843. Fax: (717) 933-1393. Email: skylight@solarinnovations.com. www.solarinnovations.com.
08920 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.02 G. GLAZED STRUCTURES Canopies: 1. 2. 3. 2.03 A. Frame Members: Aluminum. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Basic Mullion and Purlin Design: As indicated on the Drawings.
MATERIALS Aluminum: 6063-T52, 6063-T6, or 6105-T5 alloy and temper. Other alloys and tempers may be used for nonstructural members provided they do not void the required warranties. Indicate alloys and tempers clearly on shop drawings and in structural calculations. 1. 2. 3. Framing Members: Thickness based on the design loading, cross sectional configuration, and fabrication requirement. Aluminum Flashing and Closures: Minimum of 0.040 inches (1.0 mm) thick. Snap-On Covers and Miscellaneous Non-Structural Trim: Minimum thickness recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
Glazing: Provide laminated glass with white translucent, 0.060 in. thick white translucent interlayer. Flashings: Sheet aluminum, same finish as for system components; secured with concealed fastening method or fastener with head finished to match; thickness as required for conditions encountered. Internal Reinforcing: 1. 2. 3. ASTM A 36/A 36M for carbon steel; or ASTM B 308/B 308M for structural aluminum. Shapes and sizes to suit installation. Shop coat steel components after fabrication with manufacturer recommended primer.
C.
D.
E.
Glazing Gaskets: Compression type design, replaceable, EPDM, complying with ASTM C 864, with solid strand cord to prevent shrinkage. 1. 2. 3. 4. F Completely compatible with glazing sealant to be used. Profile and hardness as necessary to maintain uniform pressure for watertight seal. Manufacturer's standard black color. actory molded corners at interior.
F.
Setting Blocks, Edge Blocks, and Spacers: As required by manufacturer and compatible with insulated glass where required. Structural Glazing Sealant: GE Silpruf; black. Perimeter Sealant: GE Silpruf; color to match framing finish if available; otherwise color as selected from manufacturer's standard range.
G. H.
08920 - 4
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts I. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. 2. 3. J. Aluminum and stainless steel of type which will not cause electrolytic action or corrosion. Zinc cadmium-plated fasteners may be used if acceptable to manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match aluminum frame.
Accessories: Provide accessories as scheduled to achieve design intent and environmental control. FABRICATION Fabricate components in accordance with approved shop drawings. Remove burrs and rough edges. Shop fabricate to greatest extent practicable to minimize field cutting, splicing, and assembly. Disassemble only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Install gaskets and tapes in factory. Welding: 1. 2. Comply with recommendations of American Welding Society. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces before finishing; restore mechanical finish.
2.04 A.
B.
C.
Steel Components: 1. 2. Clean surfaces after fabrication and immediately prior to application of primer in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply specified shop coat primer in accord with manufacturer's instructions to provide 2.0 mil (0.05 mm) minimum dry film thickness.
D.
Fabricate components true to detail and free from defects impairing appearance, strength or durability. Contour outdoor horizontal or purlin glazing retainers to minimize water ponding and ice or snow buildup. Fabricate components to allow for accurate and rigid fit of joints and corners. Match components carefully ensuring continuity of line and design. Ensure joints and connections will be flush and weathertight. Ensure slip joints make full, tight contact and are weathertight. Reinforce components at anchorage and support points, at joints, and at attachment points for interfacing work. Glass: Accurately size glass to fit openings allowing clearances following recommendations of "Glazing Manual" published by Flat Glass Marketing Association. Cut glass clean and carefully. Nicks and damaged edges will not be accepted. Replace glass that has damaged edges.
E.
F.
G.
H.
08920 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.05 A. FINISHES Aluminum Finish: PPG Duranar, two coat, 70 percent fluoropolymer finish. 1. PART 3 3.01 A. B. Color: As selected by Architect.
EXECUTION EXAMINATION Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Work by Others. However, it is the installers responsibility to notify the Contractor and Architect if conditions are inappropriate for proper installation. PREPARATION Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. INSTALLATION Install glazed structure system in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Separate dissimilar materials using nonconductive tape, paint, or other material not visible in finished work. Provide attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. Anchor structure securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. Install glazing and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions without exception, including surface preparations. Set sill members in bed of sealant. Set other members with internal sealants to provide weathertight construction. Install flashings, bent metal closures, corners, gutters, and other accessories as required or detailed. Clean surfaces and install sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and structuremanufacturer's guidelines.
3.02 A. B.
3.03 A.
B.
C. D. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
08920 - 6
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.04 A. B. PROTECTION Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
08920 - 7
SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install gypsum drywall work, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Include, but do not limit to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Steel suspension systems for ceilings and soffits. Screwable steel stud interior partition framing. Screwable steel stud framed and furred enclosures at columns and beams. Blockings and attachments for fixture supports. Gypsum wallboard finishes. Acoustical sealing and acoustical insulation of gypsum wallboard finishes at steel stud framed partitions and furrings where indicated. 7. Other gypsum drywall work called for on the Drawings or reasonably required to complete the Project intent.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY; Wood blocking, furring, grounds, etc., except fixture support blocking. 2. Section 09910, PAINTING; Painting.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the HotDip Process Gypsum Wallboard Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
C 36 C 475
C 630
09260 - 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
C 645
Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Boards Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board Sealants in Acoustical Applications Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board Measurement of Airborne-Sound Loss of Building Partitions Transmission
C 754
C 840 C 919 C 931 C 1002
E 90
1.04 A. B. 1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE Reference Standards: printed standards. Conform to governing laws, building code and manufacturer's
B.
Structural Performance: Limit deflection to L/270 for all work except as follows: 1. Limit deflection on walls to receive ceramic tile to L/360.
C.
Fire Resistance Ratings: Where indicated provide materials and assemblies identical to those tested and rated by testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities that have jurisdiction COORDINATION Work of this Section shall be coordinated with the work of other Sections to assure the steady progress of all the work of the Contract. Obtain complete information regarding wall and ceiling mounted fixtures, grilles, registers, equipment, accessories, etc. to be used on the work from other trades. In no case shall work of other Sections be concealed until it has been inspected. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver all manufactured materials to site in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and brand names, type of material, and contents. 09260 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1.06 A.
1.07 A.
B.
Store materials in interior spaces, above floors, under cover, away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces, and with good ventilation. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces. Protect metal corner beads, casing beads, and trim from being bent or damaged. PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Metal Framing and Suspension Systems: Provide materials, products, and systems from one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clark Steel Framing Systems. Consolidated Systems, Inc. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. Dietrich Industries, Inc. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. National Gypsum Company. Scafco Corporation. Unimast, Inc. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
C.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B.
Gypsum Boards and Related Products: Provide materials, products, and systems from one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum Corp. National Gypsum Company. United States Gypsum Co.
2.02 A.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS General: Provide components that conform to ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless indicated otherwise. Provide all metal runners, hangers, studs, and channels hot-dip galvanized conforming to ASTM A 525, G60, unless noted otherwise. Concrete Inserts: Provide inserts designed for attachment to concrete forms, and for embedment in concrete, fabricated from corrosion resistant material, with holes and loops for attachment of hanger wires, and capable of sustaining a load equal to 3 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as tested per ASTM E 488. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 gauge minimum. Hanger Rods: Where required for loading or by local authorities, provide mild-steel rods, sized as required, hot-dip galvanized. Flat Hangers: Where required for loading or by local authorities, provide mild-steel flat hangers, sized as required, hot-dip galvanized.
B.
C.
D.
E.
09260 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. Angle-Type Hangers: Provide steel angles with legs not less than 7/8 in. wide, formed from 0.0635 in thick galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 446, G 90, with bolted connections. Channels: Provide cold-rolled steel channels, minimum 16 gauge with 7/16 in. wide flanges, protected with corrosion-resistant coating, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 in. deep, 475 lb. per 1,000 lin. ft., hot-dip galvanized. 2. Furring Channels: 25 ga. hot-dip galvanized, screwable, pressed steel furring channels, 7/8 in. thick, hat section. 3. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, minimum 25 gage, hot-dip galvanized, with flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form minimum 3/16 in. lip, depth as indicated. 4. Clips for attachment of steel furring channels to steel carrying channels shall be proprietary clips as recommended by manufacturer. I. Ceiling Suspension System: Provide a complete, mechanical suspension system conforming to ASTM C 645, consisting of cold-rolled steel channel main runners, screwable steel furring channels hangers and anchors and all required clips and other components, required for complete installation. 1. Ceiling Hangers at Room #200: Provide acoustical ceiling hangers, specified above for use at Room #200.. 2.03 A. METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS Unless otherwise indicated, steel stud system for walls and partitions shall be a complete proprietary framing system consisting of prefabricated, non-load bearing, screwable 20 ga. and 25 ga. steel studs, steel track, anchors, and related items, conforming to ASTM C 645. Provide all metal runners, hangers, studs, and channels hot-dip galvanized conforming to ASTM A 525, G60, unless noted otherwise. 1. Special system at gypsum shaft-wall construction shall be as above, except with "C-H" Type galvanized steel studs, or equivalent. 2. Provide minimum 20 gage steel studs at jambs of door and fixed glass frames, at open partition ends, and where the partition is to receive wall-mounted shelves, heavy fixtures, etc. C. Screwable Steel Wall Furring Channels: 25 ga. hot-dip galvanized, screwable, pressed steel furring channels, 7/8 in. thick, hat section. 1. Provide resilient channels where indicated on Drawings. 2.04 A. GYPSUM BOARDS Gypsum Wallboard: Indicated thickness(es) by 48 in. width by lengths as required, tapered edge, paper finish, conforming to ASTM C 36. Where used in fire-rated assemblies, provide Type X fire resistant type. Water Resistant Gypsum Backer Board: Provide water resistant type gypsum backing board conforming to ASTM C 630 at areas as scheduled. 09260 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
G.
B.
C.
Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM 1278, manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. USG Fiberock Brand AR and VHi panels. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.
D.
High Strength Sag-Resistant Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E.
Joint Treatment Materials: Joint treatment materials shall conform to ASTM C 475. 1. Laminating Adhesive and Joint Finishing Compound: As recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer, interior type for interior general use, exterior type for use at water resistant gypsum backer board. 2. Joint Tape: 2 in. to 2-1/2 in. wide paper tape, as recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
2.05 A.
FASTENERS Screws for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard to Steel Framing and Furring Members: Selfdrilling, Type S, bugle head screws, conforming to ASTM C 1002, with bugle-type Phillipshead, appropriate size and length in each case as recommended by manufacturer. Screws for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Blocking: Self-drilling Type W screws conforming to ASTM C 1002, with bugle-type Phillips-head. Screw length and size in each case shall be as recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer. Screws for Attachment of Steel Framing and Furring Members to Other Steel Members: Self-drilling, Type S, pan head screws, conforming to ASTM C 1002, appropriate size and length in each case as recommended by manufacturer. Screws for Attachment of Cementitious Backerboard: Cementitious backer-board manufacturer's recommended, non-corrosive fasteners for application to substrates indicated. METAL TRIM AND ACCESSORIES General: Provide metal trim and accessories conforming to ASTM C 840. Control Joint: 26 gauge, galvanized steel, "Vee" type, with perforated flanges, for compound finishing. Corner Bead: 1 in. by 1 in. perforated flange, standard type, 26 gauge, galvanized steel, for compound finishing.
B.
C.
D.
2.06 A. B.
C.
09260 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. E. Metal Trim: 24 gauge, galvanized steel, with perforated flanges, for compound finishing. Acoustical Blanket/Batt Insulation: Indicated thicknesses by 16-1/8 in. and 24-1/8 in. wide, as appropriate, equal to "Fiberglas CWI Unfaced Insulation", manufactured by OwensCorning Fiberglas Corp., or approved equal. Packing Wool Insulation: Fiberglas or mineral wool packing insulation, equal to products manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co. or Owens- Corning Fiberglas Corp. Fire Safing Insulation: Mineral fiber fire-rated fire safing insulation in conformance with the governing laws and building code, manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co. or approved equal. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Applications: Provide "BA-98 Acoustical Sealant", manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., or approved equal. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Applications: Provide paintable "AC-20 Acrylic Latex Caulk", manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product manufactured by DAP or Gibson Homans Co., or approved equal. EXECUTION INSPECTION AND COORDINATION Inspect job conditions and related work and report to Architect in writing, all conditions interfering with the proper installation of work of this Section. Commencement of work in any given area shall constitute acceptance of conditions in that area as acceptable to receive work of this Section. Change and adjust work of this Section to accommodate work of other Sections, providing cutting and patching until it has been inspected. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Provide work conforming to published specifications and installation instructions of each manufacturer, the approved shop drawings, above-referenced quality assurance standards, the governing laws and code. Refer to Drawings to determine location of fire-resistive, fireprotective, and acoustically-rated work, and construct this work to conform to the specifications and installation instructions of UL or other testing agency(ies). Also refer to the Drawings to determine the number of layers of gypsum board, thickness of board, etc., for each of the installations. Erect gypsum drywall work, rigidly supported, and securely fastened in place, in such a manner that plumb, level, and true finished lines and surfaces will result in the finished work in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 840. Construct gypsum drywall work only after all windows and door openings are enclosed and a temperature of not less than 55oF. is maintained during and up to completion of the drywall work.
F.
G.
H.
I.
PART 3 3.01 A.
B.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
09260 - 6
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.03 A. STEEL CEILING FRAMING AND FURRING Suspended Ceilings: Install complete suspended steel ceiling framing system in accordance with ASTM C 754, and the following: 1. Install hangers at ends of, and 48 in. on center along lengths of main runners, securing to ceiling structure above with appropriate anchors. Provide all additional secondary framing as required to provide support by primary framing members or structural ceiling deck above. Do not anchor hangers to pipes, ducts, or other overhead non-structural elements. 2. Install steel runner channels 48 in. on center maximum and within 6 in. of walls. 3. Install screwable steel furring channels perpendicular to main runners and spaced 24 in. on center along length of, and within 6 in. of walls without wall angles, and within 8 in. of ends of panels and clipped to, the main runners. 4. Entire installation shall be level and true, with maximum variation from level 1/8 in. when measured with a 10 ft. straightedge, and with accumulation of variation of level not to exceed 1/2 in. per room or area. B. Alternate Suspended Ceiling System at Dormitory Rooms: Install complete suspended steel ceiling framing system suspended from double-deflection neoprene hanger clips. STEEL WALL FRAMING AND FURRING Screwable Steel Stud Partitions: Install complete stud partition system in conformance to ASTM C 754. Installation of Partition Track: Align standard steel track at floors and ceiling construction according to partition layouts and secure with suitable fasteners to the floor and ceiling construction at a spacing not to exceed 24 in. o.c. Carry all walls and partitions full height above suspended ceilings to underside of floor and roof decks above except where otherwise specifically called for on Drawings. 1. Fill voids above track, such as steel deck flutes, solidly with packing wool or fiberglass insulation at non-fire rated partitions. Fill voids in flutes of steel deck with mineral wool fire-safing insulation at fire rated partitions for smoke and firestopping purposes to assure the rated performance at fire-rated assemblies. 2. Where partitions run parallel to flutes either install the top track directly to the bottom flange of the deck or install a continuous inverted steel stud, the same depth as the flutes, in the flute and install the top track directly under, and in contact with, the stud, all as required to provide a positive means of attachment. 3. Where acoustical partitions (those to receive acoustical insulation) and fire-rated partitions run parallel to flutes of deck, install top track in continuous bed of acoustical or thermal sealant formed by applying a 1/4 in. minimum bead of sealant to the rear of the track and pressing into place. At fire-rated partitions also install tightly packed firesafing insulation in the flutes for smoke and firestopping purposes to achieve effective closure and to assure the rated performance of the fire-rated assemblies.
3.04 A.
B.
09260 - 7
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Installation of Steel Studs: Provide one-piece steel studs without splices installed at spacing not to exceed 16 in. o.c. (or other spacing indicated) and located at abutting construction and at the internal apex of corners. Provide additional studs at corner conditions, frame jambs, etc., as called for on the Drawings and specified herein. Position steel studs vertically engaging both floor and top runners. Anchor studs located adjacent to door and fixed glass frames, partition intersections, corners, and open partition ends, to the floor and ceiling runner flanges by positive screw engagement with 3/8 in. Type S pan head screws or by locking the studs with metal lock fasteners and to the ceiling runner flanges by screw engagement. Allow for relief of 1/2 in. roof or ceiling deflection at tops of all partitions by screwing through slotted holes. Install double stud at door and fixed glass frame jambs and securely attach to the frame anchors with at least two screws per anchor. Over steel door and fixed glass frames, install steel track header and install studs above, with back-to-back pair, centered over the door to secure control joints. Run continuous length of cold-rolled steel channel through the stud cores, overlapping at least one stud beyond jamb studs at each end. Frame out for recessed cabinets, accessories, grilles, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer for each of the project conditions. Steel Stud Chase Walls: Construct partitions on both sides of non-fire rated chase walls in same manner as other partitions, with studs in direct alignment across the chase. Brace with three gypsum wallboard gussets, per pair of studs, across the chase, located at quarter points, and screwed to the studs. Comply with manufacturer's published details. Steel Furring: Install screwable steel furring channels over faces of concrete or masonry walls to receive gypsum wallboard finishes, continuously along tops and bottoms of walls and in continuous vertical rows spaced 16 in. o.c. Securely anchor at maximum spacing of 16 in. o.c. along full length of each furring member, through alternate flanges. Metal Access Panels: Install all metal access panels at partitions, furrings, and suspended ceilings. Access panels will be furnished to this trade loose under other Section(s). Fixture Attachments: Before any wallboard is installed, a complete survey of all fixtures, accessories, cabinet work, shelves, rail brackets, door stops, or other items to be attached to the finished work of this Section shall be made and wood blocking or other attachments shall be installed within the steel framing and furring work to receive the loads. Blockings or other attachments for the various loads shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be described on the shop drawings. All such fixture attachments shall be observed by the Architect before commencing installation of wallboard. All such blockings and attachments shall be provided as work of this Section. Miscellaneous Framing and Furring: Construct all special miscellaneous screwable steel stud framing and furring, such as at ceiling edgings, soffits, column and beam enclosures, skylight wells, etc., as detailed and as required to achieve the shapes and profiles indicated and other miscellaneous framing indicated and/or reasonably required for the thorough completion of the Project. 1. Thoroughly fasten together, anchor, and brace to provide absolutely rigid structural conditions fully capable of supporting the loads to be applied with factor of safety not less than 2-1/2 to 1. Carry out the work generally as detailed, strictly following instructions of the manufacturer for steel and stud structural framing use. Screw all 09260 - 8 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts connections with self-tapping metal screws or other appropriate fasteners and provide all additional reinforcement required to assure the required performance. 3.05 A. B. GYPSUM WALLBOARD APPLICATION Unless otherwise indicated, application of gypsum wallboard shall conform to ASTM C 840. Apply thicknesses and layers of gypsum wallboard at ceilings, walls, partitions, column and beam enclosures as indicated. Stagger joints in each layer. Locate joints in first layer on opposite sides of partitions to occur on different studs. Apply wallboard at ceilings with long dimension perpendicular to furring channels, with each end occurring over a framing member. Install wallboard at walls and partitions with long dimension vertical, and with each end and edge lying over a framing member. 1. At double layer installations apply second layer by combination of laminating adhesive and mechanical fastenings (through first layer into the steel framing and/or furring member behind), in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations for each project condition. C. Carry gypsum wallboard, each side, continuously from floor to underside of deck construction above, including above suspended ceilings, for acoustical and fire-resistive performances. Where installing perpendicular to steel joists, fit carefully to, and around, steel joist chords to provide positive, fire-safe barrier. To minimize end joints, use maximum practical lengths. Bring gypsum wallboard panels into contact, but do not force into place. Fit abutting ends and edges neatly. Provide slots for sealant at top, bottom, ends, and corners of wallboard at all walls and partitions indicated to receive acoustical insulation, as indicated. Also provide slots for sealant where wallboard abuts other finish materials, as specified hereinbelow. Spacing and installation of drywall screws for the various applications and fire-rating requirements shall conform to the printed standards of the manufacturer. Set heads of fasteners flush with surface of the paper, but not breaking the paper. Where attached loosely to a framing or furring member, a second fastener shall be installed within 1-1/2 in. Cut gypsum wallboard neatly at corners, edges, etc., and for pipes, electrical outlets, electrical conduit and raceway, recessed cabinets, and other projections. ACOUSTICAL INSULATION Walls and partitions indicated on the Drawings with STC Rating or indicated to receive acoustical insulation shall have a single, continuous layer of insulation installed as indicated and specified, filling the entire open space between the framing members. Carry insulation behind backs of all electric boxes and similar appurtenances. Provide mechanical attachment to prevent future settlement. Refer to descriptions of shaft wall and furred wall construction, above, for further description of insulation work.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.06 A.
B.
09260 - 9
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.07 A. INSTALLATION OF WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES Install accessories at gypsum wallboard installations, as follows, in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install joint reinforcement tape at all joints, and at all internal corners where abutting surfaces are both gypsum wallboard construction. 2. Install corner beads at all external wallboard corners. 3. Install casing bead wherever finish wallboard abuts dissimilar materials and other places where specifically called for on the Drawings. 4. Install control joints generally over (and under) centers of all major wall openings (those greater than 40% of wall height, measured floor to ceiling), over all door frames, over control joints in back-up materials, and at maximum distance of 30 ft. in walls, 60 ft. or to limit areas to not more than 2400 sq. ft., at ceilings (except where lesser distance is indicated), and other places specifically called for on the Drawings. Interrupt furring and/or framing behind the control joints. Specific locations of control joints shall be as indicated or as directed by Architect; submit proposed locations of control joints to Architect for approval before beginning work. 5. Install preformed hanging tracks where indicated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.08 A. JOINT FINISHING Finish all corners, joints, and edges of gypsum wallboard and gypsum soffit board work, and all corner beads, casing beads, control joints and other trim to provide complete finishing of all exposed wallboard surfaces, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C 840. Finish to absolutely flush, true surface showing no irregularity when tested by light source parallel to the plane of the nominal wallboard face. 1. Finish wallboard to receive ceramic tile and other adhesive-applied finishes in similar manner. B. Finish all concealed joints in wallboard above ceiling finishes flush with tape and a minimum of two coats of compound to provide a continuous, uninterrupted plane for acoustical and fire-resistive performance. Concealed joints may be left in rough condition without finish sanding. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 09260 - 10 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
C.
D. E.
F.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated panels are substrate for acoustical panels. 3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where gypsum board surfaces are scheduled to receive medium-or heavy-textured finishes before painting or heavy wallcoverings where lighting conditions are not critical. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at surfaces receiving paints. 3.09 A. ACOUSTICAL SEALING Walls and partitions designated on the Drawings with an STC Rating and/or indicated to receive acoustical or thermal insulation, including interior faces of exterior steel framed curtain walls, do all sealing work required, as indicated on the Drawing and generally as listed below. 1. Seal all joints between the gypsum wallboard and surrounding construction. 2. Seal full perimeters of all frames, sleeves, ducts, and other items set into, or passing through, gypsum wallboard construction. 3. Seal full perimeters of all projections through the gypsum wallboard construction, such as pipes, conduits, etc. 4. Seal all control joints in the gypsum wallboard work. 5. Seal all joints between gypsum wallboard and adjoining gypsum wallboard panels at corners and intersections. 6. Seal all joints between gypsum wallboard and adjoining door and window frames in exterior walls. 7. Do all other sealing called for on the Drawings or reasonably required to produce maximum thermal and sound transmission reduction through the walls and partitions. B. Seal joints in partitions continuing above suspended ceilings, in similar manner, for acoustical purposes. Sealing shall be done using sealant of type specified hereinbefore, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and applicable requirements of ASTM C 919. Sealant shall thoroughly fill void for a complete sound and thermal seal, and shall be tooled to dense, smooth, concave finish. 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically called for on the Drawings, in two layer wallboard work seal only the outer layer. 3.10 A. PROTECTION AND CLEANING Protect the work of other Sections and work of this Section already installed against soiling and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged or soiled. END OF SECTION
C.
09260 - 11
SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Work of this Section includes but is not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Floor tile. Wall tile. Base tile. Slate threshold.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Preparation of subsurfaces, including leveling and repair of faulty surfaces. Section 07920, JOINT SEALANTS; Sealing of control joints. Section 09260, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES. Section 10801, TOILET ACCESSORIES; Toilet room accessories.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A118.1 A118.4 A118.6 A136.1 A137.1 2. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Ceramic Tile Grouts Water Resistant Organic Adhesive Ceramic Tile
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 91 C 144 Masonry Cement Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 09310 - 1 CERAMIC TILE
C 150 C 503 C 840 C 847 3. Tile Council of America (TCA): Handbook 1.04 A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Portland Cement Marble Building Stone (Exterior) Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board Metal Lath
Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. 2. 3. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings to Architect for approval showing all finishes, layout plans, bedding, jointing and details, and the dimensions and setting number of each special piece, such setting number to be applied to the rear of such piece. Samples: Submit samples of all finish materials specified under this Section to the Architect for selection and approval. 1. Tile: Duplicate samples mounted on rigid panels, at least 12 in. by 12 in., for each requested color or range. Samples shall show full range of color variation that can be expected in the finish work. Base: Duplicate samples for each size, color, shape and finish. Marble Threshold: 6 in. long sample showing color variation that can be expected in the finish work. Grout: Samples showing manufacturer's standard grout colors.
B.
2. 3. 4. C.
Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of tile and tile accessory, threshold, and tile setting/waterproofing materials. If requested by the Architect, furnish in addition to grade seal, master grade certificate stating grade, kind of tile, identification marks for tile packages, and the name and location of Project, signed by the manufacturer and issued before shipment of tile is made. QUALITY ASSURANCE The work of this Section shall conform to the governing laws and building code and the TCA Handbook.
D.
1.06 A.
09310 - 2
CERAMIC TILE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Manufacturer of waterproof materials shall have been regularly engaged in the production of these materials for a minimum of ten years and shall have three similar installations with a minimum of five years of service at each installation. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Tile shall be properly packaged and brought to the site in original unopened containers with grade seals, as specified hereinbelow, intact and unbroken. Packaged mortar materials shall be delivered in original, unopened containers marked with type and quality of product. Containers, sacks, and bulk storage shall be stored inside the building at area(s) designated by the Contractor, raised above floor level, covered and protected until ready for use. COORDINATION Coordinate work of this Section with that of other Sections that affect or are affected by, this work, as necessary to ensure steady progress of work under Contract. PRODUCTS TILE MATERIALS Floor Tile Schedule: Provide as follows: 1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile at Bathrooms, Thin-set, Single Color Pattern a. b. 2. 2. Product: Dal Tile Keystones Dimensions: 2" x 2"; 5/16", and 1 x 1 x 5/16 Manufacturer: Dal Tile or approved equal
1.07 A.
B.
C.
1.08 A.
PART 2 2.01 A.
Glazed Wall Tile, Single Color Pattern with color variation "range" equal to not less than four glazing colors/textures. a. b. c. Product: Dal Tile Glazed Tile Dimensions: 4" x 4" ; 3/16" thickness Manufacturer: Dal Tile or approved equal
C.
Include special shapes, including cove bases, bullnose edges, corners, etc., required to complete the work according to best trade practice for each job condition, whether or not such special shapes are specifically indicated or specified. SLATE THRESHOLDS Provide slate thresholds in color selected by Architect. Thresholds shall be a minimum of 3/4 in. thick.
2.02 A.
09310 - 3
CERAMIC TILE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.03 A. SETTING MATERIALS Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Bonsal, W. R., Company. Bostik. LATICRETE International Inc. MAPEI Corporation.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
C.
Joint Grout: Factory packaged, precolored latex-Portland cement grout mixes conforming to ANSI A118.6, equal to "Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout", manufactured by the Upco Company, Laticrete International, Inc. equivalent products manufactured by L&M-Surco Mfg., Inc., or equal product by manufacturer licensed by Tile Council of America, as approved by Architect. A selection of at least fourteen standard colors plus black, white, and natural must be available for Architect's selection, and grout-mixes must be complete as packaged, with only addition of acrylic latex grout additive required. ANTI-FRACTURE MEMBRANE Anti-Fracture Membrane: Provide crack suppression membrane product that complies with ANSI A118.12. Provide the following, or approved equal: 1. Laticrete Blue 92P.
2.04 A.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION PREPARATION OF SURFACES Initial Preparation under other Sections: Surfaces to receive materials under this Section shall be turned over to this trade, true, plumb, and level (or uniformly sloped to required pitch) and shall be clean, free of loose dirt, and dust, grease, oil, paint, mastics, and other deleterious materials, and sufficiently cured and dried, ready to receive the finish materials. Final Preparation under this Section: Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify Architect in writing of all conditions which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been filed, until corrective work has been completed or waived. Starting of work without issuance of such notice shall constitute acceptance of conditions as being satisfactory to properly receive the work of this Section. 1. Do final cleaning of surfaces just prior to installation of tile, removing all dust, dirt, and other loose particles.
B.
09310 - 4
CERAMIC TILE
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.02 A. INSTALLATION Install and grout tile in accordance with the provisions of the standard specification and published details hereinbefore listed, generally as follows, in accordance with TCA "Recommended Uses": 1. Porcelain Floor Tile, Thinset over Anti-Fracture Membrane: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar, TCA Method F125A, With Portland-Cement Commercial Grout Latex-Portland Cement Mortar, TCA Method W244, with Proprietary Commercial Grout.
2.
Ceramic Wall Tile and Base Tile Thinset:
B.
Room temperatures where ceramic material are installed shall be maintained at temperatures of not less than 40oF. for a period of at least 48 hours prior to commencement of tile work, during the tile work, and from that time until completion of Project. Refer to Section 01000, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for temporary heating provisions. Where possible, lay out work so that no tiles less than half size occur. Maintain plumb and true finish surfaces. Maintain joints straight, true, level, plumb. All joints shall be straight and continuous in both directions. Make tile cuts straight and true. Discard improperly cut tile. Maintain consistent joint width, including joints between adjoining sheets and joints at cut tile. Maintain true and proper planes, levels, and slopes. Remove and replace all tile work which does not comply with specification requirements. Control Joints: Provide control joints where tile meets restraining surfaces (walls, curbs, columns, pipes, etc.); directly over control or expansion joints in subsurfaces; and not farther than 24 ft. each way, located as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by Architect. Control joints are not required where tile dimension perpendicular to joint is 12 ft. or less. Work shall conform to TCA Method EJ171. 1. Form control joints neat, straight, and uniform in width. Cut tile neatly and to accurate radius at exposed junction with pipes, etc. Control joints shall be full width of control joint in subsurfaces, and full width or normal tile joint at other locations, and full thickness of tile and setting bed. Keep open joints free of grout and debris. Upon completion of tile work, install noncontaminating temporary joint filler to maintain joints in clean condition until installation of joint backing and sealant under Section 07920, JOINT SEALANTS.
C.
D.
E.
2.
F.
Grouting: Grout tile joints with proprietary grout mixes as specified hereinbefore. Do not commence grouting until 24 hours after tile installation. Follow instructions of the manufacturer and the aforementioned standard specifications. Wet tile where necessary. Damp cure grout joints at least three consecutive days commencing immediately after joints have set. After grouting, protect tile work from traffic for at least seven days. Remove all work not conforming to specification requirements and replace with acceptable work. 09310 - 5 CERAMIC TILE
G.
3.04 A.
CLEANING After grout has set, polish tile free of all dirt and mortar or grout stains with clean, white cloths, using sponges and clean water. Rinse thoroughly and polish with clean, white cloths. Leave work clean and spotless. Acid cleaners will not be permitted. ADDITIONAL MATERIALS Furnish to Owner additional, factory sealed, standard cartons containing a total of at least 3% of the amount of each different type and color of ceramic tile used on the Project. Deliver the additional materials to site and place in storage area(s) within the building designated by the Architect. PROTECTION AND FINAL CLEANING After the placing, curing, and initial cleaning, of the work of this Section, the work shall be protected from damage until time of Substantial Completion of the Project. Provide all necessary protective barriers, non-staining protective covers, etc., as required to carry out such protection. END OF SECTION
3.05 A.
B.
3.06 A.
09310 - 6
CERAMIC TILE
SECTION 09400 TERRAZZO WORK
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Work of this Section includes but is not limited to: 1. Patching, extending and repairing existing terrazzo floors.
1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Work Program: Provide detailed work program, indicating repair work and methods of repair. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of written instructions for recommended periodic maintenance of each type of terrazzo. Samples for Initial Selection: Color plates showing the colors and patterns required to match existing. Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each terrazzo sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and marble-chip types, sizes, and proportions. Prepare samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the Work in size indicated below: 1. Terrazzo: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples.
B.
C.
D.
1.03 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE NTMA Standards: Comply with specified provisions and recommendations of National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (NTMA). Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed terrazzo installations similar in material and extent to that indicated for Project and that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to, the following: a. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and preparatory work required for terrazzo repair work.
B.
C.
09400 - 1
TERRAZZO WORK
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review dust-control procedures. Review all cracks and areas needing repair.
c. d. 1.04 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a wellventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting terrazzo repair work. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during terrazzo repair installation. Close spaces to traffic during terrazzo repair application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. Control and collect dust produced by routing and grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from detrimental effects of routing and grinding operations. 1. Provide dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust migration and to isolate areas from noise.
B.
1.05 A.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2 2.01 A. B. 2.02 A.
PRODUCTS TERRAZZO MATERIALS Terrazzo Type: Match existing. Mixes: Match existing TERRAZZO ACCESSORIES Cleaner: Chemically neutral, liquid cleaner, with Ph factor between 7 and 10, of formulation recommended by sealer manufacturer for type of terrazzo used and complying with NTMA requirements.
09400 - 2
TERRAZZO WORK
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Interior Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant penetrating sealer with Ph factor between 7 and 10, that does not affect color or physical properties of terrazzo surface. EXECUTION PREPARATION Clean and prepare existing substrate to comply with NTMA specifications for type of terrazzo application required. Clean substrate of loose chips and foreign matter. Rout out and remove terrazzo at cracks a minimum of 4 x the width of the cracks along crack lines. TERRAZZO INSTALLATION AND REPAIR Clean out routed cracks of all dust and loose particles. Patch and fill existing terrazzo using materials and colors that match existing Install terrazzo patches and infills at locations indicated. Exercise extreme care to ensure fluids from grinding operation do not react with existing divider or control strips to produce a stain on aggregate. Delay grinding and finishing until heavy trade work is completed and construction traffic through the area is restricted. Fine Grinding: Grind all existing terrazzo and new terrazzo patches with 120 or finer grit stones until all grout is removed from surface. Repeat rough grinding, grout coat, and fine grinding if large voids exist after initial fine grinding. Produce surface with a minimum of 70 percent aggregate exposure. CLEANING, SEALING, AND PROTECTING Clean terrazzo after installing and finishing operations are completed, complying with sealer manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealer to cleaned terrazzo surfaces to comply with sealer manufacturer's instructions. Protect terrazzo from damage and wear during construction operation. FINAL CLEANING Clean terrazzo as recommended by manufacturer of sealer and machine buff if required when building is ready for occupancy. END OF SECTION
PART 3 3.01 A.
B.
3.02 A.
B. C.
D.
E.
3.03 A.
B. C. 3.04 A.
09400 - 3
TERRAZZO WORK
SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide suspended acoustical ceilings as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. Acoustical tile ceiling with exposed suspension system.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 09260, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES; Gypsum drywall ceilings. 2. Division 15, MECHANICAL and Division 16, ELECTRICAL; Mechanical and electrical fixtures and appurtenances at acoustical ceilings, including independent suspension.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 641 C 423 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Ram Method Light Reflectance of Acoustical Materials by the Integrating Sphere Reflectometer Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels
C 523
C 635
C 636
09511 - 1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts E 84 Surface Burning Materials Characteristics of Building
E 119 E 580
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint
2. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA): Handbook Ceiling Systems Handbook
3. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): SS-S-118 1.04 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials comply with requirements. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material to be exposed in the finish work, showing full range of color and finish work, showing full range of color and finish variations expected. Provide minimum 12 in. x 12 in. samples of panels and tiles. Provide minimum 12 in. long samples of exposed suspension systems. Test Reports: Submit certified reports for tests required. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing laws and building codes as well as to CISCA Handbook and ASTM C 636. Installer: A firm with minimum three years experience in work of type required by this Section, and which is authorized, certified or licensed by the manufacturers of the primary materials. Source: For each type of material required for the work of this Section, provide primary materials which are the products of a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of primary materials. TESTS Fire Resistance: Where fire-resistance ratings are indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide materials and construction which are identical to assemblies whose fire-resistance ratings have been tested in compliance with ASTM E 119 by independent agencies acceptable to the Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. Sound Controlling (Acoustical) Tiles and Panels
B.
C.
D. 1.05 A.
B.
C.
1.06 A.
09511 - 2
B.
Burning Characteristics: Provide materials whose surface burning characteristics, when tested in compliance with ASTM E 84 are Class A. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing manufacturer's name, brand names, type of material, and contents. Store materials in interior spaces, above floors, under cover, away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces. Provide ventilation. PROJECT CONDITIONS, SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Environment: Perform work only when temperature and humidity conditions are within the limits established by manufacturers of the materials and products used. Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. 1. Proceed with installation of ceiling only when construction above ceilings and penetrating work is complete. Delay installation of ceiling tiles or panels until near time of Substantial Completion. 2. Perform work of this Section coordinated with the layout of light fixtures, HVAC equipment and fixtures, fire suppression system components and all other related work. In general, every penetration shall occur at the center of a ceiling tile or panel.
1.07 A.
B.
1.08 A.
B.
1.09 A.
EXTRA MATERIAL Provide packaged, wrapped and labeled maintenance stock equal to 2% of the actual quantity installed for the following items of work: 1. Each type of ceiling tile and panel. 2. Each type of suspension system component.
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS SUSPENSION SYSTEM Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed requirements specified: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation
B.
Exposed Suspension System: Provide manufacturers standard 15/16 in. exposed "Tee", commercial quality cold-rolled, electro-galvanized steel grid system, complying with ASTM C 635 for "Intermediate-Duty System". Provide grid modules to match ceiling panel sizes. Provide manufacturer's standard white baked enamel finish on steel exposed surfaces.
09511 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Attachment Devices: Provide attachment devices sized for five times design load indicated by ASTM C 635, Table 1, for Direct Hung. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, galvanized, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1 Coating, minimum 12 gage. Size wire so that stress at three times hanger design load given in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, will be less than the yield stress of the wire. Moldings and Trim: Provide Armstrong Axiom 6 in. perimeter trim. ACOUSTICAL PANELS AND TILES Provide ceiling panel and tile products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed requirements specified: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Co. B. Interior Ceiling Panels: Provide the following ceiling panel products, or equal products by other named manufacturers: 1. ACT-1: Armstrong No. 574 "Cirrus" 24 in. x 24 in. x 3/4 in., square edge, with 15/16 in. steel grid; or equal manufactured by USG or Celotex. 2.03 A. ACOUSTICAL INSULATION Provide acoustical batt insulation above acoustical ceilings at all Office locations, as follows: 1. ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent by weight. PART 3 3.01 A. EXECUTION INSPECTION The Installer shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this work will be performed and notify Contractor in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means Installer accepts substrates and conditions. PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION - GENERAL General: Strictly comply with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Conditioning: Condition acoustical ceiling materials to temperature and humidity conditions which approximate those that will be present when spaces are occupied by unpackaging and separating material at least 24 hours prior to installation.
D.
E. 2.02 A.
3.02 A. B.
09511 - 4
C.
Exterior doors and windows shall be in place and glazed prior to ceiling installation. Cleaning, concrete, masonry, plaster, and other "wet-work" shall be complete and dry. A minimum temperature of 65oF. shall be maintained before, during, and after the installation of acoustical work.
D.
Coordination: Coordinate installation with other work to ensure proper locations of related work such as light fixtures, mechanical fixtures, fire protection systems and the like. Layout: Measure each area and layout ceilings to balance panel widths on opposite edges of each ceiling in both directions. Avoid use of less than 1/2 width ceiling units wherever possible. Suspension Installation: Erect suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, supported only from building structure. Level main suspension members to within tolerance of 1/8 in. in 10 ft. Splay hangers where necessary and countersplay to balance resulting horizontal forces. Cross brace suspension to prevent lateral sway and displacement during full seismic loads prescribed by code. Install acoustical units flush and level with joints in perfect alignment. Maintain direction of pattern and "mill-run" of acoustical units in one direction. Finish acoustical ceilings shall be level to within 1/8 in. in 10 ft. with total accumulated error not to exceed 1/2 in. or L/960 of overall ceiling dimension, whichever is smaller, in any room or area. Use white, clean gloves when handling ceiling materials. INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED EXPOSED "TEE" LAY-IN PANEL SYSTEM Install exposed "Tee" suspension system where indicated, in accordance with ASTM C 636. Secure hanger anchors symmetrically to structure above areas to receive "Tee" suspension grid, locating the hangers in rows directly above exposed main "Tees". Install main "Tees" at proper elevation with manufacturer's recommended ties. Install cross "Tees" 2 ft. on center, developing a 2 ft. by 4 ft. grid or 2 ft. x 2 ft. grid as indicated. Install wall mouldings at perimeter walls and columns where main or cross "tees" do not occur, or as otherwise called for on the Drawings. Miter corners where wall moulding intersect or install corner caps. After installation of the exposed "Tee" suspension system, install acoustical panels flush and level, with panel grain in single direction. Installation of Acoustical Insulation: At all Office ceiling locations, install acoustical batt insulation above ceiling panels, continuous over ceiling areas, wall to wall. Butt edges tight.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I. 3.03 A.
B.
C.
D.
09511 - 5
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.04 A. CLEANING Protect the work of other trades and work of this Section already installed against soiling and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged or soiled.
END OF SECTION
09511 - 6
SECTION 09590 LAMINATE WOOD FLOORING SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. Resilient wood strip flooring system.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for work of this Section. Include instructions for handling, storage, anchorage, finishing, protection, and maintenance. Samples: Submit duplicate 12 in. x 12 in. finished wood flooring samples. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: The entire wood flooring system shall be installed by a single specialized wood flooring firm (installer), with at least five years successful experience in installation and field finishing of the types specified. Manufacturer: Obtain flooring from a single manufacturer or source, to ensure match of quality, color, pattern, and texture. Mock-ups: Before beginning primary work of this Section, provide 10 ft. x 10 ft. mock-ups at locations acceptable to Architect and obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities. Protect and maintain acceptable mock-ups throughout the work of this Section to serve as criteria for acceptance of this work. Acceptable mock-ups may be included as part of the finished work. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture during shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place, with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver materials to building until "wet work" such as concrete, masonry, and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium.
B. 1.04 A.
B.
C.
1.05 A.
09590 - 1
LAMINATE WOOD FLOORING SYSTEM
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wood Strip/Plank Flooring, Laminated: a. Pergo
2.02 A.
WOOD STRIP/PLANK FLOORING Laminated Hardwood Flooring: Provide tongued-and-grooved strip or plank-type laminated hardwood flooring complying with as manufactured by Pergo: 1. Product: Pergo Accolade. 2. Plank Dimensions: 7.6 in. x 47.5 in. 3. Color/Species: As selected by Architect.
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION INSPECTION Examine substrates where wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which work will be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. PREPARATION Where direct application of wood flooring to concrete substrate is indicated, test for dryness before proceeding with installation. Check levelness of concrete substrate to ensure not more than 1/4-inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. Grind down high spots or fill in low spots to correct improper conditions. INSTALLATION General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Pattern: Comply with pattern or direction of pattern for laying wood flooring as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Laminated Flooring Installation: Set in adhesive/mastic according to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. PROTECTION Protect installed unfinished and prefinished wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy kraft paper or other suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation. END OF SECTION
3.02 A.
3.03 A. B.
C.
3.04 A.
09590 - 2
LAMINATE WOOD FLOORING SYSTEM
SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide resilient flooring and related items, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Sheet vinyl flooring. Rubber flooring. Rubber base. Mastics and leveling compounds.
1.02 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D 570 D 638 D 2047 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces Surface Burning Materials Characteristics of Building
E 84
2. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): SS-T-312B Tile, Floor, Asphalt, Rubber Vinyl, and Vinyl Composition Wall Base; Rubber and Vinyl Plastic.
SS-W-40 1.03 A. SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used.
B.
09650 - 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
C.
Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
1.04 A.
B.
1.05 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections affecting, or affected by, this work, as necessary to ensure completion of work of the Contract on schedule. PRODUCTS GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Resilient materials shall be uniform in thickness and size. Resilient material shall be cut accurately with square, true edges. Plain colors shall be uniform throughout. Variegated colors and patterns shall be reasonably uniform so as not to mar appearance of floor. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, all colors shall be as selected by the Architect from the full range of manufacturer's standard colors. Resilient materials shall be free of objectionable odors, blisters, cracks, objectionable foreign material, or other physical defects affecting appearance or serviceability. SHEET VINYL FLOORING Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide sheet vinyl flooring products of one of the following manufacturers if they meet or exceed the requirements of these specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. Armstorng World Industries Congoleum Corporation Manington Mills Tarkett, Inc.
PART 2 2.01 A. B. C. D.
E.
F.
2.02 A.
09650 - 2
RESILIENT FLOORING
B.
Sheet Vinyl Flooring: Provide 0.080 in. gauge Armstrong Medintech solid vinyl sheet vinyl or Architect approved equal from a specified manufacturer. 1. Heat-Welded Seams: Provide 4 millimeter welding rods as recommended and approved by flooring manufacturer.
2.03 A.
RUBBER FLOORING Sport-Ability; 3/8 in. thick, 24 in. x 24 in. square; as manufactured by Johnsonite, or approved equal. 1. Color: As selected by Architect.
2.04 A.
RUBBER BASE Rubber base shall be coved base and straight base as shown on Drawings, manufactured by Roppe, Johnsonite, or approved equal. Provide heat formed inside and outside corner pieces as necessary. Color shall be as selected by Architect. ADHESIVES, MASTIC UNDERLAYMENTS, CRACK FILLERS, AND PRIMERS Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Rubber Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
2.05 A.
B.
C.
Vinyl Tile Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. Crack filler shall be as recommended by flooring manufacturer, and equal to Armstrong "S190", Kentile "Fast Kenpatch No. 13" or Amtico "Crack Filler", as approved by the Architect. EXECUTION PREPARATION OF SURFACES Initial Preparation Under Other Sections: 1. Surfaces to receive resilient materials shall be level, plumb, true and clean, free of projections, ridges, and waves, and free of loose dirt and dust, grease, oil, and other deleterious materials such as resin type curing compounds, paint, glue, and similar materials, ready to receive work of this Section. Filling of cracks with crack filler, as required, however, will be included as part of work of this Section. 2. Surfaces of concrete floor slabs to which resilient flooring is to be applied shall be
D.
PART 3 3.01 A.
09650 - 3
RESILIENT FLOORING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts finished to tolerance stated under Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 3. When variation in finished surface exceeds allowable amount specified therein, it shall be brought within the allowable tolerance with latex type underlayment applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Inspection of Surfaces and Final Preparation Under this Section: 1. Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify the Architect in writing of all conditions which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent until corrective work has been completed or waived. Start of work in any area without issuances of such notice shall constitute acceptance of conditions in the area as suitable to properly receive the work of this Section. 2. Fill all cracks, control joints, etc., in sub-surfaces, using approved Crack Filler in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Do final cleaning of surfaces just prior to installation, removing all dust, dirt, and other loose particles which may have accumulated since initial cleaning. 3. Allow concrete slabs to dry adequately before commencing application of flooring materials, checking the moisture content, if necessary, by means of primer tests, relative humidity tests, or mat moisture and bonding tests, all such tests being at the option of the Contractor, although the Architect may require any such tests to be done by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, if he wishes to verify or record the moisture conditions. C. Prepare substrates according to resilient flooring and/or adhesive manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, grease, oil, or other materials that would prohibit proper adhesion of tiles to existing or new substrates. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, grease, other petroleum containing substances, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 4. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Do not begin installation until work of other sections including painting, is substantially complete. Use only experienced workmen. Strictly adhere to printed instructions of manufacturer's of various materials; if found to be in conflict refer to Architect for decision.
09650 - 4
RESILIENT FLOORING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Maintain room temperatures in installation areas at not less than 65oF. for a period of at least 48 hours prior to commencement of tile work, and to at least 48 hours after completion, and not less than 60oF. from that time on. Lay resilient materials in manner to insure good, uniform contact with subsurface materials, and to produce finished surfaces which are smooth, even, and in true planes, free of buckles, waves, and other imperfections. Store and use adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Where different colors of resilient tile flooring occur in adjoining rooms or areas, and no threshold is called for, install feature strip under door or across center of doorless opening, of color selected by the Architect. Fit flooring neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases and thresholds, and around pipes, columns, and other projections. Cut, fit, and scribe borders after application of field tile. Install edge strips where resilient flooring materials terminate at points higher than contiguous finished flooring. Clean off surplus adhesive from resilient materials and adjacent surfaces. RUBBER TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, using recommended cement or other adhesive recommended by manufacturer. Install flooring in pattern indicated. Do all necessary cutting, coping, and scribing, keeping all exposed cut lines neat, straight, and free of burrs. SHEET VINYL INSTALLATION Sheet Flooring: Install flooring with full coverage of adhesive observing the manufacturer's recommended trowel notching spreading rates and open times. Roll floor with 150 pound roller to ensure good contact and bond. 1. Heat-Welded Seams: Route out and heat weld all seams and joints using welding rods and techniques as recommended and approved by flooring manufacturer. 3.05 A. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION Install resilient base in manner to ensure uniform positive contact with sub-surface, and to produce finished surfaces which are smooth, even, and in true planes, free of buckles, waves, and other imperfections. Store and use adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. ADDITIONAL MATERIALS Furnish additional, factory-sealed, standard cartons containing a total of at least 3% of the amount of each different material, type, and color of floor tile used on the Project.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G. 3.03 A.
B.
3.04 A.
3.06 A.
09650 - 5
RESILIENT FLOORING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Deliver the additional materials to site and place in storage area(s) within the building designated by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
09650 - 6
RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09680 CARPET
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install broadloom carpet and related items to complete work as shown on Drawings and/or as specified herein and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of concrete floor slabs and fills, except leveling and repair of faulty surfaces and those not constructed to stated tolerance. 2. Furnishing and installation of carpet at floors, where scheduled.
1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.
B.
C.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12 in. x 12 in. Sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.
D.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
E.
09680 - 1
CARPET
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 1.05 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. Mockups: Before installing carpet, install mockups for each type of carpet installation required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be installed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. 1.06 A. 1.07 A. B. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." PROJECT CONDITIONS General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B.
C.
D.
C.
09680 - 2
CARPET
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.08 A. WARRANTY General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 A. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type of carpet, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). PART 2 2.01 A. PRODUCTS CARPET TYPE CPT-1 Provide carpet as manufactured by Blue Ridge Industries manufactured from 100% Antron Lumina Solution Dyed Nylon, and as follows: 1. Lobby and Elevator Corridor Areas: Critics Choice #C284. 2. Corridor Areas: Press Release #P350, with fully adhered backing. 2.02 A. INSTALLATION MATERIALS Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by carpet manufacturer. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended by carpet manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h. b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
B.
B.
09680 - 3
CARPET
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts PART 3 3.01 A. EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. B. 3.02 A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, " Direct Glue-Down Installation." Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
B.
B.
C.
D.
3.03 A. B. C.
D.
09680 - 4
CARPET
E.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
3.04 A.
B.
Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION
C.
09680 - 5
CARPET
SECTION 09910 PAINTING
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide painting and finishing work throughout exterior and interior of Project as indicated and scheduled on the Drawings and as specified. Examine Contract Documents to determine full extent of painting and finishing work required. Materials provided under other Sections that need painting or finishing and are left unfinished under requirements of other Specification Sections, shall be painted and finished to completion under work of this Section, unless specifically scheduled herein to be left unfinished. Preparatory work of materials and surfaces to receive paint beyond that specified to be done as work of other Sections, shall be included as work of this Section. RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES; Prime coat on hollow steel doors and frames. Division 15, MECHANICAL and Division 16, ELECTRICAL; Factory finish and prime coats on mechanical and electrical fixtures and equipment.
B.
C.
1.02 A.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): TT-D-65 TT-T-801 Drier; Paint, Liquid Turpentine, Gum Spirits, Steam Distilled, Sulfate Wood, and Destructively Distilled
2.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): SP 2 SP 3 Hand Tool Cleaning Power Tool Cleaning
09910 - 1
PAINTING
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. Initial Color Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts or chips showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each paint system used. Verification Samples: After initial selection of colors, submit representative samples of each paint system color that is to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide texture to simulate actual conditions. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Resubmit samples until required sheen, color, and texture have been approved. Provide samples as follows: 1. Paint Samples for Smooth Surfaces: Provide samples of painted finishes on gypsum drywall or Masonite board having minimum size of 144 sq. in. Stained or Natural Finished Wood: Provide samples of stained or natural finished wood on actual samples of wood to be used in the completed work.
B.
C.
2.
D.
Environmental Submittals: Provide manufacturers' product data for paints, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer of finish coats for each substrate. Coordination: Review other Specification Sections where primers are provided to ensure compatibility with finish coatings provided under this Section. Mock-Ups: Prior to commencing work of this Section, provide 100 sq. ft. mock-ups of each color, paint system, and substrate at locations acceptable to the Architect. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities. Refinish mock-ups until Architect's acceptance is obtained. Maintain acceptable mock-ups throughout the remainder of the work to serve as criteria for acceptance of the work. Acceptable mock-ups may be incorporated into the finish work. TESTS The Owner may employ an independent testing agency to perform tests, evaluations, and certifications of products used. Cooperate and permit samples of materials to be taken as they are used. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather, Temperature, and Humidity: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions fall within limits established by manufacturers of materials used.
1.05 A.
B.
C.
1.06 A.
1.07 A.
09910 - 2
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. Indoor Temperature: drying of paints. Maintain indoor temperature at 65F. during application and
2.
Outdoor Temperature and Conditions: Air and surface temperature shall be between 50F. and 90F. Surfaces shall be dry within limits of finish system manufacturer. Do not paint exterior surfaces while surfaces are exposed to the hot sun.
3. B.
Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetration work is complete. Lighting: Since lighting conditions can alter appearances of finish painting work, perform work of this Section under lighting conditions simulating permanent lighting system to the greatest extent possible. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials in unopened original containers bearing manufacturer's labels. Store materials in fully sealed containers, outside the building, preferably in exterior storage shed, well ventilated, and with a minimum ambient temperature of 45F. Oily rags and waste must be removed from the building every night, and under no circumstances will be allowed to accumulate. Each space containing stored paint materials shall be provided with UL labeled fire extinguisher of suitable type, class, and capacity. ATTIC STOCK Provide a minimum of 1 gallon of each type of paint, and each type of color. Deliver to Owner's storage area after Substantial Completion. Clearly label each container indicating type of paint and color. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Latex Based Paints: Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore); Pristine Eco-Spec. The Sherwin Williams Company (S-W); Harmony Duron (Duron; Genesis)
C.
1.08 A. B.
1.09 A.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B.
High Performance Paint Coatings: Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. Tnemec Corporation (Tnemec). International Protective Coatings (IPC). Valspar Corporation (Valspar).
09910 - 3
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Materials used shall be best grade products of their respective kinds. The Painting Schedule is based on products the above named manufacturers. These are specified to establish a standard of quality and kind of material desired. Provide these products, or equals as approved by Architect. Note: If substitutes are proposed, submit complete schedule showing materials specified and equivalent materials proposed as substitutes. Provide complete manufacturer's product data on proposed materials. Substitutes must be approved by Architect before commitment for materials is made. Assume full responsibility for proper performance of materials, for method of application, and for compatibility of materials applied over shop coats or other coats previously applied, including but limited to primers, sealers, preservative treatments, etc. Notwithstanding specific schedules in this Section, select primers which have been verified to be appropriate for each of the substrates and finishes encountered. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
E.
F.
G.
2.
2.02 A.
COLORS Provide colors in accordance with schedule provided by Architect. Tint and match colors to the satisfaction of Architect. Provide facilities for comparison and adjustment of colors. No limit is placed on number of colors that may be required; however the following maximum number of colors may be used in any one room, area, or surface: 1. Four Colors.
2.03 A. B. C. PART 3 3.01 A.
FILLERS, SOLVENTS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Turpentine: Pure gum spirits of turpentine conforming to Fed Spec. TT-T-801. Drier: Conform to Fed. Spec. TT-D-65. Tinting Materials: Best quality, ground in pure boiled linseed oil, limeproof, and non-fading. EXECUTION INSPECTION AND GENERAL PREPARATION Inspect surfaces to receive finishes to ensure they are in proper condition to receive work under this Section. If surfaces are not thoroughly dry, or if surfaces cannot be put in proper condition to receive paint or other finish by customary cleaning methods, sanding, or spackling, notify Architect in writing.
B.
09910 - 4
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Commencing work on any surface will be construed as acceptance of the surface as being satisfactory to properly receive the work of this Section. Furnish and lay drop cloths in all rooms and areas where painting and finishing is being done, to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage during the painting work. Remove hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, factory finished work, and similar items; or provide ample in-place protection. Use skilled mechanics for removal, resetting, and protection. Cleaning: Do not paint over dirt, dust, rust, grease, moisture, or other contaminants detrimental to the formation of a durable paint finish. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to painting in any given area. Touch up bare or abraded spots on surfaces with shop or existing finishes scheduled to be painted under this Section. Use same material used for shop coat. Substrate shall be smooth, free from raised grain; putty sags, cracks, rust, grease, dirt, or other foreign matter or defect. Incompatible Shop Primers: Remove incompatible shop primers and reprime surfaces, or provide barrier coats in compliance with finish paint manufacturer's instructions. SURFACE PREPARATION Prepare surfaces to receive work of this Section in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions applicable to each material, condition, and finish. Gypsum Wallboard: Fill holes, dents, and similar flaws in gypsum wallboard with plaster of Paris or spackling compound. Cut out and fill cracks. Sand surface of patch smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Do not abrade adjacent surfaces. Patched areas shall not be detectable in finished work. Wood to be Painted: Sand surfaces smooth and free of marks prior to applying first coat. Wash sap spots and knots with mineral spirits. When dry, touch-up spots and knots with an approved sealer for exterior work, and with two coats of shellac for interior work. 1. 2. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects, with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dry. Prime tops, edges, and bottoms, of unprimed wood doors immediately upon delivery. Prime hardware cut-outs in similar manner prior to installation of butts, locks, and closers. Prime wood edges, ends, faces, undersides, backsides, including cabinets, casework, paneling, and mouldings and trim. Prime wood glazing rabbets and sealant slots before glazing or sealant work is begun.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
3. 4. D.
Wood to be Transparent Finished: Sand smooth and free of marks before applying the first coat. Wash sap spots and knots with mineral spirits. When dry, touch-up spots and knots with two coats of shellac. 1. 2. Backprime work with an approved spar varnish. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects after first coat is dry, using an
09910 - 5
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts exterior filler compatible with the finishing specified and tinted to camouflage repairs. Seal tops, edges, and bottoms, of unfinished wood doors immediately upon delivery. Seal cut-outs in similar manner prior to installation of butts, locks, and closers. If stained finish is required obtain alternate instructions from Architect. After being fitted by the carpenter, seal cut edges again, in similar manner, and then top and bottom edges shall be given an additional seal coat. Seal wood glazing rabbets and sealant slots before glazing or sealant work begins.
3.
4. E.
Field-Welded Ferrous Metal: After installation, field-welding, and grinding, and immediately before painting, remove rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, weld smoke stains, burnt primer, and other foreign material with wire brushes and/or steel scrapers. Power tool clean in accordance with SSPC SP 3. Remove grease and oil by use of solvent recommended by paint manufacturer. Sand exposed surfaces, and between coats, as required to produce smooth, even finishes. 1. Sand smooth and spot prime welded areas, and areas where prime coat has been damaged or abraded, using rust inhibitive primer scheduled in this Section.
F.
Other Ferrous Metal: Remove rust, mill scale, and foreign materials. Wire brush or sand damaged or rusted area to bright metal. Remove grease or dirt with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer just prior to applying paint. 1. Spot prime all areas where shop coat has been damaged or abraded, using same type paint as used for shop coat.
G.
Field-Welded Galvanized Metal: After installation, field-welding, and grinding, and immediately before painting, remove rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, weld smoke stains, and other foreign material with wire brushes and/or steel scrapers. Power tool clean in accordance with SSPC SP 3. Remove grease and oil with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer. Sand exposed surfaces, and between coats, as required to produce smooth, even finishes. 1. Sand smooth welded areas, and areas where galvanized coating has been damaged or abraded. Spot prime using zinc primer scheduled in this Section.
H.
Other Galvanized Metal: Prior to installation, remove corrosion and foreign materials by sanding or other appropriate method. Remove grease or dirt with solvent recommended by paint manufacturer just prior to applying primer. Other Non-Ferrous Metal: Prepare shop primed non-ferrous metals similarly to ferrous metals, specified above. 1. Prepare unprimed non-ferrous metals by thoroughly cleaning of oil, grease, and temporary protective coatings using solvent recommended by primer manufacturer. Provide additional pretreatment recommended by primer manufacturer to assure permanent adhesion of paint coats.
I.
J.
Other Materials: Prepare other materials in strict accordance with recommendations of manufacturers of materials to be finished, and primers and finishes to be applied.
09910 - 6
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts K. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. APPLICATION Painting Schedule in this Section lists minimum number of coats required. If specified minimum number of coats does not completely cover or hide base materials, provide additional coats required for coverage and uniform finish appearance, without additional cost to Owner. Apply paint in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrates and types of materials being applied. No material shall be thinned in any way except as directed by manufacturer. Apply paints and coatings at coverage rates and dry film thicknesses scheduled at the end of this Section. Each coat applied must be inspected and approved by Architect prior to application of succeeding coat, otherwise no credit for the coat applied will be given and work in question shall be recoated without additional expense to Owner. Notify Architect when each coat is ready for inspection. Additional Coats: Provide additional coats necessary to eliminate show through and bleed through conditions. Drying Time: Allow manufacturer's recommended drying time between successive coats. However, allow each coat to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coat. Sanding: Lightly sand finishes between coats using #00 sandpaper. Tinting: Tint prime coat on gypsum wallboard and plaster to approximate color of final shade. Closets: Finish closets inside the same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified or scheduled. Doors and Panels: Paint all doors, panels, access panels, etc., in the "open" position. Paint all edges, tops, bottoms, and both faces. Paint back face of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match adjacent exposed surfaces. Movable Equipment and Furnishings: Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings same as adjacent exposed surfaces. Permanently Fixed Equipment: Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only. Duct Interiors: Paint interior surfaces of ducts where visible through registers, grilles, or louvers with flat black, non-specular paint. Field-Finished Casework: Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and other field finished casework to match exterior.
3.03 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
09910 - 7
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts N. Finished work shall be free from runs, sags, hairs, defective brushing, and clogging of lines and angles. Flaws visible in the completed work shall be removed and the area satisfactorily repaired. Concrete Floor to Receive Sealer: Apply sealer at a rate not to exceed 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Allow first coat to cure not less than 24 hours, but not more than 72 hours. Apply second coat at a rate not to exceed 400 sq. ft./gal.
O.
P.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical items is limited to items exposed to view in the mechanical rooms and in occupied areas. 1. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to: Ductwork. Heat exchangers. Insulation Motors and mechanical equipment. Piping, hangers, and supports. Tanks and equipment;. 2. Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: Conduit and fittings. Switchgear.
Q.
Completed Work: Provide finishes that match approved samples and mock-ups for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. COMPLETION Cleaning: At completion of work of this Section, remove paint and varnish spots, and oil, grease, and other stains caused by this work from exposed surfaces. Leave finishes in a satisfactory condition. At completion of work of this Section, remove masking materials and other debris. Reinstall or replace fixtures, plates, etc., removed to facilitate application of paint. Retouching: Touch-up and repair applied finishes which, for any reason have been damaged during construction work. All finished work applied under this Section shall have finished surfaces as approved by finish material manufacturer. Final Inspection: Protect painted surfaces against damage until date of Substantial Completion. Architect will conduct final inspection of painting work. Areas that do not comply with requirements of these Specifications shall be repainted or retouched to satisfaction of Architect at no additional cost to Owner.
3.04 A.
B.
C.
D.
09910 - 8
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.05 A. SURFACES NOT TO BE FINISHED Finishes for the following items are either included under other appropriate Sections or require no painting, except as otherwise specifically scheduled with subsequent Exterior and Interior Schedules. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.06 A. B. Chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, bronze, brass, and aluminum other than mill finished, unless otherwise specified. Factory finished mechanical and electrical equipment, pumps, and machinery, which occur in mechanical or equipment rooms or areas. Galvanized ducts, pipes, conduits, etc., occurring within mechanical areas or spaces. Also all such items fully concealed from view in the finished work. Factory finished materials, specialties, and accessories unless otherwise specified. Ceramic and clay products, glass, plastic, and other surfaces with "integral" finishes, except as otherwise scheduled hereinbelow. Exterior concrete.
PAINT SCHEDULE Number of coats scheduled is minimum. Refer to Paragraph 3.03A., hereinbefore. Painting of Exterior Surfaces: 1. Exterior Wood Soffits: One Coat: 1. Cabots Austrailian Tinber Oil
C.
Painting of Interior Surfaces: Important Note: Notwithstanding anything in the following schedule to the contrary, interior painting and finishing shall conform to the applicable laws and building code regarding fire hazard classifications of finish materials. 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster for Latex Eggshell, or Satin Finish: One Coat 1. Benjamin Moore; Eco-Spec Interior Latex Primer No. 231: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). Duron Equal S-W Equal Benjamin Moore; Eco-Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 223: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). Duron Equal S-W Equal
2. 3. Two Coats 1.
2. 3.
09910 - 9
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. Interior Gypsum Wallboard or Plaster Ceilings for Latex Flat Finish: One Coat 1. Benjamin Moore; Eco-Spec Interior Latex Primer No. 231: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). Duron Equal S-W Equal Benjamin Moore; Eco-Spec Latex Flat No. 219: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). Duron Equal S-W Equal
2. 3. Two Coats 1.
2. 3. 3.
Interior Finish Carpentry and Wood Doors for Latex Semi-Gloss Paint Finish (softwoods, paint grade hardwoods, MDO, and hardwood veneers): One Coat 1. Benjamin Moore; Eco-Spec Interior Latex Primer No. 231: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). Duron Equal S-W Equal Benjamin Moore; Eco-Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 224: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). Duron Equal S-W Equal
2. 3. Two Coats 1.
2. 3. 4.
Interior Metals not Specified to Receive other Coating Systems: One Coat 1. Approved primer, in shop under other Sections (where specified)
One Coat
Field Primer (only where shop primer is not specified): 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). Devoe Equal S-W Equal
2. 3.
OR, at non-ferrous metals only, 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). Devoe Equal S-W Equal
2. 3.
09910 - 10
PAINTING
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Note: One prime coat only is required at interior metal work, except touch-up of areas which have become rusted or damaged prior to finish painting. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd SemiGloss Enamel No. 271: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). Devoe Equal S-W Equal
Two Coats
2. 3. 5.
Mechanical and Electrical Work (Paint all exposed items throughout the project except factory finished items with factory-applied baked enamel finishes which occur in mechanical rooms or areas, and excepting chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, and aluminum other than mill finished. Paint all exposed ductwork: Same as specified for other interior metals, hereinabove.
3.07 A.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE High Performance Coating of Exterior Surfaces: 1. Exterior Galvanized Steel for Acrylic Polyurethane Finish (exterior steel doors and frames): One Coat After Installation: Barrier Coat: 1. As recommended by manufacturer for compatibility between shop coats and field coats. Tnemec "No. L69 Hi-Build Epoxoline" Epoxy IPC Equal Valspar Equal Tnemec "No. 1081 Endura-Shield" IPC Equal Valspar Equal 1. Primer in shop, under Section 08110.
First Field Coat
1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
Second Field Coat (dry film 1.5 to 2.0 mils)
09910 - 11
PAINTING
B.
High Performance Coating of Interior Surfaces: 1. Interior Metal Doors and Frames: One Coat After Installation: Barrier Coat: 1. As recommended by manufacturer for compatibility between shop coats and field coats. Tnemec "No. L69 Hi-Build Epoxoline" Epoxy IPC Equal Valspar Equal Tnemec "No. 1081 Endura-Shield" IPC Equal Valspar Equal 1. Primer in shop, under Section 08110.
First Field Coat
1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
Second Field Coat (dry film 1.5 to 2.0 mils) 2. Existing Masonry Walls: First Top Coat (dry-film 4.0-5.0 mils)
1. 2. 3.
Tnemec Series 113 Tufcoat IPC Equal Ameron Equal Tnemec Series 1081 Endura Shield IPC Equal Ameron Equal
Top Coat 1. at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT 2. 3.
END OF SECTION
09910 - 12
PAINTING
SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. 2. Porcelain enamel marker boards (for liquid chalk). Linoleum tackboards.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect the work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY; Rough carpentry work, except as specified herein.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A208.1 2. Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide large scale sections and details of trim profiles and materials. Include schedule of sizes and locations of visual display boards by room numbers. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material or product used. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements.
B.
10100 - 1
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Samples: Submit representative samples of each material to be exposed in finished work. Provide samples having minimum area of 8 sq. in. Field Measurements: Take accurate field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job progress. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: For each type of product required for work of this Section, provide products of one manufacturer. Burning Characteristics: Provide tackboards with surface burning characteristics, when tested in compliance with ASTM E 84, as follows: 1. 2. 1.06 A. Flame Spread: Not more than 25. Smoke Developed: Not more than 25.
D.
1.05 A.
B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver products in unopened factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. WARRANTY Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty on porcelain on steel chalkboards agreeing to repair or replace work which exhibits defects in materials or workmanship for a period of 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. "Defects" is defined to include, but is not limited to, crazing, cracking, flaking, and loss of original writing and erasing qualities. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers if they meet or exceed the requirements of these specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. AllianceWall Corp. Carolina Chalkboard Co. Greensteel Inc. Claridge Co.
B. 1.07 A.
PART 2 2.01 A.
2.02 A.
PRODUCTS Porcelain Enamel Marker Boards: Provide porcelain enamel marker boards, fabricated from a 24 gage, enameling grade facing sheet equal to Claridge "Series 1300" marker boards laminated to a 1/2 in. particleboard core and balanced with backing sheet, and as follows: 1. Face Sheet: three coat porcelain on 24 gage steel with last two coats fused to steel at 1200F. 10100 - 2 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. 3. 4. 5. Face Sheet Colors: Provide white, glossy finish for marker boards. Core: 3/8 in. thick particleboard complying with ANSI 208.1, grade 1-M-1. Backing Sheet: 0.015 in. thick aluminum. Aluminum Angle Edges: Where scheduled to receive aluminum angle trim, provide thin-line, extruded Claridge "Series 8 Shadow Line". Where scheduled to receive standard aluminum edge trim and chalkrails, provide standard extruded aluminum trim at top and edges and continuous chalktray at bottom equal to Claridge "Screw-On Aluminum Trim". Provide clear anodized finish. Sizes: as indicated on Drawings.
6. B.
Linoleum Cork Tackboards: Provide linoleum tack boards suitable for direct mounting to partition face equal to Forbo Bulletin Board as manufactured by Forbo Linoleum, Inc. Linoleum tack boards shall be 1/4 inch thick through-colored linoleum calendared to natural burlap backing in 48 inch width by lengths required. Edges shall be cut square and true to line. Corners shall be sharp. 1. Frame: Provide clear anodized extruded aluminum with narrow face expression.
2.03 A.
FABRICATION Fabricate work to be truly straight, plumb, level and square. Provide work to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide one-piece units wherever possible. Provide factory assembled units with uniform, tight joints. SUPPORT METHOD Provide especially fabricated bent metal "Z" strip wall mounting devices, fabricated of 16 ga. steel, prime painted, secured to rear of assemblies and to face of walls. EXECUTION INSPECTION Examine substrates, supports, and conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of installation will be construed as installer accepting substrates and conditions. INSTALLATION General Installation Requirements: Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this section. Install visual display boards with concealed anchors at heights indicated, or if not indicated, as field directed, with work plumb and level. Provide trim pieces, anchors, and components necessary for a complete installation.
B. 2.04 A.
PART 3 3.01 A.
3.02 A.
B.
10100 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 3.03 A. TOLERANCES The following allowable installed tolerances are allowable variations from locations and dimensions indicated by Contract Documents. Do not add these tolerances to any allowable tolerances indicated for other work. 1. 2. 3. 3.04 A. Allowable Variation from True Plumb: + 1/8 in. in 20 ft.-0 in. Allowable Variation from True Line: + 1/8 in. in 20 ft.-0 in. Allowable Variation from True Level: + 1/8 in. in 20 ft.-0 in.
CLEANING, TOUCH-UP, AND PROTECTION Clean exposed surfaces using manufacturer recommended materials and methods. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes. Eliminate visible evidence of repair. Provide temporary protection during course of work, and immediately after completion, to ensure work of this Section is not damaged or deteriorated in any way at time of final acceptance. Remove temporary protections and reclean as necessary immediately prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION
B. C.
10100 - 4
SECTION 10431 SIGNS
PART 1 1.00 A.
GENERAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of the Specifications. WORK INCLUDED The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. 2. Interior ADA approved signage at all interior rooms where required by local codes, including elevator lobbies, stairwells, etc. Exterior aluminum dimensional letters.
1.01 A.
1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of work of this Section. Show all details of construction and installation of each sign and type.. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data of work of this Section. Provide complete product description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data. Schedule: Provide complete signage and graphic schedule, showing key plans and locations of each type of sign. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source: For each material type required for the work of this Section, provide primary materials which are the product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of primary materials. Installer: A firm with a minimum of three years experience in type of work required by this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.03 A.
B.
10431 - 1
SIGNS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.04 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetration work is complete. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Store under cover and protect from weather damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Provide products of one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed requirements specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2.02 A. Andco Industries Corp. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc. ASE. Gemini, Inc. Matthews International Corp. Metal Arts. Metallic Arts, Inc. The Southwell Company. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. Vomar Products, Inc.
1.05 A.
B. PART 2 2.01 A.
INTERIOR SIGNAGE MATERIALS Interior Room Signs shall be as manufactured by the ASE; or equal as manufactured by another specified manufacturer. Interior ADA compliant signs for application next to doors shall be two-color, lo-glare, Micarta laminated plastic, 8 in. x 6 in.; with square edges and square corners, for surface application by means of silastic adhesive mounting, equal to ASE Model Engraved ADA, or equal. Lettering, numerals, and graphics shall be Optimal Semi-Bold, raised 1/32 in. from the surrounding surface and be accompanied by the same letters and numerals in Grade 2 Braille. All signage shall conform to applicable requirements of the ADA. Sign colors shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard special colors. Provide one ADA compliant sign at all rooms required by code, including Stairwells; Elevator Lobbies; and elsewhere as required by ADAAG. Refer to Drawings for signage schedule.
B.
C.
10431 - 2
SIGNS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.03 A. EXTERIOR DIMENSIONAL LETTERS MATERIALS Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. Fabricated Channel Characters: Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. Aluminum Sheet: Not less than 0.090 inch (2.29 mm) thick. Finish: High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. 3. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect.
B.
Provide manufacturer's hardware for projection mounting of characters at distance from wall surface indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.
B. 3.02 A.
Wall-Mounted Signs: Attach signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated. CLEANING AND PROTECTION After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION
10431 - 3
SIGNS
SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.00 A. GENERAL PROVISIONS Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are made a part of this Section of the Specifications. WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install fire extinguishers and accessories as required to complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to: 1. 2. 1.02 A. Fire extinguishers and cabinets. Fire extinguisher brackets.
1.01 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. Division 15, MECHANICAL; Fire hose cabinets and valve cabinets. Division 15, MECHANICAL; Fixed fire protection systems.
1.03 A.
REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 10 2. Portable Fire Extinguishers
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Ref. 1 Metal Finishing Manual
1.04 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide portable fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories by one manufacturer, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear
B.
10520 - 1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated. C. FM Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated and carry appropriate FM marking. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for all portable fire extinguishers required. Where color selections by Architect is required include color charts showing full range of manufacturer's standard colors and designs available.
1.05 A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.02 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
J.L. Industries. Larsen's Mfg. Co. Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc. Potter-Roemer.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard which comply with requirements of governing authorities. 1. Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Fire Extinguishers: General Fire Extinguisher Co., Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type (4A60BC-FE): UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B, and Class C fires; No substitutions will be permitted. CABINETS Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Fire Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire-resistant rating matching that of wall or partition that it is installed. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing a fire extinguisher. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for recessed mounting, with cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim.
2.03 A.
B.
C. D.
10520 - 2
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts E. Trim Style: Trimless with hidden flange that overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by overlapping door. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet, Fully Recessed Type at all Public Spaces: Larsen Model #SSO2409, with the following features: 1. 2. 3. 4. G. Break glass door. Red fire handle. Stainless steel, No. 4 finish. Rough Opening: 24-1/2 in. x 10-1/2 in. x 6-1/4 in.
F.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinet, Semi-Recessed Type in Service Areas: Larsen Architectural Series Model # SS 2409-6R for semi-recessed cabinets, with vertical duo door style, with the following features: 1. 2. 3. 4. Tempered glass in door. Red fire handle. Stainless Steel, No. 4 finish. Tub, 6 in. id.
2.04 A.
MOUNTING BRACKETS Provide manufacturer's standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in manufacturer's standard plated finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Securely fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 A.
IDENTIFICATION Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface. Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect. END OF SECTION
10520 - 3
SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install postal specialties as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein including the following: 1. Mailboxes.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 09260, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES; Drywall framing.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction and installation, including details of methods of anchorage and attachment to supporting materials. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data required for complete product and product use information. 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that units conform to United States Postal Service (USPS) regulations and have been approved by the Postmaster General.
B.
C. D.
Samples: Submit sample of aluminum finish to Architect for approval. Do not order materials or begin fabrication work until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer: Provide products of manufacturers which are USPS approved. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrate, installation of anchors, and application of mail box units. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with USPS requirements for construction and installation of units serviced by USPS carriers.
1.04 A.
B.
10550 - 1
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
PART 2 2.01 A.
PRODUCTS POSTAL SPECIALTIES Mail Boxes: USPS-Approved, Front-Loading, Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Consisting of multiple compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS STD-4C. 1. Providef heavy gauge aluminum, Salsbury 3700 Series 4C standard horizontal mailboxes and parcel lockers shall be U.S.P.S. approved. Each standard mailbox door (MB1) shall be 13-1/4'' W x 3-1/4'' H and shall include a heavy duty cam lock with a dust/rain shield and three (3) keys. Provide horizontal mailbox units in configurations indicated. Provide units in color as selected by Architect.
2.02 A.
FABRICATION Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. EXECUTION INSTALLATION Installation of postal specialties shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and USPS requirements. END OF SECTION
B. C.
D.
E. F.
PART 3 3.01 A.
10550 - 2
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10801 TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install all toilet accessories as required to complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 09260, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES; Wood blocking for fixture supports at gypsum drywall partitions.
1.02 A.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction and installation, including details of methods of attachment to supporting materials. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data required for complete product and product use information. PRODUCTS TOILET ACCESSORIES Furnish and install all toilet accessories indicated on the Drawings or as scheduled below, except toilet accessories specified to be provided under other Sections. The following schedule of items is to establish type and quality and is not necessarily complete. Carefully review the Drawings for other types of toilet accessories and to establish quantities, locations, and mounting heights of the various accessories required. In the event that locations or mounting heights are not indicated, they shall be as directed by the Architect.
B.
PART 2 2.01 A.
B.
10801 - 1
TOILET ACCESSORIES
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.02 A. TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULES Apartment Unit Toilet Rooms: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Nutone Hallmark Series #HM-770, Finish #625 polished chrome. Medicine Cabinet at Bathroom: Nutone Hallmark Series #HM-FS-470. Grab Bars at Handicap Units: Nutone Hallmark Series #HM-6502, 36 in. and 42 in.; Finish #625 polished chrome. Robe Hooks: Nutone Hallmark Series #HM-781; Finish #625 polished chrome. Extra Heavy-Duty Shower Curtain Rod: Bobrick B-6047
Public Toilet Room Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Lavatory mirror: Bobrick B-290 1830 Soap dispenser: Bobrick B-2111 Towel dispenser/waste receptacle: Bobrick B-36903 Toilet paper dispenser: Bobrick B-2888 Grab bars (HC toilet): Bobrick B-5806.99 x 42, 2 per stall
2.04 A.
FASTENINGS, PACKING, AND MARKING Fastening devices shall be theft-proof, of appropriate type and of adequate capacity for each purpose intended. Exposed heads of fasteners shall be stainless steel with finish to match surrounding surfaces. All metal accessories shall have the required screws, bolts, and other fastenings necessary for proper installation, all of which shall be wrapped in the same package as the accessory item for which it is intended. Each package shall be clearly labeled indicating the portion of the work for which it is intended. EXECUTION INSTALLATION Before installation of toilet accessories, check openings and recesses to receive recessed units to assure they are of proper size and location, and are plumb and square. Check substrate materials, blockings, and built-in anchor plates for structural adequacy to support the accessories. Mount recessed accessories securely into wall openings and recesses, tightly anchored into place, and with trim fitted tightly and neatly against the wall surface. Mount surface mounted accessories plumb, level, and true, and securely anchored into place. After installation, adjust all accessories for proper operation, and clean and polish all exposed surfaces. Protect accessories from damage from all sources whatever. Deliver to Owner duplicate keys for each lockable accessory door or panel, properly tagged as to location. END OF SECTION
B.
PART 3 3.01 A.
B.
C.
D.
10801 - 2
TOILET ACCESSORIES
SECTION 11150 PARKING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install the parking equipment as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified herein, including but not limited to the following: 1. 2. Automatic parking gates (one per entrance and exit). Loop car detectors (one per parking gate).
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; Concrete.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing layouts, dimensions, clearances, designs, materials, details for electrical services, relationships to work of other trades, and all other pertinent details of manufacture and installation. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data covering each item of equipment to Architect for approval. Technical product data shall be sufficient to fully describe the design, manufacture, performance and maintenance and repair of the equipment, and shall include manufacturer's standard printed catalog cuts, technical data sheets and specifications; installation instructions, maintenance instructions, and other information required for complete description of the design, construction, operation, and maintenance of the equipment. COORDINATION The work of this Section shall be coordinated with that of other trades affecting, or affected by, this work, as necessary to assure the steady progress of all work under the contract. Closely coordinate the delivery and installation of this work with the Contractor's schedule. Coordinate access control system with the Owner's security system.
B.
1.04 A.
11150 - 1
PARKING EQUIPMENT
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1.05 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation of parking control equipment. Provide setting drawings, templates and instructions for installation of anchorage devices and sensors to be built into concrete. PRODUCTS AUTOMATIC PARKING GATES Manufacturers and Products: Provide one of the following, or approved equal: 1. 2. 3. B. Amano; AGP-1000. Parking Products, Inc.; UG-141. Cincinnati Gate Systems, Inc.; CG-1000.
PART 2 2.01 A.
Automatic parking gates shall be one-way direction traffic with gate opening initiated by a remote device. The gate shall be closed, where required, by a vehicle detector signaling the departure of a vehicle with relay operation. A count pulse shall be available to operate counting devices as each vehicle is recognized. The gate shall be one of the specified systems, incorporating in one housing all necessary components for the functioning of the unit. 1. 2. The unit shall have a 10 ft. arm of factory-painted wood construction. Gates shall have an oilite bearing shaft operating mechanism and a thermostatically controlled heating unit to ensure operation at -30 degrees F. The gate arm shall be attached to the shaft by means of a clamp device that permits easy replacement or reinsertion of the usable length following fracture. No mounting that requires drilling of holes in the gate arm will be accepted. This gate shall have the "extra-sensory" feature. This feature shall provide that should any object be struck by the gate arm during its descent, the arm will immediately reverse and return to the UP position without damage, and remain up until automatically reset by a control (variable from off to 15 seconds). The extra-sensory function shall be initiated by a mechanical sensing action contained in the gate housing. The external mounting of tubes, wiring and electrical devices on the gate arm will not be accepted. The height of gate arm shall be 39 in. from street level when in DOWN position. An articulating gate arm shall be provided for installations with limited overhead clearance. The gate arm shall be two wooden pieces driven and firmly supported by metal side brackets and a single adjustable steel rod. Wood side brackets shall not be acceptable This gate shall be controlled by a Gate Control Panel installed in the gate housing. The gate housing shall be large enough to contain additional control apparatus if needed. The gate shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code for Class 1, Division 2 for specified locations.
C.
3.
4.
5.
6.
11150 - 2
PARKING EQUIPMENT
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Gate Motor: 1/3 HP, heavy-duty, sleeve-bearing, capacitor type motor. 1. Equip with thermal overload circuit breaker protection with automatic reset. In addition, all motor, relay and solenoid power shall be provided with fused protection. There shall be an anti-vandalism clutch for protection of all components. Braking shall be accomplished by a mechanical stop. The motor shall be controlled by a heavy duty relay with ample current carrying contacts to operate the full starting load.
2. 3.
E.
Gate Control Panel: The gate control panel shall contain the 24 volt DC power supply, with dependable solid state components throughout, as well as manual control switches and circuit breaker protection of the 115 volt AC supply and low voltage power source. 1. The control circuitry shall be contained on a plugable glass epoxy board unit that determines the mode of gate operation. A switch to raise, lower and select automatic functioning of the gate shall be provided. A control to activate or deactivate the extra-sensory feature shall be provided. Operation of the gate within the parking system shall be a function of the control panel, providing one of three operating modes.
2.
3.
2.02 A.
LOOP DETECTORS Loop detectors: Shall consist of a number of turns of burial type wire (of dimensions dependent upon the width of the drive), located as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on the shop drawings. The detectors shall be completely transistorized. Each detector shall be used for closing function. The detector shall be equipped with a turning light. It shall operate with circuitry that recognizes vehicle movement into the loop and an unlimited duration of vehicle presence or a pulse as required. Detection shall result in energizing a relay and a panel-mounted monitor light. Loop: Shall be installed where indicated on the approved shop drawings to operate with the Detector. The loop shall be a continuous length of Teflon wire wrapped in vinyl plastic to resist oil, gasoline and other solvents commonly found in parking installation. A slot in the road surface of no deeper than three quarter inch shall be required to accept the loop. Loop Groove Fill: Grout with No. 202 weatherban sealant, manufactured by 3M Company, or epoxy sealant made specifically for sealing detector loops. EXECUTION INSTALLATION Erect all equipment, as indicated, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions and the approved shop drawings, in close coordination and cooperation with surrounding work by other trades and with electrical trades providing services to the equipment. Install units plumb, level, and true, with all horizontal lines level, and with all components carefully fit to adjoining work by this and other trades.
B.
C.
PART 3 3.01 A.
11150 - 3
PARKING EQUIPMENT
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Do not install damaged units. Replace any components damaged during shipping, handling or installation with new, identical, factory-supplied components. START-UP OPERATION Thoroughly test the proper operation of the unit. Provide assistance to qualified personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment with Owner's personnel. ADJUST AND CLEAN After completion of installation, test and adjust the equipment for proper operation and performance, and clean and polish all exposed surfaces, inside and out. Protect equipment from damage from all sources. Upon completion, remove and legally dispose of all cartons and debris from the site. Leave work areas in clean condition. END OF SECTION
3.02 A.
3.03 A.
B.
11150 - 4
PARKING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11175 TRASH CHUTE DOORS
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install new trash chute doors as required to complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Provide products and systems from one of the following manufacturers that meet or exceed specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. = American Chute Systems Cutler-Federal, Inc. Midland Metalcraft Co. Wilkinson Chutes, Inc.
1.02 A.
PART 2 2.01 A.
2.02 A.
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS Intake Door Assemblies: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 stainless steel, self-closing units with positive latch and latch handle; Class B labeled; 1-1/2 hour fire rated with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 deg F; and with frame suitable for enclosing chase construction. 1. 2. 3. 4. Door Type: Hopper Size: Manufacturers standard size for door type, and chute type and diameter indicated Provide 1/4-inch thick rubber back draft baffle at each intake door Finish: Manufacturers standard satin or No.3 directional polish finish.
B.
Discharge Door Assemblies: Aluminum-coated-steel doors of 1-hour fire-rated construction that is suitable for Class B openings; equipped with fusible links that cause doors to close in the event of a fire. 1. Direct Vertical Discharge: Provide inclined, horizontally rolling, shutter-type unit.
11175 - 1
TRASH CHUTE DOORS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts PART 3 3.01 A. EXECUTION INSTALLATION Trash chute door installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with the governing laws, health standards, and building code. Comply with chute door manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. components with tight, non-leaking joints. Assemble
B.
C.
Intake and Discharge Doors: Install doors at heights and locations indicated on approved shop drawings. TESTING, ADJUSTING, CLEANING Test operating components of chute system upon completion of installation. Operate doors to demonstrate that doors are adjusted correctly. END OF SECTION
3.02 A.
11175 - 2
TRASH CHUTE DOORS
SECTION 11452 APPLIANCES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing appliances complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY; Finish carpentry work including cabinet installation and countertops. Section 12370, PREMANUFACTURED CASEWORK; Kitchen cabinets. Division 15, MECHANICAL and Division 16, ELECTRICAL; Plumbing, and electrical work, both material and labor, required to connect these appliances will be furnished by other contractors and shall include rough-in to points indicated on mechanical and electrical drawings, and final connecting from rough-in point to each appliance requiring such connections and the supplying of all necessary materials and labor for this work.
1.02 A.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of each appliance to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction and installation, including details of methods of anchorage and attachment to supporting materials, dimensions, roughing-in requirements, and any other information required for complete installation. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, complete installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. Warranty: Submit to the Owner the standard manufacturer's warranties for each appliance. Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. QUALITY ASSURANCE Certification Labels: Provide residential appliances which comply with standards and bear certification labels as follows:
B.
C. D.
1.04 A.
11452 - 1
APPLIANCES
1.
Energy Ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission. UL Standards: Provide residential appliances with UL labels.
2. B.
Uniformity: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of residential appliance required. DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after spaces to receive them have been fully enclosed. QUALITY CONTROL AND GUARANTEE Appliances shall be guaranteed against defect in workmanship and material for one year from date of installation. This guarantee shall cover replacements of such defective materials, at Contractor's expense, including transportation and labor, but it shall not cover any cost whatsoever for replacement of parts of work made necessary by carelessness or misuse of equipment. After one year equipment shall be warranted in accordance with standard warranties as are offered by each manufacturer. Equipment supplied under this Contract shall be fabricated in accordance with the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) requirements. Color and Finish: It is the intent of this contract that the appliances shall harmonize in color and finish. Colors and finishes shall be selected by the Architect. The Contractor shall submit, for approval, any color or finish he proposes to use. PRODUCTS PRODUCTS Stove: GE 30 Freestanding Gas Range - Model No. JGBS07DEMBB at Typical Units. Cooktop: GE 30 Built-In CleanDesign Electric Cooktop - Model No. JP346BMBB at H.C. Conversion Units. Wall Oven: GE 24 Built-In Gas Oven Model No. JGRSO6BEJBB at H.C. Conversion Units. Refrigerator: GE Energy Star 20.3 Cu. Ft. Bottom Freezer Refrigerator Model No. GBSC0HCXBB at Typical & H.C. Conversion units. Stove Hood: GE Model JV347HBB.
1.05 A.
1.06 A.
B.
C.
PART 2 2.01 A. B.
C.
D.
E.
11452 - 2
APPLIANCES
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts PART 3 3.01 A. B. EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper appliance operation. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. ADJUST AND CLEAN Testing: Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. END OF SECTION
C.
D. 3.02 A.
11452 - 3
APPLIANCES
SECTION 12370 PREMANUFACTURED CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 1.2 A. Kitchen cabinets.
DEFINITIONS Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semiexposed." Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed." SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. B. Cabinets. Cabinet hardware.
B.
C.
1.3
Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. Samples for Verification: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Wood-veneered panels with opaque finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each species. Vinyl-faced panels for cabinet interior finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm). Exposed hardware, for each type of item. One full-size, 16 inches (406 mm) wide, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and drawers but without countertop. One full-size, 12 inches (304 mm) wide, finished wall cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and adjustable shelves.
C. D.
12370 - 1
PREMANUFACTURED CASEWORK
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: manufacturer. Obtain cabinets through one source from a single
1.4
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of cabinets by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' cabinets of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: 1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard.
C.
1.5 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wetwork is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
B.
C.
1.6
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. CABINET MATERIALS General: 1. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 3. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 4. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 12370 - 2 PREMANUFACTURED CASEWORK
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 5. 6. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde].
B.
Exposed Materials: 1. 2. 3. Exposed Wood Species: Manufacturer's standard domestic hardwood species for opaque finish. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, solid-wood edging of same species as face veneer.
4.
Thermoformed Vinyl-Faced Panels: Medium-density fiberboard, milled to required shapes, with a thermoformed vinyl overlay applied in a vacuum or membrane press. a. Color: White.
5.
PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors and drawer fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere. a. Color: White.
C.
Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. 2. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects. Same species as exposed surfaces. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with Grade C faces and not less than Grade 3 backs of same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces. Vinyl-Faced Particleboard: bonded to particleboard. a. b. Medium-density particleboard with vinyl film adhesively
3.
Provide vinyl film on both sides of shelves, dividers, drawer bodies, and other components with two semiexposed surfaces and on semiexposed edges. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: White.
D.
Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard. CABINET HARDWARE
2.2 A.
General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish. Pulls: Wire pulls. Hinges: Concealed European-style self-closing hinges.
B. C.
12370 - 3
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091. CABINETS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. C. D. E. Aristokraft. Merilat Ind., Inc. Wood-Hu Kitchens, Inc. Yorktowne Cabinets.
2.3
Face Style: As indicated on Drawings. Door and Drawer Fronts: Raised panel style as indicated, solid hardwood. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer. Cabinet End Construction: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)] thick particleboard or 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick plywood. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick particleboard or 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame (if any), and back rail. Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. Base-Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. Shelves: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick particleboard or 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick plywood. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels. Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation. SHOP FINISHING
F.
G.
H.
I.
J. K.
L. 2.4 A.
Scope: Shop finishing work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Opaque Catalyzed Lacquer: Provide complete shop finishing of work indicated for lacquer finish, including necessary field touch up after installation.
B.
Opaque Catalyzed Lacquer Finish: For lacquer finish work, provide the following: 1. AWI Finish System: Provide AWI Premium Grade Finish System #7. 12370 - 4 PREMANUFACTURED CASEWORK
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. 3. Colors: As selected by architect. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with AWI Quality Standards for sanding, filling, countersinking, sealing of concealed surfaces, and similar preparation requirements for finishing of work of this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m). Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
B.
C. D.
3.2 A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
B.
END OF SECTION
12370 - 5
SECTION 12485 ENTRANCE MATS
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. Recessed entrance grids with carpet inserts, and recessed metal frames.
1.02 A.
RELATED WORK Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
1.03 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, and maintenance recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication and installation of all parts of the work. Provide large scale plans and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for frames installed in coordination with concrete work. Field Measurements: Where possible, take accurate field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job progress; allow for field cutting and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication is not possible. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in the finished work, showing the full range of color and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum area of 144 square inches. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.04 A.
12485 - 1
ENTRANCE MATS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. 1.05 A. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish procedures to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Provide oversized recess in concrete subfloors and delay actual installation of recessed mat frame until near time of Substantial Completion of Project. Do not install mats until immediately before Owner's Final Acceptance of the Project. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS/MANUFACTURERS Recessed Entrance Mats: specified requirements: 1. 2. 3. 2.02 A. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed
B.
PART 2 2.01 A.
Balco, Inc.; Roll-Up Mats. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Pedimat. Reese Co.; Perfec Clean Roll-Up Mats.
RECESSED ENTRANCE MATS - MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS Mat: 1-5/16 in. wide x 7/16 in. deep mill finished 6063-T5 or 6061-T6 extruded aluminum alloy grids with finish inserts. Frame: Extruded 6063-T5 alloy aluminum in manufacturer's standard profile. Coat surface in contact with concrete with zinc chromate protective paint. Finish Inserts: Fusion bonded, level cut, DuPont Antron III filament carpet, 1/4 in. high, 28 oz. per sq. yd. FABRICATION Fabricate frame to be truly straight, level and square. Provide frame pieces in longest available lengths to minimize joints. Space unavoidable joints evenly about centerline of mat and spline butt-joints with connecting pins. Form corners with tightly mitered joints or use prefabricated jointless corners. Provide frames and mats to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide one-piece mats except where size exceeds manufacturer's recommended limit for easy removal and cleaning. Where more than one-piece mats are used, locate seams away from main traffic pattern. Shop fabricate framework to the greatest extent possible. FINISHES Provide clear anodized aluminum frames. Finish Insert Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
B.
C.
2.03 A.
B.
C. 2.05 A. B.
12485 - 2
ENTRANCE MATS
PART 3 3.01 A.
EXECUTION INSPECTION The Installer shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means Installer accepts substrates and conditions. INSTALLATION Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. Coordinate top of mat elevation with frame and floor elevations to provide proper foot cleaning and to avoid all possibility of tripping hazard. Coordinate installation with door bottom clearances of doors that swing across mats. Install frame near time of Substantial Completion of Project. Shim and grout frame into oversize recess. Provide temporary filler of plywood or other suitable material to protect frame until installation of mat at time of final acceptance of Project. CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned. END OF SECTION
3.02 A.
B.
C.
3.03 A.
12485 - 3
ENTRANCE MATS
SECTION 14222 ELEVATOR CAB FINISHES
PART 1 1.01 A.
GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Provide new elevator cab finishes.
1.02 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each product and system used. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by others. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used, including samples of cab finishes, and hoistway entrance finishes. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be exposed in the finished work, showing the full range of color and finish variations expected. Provide samples having minimum area of 144 square inches. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Strictly comply with applicable codes, regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A17.1. PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Provide products of the following manufacturer that meet or exceed requirements specified: 1. EDI/ECI.
B.
C.
D.
1.03 A.
B. PART 2 2.01 A.
14240 - 1
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.02 A. HOISTWAY ENTRANCES Passenger Hoistway Entrances: Provide stainless steel cladding for adhesively attachment to existing Hoistway entrances, as manufactured by EDI. 1. Finish: No. 4 Directional Polish. B. 2.06 A. Sizes: As required. CAR ENTRANCES AND CAB ENCLOSURE Passenger Entrances: Provide stainless steel cladding for adhesively attachment to existing Hoistway entrances, as manufactured by EDI. 1. Finish: No. 4 Directional Polish. B. Passenger Cab Finishes: Provide passenger car finishes with the finish materials as indicated on Drawings, and below. Include lighting, ceiling finish, wall finish, trim, floor base, accessories, and handrails. Provide finish materials as indicated below: 1. Stainless Steel Ceiling Panels: AISI Type 302/304 stainless steel panels with No. 4 satin polish finish. 2. Plastic Laminate Wall Panels: Provide medium density (minimum 45 lb. per Cubic foot) fiberboard core, finished with high pressure type plastic laminate complying with NEMA LD3, Type GP-50 (0.050 inch nominal thickness) in color as selected by Architect. 3. Stainless Steel Trim, Handrails and Accessories: AISI Type 302/304 stainless steel with No. 4 satin polish finish. PART 3 3.01 A. EXECUTION INSPECTION Examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this work is to be performed. Notify Contractor and Architect immediately, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means Installer accepts substrates and conditions. PREPARATION Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. INSTALLATION/ERECTION Install cab and elevator door finishes and re-cladding materials in strict compliance with manufacturers written recommendations.. CLEANING, PROTECTION Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes to eliminate evidence of repair.
3.02 A.
3.03 A.
3.04 A.
14240 - 2
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace work that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protections and reclean as necessary immediately before final acceptance.
C.
D.
END OF SECTION
14240 - 3
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
SECTION 16100 ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. RELATED DOCUMENTS Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this Section. Examine all Project Specifications and Drawings for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under Contract. When open-flame or spark producing tools such as blower torches, welding equipment, etc., are required in the process of executing the work, the General Contractor shall be notified not less than 24 hours in advance of the time that the work is to begin and the location where the work is to be performed. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non-working fire watch where work is being performed and until completed. The following definitions apply to the Drawings and Specifications 1. 2. 3. 4. Furnish: The term furnish is used to mean supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. Install: The term install is used to describe operations at project site including actual unloading, unpacking, rigging in place, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. Installer: An installer is the contractor or an entity engaged by the contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor for a performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
E.
1.02 A. B.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK Examine Drawings and other Sections of Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation. Drawings and Specifications form complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. Remove all debris caused by contractors work. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included in Contract. It is not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting or component; however,
C.
16100 - 1
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts Contract Documents require components and materials whether or not indicated or specified as necessary to make the installation complete and operational. D. E. F. Perform work strictly as required by rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and laws of local, state, and federal government, and other authorities that have lawful jurisdiction. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and obtain necessary approvals from authorities that have jurisdiction. As work progresses and for duration of Contract, maintain complete and separate set of prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately, including work installed as a modification or addition to the original design. Work shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. Site lighting revisions to include replacing existing fixture luminaires, relocating a quantity of light posts, providing of new branch circuits. Provide new site lighting. Provide electrical demolition and new lighting and power for the renovated lobbies of (3) buildings. Provide new lighting to (3) new canopies. Provide electrical demolition for the conversion of 1-2-3 bedroom units to Handicap units. Provide new electrical work associated with these conversions. Provide electrical demolition and new work associated with the existing Computer Learning Center and Main Office. Provide replacement lighting for basement corridors and Laundry Room, and typical corridor lighting for floors #1-12 for all (3) buildings. Provide power, lighting, and tel/data and fire alarm equipment for new Computer Lab. Provide power to new motorized gates. Replace existing garage lighting fixtures. Provide new main circuit breakers in all load centers in all apartments. Motor connections and controls including the installation of starters provided under DIV 15. Panelboards, circuit breakers and load centers. Safety disconnect switches (fused or unfused). Fuses. Lighting fixtures including lamps and fuses as required. Electronic and Energy saving Fluorescent and HID ballasts. Conduit and raceways. Wire and cable. Branch circuit wiring. Wiring devices and plates. Wiring, boxes and conduit for the telephone, data, security and other low voltage systems as indicated on the plans. All conduits shall be provided with pull string. Fire alarm control, to be added. Fire seal and fire-proof foam. Sleeving. All cores required for electrical equipment and conduit shall be provided by the electrical contractor. Staging, scaffolding, ladders, chutes and other construction aids as required for all electrical work. Pull boxes and cable troughs. Conduits, wiring, work boxes and reducer plates for telephone and data shall be provided by the electrical contractor.
G.
16100 - 2
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 30. Grounding. 31. Supervision and approval. 32. Electrical connections to HVAC and Plumbing equipment, and other equipment provided under other Sections or by Owner. All Starters and Disconnects shown on electrical drawings shall be provided by and installed by the electrical contractor. If starters and or disconnects are provided by the Mechanical contractor the EC shall install them and provide a credit for starters and or disconnects shown on electrical drawings unless specifically omitted from the Bid in writing. 33. Nameplates, labels and tags. 34. Testing. 35. Operating and maintenance instructions and manuals. 36. Occupancy Sensors. H. Install the following items furnished under other Sections or by Owner 1. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. B. 1.05 A. 1.06 A. Disconnects, Starters and VFDs furnished under Sections 15400, 15500 and 15600
WORK NOT INCLUDED Security System devices and wiring/cabling. PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION Fire Alarm Duct Smoke Detectors to be installed by Mechanical HVAC Contractor. Fire protection water flow switches installed under Section 15300. PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION None CODES, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS Installation of systems and equipment provided under this section shall be done in strict accordance with Massachusetts Department of Public Safety Codes, Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection, Massachusetts State Building Code, Town of Somerville regulations, Americans with Disabilities Act, and the National Electric Code. All work, where applicable, shall conform to NFPA codes and all material shall be U.L. approved. All electrical apparatus furnished under this section shall be approved by the U.L. and shall be so labeled or listed where such is applicable. Where custom-built equipment is specified and the U.L. label or listing is not applicable to the completed product, all components used in the construction of such equipment shall be labeled or listed by U.L. where such is applicable to the component. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver certificates of inspection to Architect. No work shall be covered before examination and approval by Architect, inspectors, and authorities having jurisdiction. Replace imperfect or condemned work conforming to requirements, satisfactory to Architect, and without extra cost to the Owner. If work is covered before due inspection and approval, the installing contractors shall pay costs of uncovering and reinstalling the covering, whether it meets contract requirements or not. RECORD DRAWINGS
B. C.
D.
1.07
16100 - 3
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts A. 1.08 A. Refer to DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, of the Specifications for record drawings and procedures to be provided under this section. CLEANING During the progress of the electrical work, clean up and remove all oil, grease and other debris caused by this work. At completion, the Contractor shall clean all equipment and systems and leave all work in perfect operating condition. RESPONSIBILITY The structure and its appurtenances, clearances and the related services, such as plumbing, heating, ventilation and electric service have been planned to be legal, adequate and suitable for the installation of equipment specified under this section. The Owner will not assume any increase in cost caused by differing requirements peculiar to a particular make or type of equipment, and any incidental cost shall be borne by the HVAC Sub-Contractor. He shall be responsible for the proper location of his required sleeves, chases, inserts, etc., and see that they are set in the forms before the concrete is poured. He shall be responsible for his work and equipment furnished and installed by him until the completion and final acceptance of this contract, and he shall replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner. PROTECTION OF MATERIALS, WORK, AND GROUNDS Materials, fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected and all pipe and duct openings shall be temporarily closed so as to prevent obstruction and damage. Protect and preserve all materials, supplies and equipment of every description and all work performed. Protect all existing equipment and property of any kind from damage during the operations. Damage shall be repaired or replaced promptly by the Contractor at his expense. DRAWINGS It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications or vice-versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. The locations of all items that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Architect before being installed. The Contractor shall follow Drawings, including his shop drawings, in laying out work and shall check the Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions. Where space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Architect before proceeding with the installation. The Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. Size of conduits and methods of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete approved working systems ready for use, shall be furnished without extra charge. All work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid being unsightly.
1.09 A.
1.10 A. B.
1.11 A.
B.
C.
16100 - 4
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. 1.12 A. All measurements shall be taken at the building by the Contractor, prior to purchasing and installing the equipment and piping. SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings and product data within 30 days after award of contract. Check, stamp and mark with project name submittals before transmitting to Architect. Indicate deviations from contract documents. Deviations from contract documents or proposed substitution of materials or equipment for those specified shall be requested in separate letter whether deviations are due to field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. Within four weeks (except as noted otherwise) after award of contract and before ordering materials or equipment. Submit list of proposed materials and equipment and indicate manufacturers names, addresses and identifying data. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted out of sequence. Substitutions for scheduled lighting equipment will be rejected. Schedule at least ten working days, exclusive of transmittal time for submittal review. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing and Product Data submittal shall include but shall not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1.13 A. 1.14 A. Panelboards, circuit breakers and load centers. Safety disconnect switches (fused or unfused). Lighting fixtures including lamps. Fluorescent and HID ballasts. Wiring devices and plates. Fire alarm system devices. (Direct Dialing Intercom System and Tone Generating System). Occupancy Sensors.
B.
C.
D. E. F.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Provide in accordance with Division 1 for all equipment provided in this section. UNDERWRITERS' LABEL AND LISTING All electrical apparatus furnished under this Section shall be approved by the UL and shall be labeled or listed where such is applicable. Where custom-built equipment is specified and the UL label or listing is not applicable to the completed product, all components used in the construction of such equipment shall be labeled or listed by UL where such is applicable to the component. CUTTING AND PATCHING All cutting and patching one (1) square foot and less in area necessary for the proper installation of work to be performed under this Section and subsections shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All cutting and patching associated with demolition work and greater than one (1) square foot in area for the installation of work under this section shall be by the General Contractor. All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the requirements for cutting and patching. 16100 - 5 ELECTRICAL
1.15 A.
B.
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. The contractor shall see that all such chases, openings, and sleeves are located accurately and are of the proper size and shape and shall consult with the Architect in reference to this work. In so doing, he shall confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the approval of the Architect. Carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point around the work specified herein to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. Fill and patch all openings or holes left in the existing structures by the removal of existing equipment by himself or his contractors. All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen competent to do such work and with the proper and smallest tools applicable. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be the contractors responsibility therefore. The fire resistance rating of floors, walls, and ceilings shall be maintained. UL listed firestopping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. GUARANTEE Guarantee that all work installed will be free from any and all defects in workmanship and/or materials and that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified. If, during a period of one year from the date of final completion and acceptance of the work, any such defects in workmanship, material or performance appear, the Electrical Contractor will, without cost to the Owner, remedy such defects within a reasonable time to be specified in notice from the Architect. RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS The following work is not included in this Section. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.18 A. Motors will be furnished and set in place under other Sections. Temporary water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during construction and testing. Automatic temperature control wiring except as noted on Drawings. Installation of duct-mounted smoke detectors. Power wiring beyond supply points, control wiring and remote disconnects for burners in heating equipment.
D. E. F. G. H. 1.16 A. B.
1.17 A.
VERIFYING CONDITIONS Before commencing any work under this section, verify all governing dimensions and examine all adjoining work on which this work is in any way associated or connected. Failure to visit the jobsite will in no way relieve the Contractor from installing the work according to the intent of these specifications and at no additional cost to the Owner. Each bidder shall visit the site and inspect conditions affecting the proposed work. Failure to do so and misinterpretation of the Plans and Specifications resulting there from shall be entirely the responsibility of the bidder. Each bidder shall make note of the existing conditions affecting hauling, rigging, transportation, installation, etc., in connection with his work and shall make all provisions for transportation of all materials and equipment.
B.
C.
16100 - 6
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. E. Where field conditions require, the Contractor shall arrange for equipment to be shipped to the job, dismantled and assembled in place. Remove walls, window assemblies/glass and floor structures where necessary to install and remove equipment as shown. The Contractor shall reinstall such displaced structures to their original condition. CONCRETE WORK All masonry and concrete pads for all trades shall be provided by the General Contractor, in accordance with SECTION 03300. PAINTING All finish field painting shall be provided by, in accordance with SECTION 09910. STANDARDS The latest published issue of the standards, recommendations, or requirements of the following listed societies, associations, or institutes in effect at the date of Contract are part of this Specification. These shall be considered as minimum requirements; specific requirements of this specification and/or associated drawings shall have precedence. In case of conflict between published requirements, the Owner' representative shall determine which is to be s followed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.22 A. UL ANSI NEC ASTM FIA IEEE OSHA NEMA NFPA Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. American National Standards Institute National Electric Code American Society for Testing and Materials Factory Insurance Association Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Occupational Safety and Health Act National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association
1.19 A. 1.20 A. 1.21 A.
COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction including all other trades shall not be delayed nor interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit and must be installed promptly when and as desired. Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Architect for decision to prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this clause shall be readjusted to the Architect' s satisfaction, at no expense to the Owner. Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or where there is evidence that the work of this section will interfere with work of other sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare and submit for approval 3/8 inch scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly showing how this work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions without extra charge.
B.
C.
16100 - 7
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts D. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals. This Subcontractor shall, with the approval of the Architect and without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in his work as required by normal structural interferences, or by interference with work of other trades, or for proper execution of the work. This Subcontractor shall protect all materials and work of other trades from damage that may be caused by his work and shall make good any damages so caused.
E.
F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. RACEWAYS Rigid metallic conduit shall be zinc-coated steel that conforms to industry standards, by Allied Tube and Conduit, Republic Steel, Wheatland Tube or approved equal. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be zinc-coated steel that conforms to industry standards, by Allied tube and Conduit, Triangle/PWC or approved equal. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be zinc-coated steel that conforms to industry standards, by Republic Steel, Allied Tube and Conduit, Triangle/PWC or approved equal. Wireways shall be sheet steel with hinged spring-latched covers, galvanized or painted to protect against corrosion. Provide necessary bends, couplings, connectors and other appurtenances. Interior parts shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and burrs. Wireways shall be by Square D or approved equal. Non-metallic conduit shall be Schedule 40 100% virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 90oC ULrated, by Carlon or approved equal. EC shall provide schedule 80 as indicated on drawings and for all exterior direct buried conduit. Direct buried conduit shall be packed in a minimum of 2 of sand. Utility conduits shall be concrete encased and shall meet all requirements of the Utility and Utility Handbook for 2000. 1. 2. 3. F. G. H. I. J. Conduit shall meet NEMA requirements and shall be UL-listed as required by Article 347 of NEC. Conduit, fittings and solvent cement shall be by single approved manufacturer. Material shall have minimum tensile strength of 7,000 psi at 73.40F, minimum flexural strength of 11,000 psi, and minimum compressive strength of 8,600 psi.
E.
Flexible metallic conduit shall be galvanized, spiral wrapped metallic conduit (Greenfield) or liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit as specified for specific equipment. Conduit expansion fittings shall be threaded hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron with internal bonding assembly by O.Z./Gedney or approved equal. Conduit fire seat fittings shall have heat-activated intumescent material for fire rating equal to or higher than that of floor or wall by O.Z./Gedney or approved equal. Provide water-tight gland sealing assemblies with pressure bushings as required for penetrations. Provide threaded malleable iron or steel connectors and couplings with insulated throats; manufactured elbows; locknuts; and plastic or bakelite bushings at terminations, as necessary. Couplings and connectors shall be gland and ring compression or stainless steel multiple point locking or steel concrete-tight set screw. Compression couplings and connectors shall form 16100 - 8 ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts positive ground. Set-screw connectors and couplings shall have wall thickness equal to conduit, case-hardened, hex-head screws and separate ground wire. Bushings for rigid steel conduit and connectors for EMT shall have insulating inserts that meet requirements of UL 514 flame test. 2.02 A. OUTLET BOXES Outlet boxes on concealed work shall be at least 4 square or octagonal, galvanized pressed steel with plaster rings as required. Outlet boxes for exposed conduit work shall be cast aluminum alloy with cast aluminum alloy covers. Where installed in plaster, boxes shall be fitted with galvanized steel plaster covers of required depth to finish flush with finished wall or ceiling. Switch boxes, receptacle boxes and other outlet boxes shall be standard 4 square with plaster rings or gang covers as required. Outlet boxes shall be by Steel City Electric Company, Appleton Electric Company, National Electric Products Company or approved equal. Outlet boxes for various systems and components shall be as required by manufacturer. Refer to AV series of drawings for further information. Waterproof boxes shall be Conduet Cast Boxes with water-proof devices and covers. Provide hot-dipped galvanized corrosion-resistant epoxy enamel finish or PVC-coated products, where noted on Drawings. Provide screw-joint outlet boxes, with gasketed weatherproof covers in exterior locations, where exposed to moisture, at kitchen and cafeteria equipment with or next to water or steam connections, and where indicated as weatherproof on Drawings. Provide only enough conduit openings to accommodate conduits at individual location. Each box shall be large enough to accommodate number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices to meet NEC requirements, but shall be at least size shown or specified. Necessary volume shall be obtained by using boxes of proper dimensions. Box depths greater than 2-1/8" shall not be used to obtain necessary volume, but may be used with Architect' approval to facilitate s installation. Standard concrete boxes may be 6" deep where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Octagonal hung ceiling boxes with suspension bars may be 3-1/2" deep. Rectangular boxes for inter-connection of branch circuit conduits may be 2-1/2" deep. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABLE TROUGHS Provide code gauge galvanized steel junction and pull boxes for conduit 1-1/4 trade size and larger, where indicated and as necessary to facilitate installation, of required dimensions, with accessible, removable screw-on covers. Provide junction and pull boxes in special sizes and shapes determined in field where necessary. Junction box covers shall be accessible. Do not install junction boxes above suspended ceilings except where ceiling is removable or where access panel is provided. Sheet metal pull boxes shall be supported adequately to maintain shape. Larger boxes shall have structural steel bracing welded into rigid assembly formed adequately to maintain alignment in shipment and installation. Secure covers with corrosion-resistant screws or bolts. 1. Pull boxes exposed to rain or in wet locations shall be weatherproof.
B. C. D. E. F.
G.
H.
2.03 A.
B. C.
16100 - 9
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D. Pull boxes used with aluminum conduit shall be metal compatible with aluminum. Provide clamps, grids and other appurtenances to secure cables. No cable shall be unsupported for more than 30". No pull box shall be within 2 feet of another. Provided sealed, cast-alloy, hazardous-location boxes with sealing fittings in garages and other areas in which flammable gases or vapors may be present to prevent transmission of gases or vapors through conduits. Pull boxes connected to concealed conduits shall be mounted with covers flush with finished wall or ceiling. No aluminum pull box shall be embedded in concrete.
Provide cable troughs of special shapes, design and construction required to install, support and enclose feeder cable throughout indicated routing. Troughs shall be as specified above for junction and pull boxes, with reinforcing, insulating supports and clamping for cable installation. Cables shall be continuous throughout troughs, and shall be racked in distributed phase groupings arranged with phase cables surrounding neutral conductors. WIRE AND CABLE (600 V INSULATION) Provide single-conductor, annealed copper wire and cable with insulation rated 600 V, of sizes specified and scheduled on Drawings, by General Electric, Rome, Okonite or approved equal, for secondary service, feeders, branch and system wiring. Wire insulated for 300 V may be used where voltage is less than 100 V, if isolated from higher voltages. Wire sizes shown and specified are American Wire Gauge for copper. Armored cable shall be Type AC 600 V copper with full-sized insulated ground conductor. Use if restricted by requirements of Paragraph entitled WIRING METHODS in Part 3 of this Section. Minimum size shall be #12 AWG unless specified otherwise. Wire #8 and larger shall be stranded; #10 and smaller shall be solid. Wire and cable shall have THWN-THHN or XHHW insulation. XHHW shall be utilized in wet, damp or underground locations. Motor control circuits and signal wiring may be #14 if NEC requirements are met. Branch circuits longer than 75' 120 V shall be at least #10 from panel to last outlet. for Wiring within light fixtures and other high-temperature equipment shall have 150oC insulation as required by NEC. Splices and Terminations 1. Make splices in branch circuit wiring with UL-listed, solderless connectors rated 600 V, of sizes and types required by manufacturers recommendations with temperature ratings equal to those of wires. Splice connectors shall be screw-on. Insulate splices with integral covers or with plastic or rubber friction tape to preserve characteristics of wire and cable insulation. Provide standard bolt-on lugs with hex screws to attach copper wire and cable to panelboards, switchboards, disconnect switches and electrical equipment. Make terminations and splices for conductors #6 and larger with corrosion-resistant, highconductivity pressure indent, hex screw or bolt-clamp connectors, with or without tongues, designed specifically for intended service. Connectors for cables 250 MCM and larger shall have two clamping elements or compression indents. Terminals for bus connections shall have two bolt holes. Ampacity of splices and connectors shall be equal to those of associated wires and cables.
2.04 A.
B.
C.
D. E. F.
2. 3.
4. G.
Arc-proofing
16100 - 10
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. H. I. Provide flexible, flame-retardant, organic-composition-coated elastomer arc-proofing tape on power cable in manholes and hand holes, suitable to withstand 200 A arc for 30 seconds. Tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. Apply tape in single, half-lapped layer as required by manufacturer' recommendations. s Secure with strips of red plastic film tape on 208Y/120V conductors.
Provide three-ply marlin twine lacing or self-extinguishing nylon straps with -65 to 350 range for bundling conductors. Mineral insulated (MI) cable shall be provided for emergency loads/feeders, sized as shown on the drawings. Cable shall be by PYROTENAX, system 1850 M.I. with 2-hour fire rating and in accordance with NEC. Refer to drawings for sizes. FEEDER IDENTIFICATION Provide nonferrous identifying tags or pressure-sensitive labels for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, manholes and switchboard rooms, at cable termination and in other locations. Tags or labels shall be stamped or printed to correspond with markings on Drawings or marked so that feeder or cable may be identified readily. If suspended tags are provided, attach with 1/32" diameter nylon 55-pound test monofilament line or slip-free plastic cable lacing unit. COLOR CODING Color code secondary service, feeders and branch circuit conductors as follows: 1. 2. 208/120 Volts Phase: a. b. c. d. e. Black Red Blue White Green A B C Neutral Ground
2.05 A.
B.
2.06 A.
B.
Colors shall be factory-applied entire length of conductors by one of the following methods except as noted and limited below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. solid color compound, solid color coating, colored stripping (2 stripes 180 degrees apart), colored bands or hash marks with maximum spacing of 18", colored fibrous covering, or surface printing every 12", maximum spacing of 18".
C.
Branch circuit conductors #12 and #10 shall have solid color compound, solid color coating. Neutrals and equipment grounds shall have solid compound or solid color coating (white, gray and green), except that neutrals with colored stripe shall be used where required by NEC. Conductors #8 and larger with stripes, bands or hash marks shall have background color other than white, green and gray. Solid color coating, stripes, bands or hash marks shall be strongly adherent paint or dye, sufficiently wide and clear to be readily distinguishable after installation.
D.
16100 - 11
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts E. Alternative field-applied color coding methods may be used for wire #10 or larger, with color code specified in Subparagraph A: 1. 2. Apply 3/4" colored pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half overlapping turns for 6" from all terminal points and in boxes in which splices or taps are made. Apply last two laps of tape with no tension. Do not cover cable identification markings. Identify with nylon, self-extinguishing, self-locking colored cable ties. Ties shall accommodate wire sizes 1/16" through 1-3/4" in diameter and shall not be less than 0.18" wide. Minimum tensile strength shall be at least 50 lbs. Temperature range shall be 650F to +3500F. Provide three ties to each wire at each terminal point starting 3" from terminal and spaced 3" apart and three ties to each wire in boxes where splices or taps are made with special tool or pliers, and cut off excess.
2.07 A. B. C. 2.08 A.
WIRE PULLING EQUIPMENT Provide polyethylene ropes for pulling wire. Provide fish wires in telephone conduits and other empty conduit systems required, without splices and with ample exposed lengths at each end. Provide wire pulling lubricants that meet applicable UL requirements as necessary. CABLE SUPPORTS AND BOXES Provide cable supports and boxes for vertical feeders as required by NEC. Boxes shall be 10 gauge steel plates fastened to angle iron frame with removable covers secured with brass machine screws. Provide split wedge cable supports with clamps for cable without metallic sheath. Provide basket weave or approved equal cable supports approved by cable manufacturer for cable with metallic sheath. Supports shall be by O.Z./Gedney or approved equal. WIRING DEVICES Provide wiring devices by single manufacturer. Arrow-Hart (Division of Crouse-Hinds), Leviton, Bryant, Hubbell or approved equal. Catalog designations of Arrow-Hart are specified to establish standards of quality for materials and performance. Devices shall be white with stainless steel cover plates. Toggle Switches: 1. 2. 3. 4. Single-pole shall be No. 1991, 20A. 120-277 V AC. Double-pole shall be No. 1992, 20A, 120-277 V AC. Three-way shall be No. 1993, 20A, 120-277 V AC. Four-way shall be No. 1994, 20A, 120-277 V AC.
B.
2.09 A.
B.
C.
Receptacles: 1. 2. 3. 4. Duplex shall be No. 5739, 125 V, 20A, 2-pole, 3 W grounding. Heavy duty receptacles shall be sized as required for intended service. Duplex convenience outlets and other outlets on emergency circuits shall be red melamine, No. 5739, 125 V, 20 A, 2-pole, 3W grounding. Isolated-ground duplex receptacles shall be No. IG 5362, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R.
2.10
WIRING DEVICE PLATES
16100 - 12
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 2.11 A. Provide stainless steel device plates by Arrow-Hart, Bryant, Hubbell or approved equal. Device plates shall be by the device manufacturer and shall be one continuous piece. Nameplate designations for device plates shall be engraved directly on plates and filled in. Telephone outlet plates shall have brushed hole or split plate. Device plates for switches and receptacles connected to emergency circuits shall have engraved nameplates marked Emergency Circuit in 1/4 letters, filled red. Device plates shall be manufacturer of wiring devices. Receptacle device plates for circuits other than 120 V, 2-wire, shall be engraved with 1/4 letters, filled red, indicating voltage characteristics and circuit number of outlet. Outlets shall be flush to surface. SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES Provide quick-make/quick-break safety switches: Type HD, heavy duty, Class 3, Design 3, unless specified otherwise. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 enclosure for dry applications and NEMA 3R for wet. Switches shall be rated 240 or 600 V minimum as required for voltage of associated circuit and shall be rated in horsepower. Fuses shall interrupt locked rotor current of associated motor or ten times full rates load current, whichever is greater. Mount switch parts on insulating bases to facilitate replacement from front of switch. Currentcarrying parts shall be high-conductivity copper. Contacts shall be silver-tungsten or plated. Provide positive pressure fuse clips and switch operating mechanism suitable for continuous use at rated capacity without auxiliary springs in current path. Switches shall withstand available fault current or let-through current before operating, without damage or rating change. FUSES Provide current-limiting, high-interrupting-capacity fuses for equipment provided under this and other Sections. Except as specified otherwise, provide 10% spares at least three of each size, in cabinet in main electric room. Cabinet trim shall match that of panelboard trim. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers and with work of other Sections. Fuses larger than 600 A shall be Class L time delay Bussman KRP-C or approved equal. Fuses 600 A and smaller that serve motors, fusible circuit breaker panelboards, transformers and motor control centers shall be dual-element current limiting Class RKI or approved equal. Submit specific fuse locations, types, manufacturers and ratings. Test data will be waived if fuses are products of single manufacturer and selectivity is substantiated by published catalog data. Provide data for short circuit and protection coordination study as directed. Switch sizes and fuse ratings shown on Drawings and specified represent general approximate values for each motor hp delineated. Coordinate fuse values with motor switch sizes. Obtain recommended fuse rating data from fuse manufacturer. In case of discrepancy between Contract Documents and manufacturers recommendations, manufacturers recommendations shall govern work. Revise switch sizes to accommodate recommended fuse values and revise assembled equipment as necessary. Furnish necessary change information to equipment manufacturers. Submit changes in switch sizes to Architect for approval. Certify that motor circuits have adequate short circuit protection with fuses provided.
B.
C. 2.12 A.
B.
C.
D.
16100 - 13
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2.13 A. LIGHTING FIXTURES Provide lighting fixtures, equipment and components where shown on Drawings, as listed in fixture schedules and as specified, wired and assembled. Provide approved aligner canopies, hangers and other appurtenances as required. 1. 2. HID fixtures shall have higher power factor, encapsulated ballasts, sound rating A and voltage indicated on fixture schedule, and shall be CBM-certified. Ballasts shall be by Advance Electric, G.E. or approved equal. Fluorescent fixtures shall have low loss, high efficiency, high efficiency, high power factor energy saving, 120V ballasts, with sound rating A and shall be CBM-certified. Fluorescent lighting fixtures shall have Type P SLH or approved equal by G.E. Provide fuse holder and fuse for each ballast.
B. C.
Verify ceiling constructions, and provide fixtures, ballasts, frames, rings and other accessories suitable for construction encountered. Coordinate installation of fixtures with installation of ceiling materials and suspension system. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ceiling-mounted fixtures shall be supported independent of hung ceiling with threaded road or bow chain. In no case shall lighting fixtures be suspended from hung ceiling, conduit or duct. Fixtures shall be supported from structural members only. Provide unistruct below ducts from which to hang fixtures when fixture locations coincide with duct runs. Provide threaded rods to support unistrut. Investigate lighting fixture locations and supports to ensure that no interference exists between lighting fixture, supports and other equipment. Correct interferences as directed by Architect.
D. E. 2.14 A.
Refer to fixture schedule for specific lamp requirements. Provide polyester covers to protect fluorescent fixtures with parabolic louvers during construction. PANELBOARDS Provide UL-listed safety dead-front lighting and power panelboards where shown on Drawings and as scheduled. Panelboards shall meet or exceed requirements of NEMA Standard Publication PB-1, and UL-50 and 67. Provide cabinets with flush hinges and combination catch and lock. Provide wiring gutters to accommodate large multiple feeder cables and lugs. Except as shown otherwise on Drawings, wiring gutters shall be at least 4" for lighting and 208 V panels. Where two section panels are required, bolt boxes together to form one unit. two-piece construction with doors of equal size over each section. Trim shall be
B. C.
Provide molded case, bolt-on, thermal-magnetic trip, single, two or three pole branch circuit breakers as shown on Drawings. Multiple pole breakers shall be single handle, common-trip. All circuit breakers shall be rated for switching purposes. Main buswork of panels shall carry at least full rating of feeder overcurrent device that supplies panel. This shall include the main and phase bus bars, the neutral bus bar and the grounding busses. Panel separate equipment ground bus for each panelboard. Ground bus shall be insulated from panel enclosure where isolated ground bus is indicated on the drawings.
D.
E.
16100 - 14
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts F. G. H. I. J. Power and lighting panels shall have heavy-duty, continuous, section vertical-hinged to box section for access to wiring gutters in addition to trim door. Panelboards shall have integrated short circuit current rating equal to or greater than circuit breaker AIC ratings schedule on Drawings. Panels shall be by Square D, Type NQOB for 225 A and below, and I-line distribution for 400 A and above, or equal by Siemens, Cutler Hammer, or approved equal. Provide surface metal tubs ready for painting. Provide bus connections for future overcurrent device with suitable insulation and bracing to maintain proper short circuit rating and voltage clearances, where required on Drawings. Provide for ready insertion of future breaker. All bus bars shall be copper, sized as required by UL standards to limit temperature rise on current-carrying parts to 50 above ambient 40 maximum. Provide 1/2" spacers for panelboards mounted at exterior walls below grade to establish 1/2" air space behind panel. Provide typed panel directories that show use of each circuit and electrical characteristics of panelboard. Directory shall be mounted inside of each panelboard within clear plastic cover. Where indicated on drawings, provide panelboards and main switchboard with internallymounted Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) system. TVSS system shall meet ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45, UL1283 and UL1449. Provide with audible alarm, 200K AIR surge rated fusing, short circuit current rating of 200KA, and EMI/RFI filtering. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Scope: The existing Mammoth Fire Alarm MIRCOM FX-2000 addressable systems shall remain. New devices shall be provided and tied into existing system. 1. Equipment shall meet requirements of Somerville Fire Department and State Fire Marshall. Installation shall meet FM requirements and following NFPA standards: a. b. c. 2. B. Life Safety Code 101. National Electrical Code 70. Fire Alarm Codes 71, 72A, 72B, 72C, 72D, 74 Shop drawings shall include each device and
K. L. M. N.
2.15 A.
Submit shop drawings as specified. appropriate specification data sheets.
Quality Assurance 1. Each and every new item of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product under the appropriate category of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and shall bear the UL label. All new devices shall be UL listed as compatible with existing. a. A complete list of the equipment proposed including descriptions and drawings.
C.
Submittals: Upon receipt of the notification to proceed, the contractor shall furnish the required number of submittals, as indicated elsewhere in this specification. At least one submittal shall include ORIGINAL, MANUFACTURERS specification sheets. Submittals shall include at least the following:
16100 - 15
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. 3. A complete list of all equipment including descriptions. Component wiring diagrams and how they interconnect with the risers. It is the intent of this specification that the submittal package, in conjunction with the manufacturers installation manual, will be utilized by the installing contractor as the systems installation manual.
D.
Warranty and Final Test 1. 2. 3. 4. See specification section 1.23A, this specification for final acceptance criteria. The contractor shall warrant all equipment and wiring free from mechanical and electrical defects for one year from the date of final system acceptance. A complete, 100% test shall be performed per Chapter 7 of The National Fire Alarm Code. The Report of Completion and the Inspection and Testing Form shall be completed and copies furnished to the architect and to the owner. Manual fire alarm station: Provide addressable semi-flush, non-coded, single-action stations. Downward pull of lever shall actuate positive snap-action switch. Station shall remain actuated until reset by means of replacement of glass rod. Key shall be used for drill and test purposes. Mount pulls so that handle is 48 inches from the floor. Thermal Detectors: Provide following detectors: a. b. c. 135 Rate-of-Rise - Fixed Temperature 135 Fixed Temperature 200 Fixed Temperature
5.
E.
System Smoke Detectors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Provide addressable photocell electric smoke detectors with integral 135oF heat detectors. Light source for detection chamber shall be solid-state light emitting diode (LED) with halflife in excess of 30 years. Detectors shall have SPST N/O alarm contact and DPDT auxiliary contact to provide two separate auxiliary switching circuits, alarm latch circuit, ALARM lamp and tamper/reset switch. Detector shall have functional test circuit capable of simulating maximum acceptable amount of products of combustion for alarm. Test circuit shall provide individual local test of detector and shall not require generation of actual smoke within building. Detector shall detect smoke at 1% light obscuration. Light source shall be pulsed infrared LED at 24 V DC. Internal detector circuits shall be shielded against electrical interference. Detector stability shall be unaffected by high air velocity at any sensitivity setting.
F.
Duct-mounted Smoke Detector (Photoelectric) 1. 2. Furnish addressable duct-mounted smoke detectors with same characteristics as ceilingmounted photoelectric smoke detectors described above for HVAC units larger than 2000 cfm as shown on Drawings. Furnish duct-mounted smoke detectors with remote test control for mounting in supply and return ducts under HVAC Sections. Detectors shall have one NO and one NC contact. Physical location of detector shall be coordinated by fire alarm system equipment representative. NC contacts of detector will be wired to fan motor starter under HVAC Section. No contact shall be wired to zone in control panel under this section. Manual reset shall be required.
G.
Audible/Visible Notification Appliances
16100 - 16
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. H. Provide combination horn-strobe units. Units shall consist of 24V strobe in modern white lens rectangular dome, silk screened in red FIRE, and horn wound for 24V DC supervised operation. All devices shall meet the requirements of ADA and shall be synchronized. Assembly shall be mounted on red lexan frame, on surface or flush wall box.
Wiring 1. All wiring shall be installed in steel conduit (3/4 inch) minimum. Twisted-shielded Fire Alarm MC cable shall be permitted in above ceiling areas. All riser and network cable and wiring shall be installed in rigid steel conduit. Fire alarm MC cable shall not be permitted where a pipe and wire installation is practicable. There are no exceptions to this requirement. Wiring shall meet requirements of NEC, Article 760, Fire Protective Systems for Building Fire Alarm Systems, and as shown on Drawings. Wires for local fire alarm system shall be color-coded to correspond with manufacturers wiring schematics submitted with shop drawings, sized as recommended by manufacturer of fire alarm system and installed in conduit. Combined cross sectional area of conductors or cables shall not exceed percentage of fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9 of NEC. Conduit size shall be coordinated with fire alarm manufacturer. Fire alarm system wires in junction boxes shall be permanently tagged and identified. Each junction box capacity shall be 40% greater than that required for associated fire alarm system wires. Each junction box shall be painted fire alarm red and identified with white markings FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. Provide, in accordance with manufacturer' instructions, wiring, conduit and outlet boxes s required for erection of complete system as specified and as shown on drawings. Make connections within control equipment and devices with T&B Stakon spade terminals. Wiring within control equipment shall be secured with T&B Ty-raps and placed in wiring gutters. Wiring shall be in conduit of same approved type as used for electric light and power wiring. Wires shall be at least #14 AWG, with type THWN insulation. Fire alarm equipment shall be flush to surface where possible. All locations where this is not possible shall be approved in writing by the Architect.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. I.
Fire Alarm Inspection and Testing Agreement 1. Provide fire alarm inspection and testing agreement in accordance with Owner' s requirements.
J.
Fire Watch 1. The Electrical Contractor shall carry all costs of required fire watches do to defects, poor workmanship or non-compliance with these specifications.
K.
Miscellaneous 1. The fire alarm manufacturer shall be the following: a. Mammoth Fire Alarm-MIRCOM.
2.16 A. 2.17
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 225 Amp Automatic transfer switch is existing to be reused. Relocate switch to emergency room as shown on the drawings. LOAD CENTERS
16100 - 17
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts A. Load centers are existing and shall be reused and relocated. The load centers shall be provided with a new 100 amp, 208 volt 2 pole main circuit breaker. Provide new arc-fault circuit breakers for new branch circuits, as shown on the drawings. All branch breakers up to 125 amperes shall be plug on type, toggle action with quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. All multi-pole breakers shall be single operating handle, common trip variety. Arc fault type branch circuit breakers where shown shall have sensitive trip in order to give "flash protection" for frayed, stranded wire cords in addition to instantaneous and overload protection. AFCIs shall be fully rated to the load center requirements. All apartment load centers shall contain arc-fault circuit interrupter type circuit breakers for all 120 volt single phase 15 and 20 amp branch circuits supplying outlets in family rooms, dining rooms, living rooms, bedrooms, dens, sunrooms, closets, hallways, etc. per NEC Article 210.12. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375B, Class 1.
B.
C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP Work shall be executed in workmanlike manner and shall present neat, rectilinear and mechanical appearance when completed. Maintain maximum headroom at all times. Do not run pipes and ducts exposed unless shown exposed on drawings. Material and equipment shall be new and installed according to manufacturers recommended best practice so that completed installation shall operate safely and efficiently. CONTINUITY OF SERVICES Do not interrupt existing services without Owners and Architects approvals. SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections. 1. 2. 3. 4. Provide information about items furnished under this Section to be installed under other Sections, as necessary. Obtain detailed information from manufacturers of equipment provided under this Section as to proper methods of installation. Obtain final roughing dimensions and other information as needed for complete installation of items furnished under other Sections or by Owner. Keep fully informed of shape, size and position of openings required for material and equipment provided under this and other Sections. Ensure that openings required for work of this Section are coordinated with work of other Sections. Provide cutting and patching as necessary.
3.02 A. 3.03 A.
B. 3.04 A.
Coordinate installation and pay backcharges to city building and fire departments. TESTING, INSPECTION AND CLEANING Test and inspect work provided under this Section as required by Contract Documents, codes, standards and authorities that have jurisdiction, to satisfaction of Architect. Notify Architect and authorities at least 48 hours before testing or inspection. Do not cover work before testing or inspection.
16100 - 18
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts B. Furnish Architect with certificates of testing and inspection for electrical systems, indicating approval of authorities that have jurisdiction and conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. Test wiring and connections for continuity and grounds before fixtures are connected; demonstrate insulation resistance by megger test as required. Insulation resistance between conductors and grounds for secondary distributions systems shall meet NEC requirements. Verify and correct as necessary: voltages, tap settings, trip settings and phasing on equipment from secondary distribution system to points of use. Test secondary voltages at bus in main switchboard, at panelboards, and at other locations on distribution systems as necessary. Test secondary voltages under no-load and full-load conditions. Test lighting fixtures with specified lamps in place for 10 hours; check fixtures in sections. Do not operate lamps other than for testing before final inspection by Architect. Replace lamps that fail within 90 days after acceptance by Architect within Contract Price. Provide necessary testing equipment and testing. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or inspection shall be corrected promptly and retested. Replace defective material. Clean switchboard, panels, generator and other equipment. Panelboard interiors shall be cleaned and vacuumed. Equipment with damage to painted finish shall be repaired to Architects satisfaction. Equipment 1. 3.05 A. After completion of project, clean the exterior surface of equipment included in this section, including concrete residue.
C.
D.
E.
F. G. H.
I.
NAMEPLATES Provide nameplates in or on panelboards, junction boxes and cabinets, and for special purpose switches, motor disconnect switches, remote control stations, starters or other controls furnished or installed under this Section. Nameplates shall designate equipment controlled and function. Nameplates shall be laminated black bakelite with 1/4 high white recessed letters. Nameplates shall be securely attached to the equipment with galvanized screws. Adhesives or cements shall not be used. WIRING METHODS Install wire and cable in approved raceways as specified and as approved by authorities that have jurisdiction. Surface metal raceways shall not be used unless explicitly specified and shown on Drawings. Do not use surface raceways on floor. Do not use armored cable except as approved by local code for lighting and receptacle circuits in suspended ceilings and studwall partitions. Homeruns for lighting circuits shall be 3-phase, 4-wire run in conduit. Wire from point of service connection to receptacles, lighting fixtures, devices, equipment, outlets for future extension, and other electrical apparatus as shown on Drawings. Provide slack wire for connections. Tape ends of wires and provide blank covers for outlet boxes designated for future use.
B.
3.06 A.
B.
16100 - 19
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts C. Conductors #10 and smaller in branch circuit panelboards, signal cabinets, signal control boards, switchboards and motor control centers shall be bundled. Conductors larger than #10 in switchboards, motor control centers and pull boxes shall be cabled in individual circuits. Two or more conduits installed instead of single conduit shall contain duplicate conductors, including neutrals and ground conductors where required; total capacity of duplicate conductors shall be at least equal to capacity of conductors replaced. Follow homerun circuit numbers shown on Drawings to connect circuits to panelboards. Where homerun circuit numbers are not shown on Drawings, divide similar types of connected loads among phase buses so that currents are approximately equal in normal usage. Connect each branch circuit homerun with two or more circuits and common neutral to circuit breaker or switch in three-wire or four-wire branch circuit panelboard so that no two circuits are fed from same bus. Where panelboard cabinets are recessed, provide conduits with sufficient capacity for future conductors for spare branch circuit protective devices and spaces in panelboard; stub up concealed to junction box. Provide extensions above ceiling. Electrical metallic tubing may be used generally, if approved by local codes, for lighting fixture and receptacle circuits, telephone, inter-communications, signal and instrumentation circuits, and for control circuits. EMT may be used generally, if approved by authorities, in masonry walls, above hung ceilings, in equipment rooms, in mechanical and electrical chases and closets, in exposed locations along ceilings or walls above normal traffic level and where not subject to accidental damage or abuse. Do not run EMT exposed below 8 feet above finished floor. Conduit below 8' AFF exposed shall be rigid steel this shall include the basement -0" area except the new main electric room, the life safety closet and the MDF where EMT may be utilized below 8-0. Install connectors and couplings as recommended by manufacturers. Compression fittings shall not be used with rigid steel, intermediate metallic or aluminum conduit. Set screw fittings shall not be used with rigid aluminum conduit and shall not be used for other applications, unless specified and approved by Architect. If set-screw connectors are used, tighten to imbed screws in conduit. Conduit in concrete shall be rigid steel. EMT shall not be installed underground, in slabs on grade, in wet locations, in hazardous areas, or for circuits operating at more than 600 V. Buried metallic conduit shall be rigid steel. Run conduit in slabs above bottom steel reinforcing, below top reinforcing and inside beam stirrup, wall reinforcements and column ties. Rigid non-metallic conduit as specified in Part 2 of this Section may be used, if approved by local authorities, for installation in concrete slabs when installed as required by NEC and manufacturer' requirements. Penetrations from concrete slabs shall be made with rigid steel s conduit and rigid steel conduit fittings only. Maximum outside diameters of raceways in conduit shall be 1/3 slab thickness. No more than two 3/4" raceways shall cross in floor slab at a single point. Submit raceway crossing locations for approval before pouring slabs and relocate at no expense to Owner as directed by Architect. Lateral spacing of parallel raceways shall be at least 6" on centers. Do not run conduit in slab less than 3" thick without express approval and direction of Architect. Raceways with outside diameters larger than 1/3 slab thickness shall be run concealed in hung ceilings in finished areas, exposed in unfinished Mechanical/Electrical and storage areas, below slabs on grade. Penetrate waterproof walls of structural slabs and foundation walls only where approved by Architect. Submit proposed penetration points, size openings and penetration methods to Architect for approval.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
16100 - 20
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts M. Provide flexible conduits for connections to electrical equipment and to equipment furnished under Divisions 14 and 15 that are subject to movement, vibration or misalignment; where available space dictates; and where noise transmission must be eliminated or reduced. Flexible conduit shall be liquid-tight under following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. N. Exterior locations Moisture or humidity-laden atmospheres (This shall include the basement area) Corrosive atmospheres Where wash-down operations are possible Where seepage or dripping of oil, grease or water is possible
Run concealed conduit and EMT in as direct lines as possible with minimum number of bends of longest possible radius. Run exposed conduit and EMT parallel to or at right angles to building lines. Ends shall be free from dents or flattening. Conduit and EMT runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from service entrance to outlets. Conduit shall enter and be secured to cabinet, junction box, pull box or outlet box with locknut outside and bushing inside, or with liquid-tight, threaded, self-locking, cold-weld wedge adapter. Provide additional locknut for rigid conduit and wrench- tighten locknut for EMT or flexible conduit where circuit voltage exceeds 250 V. Locknuts and bushings or selflocking adapters will not be required where conduits are screwed into tapped connections. Vertical conduit runs that terminate in bottoms of wall boxes or cabinets shall be protected from entrance of foreign material before installation of conductors. Size rigid steel conduit, EMT and flexible metallic conduit as required by NEC except as specified or shown on Drawings otherwise. Unless shown otherwise on Drawings, telephone conduits shall be at least 1. Check raceway sizes to determine that green equipment ground conductor fits in same raceway with phase and neutral conductors to meet NEC percentage of fill requirements. Increase duct, conduit, tubing and raceway sizes shown or specified as required to accommodate conductors. Unless specified or shown on Drawings otherwise, install conduit and EMT concealed. Unless specified or shown otherwise, conduit and EMT may be run exposed on unfinished walls and unfurred basement ceilings and in unfinished penthouses, attics and roof spaces. Provide stand-off clips for conduits on exterior masonry walls. Install conduit systems complete before drawing in conductors. Blow through and swab after plaster is finished and dry, and before conductors are installed. Expansion/Deflection Fittings: Conduit buried or secured rigidly on opposite sides of building expansion joints and long runs of exposed conduit subject to stress shall have expansion fittings. Fittings shall safely deflect and expand to twice distance of structural movement. 1. 2. Provide separate external copper bonding jumper secured with grounding straps on each end of fitting. Conduits buried in concrete shall cross building expansion joints at right angles; provide expansion fittings as required by manufacturers instructions. Provide insulated bushings at ends of conduits.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S. T.
U.
Sealing Fittings: Threaded sealing fittings for rigid steel conduits shall be zinc- or cadmiumcoated, cast or malleable iron; sealing fittings for aluminum conduit shall be threaded cast aluminum. Fittings that prevent passage of water vapor shall be continuous drain.
16100 - 21
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 1. 2. Install and seal fittings as required by manufacturers recommendations. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel box with blank cover plate. Install sealing fittings at following points, and elsewhere as shown: a. b. c. 3. V. W. 3.07 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 3.08 A. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous areas equipped with explosion-proof lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles and other electrical devices. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations. Where required by NEC.
Secure conduit system as required by NEC. Pull cables that
Attach pull ropes to conductors with basket-weave grips on pulling eyes. share conduit at same time. Provide inserts, hangers, anchors and steel supports as necessary. INSTALLATION OF LIGHT FIXTURES
Coordinate installation of fixtures with installation of ceiling materials and suspension systems. Do not install fixtures until work of other trades that may damage fixtures is completed. Investigate lighting fixture locations and supports to ensure that no interference exists with hangers, ducts, sprinklers, pipes and other equipment. Provide plaster frames for fixtures recessed in gypsum board or plaster ceiling. Do not suspend or support lighting fixtures or safety chains from hung ceiling conduit or duct. Support fixtures with threaded rod from structural members only. Provide unistrut below ducts where fixture locations coincide with duct runs. Provide threaded rods to support unistrut. Luminaires shall be compatible with flexible wiring system. Where air is supplied or returned through luminaries, coordinate compatibility of fixtures with air boots and attachments. Patch spray-on fireproofing damaged during installation. Support surface-mounted luminaries at least two concealed points to prevent rotation. Fire-rated enclosures necessary for fixture housings above ceiling will be provided under another Section. Mounting height of suspended or wall-mounted luminaries shall be shown on Drawings. Locate ceiling-mounted fixtures as shown on reflected ceiling plans. Locate wall- and floormounted fixtures as shown on Electrical Drawings. Coordinate aiming of adjustable fixtures with Architect. GROUNDING Provide equipment grounding system as shown on Drawings. Equipment grounding system shall be designed so metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment and other conductive items in close proximity
16100 - 22
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts with electrical circuits operate continuously at ground potential and provide low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. B. C. System shall meet NEC requirements, modified as shown on Drawings and as specified. Provide separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each single or threephase feeder and each branch circuit. Install grounding conductor in common conduit with related phase or neutral conductors, or both. Parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway shall have individual full size green insulated equipment ground conductors. Determine numbers and sizes of screw terminals for equipment grounding bars in panelboards and other electrical equipment. Provide screw terminals for active circuits, spares and spaces. Provide green insulated grounding conductor in same raceway with associated phase conductors, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From green ground terminals of receptacles to green 10-32 washer-in-head outlet box machine screw. (Receptacles with special cast boxes and factory-designed and approved ground path do not require separate ground jumper.) From green 10-32 washer-in-head machine screw in ceiling outlet box or junction box through flexible metallic conduit to ground terminal in fixture. From green 10-32 washer-in-head machine screw in ceiling outlet box or junction box through flexible metallic conduit to green 10-32 washer-in-head machine screw in switch outlet box in movable partitions. From green 10-32 washer-in-head machine screw in junction box or disconnect switch through flexible metallic conduit to ground terminal in connection box mounted on single phase fractional horsepower motor. From equipment ground bus in motor control center through conduit and flexible metallic conduit to ground terminal in connection box mounted on three-phase motor. Ground conductor motors with separate starters and disconnect devices shall originate at ground bar in panelboard and shall be bonded to each starter and disconnect device enclosure. From switchgear equipment ground bus to panelboard equipment ground bus. From switchgear equipment ground bar to equipment grounding bar on busway. From computer area power panel ground bar for branch circuits as required by NEC. No ground conductor circuit shall exceed 3 ohms resistance to building ground system.
D. E.
6. 7. 8. F. 3.09 A.
Provide green insulated grounding conductor in nonmetallic conduits or ducts unless specified otherwise. DEMOLITION Where sections of a system are to be removed and the system serves other areas of the building that are outside the immediate scope of the work, perform the following: 1. 2. 3. Coordinate the temporary shut down of the system with the Owner' representative. s Install supports in the remaining active sections of the system as required by the removal of nearby supports associated with the demolition. Isolate the system.
B. C.
Promptly repair any damage caused to adjacent facilities or areas that are designated to remain at no additional cost to the Owner. Equipment: 1. Coordinate with all Contractors and Subcontractors to provide disconnection prior to equipment removal.
16100 - 23
ELECTRICAL
CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts 2. 3. 4. Remove equipment by unfastening at the supports or attachments. Then remove the attachments from the building, leaving no component of the original installation. The Owner shall have the option to choose to take possession of the equipment or not. If the Owner chooses not to take possession of the equipment, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of the equipment in accordance with the paragraph below. Exercise care with equipment that is to be relocated or turned over to the Owner. Examine the equipment before removal in the presence of the Owner' representative to s determine its condition. Make a record of any marks, etc. by a photograph or videotape acknowledged by the Owner' representative. s Install relocated equipment to ensure no damage. Equipment to be turned over to the Owner: Deliver to an on-site location designated by the Owner, and obtain acknowledgment of receipt in good condition the following equipment.
5. 6.
D. E.
All equipment, etc., not turned over to the Owner shall be put into the dumpsters; become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. Remove existing equipment and appurtenances as indicated on demolition plans and as required to install the new systems. END OF SECTION
16100 - 24
ELECTRICAL

X Specifications - Site & Buildings 02-20-09

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

X Specifications - Site & Buildings 02-20-09

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifications

Clarendon Hill Towers Site and Building Renovations

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING

CUTTING AND PATCHING

CUTTING AND PATCHING

CUTTING AND PATCHING

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

CUTTING AND PATCHING

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

SECTION 01120 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

E. PART 2 PART 3 3.01 A.

RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS Somerville, Massachusetts

Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

SECTION 02230 SITE PREPARATION

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

02230_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02230_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS

CLARENDON HILL TOWERS SITE AND BUILDING RENOVATIONS SOMERVILLE, MASSACHUSETTS

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

STORM WATER QUALITY SEPARATOR

SECTION 02515 UNIT PAVERS

02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

END OF SECTION 02515

02515_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

SECTION 02520 GARDEN PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02520 - 2 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02520 - 3 G A R D E N P O R T L AND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW

02520_p.CHT.wpd: 2/19/09 MTW